JP7083609B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As an example of a gaming machine, a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area by a launching device, and the gaming medium wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area. There is a pachinko game machine that can be granted. Further, as another example of the gaming machine, the player operates the start lever after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming medium such as a medal, a coin, or a gaming ball similar to a pachinko gaming machine. There is a slot machine capable of starting variable display of a display symbol by a variable display device and imparting a predetermined game value based on the derived display result.

As such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that reproduces a music selected by a player during a jackpot given as a predetermined gaming value (for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, there is a gaming machine that performs a winning effect according to the winning of a gaming ball in the jackpot during a jackpot (for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-183860 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-45233

However, if a specific effect such as playback of a song and a predetermined effect such as a winning effect are configured to be executable during a big hit, the predetermined effect is executed during the execution of the specific effect, which hinders the specific effect and causes the specific effect. There was a risk that the effect of the effect would be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and is a game capable of preventing a predetermined effect from being executed during the execution of the specific effect, which hinders the specific effect and reduces the effect of the specific effect. The purpose is to provide a machine.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A specific effect executing means capable of executing the selected specific effect in the advantageous state, and
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect while a specific effect is being executed, and a predetermined effect execution means.
A changing means that can change whether or not a predetermined effect is executed,
Equipped with an abnormality notification means capable of executing abnormality notification,
The abnormality notification means can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the presence or absence of execution of the predetermined effect is changed by the change means during the abnormality notification.
When the presence or absence of execution of the predetermined effect is changed by the changing means during the abnormality notification, the recognizability of the abnormality notification changes .
It is possible to change whether or not a plurality of predetermined effects are executed based on the detection of the specific action of the player during the advantageous state.
It is characterized by that.
(1) In order to achieve the above objectives, other gaming machines
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S634 shown in FIG. 16) capable of executing the selected specific effect (for example, a musical piece or a moving image of the song) in the advantageous state.
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, the large winning opening winning effect processing shown in FIG. 20 and the large winning opening winning effect process shown in FIG. 20) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a large winning opening winning effect or a large winning opening opening effect) during execution of a specific effect CPU120 for effect control that executes the effect processing when the large winning opening is opened) and
A changing means that can change whether or not a predetermined effect is executed (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S414, S415, and S423 to S426 shown in FIG. 14) and
An abnormality notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the error notification process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing an abnormality notification (for example, ball removal error notification) and
A detection means capable of detecting a game medium (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) used for a game (for example, an out-ball detector 90710, etc. shown in FIGS. 129, 133, etc.) and
A signal line to which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 129) and the like.
A receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, etc.) and
An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 130) and
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning opening, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, and the large winning opening. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.).
The number of gaming media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like; specifically, a state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening) calculated based on the number of balls to be driven and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls to each winning opening). For example, it is provided with an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 133) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible) of the performance information of FIG. 109.
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified and the performance display is restricted as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132).
The abnormality notification means can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the presence or absence of execution of the predetermined effect is changed by the change means during the abnormality notification (for example, when the stop flag is turned on). Yes (see, for example, FIG. 22 (B), FIG. 24).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being hindered by the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the specific effect, and the effect of the specific effect from being deteriorated.

(B) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A specific effect executing means capable of executing the selected specific effect in the advantageous state, and
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect while a specific effect is being executed, and a predetermined effect execution means.
A changing means that can change the execution mode of a predetermined effect,
Equipped with an abnormality notification means capable of executing abnormality notification,
The abnormality notification means can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by the change means during the abnormality notification.
When the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by the changing means during the abnormality notification, the recognizability of the abnormality notification changes .
Based on the fact that the specific action of the player is detected during the advantageous state, it is possible to change the execution mode of a plurality of predetermined effects.
It is characterized by that.
(2) In order to achieve the above objectives, other gaming machines
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
A specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S634 shown in FIG. 16) capable of executing the selected specific effect (for example, music) in the advantageous state.
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, the large winning opening winning effect processing shown in FIG. 20 and the large winning opening winning effect process shown in FIG. 20) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a large winning opening winning effect or a large winning opening opening effect) during execution of a specific effect CPU120 for effect control that executes the effect processing when the large winning opening is opened) and
A changing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S423 to S426 shown in FIG. 14) capable of changing an execution mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 15) of a predetermined effect.
An abnormality notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the error notification process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing an abnormality notification (for example, ball removal error notification) and
A detection means capable of detecting a game medium (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) used for a game (for example, an out-ball detector 90710, etc. shown in FIGS. 129, 133, etc.) and
A signal line to which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 129) and the like.
A receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, etc.) and
An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 130) and
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning opening, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, and the large winning opening. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.).
The number of gaming media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like; specifically, a state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening) calculated based on the number of balls to be driven and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls to each winning opening). For example, it is provided with an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 133) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible) of the performance information of FIG. 109.
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified and the performance display is restricted as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132).
The abnormality notification means can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by the change means during the abnormality notification (for example, when the suppression flag is turned on). (See, for example, FIGS. 22B and 24),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being hindered by the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the specific effect, and the effect of the specific effect from being deteriorated.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above
It is possible to detect a predetermined operation of the player (for example, a pressing operation on the push button 31B (simple pressing)) and a specific operation different from the predetermined operation (for example, an operation of continuously pulling the stick controller 31A for 5 seconds). can be,
Based on the detection of the predetermined operation in the advantageous state, the effect mode in the advantageous state can be changed (for example, the image showing the music name can be moved by the process of step S628 shown in FIG. 16). 18 (B)),
The changing means can change the execution mode of the predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific operation in the advantageous state (for example, Yes in step S401 shown in FIG. 14 and Yes in step S412). , Or, when Yes in step S421, the on / off state of the stop flag or the suppression flag can be switched).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, since the player can change the execution mode of the predetermined effect by performing a specific motion different from the predetermined motion, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally changing the execution mode, and the effect of the effect. Can be prevented from decreasing.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above
Even in the advantageous state, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is not changed depending on the start timing of the specific operation (for example, the period from 5 seconds before receiving the jackpot end designation command to the time when the jackpot end designation command is received. If the lever pulling operation is started by the player and the lever pulling operation is continued, the timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of the lever pulling operation does not exceed 5 seconds, so the stop flag can be switched on / off. do not have),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably change the execution mode of the predetermined effect.

(5) In the gaming machine of (3) or (4) above,
Based on the detection of the specific motion in the advantageous state, a plurality of predetermined effects (for example, an effect of outputting a winning sound notifying that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening, and the remaining number of winnings in the round game). The execution mode of the effect of displaying the remaining number of winnings indicating that the number of remaining winnings is displayed, the effect of outputting the opening sound of the large winning opening to notify that the large winning opening has been opened, etc.) is changed.
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (3) to (5) above,
During the detection of the specific operation (for example, a period from the start of the specific operation to the elapse of 2 seconds or 5 seconds), the execution mode of the predetermined effect becomes the execution mode of the predetermined effect after the change by the changing means. (See, for example, FIG. 25).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
When the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by the changing means during the abnormality notification, the recognizability of the abnormality notification changes (for example, as shown in FIG. 24C, a ball removal error display and a ball removal error). When the notification sound is being output, the lever pulling 5 seconds is detected and the stop flag is turned on, so that the remaining winning number display ends as shown in FIG. 24 (D1), which is large. Even if a prize is won in the winning opening, the normal winning sound (winning sound) is not output, while the ball removal error display and the ball removal error notification sound are continuously output, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify an abnormality according to a change in the execution mode of a predetermined effect, and it is possible to prevent giving a feeling of strangeness.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A music playing means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control that executes the process of step S634 shown in FIG. 16) capable of playing a music in a specific period (for example, a period in a jackpot gaming state) is provided.
The music to be played in the specific period can be selected from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 17C).
The music reproduction means reproduces a specific portion that is a part of the selected music at the time of music selection and is different from the beginning of the music (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 16). Such),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when selecting the music.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
Further provided with a display means (for example, see FIG. 26) capable of displaying the control history to the advantageous state (for example, the first control history, the second control history, etc.).
It is possible to detect a player's special movement (for example, a player's pressing operation on a trigger button provided on the operation rod of the stick controller 31A).
Based on the detection of the special operation, the display mode of the control history can be switched (see, for example, FIG. 26).
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, the control history can be displayed in a display mode according to the player's preference.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the following means C1 to C4. Conventionally, in gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-118314, a gaming machine that displays information (base value) regarding the number of hit balls (number of hit balls, number of out balls) and the number of prize balls has been used. Are known. However, for example, if the out ball is not detected accurately, there is a possibility that inaccurate information may be displayed. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing display of inaccurate information.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc.) that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
A detection means capable of detecting a game medium (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) used for a game (for example, an out-ball detector 90710, etc. shown in FIGS. 129, 133, etc.) and
A signal line to which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 129) and the like.
A receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, etc.) and
An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 130) and
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning opening, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, and the large winning opening. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.).
The number of gaming media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like; specifically, a state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening) calculated based on the number of balls to be driven and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls to each winning opening). For example, it is provided with an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 133) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible) of the performance information of FIG. 109.
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified and the performance display is restricted as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132).
According to this, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing an inaccurate display.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
It is a gaming machine of means C1 and
When the abnormality of the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the display mode of the information display means is changed to indicate that the abnormality of the reception state is detected (for example, the display mode as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132). Is notified by changing etc.).
According to this, it is possible to confirm without providing a new display means.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The abnormality detecting means can detect the disconnection of the signal line (for example, it can be detected by monitoring the signal input from the out-ball detector 90710).
It is possible to notify the outside (for example, the game effect lamp 909, the speaker 908L, 908R, the display device of the card unit, the call lamp device, the hall computer, etc.) that the disconnection of the signal line is detected.
According to this, it is possible to recognize without performing the door opening work.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to C3,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 is configured as a unit that can be arranged on the game board 902 as shown in FIG. 133 (B)).
This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B1 to the means B9 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
During a specific period (1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning) after the gaming medium enters the general winning area, the effective starting winning and reach to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It is provided with an effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect F (pre-reading advance notice effect), specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect)) when the state is established. It is a characteristic gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 47th staging form to the 49th staging form).
According to this, it is possible to make an interest in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period after the game medium enters the general prize area, and the specific effect is performed after the game medium enters the general prize area. It can enhance the interest until it is executed.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
It is a gaming machine of means B1 and
Execution of notification effect for executing notification effect (any of characters A to C appears immediately after winning a prize in the general winning opening) so as to be able to identify and specifically notify the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area. It is a gaming machine characterized by further providing means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as a notification effect for notifying that the state after the game medium has entered, the player determines whether or not a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. It includes both a production that is difficult to grasp and a production that makes it easy for the player to grasp whether or not a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, there is an effect of outputting a sound effect for a relatively short period (for example, about 0.5 to 2 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general prize area, and as the latter effect, there is a general prize area. There is an effect that the character is continuously displayed on the image display device from immediately after the game medium enters until a predetermined specific period (for example, 1 minute) elapses.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
It is a gaming machine of means B2,
The notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the specific period is specified (the specific period (character display period) differs depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game until the specific effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period differs depending on the mode of the notification effect (the display period when the character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when the character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display when the character C appears. The period will be 5 minutes)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to the means B4 may be, for example, as follows.
First, based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) has a plurality of predetermined specific periods (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes). One of the specific periods is selected, an effect mode (for example, the type of character to be displayed on the image display device 905) is determined based on the selected specific period, and a notification effect (character is displayed for a specific period) is determined according to the determined effect mode. The effect to be displayed) is executed.
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, display of character A) is set as compared with the case where the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio. Further, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, the display of the character B) is set as compared with the case where the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio.
When the specific period and the effect mode of the notification effect correspond to one-to-one (1 minute for character A, 2 minutes for character B, and 3 minutes for character C). ), The staging control means (for example, the staging control CPU 90120) determines one of a plurality of predetermined staging modes based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area. , It is preferable to execute the notification effect (the effect of displaying the character for a specific period) according to the determined effect mode.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
The variable display means has a starting condition based on the entry of the game medium into the starting winning area (a game ball wins a prize in the first starting winning opening when the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (effective starting winning). ), And the game ball won a prize (valid start prize) in the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value), and then the start condition (controlled to the jackpot game state) The variable display is executed based on the fact that the variable display of the special figure game is not executed).
The effect executing means corresponds to a notice effect (in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a variable display game to be notified) for announcing a display result of a variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 47th effect mode and the 49th effect form) characterized by executing the hold change effect of changing the display portion from the normal mode to the special mode as the specific effect.
According to this, the game medium enters the general prize area by giving an interest of notifying the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general prize area. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the beginning to the execution of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
It is a gaming machine of means B5,
Hold information corresponding to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed in response to the existence of the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Further provided with a hold information display control means (CPU 90120 for effect control) for displaying the display portion) on the display device (image display device 905).
The advance notice effect is to announce the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold information according to the mode of the hold information (if the start winning prize determination result designation command is a command to specify "big hit", the notice effect is applicable. It is characterized by a pending change effect that changes the display part corresponding to the command from a normal mode (for example, blue or red) to a special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than the command for designating "off". It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of notifying the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
It is a gaming machine of means B6,
By displaying the objects (characters A to C) on the display device, the effect executing means can clearly notify that the state is after the game medium has entered the general winning area (to the general winning opening). (Any of the characters A to C will appear immediately after winning the prize) Perform the notification effect and
The advance notice effect is an effect that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the hold information (a mode of the display portion corresponding to the special figure game in which the displayed character performs some action and is held. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an effect of changing from a normal mode to a special mode).
According to this, it becomes possible to suggest the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the advance notice of the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied by the common object, and the game to the general winning area. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific production.
Specifically, the player can recognize that the object changes the mode of the hold information by making the effect that the mode of the hold information changes according to the change of the display mode of the object (for example, a predetermined action). Become.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period (the specific effect F or the specific effect G is not executed if the predetermined condition is not satisfied within the character display period). be.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8.
There are a plurality of the general winning areas (four of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D).
The specific period differs depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning opening is specified. It can be a period (characters A to C can appear), but if you win the 3rd general prize 50C or the 4th general prize opening 9050D, only 5 minutes from the general prize can be a specific period (only character C can appear). It is a gaming machine characterized by being able to appear)).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B10 to the means B21 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
Motion detecting means (operation button 9030 and CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of detecting the motion of the player, and
When the player's movement (continuous striking operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) is detected by the motion detection means after the gaming medium has entered the general winning area, a specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo-ream) is detected. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 50th effect mode to the 53rd effect form) characterized by being provided with an effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a notice effect and a chance eye advance notice effect. ..
According to this, after the game medium enters the general prize area, the specific effect is executed triggered by the action of the player, so that the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
It is a gaming machine of means B10,
The state after the game medium has entered the general winning area is identifiablely notified (in the 50th and 51st staging modes, the button icon 904000 is increased for each winning to the general winning opening, 52nd. In the staging form and the 53rd staging form, the advance notice staging (“cut-in”, “pseudo-ren”, “chance eye”) that can be executed for each winning to the general winning opening is determined, and the character 904000a according to the determination result is determined. The gaming machine is further provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a notification effect (displayed up to 904000c).
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
It is a gaming machine of means B11,
Depending on the type of operation (continuous striking operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for enabling the specific effect, the mode of the notification effect (character 904000a of "cut-in", "pseudo-ream"). It is a gaming machine characterized in that the characters 904000b and the characters 904000c of "chance eyes" are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of operation enables the specific effect to be executed.

The gaming machine of means B13 is
A gaming machine of means B11 or means B12,
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on which general prize area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general prize opening 9050A of the left game area 9010A or When the second general winning opening 9050B is won, the notification is given at a higher rate than when the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D of the right gaming area 9010B is won). It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B14 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B13.
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The mode of the notification effect differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is won. In this case, either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" can be displayed, and if the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is won, " It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can display either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000c of "chance eye").
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B15 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B14.
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the general winning opening is won in the normal state. In the case (when winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B of the left game area 9010A), when the general winning opening is won in the probable change state or the time saving state (the first of the right game area 9010B). 3) If you win a prize in the general winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D), you will be notified at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B16 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B15.
The mode of the notification effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, in the normal state, the characters 904000a of "cut-in" and "pseudo". The character 904000b of "ream" can be displayed, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" and the character 904000c of "chance eye" can be displayed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B17 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B16.
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect when the predetermined operation is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (generally in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode). Pseudo-repeated notice can be executed when the winning opening is won twice or more, and chance eye notice can be executed when the general winning opening is won three or more times.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B18 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B17.
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The execution rate of the specific effect differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is used. If a prize is won, the advance notice will be performed at a higher rate than if the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is won.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B19 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B18.
There are multiple general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The type of specific effect that can be executed differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening If the 9050B is won, either the cut-in notice effect or the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed, and if the third general prize opening 9050C or the fourth general prize opening 9050D is won, the cut-in notice effect can be executed. And any of the chance eye notice effects can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B20 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B19.
The execution rate of the specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, when the general winning opening is won in the normal state ( In the case of winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B of the left game area 9010A, the general winning opening is won in the probable change state or the time saving state (the third general of the right game area 9010B). (When winning a prize in the winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D), a notification is given to enable the specific effect to be executed at a higher rate than the winning opening 9050C).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B21 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B20.
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-ream in the normal state. Either the notice effect can be executed, and either the cut-in notice effect or the chance eye notice effect can be executed in the probable change state or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B22 to the means B28 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B22 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point granting effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result advance notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect).
When the variable display is executed (during the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed, within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed or is determined to be executed), the general winning area It is also determined that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is executed when the game medium enters the machine and when the variable display is not executed (during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). Pachinko machines (27th to 30th production forms) characterized in that the ratio at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area (within a period during which the game has not been performed). It is a game machine 901).
According to this, the execution ratio of the specific effect differs between the case where the variable display is executed and the case where the variable display is not executed, so that the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area is enhanced. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B23 is
It is a gaming machine of means B22,
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is a game machine (27th effect form, 29th effect form pachinko gaming machine 901) characterized by being an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point-giving effect). be.
According to this, even when the variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B24 is
It is a gaming machine of means B22,
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect), and the general winning area when the variable display is not executed. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 28th staging form and the 30th staging form), which is characterized in that it is not executed when the game medium enters the machine.
According to this, when the variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B25 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point granting effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result advance notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect).
When the variable display is being executed (during the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or is determined to be executed), the general winning area It is also determined that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is executed when the game medium enters the machine and when the variable display is not executed (during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). A gaming machine (31st effect form and 32nd effect form pachinko gaming machine 901) characterized in that a different specific effect is executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (within a period not specified). ).
According to this, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area by different specific effects depending on whether the variable display is executed and the variable display is not executed. ..

The gaming machine of means B26 is
It is a gaming machine of means B25,
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
When the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect). Is executed as the specific effect,
When the gaming medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is not executed, an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point granting effect) is executed as the specific effect. It is a characteristic gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 31st staging form and the 32nd staging form).
According to this, when the variable display is executed, the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be further enhanced, and even when the variable display is not executed, the general winning area can be further enhanced. It is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the game.

The gaming machine of means B27 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B26 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form).
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed (for example, a special figure game when winning a prize in the general winning opening). The classification of whether or not is executed, the classification of the number of reserved memories at the time of winning the general winning opening, and the gaming state at the time of winning the general winning opening is the normal state, or the probabilistic state or the time saving state. Perform specific effects at different rates depending on the classification, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to be interested in the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area.

The gaming machine of means B28 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B27 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form).
When the variable display is executed, different specific effects are executed according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (for example, the special figure game is executed when the general winning opening is won. Whether or not the game is in the normal state, the number of stored memories at the time of winning the general winning opening, and whether the gaming state at the time of winning the general winning opening is in the normal state, or in the probabilistic state or the shortened time state. Execute different types of specific effects according to the classification, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to be interested in the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B29 to the means B39 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 59), a winning rate for a starting winning opening in a gaming machine is calculated, and a character wearing different color clothes is used according to the calculated winning rate. A gaming machine that executes an effect display to be displayed has been proposed. However, it is necessary not only to display information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the start winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information easier to see. The inventions according to the means B29 to the means B39 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to make it easy to visually recognize information regarding the number of gaming media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B29 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.). Equipped with a display means (image display device 905)
The information display means displays effect information (for example, a decorative symbol, a fourth symbol, etc.) different from the approach information in a region where the visibility of the approach information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIG. 68, each winning opening). It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in the second area β), which is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to the means B30 is
It is a gaming machine of means B29,
The information display means can display the approach information regardless of the mode of the effect information (as illustrated in FIG. 68, regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed, and the fourth symbol. Regardless of whether or not is variablely displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. The displayed number of winnings can be updated according to the winnings to each winning opening.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized regardless of the mode of the staging information.

The invention according to means B31 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Error detecting means (abnormality detecting sensor group 9026) for detecting an error (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.) and
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.). A display means (image display device 905) is provided.
The information display means transfers error information (for example, an error message) notifying the occurrence of the error to each winning opening as illustrated in FIGS. 68 and 69 in a region where the visibility of the approach information is not hindered. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in the second area β), which is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B32 is
It is a gaming machine of means B31.
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as illustrated in FIG. 69, regardless of whether or not an error message is displayed, a general winning opening. The number of winnings, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and are displayed according to the winnings in each winning opening. The number of winning prizes can be updated)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to means B33 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.). Equipped with a display means (image display device 905)
The information display means displays the display result of the variable display (for example, the display result of the definite decorative symbol (final stop symbol) or the fourth symbol) executed based on the entry of the gaming medium into the start region, as the entry information. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is displayed in an area where the visibility of the player is not obstructed (as illustrated in FIG. 68, a second area β different from the first area α in which the number of winnings to each winning opening is displayed). Is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B34 is
It is a gaming machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the approach information even when the variable display is being executed (as illustrated in FIG. 68, regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and also. Regardless of whether or not the 4th symbol is variably displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the 1st starting winning opening, the number of winnings to the 2nd starting winning opening, etc. are set to the 1st area α. It can be displayed and the displayed number of winnings can be updated according to the winnings to each winning opening.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the variable display is being executed.

The invention according to means B35 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B34.
Operable operation means (operation button 9030) and
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the approach information on the information display means according to the operation of the operation means (as illustrated in FIG. 31, to each winning opening based on the setting by the operation button 9030). The gaming machine is further provided with an effect control CPU 90120) for setting whether or not to display the winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the approach information.

The invention according to the means B36
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B35.
Operation means (operation button 9030) that can be operated by the player,
The aggregation period setting means (as illustrated in FIG. 72, the effect control CPU 90120 that sets the aggregation period based on the setting by the operation button 9030) that sets the aggregation period of the approach information according to the operation of the operation means. It is a gaming machine characterized by further providing.
According to this, the aggregation period can be set according to the judgment of the player.

The invention according to means B37 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B36.
Further equipped with a game state control means (microcomputer 90100 for game control) capable of controlling a game state (big hit game state, probability change state, time saving state, low base state, high base state, etc.).
The information display means can display the approach information according to the gaming state (as illustrated in FIG. 71, the number of winnings in the low base state and the number of winnings in the high base state can be displayed separately. Is)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to grasp the approach information according to the gaming state.

The invention according to means B38 is
It is a gaming machine of means B37,
Variable display means for executing variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the game medium entering the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B) is further provided.
The game state control means has a low frequency state (a low base state in which high opening control for the second start winning opening is not executed) and a high frequency state (first) in which the frequency of entry of the game medium into the start area is different. 2 It is possible to control to the high base state where the high opening control for the starting winning opening is executed).
The information display means has the entry information (such as the number of general prizes in the low base state exemplified in FIG. 71) regarding the period controlled to the low frequency state and the entry regarding the period controlled to the high frequency state. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can display information (general winning numbers in a high base state exemplified in FIG. 71, etc.).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the approach information according to the low frequency state and the approach information according to the high frequency state.

The invention according to means B39 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B38.
Notification is performed when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as illustrated in FIG. 72, when the number of winnings per set aggregation period does not reach a predetermined reference value, a notification to that effect is given. The gaming machine is further provided with a notification means (image display device 905) (which displays a message).
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the approach information satisfies the predetermined condition.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B40 and the means B41 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIGS. 58 and 59), when a player accepts a game start by inputting a password, the winning rate to the starting winning opening in the gaming machine is calculated. , A gaming machine that executes an effect display that displays characters dressed in different colors according to the calculated winning rate has been proposed. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at the game hall) to be able to confirm the information regarding the fact that the game medium has entered the entry area such as the start winning opening. The invention according to the means B40 and the means B41 is made in view of the above circumstances, and is intended to allow only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk of the game hall) to confirm the information.

The invention according to the means B40 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having an entry area (for example, a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A-9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter. It is a gaming machine 901),
A granting means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90100) for imparting a game value (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the approach area.
Specific operation means (for example, mode changeover switch 9031, reset button) that cannot be operated by the player, and
A notification means for notifying cumulative value information (for example, the number of payouts of each general winning opening, the number of payouts of each starting winning opening, and the total number of payouts) regarding the cumulative value of the game value given by the granting means (for example, the number of payouts of each general winning opening). For example, an image display device 905) is provided.
The notification means notifies the cumulative value information based on the operation of the specific operation means (for example, when the mode changeover switch 9031 is operated to enter the maintenance mode, the information of the winning number management table is displayed as an image display device. Display on 905)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at the game hall) can confirm the information.

The "specific operating means that cannot be operated by the player" may be, for example, any means that can be operated by a clerk at the game hall or an inspector / inspector of the gaming machine.

The invention according to means B41 is
It is a gaming machine of means B40,
A staging execution means (for example, a staging control CPU 90120) for executing a staging related to a game is provided.
The notification means notifies the cumulative value information according to an aspect of the effect executed by the effect execution means (for example, a character appearing during the advance notice effect or the reach effect outputs information on the winning number management table). (Displays aloud and outputs voice)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to easily recognize which type of gaming machine information is from the mode of notification.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B42 to the means B51 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 93), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up and displayed on the effect display device. , A gaming machine has been proposed in which when the number of counts being counted up reaches the number of execution opportunities determined by lottery, the player is informed that a villa in memory will occur. In the gaming machine shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187, when a gaming ball enters a normal winning opening, the number of balls entered is uniformly counted up and displayed one by one. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. The inventions according to the means B42 to the means B51 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to enhance the interest of a game in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B42 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect (specific effect D in which the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is gradually increased from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages) is provided in which the effect mode is gradually changed according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. A specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that can be executed is provided.
The specific according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (division between the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). The rate at which the effect mode changes in the effect is different (the rate at which the effect of increasing the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 by one step is different) is different.
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form).
According to this, the rate at which the production mode changes in a specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B43 is
It is a gaming machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variable pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). To do
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). , A gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different (the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 34th effect form).
According to this, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the interest of the specific effect can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B43
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). ) And the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Correspondingly, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect may be different (for example, in the case of a big hit symbol, it changes at a high rate, and in the case of an out-of-order symbol, it changes at a lower rate). ..

The gaming machine of means B44 is
A gaming machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 905) ends the start condition (variable display based on the previous start prize) after the game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit game state. ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect). Further equipped with a notice effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) to be executed before).
The period from when the gaming medium enters the general winning area until the variable display, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). A gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed (35th effect form pachinko game machine). 901).
According to this, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B44
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display which is the target of the advance notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). According to the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed) and the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect, the effect is produced in the specific effect. The rate at which the aspects change may be different. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that is the target of the advance notice effect when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed is within a predetermined range. In the case of the inside (for example, twice or less), the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect (high in the case of a big hit symbol). It changes at a rate, and if it becomes an outlier, it changes at a lower rate).

The gaming machine of means B45 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B44.
A reach effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that executes a reach effect in accordance with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is further provided.
When the gaming medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), after the execution of the reach effect. The rate at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general prize area (when the timing at which the game ball wins the general prize opening is after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation). It is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 36th staging form).
According to this, the effect mode changes in the specific effect depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the reach effect is executed or the game medium enters the general prize area after the reach effect is executed. By having different ratios, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B46 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B45.
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
Depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when the game ball wins in any of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, and the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D). It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 37th effect form) characterized in that the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different depending on whether the game ball wins a prize in any of the above cases).
According to this, the rate at which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered, so that the interest of the specific production can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B47 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect (specific effect D in which the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is gradually increased from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages) is provided in which the effect mode is gradually changed according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. A specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that can be executed is provided.
The specific according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (division between the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). The stages in which the production mode changes in the production are different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is different).
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 38th staging form to the 42nd staging form).
According to this, the stage at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B48 is
It is a gaming machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variable pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). To do
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). It is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 39th effect form) characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes is different in the specific effect.
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the interest of the specific production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). ) And the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Depending on the specific effect, the stage in which the effect mode changes is different (for example, in the case of a big hit symbol, the number of stages changes, and in the case of an out-of-order symbol, the number of stages changes less than that). good.

The gaming machine of means B49 is
A gaming machine of means B47 or means B48.
The variable display means (image display device 905) ends the start condition (variable display based on the previous start prize) after the game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit game state. ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect). Further equipped with a notice effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) to be executed before).
The period from when the gaming medium enters the general winning area until the variable display, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). A gaming machine characterized in that the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different depending on the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed (40th effect form pachinko game machine). 901).
According to this, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B49
The period from when the game medium enters the general winning area until the variable display which is the target of the advance notice effect is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). According to the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed) and the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect, the effect is produced in the specific effect. The stage at which the embodiment changes may be different. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that is the target of the advance notice effect when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed is within a predetermined range. In the case of being within (for example, twice or less), the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect (for example, in the case of a big hit symbol). The number of steps may change, and if the symbol is out of order, the number of steps may change less than that.)

The gaming machine of means B50 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B49.
A reach effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that executes a reach effect in accordance with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is further provided.
When the game medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), after the execution of the reach effect. The stage at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general prize area (when the timing at which the game ball wins the general prize opening is after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation). It is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 41st staging form).
According to this, the effect mode changes in the specific effect depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the reach effect is executed or the game medium enters the general prize area after the reach effect is executed. By different stages, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B51 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B50.
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
Depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered (when the game ball wins in any of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, and the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D). It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 42nd effect form) characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different depending on whether the game ball wins a prize in any of the above cases).
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered, so that the interest of the specific production can be further enhanced.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B52 to the means B56 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 93), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up and displayed on the effect display device. , A gaming machine has been proposed in which when the number of counts being counted up reaches the number of execution opportunities determined by lottery, the player is informed that a villa in memory will occur. In the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, an effect (count-up display) is executed every time a gaming ball enters a normal winning opening. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, if the gaming medium does not enter the general winning area, it is necessary to grasp this, but this is not considered in the prior art. The inventions according to the means B52 to the means B56 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to make it possible to grasp that the game medium does not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B52 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
When the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in 10 minutes when it is detected that the game is being played is 0, or when the game is played. When the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than 3 in the 30 minutes when it is detected to be inside, a specific effect (an image imitating the form of the general winning opening and "There is no general winning"" It is a gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect E) for displaying a broadcast image 902200 or the like including characters on an image display device 905.
According to this, it becomes possible for the player or the game field to grasp that the number of the game media entering the general winning area is less than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53 is
It is a gaming machine of means B52,
Setting means for setting whether or not to allow the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means (whether or not to execute the specific effect E is determined based on the game hall setting and the player setting in the display setting table. Control CPU 90120) and
Further equipped with a clerk operation reception means (display changeover switch 9032) that accepts setting operations by the clerk.
The setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the store clerk operation reception means (specific effect E (notifying that there is no general prize) based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032). ， Notify that the number of general prizes is small)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the amusement park regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B54 is
A gaming machine of means B52 or means B53.
A storage means (a winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122) for storing the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings for 30 minutes) is further provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of entries stored in the storage means is not held at the time of power failure (the value in the winning number counter area is erased by power failure).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control load for retaining the memory of the number of intrusions at the time of power failure.

The gaming machine of means B55 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B54.
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed at a different rate depending on the case of the normal state and the case of the probability change state or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B56 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B55.
Different specific effects are executed according to the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effects E are executed in different modes depending on the case of the normal state and the case of the probabilistic change state or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B57 to the means B64 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 109), the number of prize balls (granted value) obtained by the game medium entering the big winning opening during the execution of the big hit game, There has been proposed a gaming machine that performs an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (granted value) obtained by the game medium entering the ordinary winning opening (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intentions of the game hall and the player are not reflected with respect to whether or not to execute the effect when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. The inventions relating to the means B57 to the means B64 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and reflect the intentions of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the effect when the game medium enters the general winning area. The purpose is to make it possible.

The gaming machine of means B57 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variablely displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
When the game medium enters the general winning area, the information of the winning number management table is displayed in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode switching switch 9031, and the setting of the display switching switch 9032 and the operation button 9030 are used. Based on the settings, the object is increased each time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed, specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead. Notification means (image display device 905) capable of executing a notice effect) and
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising setting means (mode changeover switch 9031, display changeover switch 9032, and operation button 9030) for setting whether or not to permit execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means. ..
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B58 is
It is a gaming machine of means B57,
Further equipped with a clerk operation receiving means (mode changeover switch 9031, display changeover switch 9032) for accepting setting operations by the clerk.
The setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the clerk operation receiving means (based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, the winning number management table in the maintenance mode). Display the information of, increase the number of objects each time the game ball enters the general winning opening based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032, display the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state, specific effect A : Makes it possible to execute the fluctuation result advance notice effect, Specific effect B: Makes it possible to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the amusement park regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B59 is
A gaming machine of means B57 or means B58.
Further equipped with a player operation receiving means for accepting setting operations by the player,
The setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the player operation receiving means (general winning opening based on the setting by the operation button 9030 on the demo screen display). The object is increased each time the game ball enters the game, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed based on the setting by the operation button 9030 on the demo screen display. Specific effect B: Pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B60 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B59.
The specific effect specifically notifies the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area during a predetermined period (the period controlled by the big hit gaming state) (the number of winning balls to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls). The number of prize balls according to the above, the number of prize balls to the general winning opening, and the number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls are displayed separately).
According to this, it is possible to improve the playability in a predetermined period.

The gaming machine of means B61 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B60.
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form) when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. It is a featured gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B62 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B61.
The specific effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that different specific effects are executed according to the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form are executed). Is.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B63 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B62.
The specific effect is an effect of identifiablely notifying the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the object is increased each time the game ball enters the general winning opening).
When the game is not performed on the gaming machine (the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received for a predetermined period. The effect control CPU 90120 that determines the end of the game based on the fact that the game has not been completed), and in the specific effect, it is identifiable that the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area is 0 (the end of the game is determined). In that case, all the objects corresponding to the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 are deleted.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from grasping the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B64 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B63.
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized by displaying display information (object corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening) corresponding to the number of entries of the gaming medium into the general winning area.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the means B65 to B77 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 85), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during a big hit, one aspect of the start memory display changes and the start memory is stored. A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is "hit" or "missing". In a gaming machine having such a general winning opening, there is room to further enhance the interest when a game ball wins in the general winning opening. The inventions relating to the means B65 to the means B77 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to enhance the interest of a game in a gaming machine having a general winning opening.

The gaming machine of means B65 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variablely displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that executes a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result advance notice effect).
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state). , The ratio of executing the specific effect is different (in the normal state, the specific effect is executed at a higher ratio than the probability change or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the first staging form to the fourth staging form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B66 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variablely displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result advance notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect) is provided.
The case where the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and the case where the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state). , Execute a different specific effect (execute the specific effect A in the normal state, and execute the specific effect B in the probability change or time saving state)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the fifth effect form to the twelfth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B67 is
A gaming machine of means B65 or means B66 (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form).
In the first gaming state (normal state), when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area reaches the first entry number, the specific effect is executed.
In the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state), the specific effect is executed when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area is a second entry number different from the first entry number. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B68 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variablely displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result advance notice effect) is provided.
The above-mentioned when the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established) and during the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established). The ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area (after the reach fluctuation state is established, it is specified at a higher ratio than before the reach state of the reach fluctuation or the period other than the reach fluctuation is established. The production is executed)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the thirteenth staging form to the sixteenth staging form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B69 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variablely displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result advance notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect) is provided.
The above-mentioned when the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established) and during the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established). A different specific effect is executed depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area (the specific effect A is executed after the reach state is established, and the specific effect B is executed before the reach state is established. The specific effect A is executed, and the specific effect B is executed during a period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established.)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 17th effect form to the 24th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B70 is
A gaming machine of means B68 or means B69 (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 14th effect form to the 16th effect form, the 22nd effect form to the 24th effect form).
During the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), the specific effect is executed when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area becomes the first number of entries.
During the second period (a period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area is the number of second entries different from the number of first entries. It is a gaming machine characterized by executing the specific effect in some cases.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B71 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B70 (second effect form, sixth effect form, tenth effect form to twelfth effect form, 14th effect form, 18th effect form, 22nd effect form). Pachinko game machine 901)
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a gaming medium enters each of a plurality of the general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B72 is
One of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B71 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the fifth effect form to the twelfth effect form and the 17th effect form to the 24th effect form).
The variable display means has started conditions (variable display based on the previous start winning prize has ended and a big hit game state) after the game medium has entered the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that it is not controlled.
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can control the advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. )When,
Before the start condition is satisfied, the pre-start determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (control to the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot determination random number extracted at the start winning prize). Further equipped with a game control microcomputer 90100) for determining whether or not to do so.
The specific effect executing means is
Based on the pre-start determination, the effect of notifying that the control is controlled to the advantageous state (pre-reading advance notice effect) is performed by the specific effect (specific effect B) before the start condition of the variable display to be targeted is satisfied. It is a gaming machine characterized by being executed as.
According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect more interesting by foretelling that the variable display start condition is controlled to an advantageous state before the condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine of means B73 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B72 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the first effect form to the 24th effect form).
The variable display means has started conditions (variable display based on the previous start winning prize has ended and a big hit game state) after the game medium has entered the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that it is not controlled.
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can control the advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. )When,
When the start condition is satisfied, the start time determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for the jackpot determination stored when the variable display of the special symbol is started). Further equipped with a game control microcomputer 90100) that determines whether or not to control the jackpot game state based on a random number.
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that an effect (variation result advance notice effect) for notifying control of the advantageous state is executed as the specific effect based on the start time determination.
According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect more interesting by foretelling that the control is performed in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B74 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B73 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the third effect form and the fifteenth effect form).
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the execution rate of the specific effect varies depending on the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B75 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B74 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the eleventh staging form and the 23rd staging form).
It is a gaming machine characterized in that different specific effects are executed according to the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning in the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B76 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B75 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 4th effect form, the 8th effect form, the 12th effect form, the 16th effect form, the 20th effect form, and the 24th effect form). And,
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the order of entry of the gaming media into the plurality of general winning areas in a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the order of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B77 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B76 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 4th effect form, the 8th effect form, the 12th effect form, the 16th effect form, the 20th effect form, and the 24th effect form). And,
It has other winning areas (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning area.
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the order in which the game medium enters the general winning area and the game medium enters the other winning area in a specific order. ..
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the order of entry of the game medium into the general winning area and other winning areas.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the means A1 to A9 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576, a gaming machine in which a wind turbine for changing the flow direction and speed of a gaming ball and a large number of gaming nails are provided on the surface of the gaming board has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, the passing ratio of the winning opening and the passing gate varies depending on the adjustment of the gaming nails provided on the gaming board, and the payout rate of the gaming balls is designed by adjusting the gaming nails and the like. Sometimes. However, since it was not possible to recognize from the outside of the gaming machine what kind of adjustment was made to the gaming nails, it was difficult to judge whether or not the payout rate would be as designed. The inventions according to the means A1 to the means A9 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing what kind of adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of the means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.)
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B as a second starting winning slot, a special variable winning ball device 907 as a large winning slot, a normal winning ball device 906A as a first starting winning slot, and a general winning area. It is a gaming machine in which the game value (for example, a game ball, a slot machine medal, etc.) is paid out by winning a prize in the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, displaying a predetermined combination of symbols on the effective line of the slot machine, etc.). Predetermined information regarding the game value provided on the main board (for example, the main board 9011, the main board of the slot machine, etc.) for controlling the game (for example, the combination (combination), combination, machine allocation, etc.) ) Is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, slot machine display monitor, etc.), and the door frame (for example, game machine frame 903, slot machine door frame, etc.) can be opened and released. In response to the occurrence of an error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 91), the display of the predetermined information is restricted (for example, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio is stopped). It is characterized by that.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information when the error is canceled when the door frame is opened.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.).
When the error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 91) occurs, the limitation (for example, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio is canceled) is performed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.).
When the door frame (for example, a game machine frame 903, a slot machine door frame, etc.) is opened after the error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 91) occurs. (For example, for example, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio is stopped).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A3 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, display monitor of slot machine, etc.) is conditioned on the condition that the error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 91) has not occurred. As the above-mentioned predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A4 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
After canceling the error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 91), a predetermined time (for example, the measurement time t measured by the measurement timer in the display restriction confirmation process of FIG. 89) or the like. ) Has elapsed, and then the predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A5 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029, a display monitor of a slot machine, etc.) displays a plurality of the predetermined information (for example, a combination (combination ratio), a combination ratio, a machine allocation, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). It can be switched and displayed each time.
According to the above configuration, the increase of members can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A6 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, display monitor of a slot machine, etc.) has a predetermined unit (for example, the number of prize balls) as the predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.). Displays information for each (60,000).
According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from the means A1 to A7 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, display monitor of a slot machine, etc.) provides information for each predetermined unit (for example, combination) as the predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.). Short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio) and cumulative information (for example, cumulative combination (relationship), cumulative combination ratio) are switched and displayed.
According to the above configuration, the information for each predetermined unit and the cumulative information can be compared.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A8 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, slot machine display monitor, etc.) is provided with the main board (for example, main board 9011, slot machine main board, etc.) and is crimped. It is housed in 90201, 202).
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a staging control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the volume condition display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the volume condition display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific motion detection process. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the execution mode of a predetermined effect in the on / off state of a stop flag / suppression flag. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the music determination process in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the music which can be played during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the composition example of the data which can be reproduced during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize-winning production process of a large prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the staging process at the time of opening a big prize opening. It is a figure which shows the execution timing such as a big winning opening opening sound and a ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when there is a volume change operation in the super reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production example such as the opening sound of a big prize opening and the error display of a ball removal. It is a figure which shows the production example such as the big winning opening opening sound and the ball removal error display in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode switching example of the control history to the jackpot game state in the modification. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in another form example. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. (A) It is a figure which shows the prize number information managed by the prize number management table, and (b) is a figure which shows the prize number information which is managed by a display control table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the playground setting and the player setting. It is explanatory drawing in the case of setting the display by the operation button which a player can operate. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the object corresponding to the prize in the general prize opening. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening in a big hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each effect performed according to the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 1st staging form to the 4th staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 5th staging form to the 8th staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 9th effect form to the 12th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 13th staging form to the 16th staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 17th directing form to the 20th directing form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 21st staging form to the 24th staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 25th staging form and the 26th staging form. It is a figure which shows the prize number information managed by the prize number management table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the point giving effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 27th staging form to the 30th staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the gauge update effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 33rd staging form to the 36th staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 37th staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 38th staging form to the 41st staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 42nd staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the non-winning notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 43rd staging form to 46th staging form. It is a figure which shows the appearance ratio of the character A to C in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form. It is a figure which shows the display period of the characters A to C in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 47th staging form to the 49th staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold change effect in the 47th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation result advance notice effect in the 48th effect form. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each effect in the 47th effect form and the 48th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 50th staging form and the 51st staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuous hit operation notification and the cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and pseudo-continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and pseudo-continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the all symbol stop operation notification and the chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the all symbol stop operation notification and the chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 52nd staging form and the 53rd staging form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of each advance notice effect for every general winning opening in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode of an error message. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the item example of the prize number information which can be displayed in the 1st area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting method of the aggregation period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays the winning number information, and the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays the winning number information, and the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards mounted on a pachinko machine in more detail. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view simplified from the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view explaining the display contents of the display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of the storage area in the RAM of a main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the CPU in the main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the built-in ROM area in a CPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. It is a table which shows the call instruction used in the built-in ROM area. It is a figure which shows the other configurations of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in a built-in ROM area. (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the first interrupt processing, (B) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the second interrupt processing, and (C) is a processing procedure of the third interrupt processing. Is a diagram conceptually showing. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-5) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the combination (relationship) / combination-related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the combination (relationship) / combination display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of display restriction confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a display switching control process. It is a table which shows the type of an error in a gaming machine. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor or the like, and (B) is the signal flow and the monitor when the first interrupt process is executed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship with the display state such as. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of each LED of the display part in a display monitor. It is a perspective view of the main board in which a display monitor is arranged in the 1st display monitor arrangement mode. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the frame for a game machine to which a main board is attached is opened from the outer frame. (A) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a second display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a third display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a fourth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a fifth display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. It is a front view of the gaming machine provided with the blade type variable winning ball device. It is a front view which looked at the variable winning ball device provided in the game board from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the counter of the total number of acquired balls, the number of characters acquired by a character, and the number of balls acquired by a continuous character. (A) to (D) are front views which simplified the modification of the main board. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing about the performance information. It is explanatory drawing about the performance information. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure processing (special figure process processing). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the state control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process of opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening post-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the state control processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like. This is a configuration example of the out-ball detector. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error notification processing. This is an example of a display mode for notifying an error. This is an example of a display mode for notifying an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance information update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance information update process. This is an example of the placement position of the out-ball detector.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into this game area and is driven into the game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and are identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each have a number indicating "0" to "9", a symbol indicating "-", or a lighting pattern of each segment not limited to the number or symbol. Variable display of multiple types of special symbols composed of such as. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

A plurality of types of special symbols variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be given a symbol number for identifying each. As an example, the special symbol indicating the "-" symbol may have "0" as a symbol number, and "1" to "9" may be attached as symbol numbers for a plurality of types of lighting patterns. ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game are supported. In a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Variation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol is variable in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 5. The fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “deriving”). In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols is to stop the identification information such as decorative symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and end the variable display. .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display has not progressed. It becomes. It should be noted that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

A first hold display unit 5HR and a second hold display unit 5HL are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. The first hold display unit 5HR displays the number of first special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The first special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display holdes corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The second hold display unit 5HL displays the number of second special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The second special figure hold storage number is a variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. To hold the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by doing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. It will be done.

For example, due to the occurrence of the first start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A (first start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first special figure hold storage number is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, due to the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure hold storage number is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of stored special figures of the first special figure is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. When is started, the second special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1. If the first special figure reserved storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") when the first start prize is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied and the first start prize is based on the start prize. The special figure game is invalidated, and only the prize ball may be paid out. Further, if the second special figure reserved storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") when the second start prize is generated, the second start condition is not satisfied and is based on the start prize. The special figure game is invalidated, and only the prize ball may be paid out.

In the first hold display unit 5HR, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display unit 5HL, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number is also particularly referred to as a total hold storage number. The term "special figure holding memory number" usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure holding storage number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number, but in particular, a part of these (for example, for example). It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved storages of the first special figure and the number of reserved storages of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved storages).

A display device for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the first reserved display unit 5HR and the second reserved display unit 5HL, or in place of the first reserved display unit 5HR and the second reserved display unit 5HL. .. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the number of special symbol hold storage can be specified on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL. A first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The second hold display 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The number of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B corresponds to, for example, the upper limit value (for example, "4") in each of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number (for example, 4). It is configured to include (pieces) LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes (enters) through the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) through the second starting winning opening. ) Make it open. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) through the second starting winning opening, while the expansion when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. It may be configured so that the game ball is less likely to enter (pass) than in the open state. As described above, the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B has a first variable state such as an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) through the second starting winning opening or an expanded open state, and the game ball cannot pass (enter). It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state where it is difficult to pass (enter).

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game medium), and the first reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value. If it is (for example, "4") or less, the first starting condition is satisfied. If a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, and the second reserved storage number is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value. The second starting condition is satisfied.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) It becomes easier. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the gaming ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the large winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The normal design (also called "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided around the gaming area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward a gaming area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) There is an upper plate (ball hitting plate). At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by a player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilting direction sensor unit that detects (detects) a tilting operation (operation) with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower portion of the stick controller 31A.

A push that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation (operation) on the member forming the upper plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body by a pressing operation or the like. A button 31B is provided. The push button 31B may be configured so as to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the staging control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back surface of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

For example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11. The switch circuit 110 captures detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for ordinary electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning door.

The staging control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, and receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 to receive an image display device 5, speakers 8L, and 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the effect operation by the electric components for the effect such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the staging control board 12 has all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations in the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, and the like. It has a function to determine the control content for causing the electric component for the effect, such as a unit, to execute a predetermined effect operation.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the staging control board 12, and is based on commands and control data from the staging control board 12, such as a game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. The wiring is connected. The various switches may have any configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor. Further, a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the like is connected to the main board 11.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. It contains lamp control commands used to control lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, in which the first byte represents MODE (command classification) and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data may be set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to "0" in advance.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip computer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and updates of numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data in which the CPU 103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 102. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And transmission operation to output various signals is also performed.

The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may have at least a RAM 102 built in in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 100, numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game is updatablely counted by, for example, a random number circuit 104. Random numbers used to control the progress of a game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, a predetermined random number value is shown in a random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100, or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102. Numerical data may be stored, and the CPU 103 may update the stored value periodically or irregularly so that the random value is updated.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 is configured with table data constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be used is stored. In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored in a rewritable manner.

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. A display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the staging CPU 120, and an I / O 125. And are installed.

As an example, in the staging control board 12, the staging control CPU 120 executes a staging control program read from the ROM 121 to execute a process for controlling the staging operation by the staging electrical components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has a fixed data read operation for reading fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable data writing operation for writing various variable data to the RAM 122 and temporarily storing the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 has the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data read operation to read various temporarily stored fluctuation data, reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the effect control CPU 120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. On the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring for transmitting an illuminated signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Further, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the staging control board 12, for example, a random number circuit 124, a random counter for staging provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the like, can update numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the staging operation. .. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also referred to as an effect random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating various effect determination random values such as a random value for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of a decorative symbol and a random value for determining a notice effect can be counted. Is controlled by.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from the process data including the effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and the end code associated with the effect control process timer judgment value. It is configured.

Various data used for controlling the staging operation are stored in the RAM 122 mounted on the staging control board 12 shown in FIG. Specifically, the RAM 122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit. There are a plurality of types of the effect control flag setting unit that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120 or the like. For example, the display control unit 123 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, or the like. The VDP may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured.

The I / O 125 mounted on the staging control board 12 has an input port for taking in the staging control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the staging control board 12. Consists of including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14. (Electric signal) etc. are output.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a gaming ball, a predetermined hitting ball is launched based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) of a hitting ball operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the device. When the game ball flowing down the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening (first starting area) formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the game ball is moved by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection or the like. After that, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A starts. Will be done.

Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second starting area) formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Therefore, the second starting condition is satisfied. After that, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B starts. Will be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, the game ball is difficult or impossible to pass through the second starting winning opening.

Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is established. After that, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (deriving display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss". In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "hit the normal figure", the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilting position. , Closing control or normal opening control that returns to the vertical position after a predetermined time elapses is performed.

When the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, it is special. Whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. Is transmitted from to the staging control board 12.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of decorative symbols (effect symbols) different from the special symbols is performed. The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are also referred to as left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, respectively. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the definite special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol.

When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes a "big hit" (specific display result), and the specific gaming state (advantageous) is advantageous for the player. It is controlled to the jackpot game state as a state). That is, whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes "missing" (non-specific display result).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is "big hit", it is determined in advance in the display area of the image display device 5. A definite decorative pattern that is a combination of big hits is derived and displayed. As an example, the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", so that a big hit combination is confirmed. It suffices if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an advantageous state for the player. Then, a period until a predetermined opening upper limit time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. Until then, a round game (simply referred to as a "round") in which the big winning opening is continuously opened is executed. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to be generated. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "15") is reached.

When the variable display result is "big hit", it suffices to include the case where the big hit type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change". When the jackpot type is "non-probable change" or "probable change", the upper limit of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an advantageous state for the player (the jackpot is open) as a round game in the jackpot game state. A normal open round is performed with a relatively long time (eg 29.5 seconds). It should be noted that the jackpot type may include the case of "probability", and when the jackpot type is "probability", the special variable winning ball device 7 is used by the player as a round game in the jackpot game state. A short-term open round may be executed in which the upper limit time for making an advantageous state (large winning opening open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second).

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to a probability variation state that is higher than the normal state, based on the condition that the predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied. There is. In the probabilistic state, a predetermined probabilistic end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or the jackpot gaming state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done. The probability change end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit game state is started, regardless of the number of times the variable display is executed. After the jackpot game state ends, the average variable display time may be controlled to a shorter time state than in the normal state. In the time saving state, a predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done. As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the gaming state becomes the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability change", the gaming state becomes the probability change state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second starting winning opening than in the normal state. And the second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is "normal". Tilted control time for controlling the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the control that improves the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, and the variable display result is "hit the normal figure". The normal variable winning ball device 6B is changed into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by the control to make the normal variable state longer than in the normal state and the control to increase the number of tilts from the normal state. Just do it. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high open control (also referred to as “high base control”). By being controlled to such a probable change state or a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the special state is more advantageous for the player than the normal state. Even when the probability change control is performed in the probability change state, the high opening control may not be performed.

In the image display device 5, the decorative symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state of being consistent with the jackpot combination for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to shaking, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple decorative symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the display positions being swapped. The effect performed in a state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. As a reach effect, a character image (an effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, the display mode of the background image is changed, and a moving image different from the decorative pattern is displayed. An effect operation different from changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, such as reproducing and displaying an image, may be performed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are different from the operation mode before the reach mode. The operation mode may be included in the reach effect. The reach state and its state are called the reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not a big hit combination, a “miss” occurs and the variable display state ends.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as reach patterns) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as reliability or jackpot reliability) differs depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach effect (normal reach) and a super reach effect (super reach) are preset. Then, when the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) is higher than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. The reach effect that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach effects including a super reach that executes a specific reach effect that has a higher expectation of a big hit than other super reach. In this embodiment, as an example, the reach production that becomes super reach includes reach productions such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C, and is super reach B than super reach A and super than super reach B. Reach C is a reach production with high expectations for big hits.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream", for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying an image as a message, or outputting a voice is used for decoration. Due to an effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state, the reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is ". A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of becoming a "big hit".

The staging operation that becomes the advance notice is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed (started) before the reach mode is reached (before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right"). Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the confirmed special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell the sex will do. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance according to the content (effect mode) of the effect operation when the advance notice effect is executed.

When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode is "non-reach" ("normal"). The case where the variable display mode is "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") is included. When the variable display mode is "non-reach", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state, and a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that does not become reach (non-reach). Reach combination) is displayed (derived) as a stop. When the variable display mode is "reach", the reach effect is executed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and then the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and finally what is the jackpot combination? A combination of predetermined decorative symbols (reach combination) that does not become is stopped and displayed (derived). The decorative symbols constituting the non-reach combination and the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol which is the lost symbol.

In this embodiment, in the big hit game state, for example, a winning sound (normal winning sound, over winning sound) for notifying that the game ball has won a prize is output to the big winning opening, and the remaining number of winnings in the round game is shown. Predetermined effects such as a large winning opening winning effect that displays the number of remaining winnings and a large winning opening opening sound that notifies that the large winning opening has been opened are set to be feasible. There is. Then, in the big hit game state, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be changed by detecting the specific action of the player such as the long pulling of the stick controller 31A continuously for a predetermined time. For example, from a mode in which a predetermined effect can be executed (a normal execution mode described later), a player pulls the stick controller 31A continuously for 5 seconds so that the predetermined effect cannot be executed (execution at the time of stop described later). The mode) is changed, or the player is changed to a mode in which the predetermined effect is suppressed by continuously pulling the stick controller 31A for 2 seconds (execution mode at the time of suppression described later). The execution mode of the predetermined effect is whether or not the predetermined effect is executed, or the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, volume output level, brightness level, display size, display transparency, display color, etc.) when the predetermined effect is executed. Sound quality, etc.). In this embodiment, in the big hit game state, unlike the predetermined production, for example, a music selected by the operation of the player or a moving image such as PV (Promotion Video) or MV (Music Video) of the music. It is set to be able to execute a specific effect such as playback of.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

On the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 101 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupt processing is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and other games in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It includes processing to control the progress of.

The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

As an example, the random numbers for games used on the side of the main board 11 include a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern. It suffices if the random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result is included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of prepared patterns. The random number value MR5 for determining the normal figure display result is in a closed state (normally open) of the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B with the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal figure game as "per normal figure". It is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the open state (expanded open state) in which the game ball easily passes (enters) more frequently than the state).

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is displayed on the special symbol display device 4. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the operation and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process processing controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) in the normal symbol display 20, variable display of the normal symbol, tilting operation setting of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, and the like. It is a process that enables. In the normal symbol process processing, as high-opening control accompanying the time reduction control, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and each time. Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol will be "per normal" in the normal game, and the normal variable winning ball device based on the variable display result being "per normal". A part or all of control is performed in which the tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable wing piece in 6B is made longer than in the normal state, and the number of tilts is increased as in the normal state.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the staging control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the effect control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal to turn the effect control INT signal on and then off for a predetermined time. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit, etc.). And execute.

FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S101 of FIG. 3 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first starts based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the first special figure by reading the first hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the first hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. The buffer value is set to "1" (step S203).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (). Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the second special figure by reading the second hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the second hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to "2" (step S206).

After executing any of the processes of steps S203 and S206, the hold storage count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be added by 1 (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). In this way, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to increase by 1, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to increase by 1. .. At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated to be added by 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number for determining the special figure display result is disturbed from the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210).

In the process of step S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is held. The data is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit. In the first special figure holding storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, and the first starting winning is generated, but the special drawing game that has not been started yet ( The special figure game) using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is stored as a hold memory. In the second special figure holding storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, and the second starting winning is generated, but the special drawing game has not been started yet. (Special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored as a hold memory.

The first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with, for example, the winning order to the first starting winning opening, and is based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103, are stored as reserved data. Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with, for example, the winning order to the second starting winning opening, and is based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103, are stored as reserved data. Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

Following the process of step S210, a setting for transmitting a start opening winning designation command prepared in advance to the staging control board 12 is made (step S211). After that, the setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is made (step S213). Further, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S215), and then the start prize is won. The judgment process is terminated. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S216). The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

When a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs, the step shown in FIG. When it is determined in the process of S202 that the number of reserved first special figures has not reached the upper limit value, the first start condition is satisfied. The first start condition is a condition for executing a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to "1" in the process of step S203 shown in FIG. 4, and then the transmission setting is made by the process of step S211. The first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. Further, by setting the transmission by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. 4 when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Will be done.

When a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, it is shown in FIG. When it is determined in the process of step S205 that the second special figure reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to "2" in the process of step S206 shown in FIG. 4, and then the transmission setting is made by the process of step S211. A second start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. Further, by setting the transmission by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. 4 when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12. Will be done.

On the side of the staging control board 12, the establishment of the first starting condition can be detected by receiving the first starting opening winning designation command, and the establishment of the second starting condition can be detected by receiving the second starting opening winning designation command. can. As described above, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The first reserved storage number notification command notifies the first special figure reserved storage number. The second reserved storage number notification command notifies the second special figure reserved storage number. In this embodiment, in the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the game ball passes (enters) either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and the starting winning is won. In addition to notifying whether it has occurred, it is transmitted as hold notification information specifying which of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number has increased.

The first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command correspond to the fact that the execution of the special figure game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be sent. Alternatively, a hold storage number addition designation command (first hold storage number addition designation command or second) indicating that the first special figure hold storage number or the second special figure hold storage number has increased when the hold storage number increases. While sending the hold storage number addition specification command), when the hold storage number decreases, the hold storage number subtraction specification command (No. 1) indicating that the hold storage number of the first special figure or the second special figure hold storage number has decreased. (1) Hold storage number subtraction designation command or second hold storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted. A total hold storage notification command that notifies the total hold storage number in place of the first hold storage notification command or the second hold storage notification command, or together with the first hold storage notification command or the second hold storage notification command. May be sent. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The special symbol normal processing of step S110 shown in FIG. 3 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or the like is based on the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the first special symbol reservation storage unit and the second special symbol reservation storage unit. The second special symbol display device 4B determines whether or not to start the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the variable display result determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as a "big hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Derived Determined (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, if the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types. The jackpot type is stored by storing the data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the definite special symbol (big hit symbol,) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B corresponds to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. One of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is predetermined.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set in advance according to the variable pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the definite special symbol as the variable display result is determined. Further, the variable pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" when the variable display result is "missing". Alternatively, even if the variable display state of the decorative symbol is determined to be "reach" by determining the variable pattern when the variable display result is "missing" in the variable pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to start the variation of the special symbol. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to change the special symbol, a process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the like. .. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 4 and setting to stop and display the confirmed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control flag setting unit) is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command that specifies the start of the big hit game state based on the special figure display result being "big hit" is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to ". Update to 4 ". If the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and setting to open the big winning opening, etc. It is included. When the jackpot opening preprocessing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit opening post-processing, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is opened has reached a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15") or the upper limit number of times has been reached. If not, it includes a process of waiting until the next round game is started. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Is updated to.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a wait corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It includes a process of waiting until the time elapses and a process of making various settings for controlling the probabilistic state and the time saving state according to the success or failure of the probabilistic control condition. Then, when the setting for controlling the probability change state or the time saving state is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reserved storage number is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; No), it is stored in the head area (storage area corresponding to the reserved number "1") of the second special figure reserved storage unit. Numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read out as the reserved data (step S232). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize (second start prize) at the second start prize opening in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 4 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure holding storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure holding storage is updated. The storage content in the unit is shifted (step S233). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102, is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0". As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, regardless of whether it is the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, if the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls pass (enter) the starting winning opening, the first A predetermined area of the RAM 102 in which the start opening data indicating which of the start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) is associated with the hold number together with the hold data or separately from the hold data. It suffices to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are satisfied for the special figure game corresponding to each reserved data.

Following the process of step S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure holding storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure holding storage is updated. The storage content in the unit is shifted (step S237). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variable special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101 is selected and set as a table used for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing". , Should be assigned. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the random number buffer for variation.

In the process of step S239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state and the probabilistic change control is performed, the special figure is at a higher rate than when the probabilistic change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state. The display result is determined to be a "big hit". The probabilistic change state is started by setting the probabilistic change flag to the on state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is "probability change" by, for example, the big hit end process of step S117 shown in FIG. In the probabilistic state, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and the big hit game state is more likely to occur than when the probabilistic change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

The CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is a "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit, etc.) is set to the on state (step S241). .. Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101 is selected and set as a table used for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value for determining the jackpot type, depending on whether the variable special map is the first special map or the second special map, has a plurality of jackpot types. It suffices if it is assigned to the decision result of which type to use. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type read from the random number buffer for variation.

After executing the process of step S242, the jackpot type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102.

When the special symbol display result is not "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; No), or after the processing of step S243 is executed, a confirmed special symbol which is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined. (Step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special symbol display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a definite special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is "big hit", any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. It may be decided as a definite special symbol.

After executing the process of step S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (step S245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" in step S245, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 3 is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S246), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 3 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 6, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). Then, when the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is "big hit" is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step S261; No), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result becomes "loss" is determined (step S263).

In the process of step S262, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined by using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101, for example. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result becomes "big hit" by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined. Further, in the process of step S263, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined by using the loss variation pattern determination table prepared, for example, by storing in a predetermined area of ROM 101. In the loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result becomes "loss" by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined.

FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "missing", the variable display state of the decorative symbol is "non-reach", which is not the reach state, and "the reach state". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases of "reach" and to the case where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "big hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is "non-reach" is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is "reach" is , Also called reach fluctuation pattern (also called reach loss fluctuation pattern). The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect in the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect in the super reach is executed.

FIG. 8 shows an example of determining a jackpot fluctuation pattern and a loss fluctuation pattern. In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 6, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined at a ratio as shown in FIG. 8 (A). In the example shown in FIG. 8 (A), as the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-3 are determined as the usage pattern at the ratio shown in FIG. 8 (A). In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 6, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a ratio as shown in FIG. 8 (B1), for example, in the normal time (during non-time reduction) when the time reduction control is not performed. To. Further, in the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 6, when the time saving control is being performed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a ratio as shown in FIG. 8 (B2), for example. In the process of step S263, by determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is "loss". It should be noted that, by a process separate from the determination of the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not to reach the reach state when the variable display result becomes “missing”.

In the example shown in FIG. 8A, the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach such as the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-3 is the reach in the normal reach such as the fluctuation pattern PA3-1. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the effect. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8 (B1) and 8 (B2), the determination values assigned to the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the reach effect in the normal reach, such as the fluctuation pattern PA2-1, are the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2. It is set to be larger than the decision value assigned to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach such as -3. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8 (B1), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is 0, 1, or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of "159" to "205" is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 if the first special figure reserved storage number is 0, and the first special figure reserved storage number is 1. If it is, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-2, and if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is 2 or more, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be made different according to the number of reserved first special symbols. In particular, when the number of reserved first special figures is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time is shorter than when the number of reserved first special figures is less than a predetermined value. It suffices if a determined value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that In the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the first special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as in. Alternatively, refer to the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number at that time regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. , The fluctuation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, FIG. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data to which the determination value is assigned differently from B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the "first special figure reserved storage number" shown in FIG. 8 (B1) is read as "the second special figure reserved storage number". The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the number of reserved storages in the second special figure.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8 (B2), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the second special figure reserved storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be made different according to the second special symbol reserved storage number. In particular, when the second special figure holding storage number is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time is shortened as compared with the case when the second special figure holding storage number is less than the predetermined value. It suffices if a determined value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that During the time reduction control, the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening, and the special figure game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is shortened. There is a high possibility that it will be executed, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. Then, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the number of reserved second special figures is set to 0. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure reserved storage number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the first special figure reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as in. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data in which the allocation of the determined values is different from that in FIG. 8 (B2) regardless of the number of reserved storages in the first special figure. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the "second special figure reserved storage number" shown in FIG. 8 (B2) is read as "the first special figure reserved storage number". The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the number of reserved storages in the first special figure.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262 and S263, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is set (step S264). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 7, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processes of steps S262 and S263. By setting the special symbol fluctuation time, the CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived.

Following the process of step S264, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the condition is satisfied (step S265). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

After executing the process of step S265, the command transmission setting at the start of the change of the special symbol is performed (step S266). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a first from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification commands, the storage address (start address) in ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a second from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the hold storage number notification commands, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is specified.

The first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command use the fluctuation start in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command that specifies the start of fluctuations in the special figure game. The variable pattern specification command is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

After the process of step S266 is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S267), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" in step S267, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 3 is executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

Next, the operation on the staging control board 12 will be described.

In the staging control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the staging control CPU 120 is activated to execute the staging control main process shown in FIG. 9 as an example. As shown in FIG. 9, when the staging control main process is started, the staging control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S51), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and is a staging control board. The registers of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the 12 are set. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S52). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the staging control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control signal that becomes an effect control command is selected from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. To capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on (step S52; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and the command analysis process is executed (step S54). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. In the command analysis process, for example, when there is a reception command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined which effect control command is received by checking the MODE data of the reception command.

Following the command analysis process, the error notification process (step S55) is executed. In the error notification processing, for example, under the control of the effect control CPU 120, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Output it.

Following the error notification process, the effect control process process is executed (step S56). In the effect control process process, various operations such as display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operation in the light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the like. Regarding the control content of the effect operation using the effect device, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. Following the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed (step S57), and as various random number values used for the effect control, numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 is generated by software. Update. After executing the effect random number update process, the process returns to the process of step S52.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S55 of FIG. 9 as the error notification process. In this error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a ball removal error notification start command has been received (step S301). The ball removal error notification start command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12, for example, assuming that a ball removal error has occurred when the lower plate is full of game balls. When it is determined in step S301 that the ball removal error notification start command has been received (step S301; Yes), the stop flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is in the ON state. Whether or not it is determined (step S302). When it is determined in step S302 that the stop flag is in the off state (step S302; No), whether or not the suppression flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is in the on state. Is determined (step S303). In the initial state, the stop flag and the suppression flag are in the off state, and the on / off state of the stop flag and the suppression flag is switched in the specific operation detection process of step S162 described later.

When it is determined in step S302 that the stop flag is in the ON state (step S302; Yes), or when it is determined in step S303 that the suppression flag is in the ON state (Step S303; Yes), the ball Make settings to start the extraction error display in a reduced size (step S304). The ball removal error display may be performed, for example, by displaying the ball removal error display image on the image display device 5. By executing the process of step S304, the ball removal error display is performed in the image display device 5 in a reduced size. If it is determined in step S303 that the suppression flag is in the off state (step S303; No), a setting is made to start the ball removal error display in the normal size (step S305). By executing the process of step S305, the ball removal error display is performed in the image display device 5 in a normal size. That is, when either the stop flag or the suppression flag is in the on state, the ball removal error display is performed in a reduced size, while when both the stop flag and the suppression flag are in the off state, the ball is displayed. The extraction error is displayed in the normal size. When the ball removal error display is started in the reduced size, the reduced size flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the staging control flag setting unit) is turned on, and the ball removal error display is started in the normal size. In this case, the normal size flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) may be turned on.

In this embodiment, when it is determined in step S302 that the stop flag is in the ON state (step S302; Yes), or when it is determined in step S303 that the suppression flag is in the ON state. (Step S303; Yes), a setting is made to start the ball removal error display in a reduced size (step S304). That is, the ball removal error display is performed in the reduced size, which is the same size, when the stop flag is on and when the suppression flag is on. However, the display size of the ball removal error display may be different depending on whether the stop flag is on or the suppression flag is on. For example, when the stop flag is on, the ball removal error is displayed at the first reduced size of the reduced sizes, and when the suppression flag is on, the size is larger than the first reduced size of the reduced sizes. The ball removal error may be displayed in the second reduced size. When the stop flag is on, the ball removal error may be displayed in the second reduced size, and when the suppression flag is on, the ball removal error may be displayed in the first reduced size. By doing so, the display size of the error display can be changed according to the execution mode of the predetermined effect.

Then, after executing the processes of steps S304 and S305, the setting for starting the output of the ball removal error notification sound is made (step S306). In this embodiment, when a ball removal error occurs, a ball removal error notification sound is output at a common volume output level regardless of the on / off state of the stop flag and the suppression flag. The volume output level of the ball removal error notification sound may be different depending on the on / off state of the stop flag and the suppression flag. For example, when either the stop flag or the suppression flag is in the on state, the ball removal error notification sound is output at a small volume output level, while both the stop flag and the suppression flag are in the off state. The ball removal error notification sound may be output at a normal volume output level. When the stop flag is on, the ball removal error notification sound is output at the first volume output level of the small volume output level, and when the suppression flag is on, the first volume of the small volume output level is output. The ball removal error notification sound may be output at the second volume output level, which is an output level higher than the output level. When the stop flag is on, the ball removal error notification sound may be output at the second volume output level, and when the suppression flag is on, the ball removal error notification sound may be output at the first volume output level. .. By doing so, the output level of the error display sound can be changed according to the execution mode of the predetermined effect. The output of the ball removal error display and the ball removal error notification sound is simply referred to as "ball removal error notification".

When it is determined in step S301 that the ball removal error notification start command is not received (step S301; No), it is determined whether or not the ball removal error notification end command is received (step S311). The ball removal error notification end command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the staging control board 12, for example, when the lower plate is not full of game balls, that is, when the ball removal error is resolved. When it is determined in step S311 that the command to end the ball removal error notification has been received (step S311; Yes), the setting for ending the ball removal error display is made (step S312). In step S312, the ball removal error display performed in the image display device 5 is terminated, and the reduced size flag and the normal size flag are turned off. After the processing of step S312, the setting for ending the output of the ball removal error notification sound is made (step S313), and then the error notification processing is ended.

It is determined whether or not the ball removal error notification end command has not been received in step S311 (step S311; No), or whether or not the ball removal error display is being executed after the processing of step S306 is executed. (Step S321). When it is determined in step S321 that the ball removal error display is being executed (step S321; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop flag is on (step S322). When it is determined in step S322 that the stop flag does not appear in the ON state (step S322; No), it is determined whether or not the suppression flag is in the ON state (step S323).

When it is determined in step S322 that the stop flag is in the ON state (step S322; Yes), or when it is determined in step S323 that the suppression flag is in the ON state (step S323; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the size is displayed, that is, whether or not the ball removal error display is performed in the normal size (step S324). In step S324, when the normal size flag is on, it may be determined that the normal size is displayed. When it is determined in step S324 that the display size is the normal size (step S324; Yes), the display size of the ball removal error display is switched from the normal size to the reduced size (step S325). Further, in step S325, the normal size flag is turned off and the reduced size flag is turned on.

When it is determined in step S323 that the suppression flag is in the off state (step S323; No), it is displayed in the reduced size, that is, whether or not the ball removal error display is performed in the reduced size. Determination (step S326). In step S326, when the reduced size flag is on, it may be determined that the reduced size is displayed. When it is determined in step S326 that the display size is reduced (step S326; Yes), the display size of the ball removal error display is switched from the reduced size to the normal size (step S327). Further, in step S327, the normal size flag is turned on and the reduced size flag is turned off.

After executing the processes of steps S325 and S327, or when it is determined in step S324 that the normal size is not displayed (displayed in the reduced size) (step S324; No), the reduced size is determined in step S326. If it is determined that the error is not displayed (displayed in the normal size) in (step S326; No), and if it is determined in step S321 that the ball removal error display is not being executed (step S321; No). ), Since other error notification processing has been executed (step S331), the error notification processing is terminated.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the staging control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 11, the effect control CPU 120 executes the volume status display process (step S161), the specific operation detection process (step S162), and the jackpot middle music determination process (step S163), and then the RAM 122. One of the following processes of steps S170 to S176 is selected and executed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit).

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process displays the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 in a variable manner based on whether or not the first variable start command or the second variable start command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to start. When either the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display of decorative symbols in, and other various staging operations, it includes processing to determine definite decorative symbols and various staging control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbols and the type of display result. .. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit, etc.), and various control data from the effect control pattern. Is included, and processing for performing various effect controls during variable display of the decorative pattern is included. Further, in the variable display effect processing, the final stop display as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11. (Derived display) processing is included. It should be noted that, in response to the fact that the end code is read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the fixed decorative symbol may be displayed as a complete stop display (derivative display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command elapses, the effect control board 12 autonomously operates without using the effect control command from the main board 11. The variable display result can be confirmed by deriving and displaying the fixed decorative pattern. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The variable display stop process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the variable display stop process, the jackpot game state starts based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command and the determination result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process of determining whether or not the command is to be performed. When the variable display result corresponds to "big hit" and the big hit game state is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", while the variable display result corresponds to "miss". If the jackpot game state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0".

The jackpot display process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the jackpot gaming state. Then, when the execution of the jackpot notification effect is completed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5".

The big hit middle effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this big hit middle effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and displays the effect image based on the set content on the screen of the image display device 5. Or, the sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by the output of the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by the output of the command (illuminated signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls in the big hit game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the LED for, are executed. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "6" in response to, for example, receiving the big hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

The jackpot end effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the screen of the image display device 5. Or, the sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by the output of the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by the output of the command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls at the end of the big hit game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the LED for, are executed. After that, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0".

In the volume status display process of step S161, for example, in a game state other than during the super reach effect, or in a state of waiting for a customer and not displaying an error (first state), the player operates the stick controller 31A or the like. It includes a process for visually displaying a volume status display image indicating a volume output level on the display screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the presence or absence. Further, it includes a process for changing (adjusting) the volume output level according to the player's operation such as the player's operation of the stick controller 31A in the left direction or the right direction.

12 and 13 are flowcharts showing an example of volume status display processing. In the volume status display process shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the super reach effect is in progress (step S601). In the process of step S601, for example, it may be confirmed whether or not the variation (variation in which the start condition is satisfied) is a variation due to the super reach variation pattern and is the reach effect period in the variation.

If the super reach effect is not being produced in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S602). The super reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach effect. The data indicating the on state or the off state of the super reach operation flag is stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

If the super reach operation flag is not set to the ON state in step S602 (step S602; No), display control for displaying the volume status display on the image display device 5 is executed (step S603). As a result, as the volume status display, a volume status display image showing the current volume output level is displayed on the image display device 5. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the volume status display image has five rectangular image display sections arranged side by side, and in the image display section, a portion corresponding to the current volume (FIG. 23 (FIG. 23). In A), the image is displayed in such a manner that only three) are lit from the left end.

Specifically, when the volume output level is the lowest level (the volume output level is lower than usual and not the muffling level), the image display is in a mode in which all five image display sections are turned off. .. The lowest level may be used as the muffling level. Further, in the case of the first level, which is one larger than the lowest level, the image display is in a mode in which the leftmost image display section is lit. In the case of the second level, which is one larger than the first level, the image display is in a mode in which two image display sections are lit from the left end. In the case of the third level (the volume output level is a normal level, that is, the normal level), which is one larger than the second level, the image display is in a mode in which three image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of the fourth level, which is one larger than the third level, the image display is such that four image display sections from the left end are lit. Further, in the case of the fifth level (highest level), which is one larger than the fourth level, the image display is in a mode in which all five image display sections are lit. In this way, the player can grasp the current volume output level by looking at the volume status display image. In this embodiment, the volume status display image is a meter-type display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a mathematical expression display mode using numbers or numerical values or a color-type display mode (for example, blue → green) is used. Various display modes may be used, such as changing in the order of → yellow → red, and displaying that the larger the color, the larger the display).

If the super reach operation flag is set (on state) in step S602 (step S602; Yes), display control for continuing the volume status display (display of the volume status display image) on the image display device 5 is performed. It is executed (step S604), and the operation flag at the time of super reach is reset to the off state (step S605). Steps S604 and S605 are processes for continuing the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect. As a result, the volume status display image displayed by performing the volume change operation immediately before the end of the super reach effect can be continuously displayed even after the end of the super reach effect, and is deleted once at the end timing of the super reach effect. It can be prevented from being done.

After executing the process of step S603 or after executing the process of step S605, it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S606). When there is a volume change operation (step S606; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S607). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (for example, to the left or right) (step S606; Yes), the image display device 5 is changed. While executing the display control to display the later volume status display image, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122 so that the voice and the effect sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the changed volume output level. The changed volume setting such as controlling the voice control board 13 is executed (step S607).

For example, the stick controller 31A can be operated in the left-right direction, and when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, the changed volume status display image in which the lighting mode of the image display section is increased by one is an image. It is displayed on the display device 5 and the volume output level is increased by one. On the contrary, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once to the left, the changed volume status display image in which the lighting mode of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 5 and at the same time. The volume output level is lowered by one.

After executing the process of step S607, the operation flag at times other than super reach is set to the ON state (step S608). As described above, the operation flag at times other than super reach is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A at a time other than during the super reach effect. The data indicating the on state or the off state of the operation flag other than the super reach is stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

On the other hand, when there is no volume change operation (step S606; No), it is determined whether or not the operation flag other than super reach is set to the ON state (step S609).

After the process of step S608 is executed, or when the operation flag other than super reach is set to the ON state in step S609 (step S609; Yes), a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation. Whether or not it is determined (step S610). When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S610; Yes), the operation flag at times other than super reach is reset to the off state (step S611). The predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation may be from the first operation until the predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses, or if there are multiple operations within the predetermined period, from the last operation. It may be until a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed. Further, in this embodiment, the predetermined period is set after the operation, but the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) may elapse from the start of displaying the volume status display image.

Returning to step S601, if the super reach effect is being produced (step S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not the non-super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S701). When the operation flag other than super reach is set to the ON state (step S701; Yes), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S702). If a predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S702; No), it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S703).

When there is a volume change operation (step S703; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S704). In step S704, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (for example, to the left or right), the image display device 5 displays the changed volume status display image. The display control is executed, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122, and the voice control board 13 is controlled so that the voice and the effect sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the changed volume output level. The changed volume setting is executed (step S704).

On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S702; Yes), the volume status display erasing process for erasing the volume status display image displayed on the image display device 5 is executed (step S705), and the supermarket is executed. The operation flag at times other than reach is reset to the off state (step S706).

When the operation flag other than super reach is off in step S701 (step S701; No), when there is no volume change operation in step S703 (step S703; No), or after the processes of steps S704 and S706 are executed. Determines whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S707). If the super reach operation flag is off in step S707 (step S707; No), a process of erasing the volume status display is executed (step S707a). In principle, the process of step S707a is a process for not displaying the volume status during the super reach effect. Specifically, in the second state of executing the super reach effect, that is, in the game state during the super reach effect, the volume status display image is not displayed on the image display device 5 unless requested by the player (volume status). The displayed image is erased). As a result, the volume status display image can be hidden during the execution of the super reach effect, which is an example of the game effect (effect including important notices) that the player wants to show in particular, and the effect of the super reach effect can be improved. The decrease can be suppressed.

After executing the process of step S707a, it is determined whether or not the operation start acceptance of the volume change is accepted (step S708). When the operation start is accepted in step S708 (step S708; Yes), that is, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A to the left or right, the image display device. Display control for displaying a volume status display image indicating the current volume output level in step 5 is executed (step S709). After that, the super reach operation flag is set to the ON state (step S710).

When the super reach operation flag is on in step S707 (step S707; Yes), or after the process of step S710 is executed, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (for example, 3 seconds). Step S711). If a predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S711; No), it is determined whether or not there is a volume change operation (step S712). If there is a volume change operation (step S712; Yes), the changed volume status display image is displayed and the changed volume setting is executed (step S713). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A to the left or right (step S712; Yes), the stick controller 31A is moved to the left or right. The display control for displaying the changed volume status display image according to the number of operations on the image display device 5 is executed, and the changed volume setting value according to the number of operations is stored in the RAM 122 from the speakers 8L and 8R. The changed volume setting such as controlling the voice control board 13 so that the voice or the effect sound is output at the changed volume output level is executed (step S713).

When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation in step S711 (step S711; Yes), a process of erasing the volume status display is executed (step S714). In this way, during the super reach effect, the volume status display image is temporarily displayed when there is an operation by the player, and if a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation and the super reach effect is still in progress, the volume status display image is displayed. Is to be erased. After executing the process of step S714, the super reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S715).

If there is no operation start reception in step S708 (step S708; No), or if there is no volume change operation in step S712 (step S712; No), the volume status is displayed after the processes of steps S713 and S715 are executed. End the process.

In the specific motion detection process of step S162, for example, in the jackpot gaming state (during the jackpot), the specific motion of the player such as the player's long-pulling operation (lever pulling) of the stick controller 31A toward the front is detected. It includes a process for changing the execution mode of a predetermined effect such as a large prize opening winning effect or a large winning opening opening effect, and other execution modes of the predetermined effect. Further, the specific motion detection process also includes a process such as setting for vibrating the stick controller 31A according to the detection of the player's specific motion.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific motion detection process. In the specific operation detection process shown in FIG. 14, the staging control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot is being performed (step S401). In step S401, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot is in progress when, for example, the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received and the jackpot end designation command is not received. If the value of the effect process flag is any of 3 to 5, it may be determined that the jackpot is in progress. When the jackpot is in progress (step S401; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a lever pulling operation such as a pulling operation toward the front of the stick controller 31A (step S402). If there is a lever pulling operation (step S402; Yes), the timekeeping process of the lever pulling operation is performed (step S403). In step S403, the timer value of the lever pulling operation timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control timer setting unit or the like) is updated (for example, 1 addition).

After the process of step S403, it is determined whether or not the timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of the lever pulling operation is 2 seconds (step S404). In step S404, when the timer value of the lever pulling operation timer updated in step S403 is a value corresponding to "2 seconds", it is determined that the timekeeping result is 2 seconds. When the time measurement result is 2 seconds (step S404; Yes), the first vibration setting of the lever for vibrating the stick controller 31A in the first vibration mode (for example, a vibration mode such as "brut") is set (step S405). ). If the timekeeping result is not 2 seconds (step S404; No), it is determined whether or not the timekeeping result of the timekeeping process of the lever pulling operation is 5 seconds (step S406). In step S406, when the timer value of the lever pulling operation timer updated in step S403 is a value corresponding to "5 seconds", it is determined that the timekeeping result is 5 seconds. When the time measurement result is 5 seconds (step S406; Yes), the second vibration setting of the lever for vibrating the stick controller 31A in the second vibration mode (for example, a vibration mode such as "brubbling") is set (step S407). ). After executing the processes of steps S405 and S407, or when the timekeeping result is not 5 seconds in step S406 (step S406; No), the specific operation detection process is terminated.

When there is no lever pulling operation in step S402 (step S402; No), it is determined whether or not there is a timing result in the timing processing of the lever pulling operation (step S411). In step S411, for example, if the timer value of the lever pulling operation timer is an initial value, it may be determined that there is no timekeeping result, and if it is not an initial value, it may be determined that there is a timekeeping result. When there is a timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of the lever pulling operation (step S411; Yes), it is determined whether or not the timekeeping result is 5 seconds or more (lever pulling 5 seconds or more) (step S412). When the timekeeping result is 5 seconds or more (step S412; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop flag is in the off state (step S413). Then, when the stop flag is in the off state (step S413; Yes), the stop flag is switched to the on state (step S414), and when the stop flag is in the on state (step S413; No). The stop flag is switched to the off state (step S415). By switching the on / off state of the stop flag, whether or not the predetermined effect is executed (executable / unexecutable) as the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed.

If the timekeeping result is not 5 seconds or more in step S412 (step S412; No), it is determined whether or not the timekeeping result is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds (step S421). When the timing result is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds (lever pulling 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds) (step S421; Yes), it is determined whether or not the suppression flag is in the off state (step S422). Then, when the suppression flag is in the off state (step S422; Yes), the suppression flag is switched to the on state (step S423), and the suppression setting of the predetermined effect is performed (step S424). When the suppression flag is on (step S422; No), the suppression flag is switched to the off state (step S425), and the normal setting of the predetermined effect is performed (step S426). By performing the normal setting and the suppression setting of the predetermined effect, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed. When the stop flag is on, the infeasible mode of the predetermined effect is prioritized even if the normal setting or the suppression setting of the predetermined effect is performed.

After executing the processes of steps S414, S415, S424, and S426, or when the timekeeping result is not 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds in step S421 (step S421; No), the timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of the lever pulling operation is initialized. (Step S431). By executing the process of step S431, the timekeeping result becomes 0 seconds, that is, there is no timekeeping result. After the process of step S431 is executed, or when there is no timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of the lever pulling operation in step S411 (step S411; No), the specific operation detection process is terminated.

Further, when the jackpot is not hit in step S401 (step S401; No), it is determined whether or not there is a timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of the lever pulling operation (step S451), and when there is a timekeeping result (step S451; Yes), the timekeeping result is initialized (step S452). After the process of step S452 is executed, or when there is no timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of the lever pulling operation in step S451 (step S452; No), the specific operation detection process is terminated.

Here, for example, when the lever pulling operation by the player is started within the period from 2 seconds before receiving the jackpot end designation command to the time when the jackpot end designation command is received, the timekeeping result in the timing processing of the lever pulling operation. Is not longer than 2 seconds, so that the on / off state of the suppression flag is not switched, and the suppression setting of the predetermined effect (step S424) and the normal setting of the predetermined effect (step S426) are not executed. The timekeeping result is initialized. Further, for example, when the lever pulling operation by the player is started within the period from 5 seconds before receiving the jackpot end designation command to the time when the jackpot end designation command is received and the lever pulling operation is continued, the lever pulling operation is performed. Since the timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of is not more than 5 seconds, the on / off state of the stop flag is not switched, and the timekeeping result is initialized. Unless the on / off state of the suppression flag and the stop flag is switched, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is not changed. As described above, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is not changed depending on the start timing of the specific operation such as the lever pulling operation by the player.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a setting example of an execution mode of a predetermined effect in the on / off state of the stop flag / suppression flag. In this embodiment, for example, an effect of outputting a winning sound notifying that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (large winning opening winning effect), and displaying the remaining number of winnings indicating the remaining number of winnings in the round game are performed. There are multiple predetermined effects such as a production (a large winning opening winning effect) and a production that outputs a large winning opening opening sound that notifies that the large winning opening has been opened (a large winning opening opening effect). Then, by switching the on / off state of the stop flag / suppression flag, the execution mode of the plurality of predetermined effects is changed. In addition, as a predetermined effect, there may be an effect other than the above three effects. Further, it may be possible to execute any one or two predetermined effects of the above three predetermined effects.

The winning sounds for notifying that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening include a normal winning sound and an over winning sound, and the normal winning sound is output when, for example, 1 to 10 prizes are generated. The over-winning sound is a winning sound that is output when, for example, 11 or more winnings are generated. It suffices if the normal winning sound and the over winning sound can be distinguished from each other by, for example, different tones and volumes. In addition, the remaining winning number display includes the remaining winning number display in the normal mode and the remaining winning number display in the over mode, and the remaining winning number display in the normal mode is, for example, when there is no winning and 1 to 10 winnings occur. The remaining winning number display is displayed when the game is played, and the remaining winning number display in the over mode is, for example, the remaining winning number display displayed when 11 or more prizes are generated. The remaining winning number display may be performed, for example, by displaying an image of the remaining winning number display on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 15, when both the stop flag and the suppression flag are in the off state, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is the execution mode in the normal time (executable mode of the predetermined effect), and the execution mode in the normal time. Is set when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, or when the stop flag is off and the normal setting of the predetermined effect is performed by the process of step S426. In the normal execution mode, it is possible (with execution) to execute all predetermined effects such as an effect of outputting a winning sound, an effect of displaying the number of remaining winnings, and an effect of outputting a large winning opening opening sound. The volume output level for the large winning opening opening sound is set to the normal level (for example, the lowest level and the third level of the first to fifth levels), and the brightness level for the remaining winning number display is set to a high level. To. In addition, instead of the brightness level, or together with the brightness level, the display transparency, the display size, the display color, the sound quality, and the like may be set. Here, the normal level as the volume output level for the winning sound and the large winning opening opening sound may be the same volume output level as the normal level (third level) in the above-mentioned volume status display. When the volume output level is changed according to the player's operation such as the player's operation of the stick controller 31A to the left or right in the volume status display process of step S161, the change is made. , The volume output level for the winning sound and the opening sound of the large winning opening may be changed.

The execution mode of the predetermined effect when the stop flag is on is the execution mode at the time of stop (the non-executable mode of the predetermined effect), and the execution mode at the time of stop is whether the suppression flag is on or off. Regardless of the state, it is set by turning on the stop flag. In the execution mode at the time of stop, it is impossible (no execution) to execute all predetermined effects such as an effect of outputting a winning sound, an effect of displaying the number of remaining winnings, and an effect of outputting a large winning opening opening sound.

Further, when the stop flag is off and the suppression flag is on, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is the execution mode at the time of suppression (suppression mode), and the execution mode at the time of suppression is the execution mode at which the stop flag is off. In this state, it is set when the suppression setting of the predetermined effect is performed by the process of step S424. In the execution mode at the time of suppression, it is possible (with execution) to execute all predetermined effects such as an effect of outputting a winning sound, an effect of displaying the number of remaining winnings, and an effect of outputting a large winning opening opening sound. And the volume output level for the large winning opening opening sound is set to the lowest level (for example, the lowest level and the lowest level among the 1st to 5th levels), and the brightness level for the remaining winning number display is set to the low level. To. Here, the lowest level as the volume output level for the winning sound and the large winning opening opening sound may be the same volume output level as the lowest level in the above-mentioned volume status display.

In the big hit middle music determination process of step S163, for example, in the big hit game state (during big hit), the player's predetermined operation such as the operation of the push button 31B by the player is detected, and the music is among a plurality of types of music. It includes the process of selecting one.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of a music determination process during a big hit. Here, the jackpot middle music is a music that can be played during the jackpot gaming state, and in this embodiment, a plurality of types of music are prepared. The prepared multiple types of music will be described later. In the big hit middle music determination process shown in FIG. 16, the staging control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the big hit start designation command is received (step S621). When the jackpot start designation command is received (step S621; Yes), the number of consecutive chan count value K is updated to be added by 1 (step S622). The continuous chan count value K is a stored value of the continuous chan count counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and may indicate the number of continuous chans. Here, with continuous chan, it is executed a predetermined time that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the probable change state or the time reduction state and is controlled to the probable change state or the time reduction state even after the end of the big hit game state. Say that. In addition, the number of consecutive chans means that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" in the probable change state or the time reduction state, and it is continuously controlled to the probable change state or the time reduction state even after the end of the big hit game state. The number of times. The continuous-chan count value K is initialized to "0" when the probability change state or the time reduction state ends and is controlled to a normal state (also referred to as a low probability low base state) that is not the probability change state or the time reduction state. ..

After executing the process of step S622 or when the jackpot start designation command is not received in step S621 (step S621; No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (step S622a). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot is in progress when the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received and the jackpot end designation command is not received. If the value of the effect process flag is any of 3 to 5, it may be determined that the jackpot is in progress. If it is not a big hit (step S622a; No), the process of determining the music during the big hit is terminated, while if it is a big hit (step S622a; Yes), is the music determined flag turned on (the music during the big hit is determined)? It is determined (step S623) whether or not it has been completed. Here, the music determined flag indicates whether or not the music in the big hit has been determined, is set to the on state in step S633 described later, and is cleared to the off state in step S636. The data indicating the on or off state of the music determined flag is stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

When the music determined flag is off (the music during the big hit is not determined) (step S623; No), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the continuous chan count counter provided in the RAM 122 as described above, and makes the first hit (step S623; No). It is determined whether or not the number of consecutive chan counts is K = 1) (step S624).

In the case of the first hit (K = 1) in step S624 (step S624; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is accompanied by music-based reach (step S625). .. Here, the musical piece-based reach is a reach in which a song corresponding to the type of the reach is played during the reach production. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A as an example, super reach A to C are set as music-based reach. In the music-based reach, as shown in FIG. 17B, the music corresponding to the reach type is reproduced in a predetermined mode during the super reach production.

In the case of a music-based reach jackpot in step S625 (step S625; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the jackpot music according to the reach type (step S626). In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (A), if the reach type is Super Reach A, the jackpot hit song is determined to be "Music A", and if it is Super Reach B, the jackpot hit song is "Music". "B" is decided, and if it is Super Reach C, the jackpot song is decided to be "Music C". In this way, when the first hit is a musical reach big hit, it is determined to be a predetermined big hit middle song according to the reach type, so that it is impossible to select the big hit middle song by the player's selection operation. It has become. If the first hit is a musical reach jackpot, after playing the song during the super reach production, the same song as the song is played from the continuation of the part that was playing during the super reach production at the start of the jackpot. .. As a result, the music corresponding to the reach type is reproduced without interruption from the super reach to the big hit game.

When it is not the first hit (K = 1) in step S624 (step S624; No), but it is the first hit (step S624; Yes), but it is not the music-based reach jackpot (step S625; No), it is for effect control. The CPU 120 determines whether or not the first round in which the number of times the round game is executed in the jackpot game state is "1" is being executed (step S627). For example, whether or not it is the first round can be determined by checking which number of rounds the command indicating the number of rounds is stored in the designated command storage area during the opening of the large winning opening.

When the first round is being executed (step S627; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific part of the selected music (step S628). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 issues a command to the voice control board 13 to output a specific part of the selected music (in this embodiment, a so-called “rust” part) to the voice control board 13. And transmit, and output the specific part of the music selected from the speakers 8L and 8R. That is, in the process of step S628, only the chorus portion of the selected jackpot song is reproduced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 17C, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of music that can be selected during the execution of the first round are prepared. Further, as shown in FIG. 17C, the number of songs that can be selected during the execution of the first round is set to increase as the number of consecutive chans increases. Specifically, this embodiment can be selected from three songs (music A to C) in 1 ≦ K ≦ 5 (K: the above-mentioned continuous chan count value), and four in 6 ≦ K ≦ 10. It can be selected from songs (musics A to D), 5 songs (songs A to E) can be selected in 11 ≦ K ≦ 15, and 6 songs (songs A to F) can be selected in 16 ≦ K. Has been done. For example, when K = 2, the number of songs that can be selected from the first hit (K = 1) increases by one, and when K = 3, the songs that can be selected from the first hit (K = 1) are added. The number of selectable songs may be sequentially increased by the number of consecutive chans, such as increasing by two songs. In addition, it is decided by lottery whether or not a new song can be selected and which type of song can be selected each time a big hit is made, not according to the specified number of consecutive chans. May be good. Further, in addition to the super reach A to C shown in FIG. 17 (A), for example, a super reach D that is executed only during the probability change is provided, and when a big hit accompanied by the super reach D is obtained, the super reach D is set. The configuration may be such that the corresponding music D can be selected.

Further, for the selection of the music, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B), the image showing the currently selectable music displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 18 (B) has 1 ≦ K ≦ 5). It is done by moving the cursor CU to the corresponding display example of the music A to C). The music selection operation is performed, for example, by the player pressing the push button 31B. For example, each time the push button 31B is pressed for a short period of time (simple press), the image showing the music name moves, and the music corresponding to the image of the music that is placed on the cursor CU (instructed) is displayed. , The currently selected song (FIG. 18 (B) is an example in which "song A" is selected). That is, in step S628, when the referent of the cursor CU moves to another song, the chorus portion of the moved destination song (the song currently instructed by the cursor CU) is reproduced. As shown in FIG. 17C, when a song is added according to the increase in the number of consecutive chans, it is preferable that the initial position of the cursor CU is the position indicating the added song. .. In this way, the newly added music can be preferably notified to the player. However, when the same song is selected in the jackpot of the immediately preceding predetermined times (for example, the immediately preceding two times), it is preferable that the initial position of the cursor CU is the position instructing the same song. By doing so, it is possible to present a music that suits the taste of the player, which is user-friendly.

In addition, the cursor CU may be moved according to the selection operation with respect to the image showing the music name. Further, the method of indicating the currently selected music is not limited to the instruction by the cursor CU, and the image showing the selected music can be made easier to see than the image showing other music (for example, indicating the selected music). The frame image surrounding the image may be superimposed and displayed, the image showing the selected music may be illuminated, etc.), or the image showing the music other than the selected music may be difficult to see or invisible. Further, when selecting a musical piece, the volume output level may be increased to output a specific part of the musical piece. For example, if the current volume output level is the normal level (the above-mentioned third level), when selecting a music, a specific part may be output at the fourth level or the fifth level (the highest level), or the current level may be output. When the volume output level is the lowest level or the first level, a specific part may be output at a normal level when selecting a song.

Further, the "specific part" is a part of the selected music and different from the beginning of the music. In this embodiment, the so-called "rust" is an example of a specific part of the music. Here, in this embodiment, the music data of the music A to F as the above-mentioned big hit music is stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The music data indicating one music is composed of a plurality of audio data (for example, WAV, MP3, etc.) including chorus data (an example of specific unit data) indicating chorus audio. Specifically, as illustrated for "musical piece A" in FIG. 18A, the data indicating the entire music piece A includes intro data, A-melody data, B-melody data, and chorus data. It is stored in the ROM 121 (as separate audio data) in a divided manner such as outro data. The same applies to each of the songs B to F as other jackpot songs. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the burden on the data capacity as compared with a configuration in which the data of a specific part is stored in addition to the data of one song. In addition, by using a part of the data of one song (for example, data for B melody) alone during a predetermined production such as during the reach production or the advance notice production of the music-based reach, the music can be played during the predetermined production. You may output only a part. By doing so, it is possible to further utilize the advantage of the configuration in which the data indicating one musical piece is stored as divided data as in this embodiment.

Regarding the chorus data as an example of the specific part data, for each song, for example, a part that is familiar, has an impact, and is supposed to be catchy is selected in advance as "chorus", and the chorus part is selected. The voice data may be prepared in advance as rust data. Further, for example, the music A may be more famous for "sabi", but the music C may be more famous for "verse". In this case, for the music C, the specific part may be an A melody (the specific part data is the data for the A melody), and if the music C is selected in step S628, the A melody part may be reproduced. In addition, a so-called head chorus song (a song whose head starts with chorus) may be included in the big hit middle song. The specific part may be the beginning of the music (characteristic intro or head rust). That is, the data used as the specific part may be different depending on the music. Further, when the music of the head rust is included in the music of the big hit, the data used as the music data may be shared between the time of selecting the music and after the music is determined for the music of the head rust. For example, when selecting a song, the chorus data and the part (for example, verse) data following the chorus are used to connect the chorus and the part following the chorus for playback, and the same data is used even after the song is determined. Then, the chorus and the part following the chorus may be connected and played.

Following the process of step S628 shown in FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not there is a music determination operation (step S629). For example, the music determination operation is a pressing operation (long press) for a long period (for example, 1 second) for the push button 31B, and when the effect control CPU 120 detects the music determination operation, it is determined that the music determination operation has been performed. do it. If there is no music determination operation (step S629; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the large winning opening (step S630). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the first round end designation command (large winning opening closing designation command) from the main board 11, it may determine that it is the closing timing of the large winning opening. Then, when there is a music determination operation (step S629; Yes) or when the big winning opening closing timing (step S630; No), the selected music is determined (step S631). That is, in this embodiment, during the execution of the first round, when the music determination operation is performed before the music determination operation is closed, or when the music determination operation is not performed and the music selection operation is closed. The selected song is determined to be the big hit song.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of methods for reproducing a specific portion of the selected musical piece at the time of selecting the musical piece and determining the musical piece at the time of selecting the musical piece. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when selecting the music.

Following the processing of step S626 and step S631, the effect control CPU 120 stores the music information determined in step S626 or S631 in the RAM 122 (step S632), and sets the music determination flag to the ON state (step S633). .. The data indicating on / off of the music determined flag is stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

Further, when it is determined in step S623 that the music determination flag is in the ON state (step S623; Yes), the big hit middle music determined in step S626 or S631 is played (step S634). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (step S635), and if it is the jackpot end timing (step S635; Yes), the reproduction of the music started in step S634 ends. And clear the music determined flag to the off state (step S636).

After the processing of steps S636 and S633 is executed, if the determination is No in steps S621, S627, S630, and S635, and if the determination is Yes in step S622, the jackpot middle music determination process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 17A, in the reach other than the music-based reach, the music during the big hit can be selected by the selection operation by the player during the execution of the first round (step S628 described above). There is. In this embodiment, "reach: normal (big hit)" (variation pattern PA3-1) shown in FIG. 7 is prepared as a reach other than the music-based reach, but as a super reach other than the music-based reach, "super" is prepared. Further reach types such as "Reach D" and "Super Reach E" are prepared, and when the jackpot is accompanied by the production of Super Reach D or Super Reach E, the selection operation by the player during the execution of the first round. It may be possible to select a song during a big hit. Further, in the above example, although the example in which the big hit song can be selected during the first round, the song may be selectable during another round, or the song is selected over a plurality of rounds. It may be possible. The period during which the music can be selected during the jackpot is arbitrary.

Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the music reproduction mode at the time of selecting the jackpot music and after the jackpot music is determined will be described.

As shown in FIG. 18B, when a music is selected, a specific portion (“sabi” as an example) of the selected music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (corresponding to step S628). The specific part is continuously played until the selected music is determined. The length of the specific portion corresponds to the period until the selected music is determined (corresponding to the period from the start of execution of the first round to the execution of the process of step S631. The period until the music determination operation is performed. Alternatively, if it is shorter than the execution period of the first round (for example, 29.5 seconds), the specific part is repeatedly played until the selected music is determined. If the length of the specific part is shorter than the period until the selected music is determined, the part following the specific part in the selected music after the reproduction of the specific part (FIG. 18 (A). In the example of), the outro) indicated by the “outro data” may be reproduced.

Further, in this embodiment, when the music is selected, the image corresponding to the selected music (hereinafter referred to as the music corresponding image) is displayed in the display area VA1 shown in FIG. 18B. The music-compatible image is, for example, a moving image such as PV (Promotion Video) or MV (Music Video) of the selected music. do. It should be noted that the moving image as the music-compatible image does not have to be played from the portion corresponding to the specific part of the music. For example, when selecting a song, the song may be played from a specific part other than the beginning, but the moving image may be played from the beginning. Further, the music-compatible image may be a still image showing an artist photograph or the like instead of a moving image. Further, the data of the image corresponding to the music may be stored in the ROM 121 or the like in a mode divided for each part of the music (as separate image data for each), similarly to the audio data of the music.

As shown in FIG. 18C, after the music is determined, the audio data divided into a plurality of parts (for example, intro data, A melody data, B melody data, etc.) constituting the music data of the determined music. By connecting the chorus data and the outro data (that is, so that each part constituting one song is played without interruption in time series), one song is played from the speakers 8L and 8R. The determined reproduction mode of the jackpot music (corresponding to the reproduction mode of the music in step S634) is, for example, as follows (a) to (c).
(B) After the music is determined during the execution of one round, the music is played from the continuation of the specific part that was being played at the time of selection, or is played from the beginning of the music.
(B) From the second round onward, the music is played from the beginning of the music (for example, the music is played from the beginning in response to receiving the second round start command (large winning opening designation command)).
(C) In the case of K = 1 (step S624; Yes) and the music-based reach jackpot (step S625; Yes), the music corresponding to the reach type is played from the continuation of the part that was being played during the super reach production. Playback (For example, as shown in FIG. 17B, play the "intro", "A melody", and "B melody" of the music corresponding to the reach type during the super reach production, and when it becomes a big hit, "rust". To play).
After the song is decided, it is played from the beginning (intro) of the song, and after the song has made a round to the end (outro) of the song with the big hit not finished yet, it returns to the intro of the song and makes two rounds. The eyes may be reproduced, or the eyes may be reproduced from the chorus (specific part) instead of the intro.

Further, after the music is determined, the music-compatible image is displayed in, for example, the display area VA2 shown in FIG. 18C, which is larger than the display area VA1. The example shown in FIG. 18C is an example in which the display area VA2 is configured over the entire image display area of the image display device 5 after the music is determined. After the music is determined, for example, a moving image in which the reproduction portion and the corresponding portion of the music are sequentially reproduced may be displayed in the display area VA2. The music-compatible image displayed in the display area VA2 after the music is determined may also be a still image such as an artist photograph. Further, the images corresponding to the music at the time of selecting the music and after the music is determined may have different display modes. That is, the display mode may be different by a method other than different positions and sizes of the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 on which the music-compatible image is displayed. For example, the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 have the same position and size, but the music-compatible image after the music is determined has an effect that is not present when the music is selected (for example, a fade-in / fade-out effect or a brilliant lighting effect). Etc.) may be applied.

The operation means for performing the music selection operation and the determination operation is not limited to the push button 31B described above. The operating means may be, for example, a cross-shaped button that can be operated in the vertical and horizontal directions, a dial key that can be rotated, for example, or a touch panel that can be touched or pressed. .. Further, any operation that is not limited to the instruction input action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, and a CMOS sensor, may be performed as long as the operation content can be detected according to the operation by the player. A sensor that can detect may be used.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit middle effect process executed in step S175 shown in FIG. In the big hit middle effect process shown in FIG. 19, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the big hit end designation command is received (step S581). When the big hit end designation command is not received (step S581; No), after the big winning opening winning effect processing is executed (step S582), the big winning opening opening effect processing is executed (step S583). After that, after executing the other big hit middle effect (step S584), the big hit middle effect process ends.

If the jackpot end designation command is received in step S581 (step S581; Yes), the end setting of the jackpot middle effect is set (step S591), and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "6". (Step S592), the jackpot production process is completed. In step S591, for example, the stop flag and the suppression flag may be turned off (initial state). By doing so, even if the big hit game state ends with the stop flag and the suppression flag on, the stop flag and the suppression flag are turned off at the timing when the big hit game state ends, and the predetermined effect is executed. The mode will be set to the normal execution mode. The timing for turning off the stop flag and the suppression flag is not limited to step S591, that is, the timing when the jackpot end designation command is received. For example, a round end command for specifying the end of the final round in the jackpot game state is received. It may be the timing when the change is started, the timing when the change start command for the change executed first after the end of the big hit game state is received, and the like.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening winning effect processing executed in step S582 shown in FIG. In the large winning opening winning effect processing shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a round start command, which is an effect control command indicating that a round is to be started, is received (step S801). When the round start command is received (step S801; Yes), the count value (large winning opening winning count value C) of the large winning opening winning counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control counter setting unit) is set. Initialize to "0" (step S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the stop flag is in the ON state (step S803). When the stop flag is in the off state (step S803; No), the setting for starting the display of the remaining winning numbers is made in the normal mode (step S804), while when the stop flag is in the on state (step S804). S803; Yes), the large prize opening prize production process is terminated without making the setting for starting the display of the number of remaining prizes.

In this embodiment, the number of remaining winnings in the normal mode is displayed according to the winning count value C of the large winning opening. In the normal mode, the remaining winning number display is, for example, displaying the same number of winning ball compatible images as the remaining winning number, or displaying a combination of the winning ball compatible image and the numerical image showing the remaining winning number. Anything that indicates the number of remaining prizes in the round game may be used. For example, when the winning count value C of the big winning opening is "0", it is sufficient to show that the remaining number of winnings is "10" by displaying the images corresponding to 10 winning balls. When the winning count value C of the large winning opening is "1", it is sufficient to show that the remaining number of winnings is "9" by displaying the images corresponding to nine winning balls. When the winning count value C of the big winning opening is "2" to "10", the remaining number of winnings is "8" to "0" by displaying the images corresponding to 8 to 0 winning balls. It only needs to be shown to be. Further, for example, when the prize-winning count value C of the large prize-winning opening is "0", the remaining number of prizes can be obtained by displaying the image corresponding to one prize ball and the numerical image indicating "10" in combination. It suffices if it is shown to be "10", and when the large winning opening winning count value C is "1", one winning ball compatible image and a numerical image indicating "9" are displayed in combination. By doing so, it suffices to show that the number of remaining prizes is "9". When the winning count value C of the large winning opening is "2" to "10", the remaining by displaying one winning ball compatible image and the numerical image indicating "8" to "0" in combination. It suffices if it is shown that the number of winnings is "8" to "0".

In the process of step S804, since the large winning opening winning count value C is initialized to "0" in step S802, the remaining winning number display indicating that the remaining winning number is "10" is performed. ..

When the round start command is not received in step S801 (step S801; No), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening winning designation command, which is an effect control command indicating that the winning opening has been won, is received. (Step S811). When the large winning opening winning designation command is received (step S811; Yes), the large winning opening winning count value C is updated to be added by 1 (step S812). Then, it is determined whether or not the stop flag is in the ON state (step S813). When the stop flag is in the off state (step S813; No), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening winning count value C is "10" or more (step S814).

When the large winning opening winning count value C is "10" or less (step S814; Yes), a setting for updating the remaining winning number display is made (step S815). For example, when the large winning opening winning count value C becomes "1" in step S812, the remaining winning number display indicating that the remaining winning number is "9" is updated in step S815. .. Then, a setting is made to output a normal winning sound for notifying that the game ball has won a prize at the large winning opening (step S816).

Further, when the large winning opening winning count value C is not "10" or less, that is, when the large winning opening winning count value C is "11" or more (step S814; No), the remaining winning number display is updated in the over mode. (Step S817). For example, when the large winning opening winning count value C becomes "11" in step S812, the display is updated to the remaining winning number display in the over mode in step S817. In this embodiment, for example, the remaining winning number of the over-winning mode is displayed by displaying the over-winning occurrence image showing the occurrence of the over-winning instead of the winning ball corresponding image and the numerical image in the normal mode. After that, a setting is made to output an over-winning sound notifying that the game ball has won a prize at the large winning opening (step S818). By executing the processes of steps S817 and S818, the occurrence of over winning is notified. Even if an over-winning occurs, the over-winning sound may not be output or the remaining number of winnings in the over-winning mode may not be displayed.

After executing the processes of steps S816 and S818, or when the stop flag is in the ON state in step S813 (step S813; Yes), the large winning opening winning effect processing is terminated. As described above, when the stop flag is on, the update setting of the remaining winning number display is not performed, and the output setting of the winning sound (normal winning sound, over winning sound) is not performed.

Further, when the large winning opening winning designation command is not received in step S811 (step S811; No), it is determined whether or not the stop flag is on (step S831). When the stop flag is on (step S831; Yes), it is determined whether or not the remaining winning number display is being executed (step S832). If the remaining winning number display is being executed (step S832; Yes), a setting for ending the remaining winning number display is made (step S833). If the stop flag is in the off state (step S831; No), it is determined whether or not the remaining winning number display is being executed (step S834). If the remaining winning number display is not being executed (step S834; No), the setting for starting the remaining winning number display is made in the normal mode (step S835). After executing the processes of steps S833 and S835, when the remaining winning number display is not being executed in step S832 (step S832; No), and when the remaining winning number display is being executed in step S834 (step). S834; Yes), the large prize opening prize production process is completed.

In this way, during the big hit (the value of the effect process flag is “5”), the on / off state of the stop flag is determined in step S831, and the remaining winning number display is executed according to the on / off state of the stop flag. Presence / absence (display / non-display) can be switched. Further, at the time of winning the big winning opening, the on / off state of the stop flag is determined in step S813, and when the stop flag is off, the winning sound (normal winning sound, over winning sound) is output. On the other hand, if the stop flag is on, the winning sound is not output. When the suppression flag is on, the suppression setting of the predetermined effect is performed in step S424. Therefore, in steps S804, S815 to S818, and S835, the remaining winning number display and the winning sound are displayed in the suppression mode. Output is done. Further, since the normal setting of the predetermined effect is performed in step S426 when the suppression flag is off, in steps S804, S815 to S818, and S835, the remaining winning number display and winning sound based on the normal setting are displayed. Will be output.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening opening effect processing executed in step S583 shown in FIG. In the effect processing at the time of opening the large winning opening shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a round start command, which is an effect control command indicating to start a round, is received (step S901). .. When the round start command is received (step S901; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop flag is on (step S902). When the stop flag is in the off state (step S902; No), the setting for outputting the large winning opening opening sound is made (step S903). After executing the process of step S903, or when the round start command is not received in step S901 (step S901; No), the effect processing at the time of opening the large winning opening is terminated.

In this way, when the big winning opening is opened (at the start of the round game), the on / off state of the stop flag is determined in step S902, and when the stop flag is off, the big winning opening opening sound is heard. On the other hand, when the stop flag is on, the big winning opening opening sound is not output. When the suppression flag is in the ON state, the suppression setting of the predetermined effect is performed in step S424. Therefore, in step S903, the large winning opening opening sound is output in the suppression mode. Further, when the suppression flag is off, the normal setting of the predetermined effect is performed in step S426, so that in step S903, the large winning opening opening sound based on the normal setting is output. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the execution timing of the big winning opening opening sound, the ball removal error display, and the like will be described.

FIG. 22A shows a large winning opening opening sound and a winning sound (normal winning sound / over) when the selected music is being played (on state) and the stop flag is off in the big hit game state. It shows a predetermined effect such as a winning sound) and a remaining winning number display, and an execution timing of a ball removing error notification such as a ball removing error display and a ball removing error notification sound. It should be noted that the ball removal error notification shall be started in the middle of the round game. Further, when the suppression flag is on, the volume output level and brightness level are lower than when the suppression flag is off, and it is predetermined regardless of whether the suppression flag is on or off. The execution timings of the production and error notification are the same. FIG. 22A shows, as an example, a round game of the tenth round. The round games other than the 10th round are basically the same as in FIG. 22 (A), but the round games in the first round are the same as in FIG. 22 (A) after the music is selected and played. Is.

In the example shown in FIG. 22 (A), the round game of the tenth round is started at the timing T0. At this timing T0, the opening of the large winning opening is started, and the large winning opening opening sound is output by the process of step S903 shown in FIG. Further, the large winning opening winning count value is initialized to "0" by the process of step S802 shown in FIG. Then, by the process of step S804, the display of the remaining winning number indicating that the remaining winning number is "10" is started.

When a prize is generated in the large winning opening, the large winning opening winning count value is set to "1" by the processing of step S812 shown in FIG. 20, the normal winning sound is output by the processing of step S816, and the remaining by the processing of step S815. The winning number display is updated to the remaining winning number display indicating that the remaining winning number is "9". After that, every time a prize is won in the big prize opening, the big winning opening winning count value is increased, a normal winning sound is output, and the remaining winning number display is updated.

For example, when the lower plate is full of game balls at timing T1, the ball removal error display is started in the normal size by the process of step S305 shown in FIG. 10, and the output of the ball removal error notification sound is started by the process of step S306. do. When the suppression flag is on at the timing T1, the ball removal error display is started in a reduced size. Then, at the timing T2 at which the ball removal error is resolved, the ball removal error display and the output of the ball removal error notification sound are terminated by the processing of steps S312 and S313 shown in FIG. In the period from timing T1 to timing T2, the music, the winning sound, and the ball removal error notification sound are output in an overlapping manner (if a ball removal error occurs when the large winning opening is opened, the large winning is won. Output including mouth opening sound).

As shown in FIG. 22 (A), in a state where the winning count value of the large winning opening is "9" and the remaining winning number indicating that the remaining winning number is "1" is displayed, the large winning opening is further displayed. When a prize is awarded, the winning count value of the large winning opening is set to "10", the normal winning sound is output, and the remaining winning number display is displayed to indicate that the remaining winning number is "0". Update. Further, if a prize is further generated in the large winning opening immediately after this winning, an over winning is performed. When this over winning occurs, the large winning opening winning count value is set to "11", and the over winning sound is produced by step S818 shown in FIG. Is output, and the remaining winning number display is updated in the over mode by step S817.

Then, based on the fact that 10 game balls enter the large winning opening and the winning balls are generated, the round game of the 10th round is completed at the timing T3. At this timing T3, the opening of the big winning opening is finished. After that, the 11th round round game is started at the timing T4 when the waiting period for the next round, which is the waiting period until the next round game is started, has elapsed. At this timing T4, the opening of the large winning opening is started, the large winning opening opening sound is output, the large winning opening winning count value is initialized to "0", and the remaining number of winnings is "10". Start displaying the number of remaining prizes indicating that there is.

FIG. 22B shows a large winning opening opening sound and a winning sound (normal winning sound) when the selected music is being played (on state) and the stop flag is switched on / off in the big hit game state. -Predetermined effects such as (over winning sound) and remaining winning number display, and the execution timing of ball removal error notification such as ball removal error display and ball removal error notification sound are shown. In FIG. 22B, it is assumed that the on / off state of the stop flag is switched in the middle of FIG. 22A.

In the example shown in FIG. 22 (B), the round game of the tenth round is started at the timing T0 as in the example shown in FIG. 22 (A). Then, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 22A, the ball removal error display is started at the timing T1 at the normal size, and the output of the ball removal error notification sound is started. Here, the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 5 seconds, and based on the detection of the operation, the stop flag is turned on at the timing T1'by the process of step S414 shown in FIG.

When the stop flag is turned on, the process of step S833 shown in FIG. 20 ends the display of the number of remaining winnings. Further, by the process of step S325 shown in FIG. 10, the size is switched to the reduced size and the ball removal error display is continuously performed, and the ball removal error notification sound is also continuously output. Then, at the timing T2 when the ball removal error is resolved, the ball removal error display and the output of the ball removal error notification sound are terminated. In this way, during the period from timing T1 to timing T1', music, a large winning opening opening sound, a winning sound, and a ball removal error notification sound can be output, and the remaining winning number display and the ball removal error display can be executed. On the other hand, in the period from timing T1'to timing T2, music, ball removal error notification sound can be output, large winning opening opening sound, winning sound cannot be output, remaining winning number display cannot be executed, ball removal error. The display is feasible.

As shown in FIG. 22B, if a prize is further generated in the large prize opening while the large winning opening winning count value is "9", the large winning opening winning count value is set to "10", but it is normal. No winning sound is output. In this state, the number of remaining prizes is not displayed. Further, if a prize is further generated in the large winning opening immediately after this winning, an over winning is performed, and when this over winning occurs, the large winning opening winning count value is set to "11", but the over winning sound is not output. Even in this state, the number of remaining prizes is not displayed.

Then, based on the fact that 10 game balls enter the large winning opening and the winning balls are generated, the round game of the 10th round is completed at the timing T3. At this timing T3, the opening of the big winning opening is finished. After that, the 11th round round game is started at the timing T4 when the waiting period for the next round, which is the waiting period until the next round game is started, has elapsed. At this timing T4, the opening of the big winning opening is started, but since the stop flag is on, the big winning opening opening sound is not output. Further, although the winning count value of the large winning opening is initialized to "0", the display of the remaining winning number indicating that the remaining winning number is "10" is not started. Here, the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 5 seconds, and based on the detection of the operation, the stop flag is turned off at the timing T4'by the process of step S415 shown in FIG.

When the stop flag is turned off, the remaining winning number display is started by the process of step S835 shown in FIG. Since the large winning opening winning count value at the timing T4'is "0", the timing T4'starts displaying the remaining winning number indicating that the remaining winning number is "10". For example, when the ball removal error display is performed in the reduced size at the timing T4', the ball removal error display is continuously performed by switching to the normal size.

When the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 2 seconds and detects the operation, the suppression flag is turned on at the timing T1'by the process of step S414 shown in FIG. , The suppression setting of the predetermined effect of step S424 shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Further, by the process of step S325 shown in FIG. 10, the size is switched to the reduced size and the ball removal error display is continuously performed, and the ball removal error notification sound is also continuously output. Then, at the timing T2 when the ball removal error is resolved, the ball removal error display and the output of the ball removal error notification sound are terminated. In this case, even after the timing T1', the music, the big winning opening opening sound, the winning sound, and the ball removal error notification sound can be output, and the remaining winning number display and the ball removal error display can be executed. However, since the suppression setting of the predetermined effect in step S424 shown in FIG. 14 is performed, the output of the large winning opening opening sound and the winning sound and the display of the remaining winning number are performed in the suppression mode after the timing T1'.

Then, when the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 2 seconds and detects the operation, the suppression flag is turned off at the timing T4'by the process of step S415 shown in FIG. 14, the timing T4' Subsequent output of the large winning opening opening sound and the winning sound and display of the remaining winning number are performed in the normal manner.

When the stop flag is turned off, the remaining winning number display is started by the process of step S835 shown in FIG. Since the large winning opening winning count value at the timing T4'is "0", the timing T4'starts displaying the remaining winning number indicating that the remaining winning number is "10". For example, when the ball removal error display is performed in the reduced size at the timing T4', the ball removal error display is continuously performed by switching to the normal size.

Next, an example of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. 23.

FIG. 23 shows an example of the effect when there is a volume change operation in the super reach fluctuation display. For example, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern PB2-1 in which the reach effect of the music-based reach is executed (super reach A is executed). In the example shown in FIG. 23, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), the variable display state of the decorative symbol will be described from the time when the reach state (reach is established). Further, by the volume status display process shown in FIG. 12, the volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 23 (A).

After passing through FIG. 23 (B), the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. 23 (C) is executed. The super reach is notified by displaying an effect image (for example, an image in the characters of "super reach") as shown in FIG. 23 (C) on the screen of the image display device 5. The player can grasp that the super reach effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 23C, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, by the volume status display erasing process (step S707a) shown in FIG. 12, the volume status display image VL is erased from the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 23 (C). Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (C), the hold display is erased.

As shown in FIG. 23D, when the stick controller 31A is operated to the left or right during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is displayed. Then, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once to the right, as shown in FIG. 23 (E), the changed volume status display image VL in which the lighting mode of the image display section is increased by one. (4th level volume status display image VL) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by 1 level (the volume output is 4th level). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation, the volume status display image VL is erased as shown in FIG. 23 (F).

Then, after passing through FIG. 23 (G), the super reach effect is completed by displaying the battle effect result (here, for example, the battle defeat result) as shown in FIG. 23 (H), and the super reach effect is completed, for example, in FIG. 23 (I). The final stop symbol of the reach combination as shown is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (I), since the super reach effect is completed, the changed volume status display image VL is displayed and the hold display is restored. Since the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative symbol when the fluctuation is stopped, the volume can be adjusted while not obstructing the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, that is, the visual recognition of the game result.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 23 (D) and 23 (E), the volume status display image VL in the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect is other than that during the super reach effect as shown in FIG. 23 (I). Since it is displayed in the same manner as the display mode of the volume status display image VL in the gaming state (first state), the display of the volume status display image VL in the second state can be easily understood. The display mode of the volume status display image VL in the second state may be different from the display mode of the volume status display image VL in the first state. Further, the volume status display image VL in the second state and the volume status display image VL in the first state may be displayed in the same display location or may be displayed in different display locations.

Immediately before the start of the super reach effect (for example, within the period from 3 seconds before the start to the start), the player may operate the stick controller 31A to the left or right. Also in this case, the display of the volume status display image VL is started based on the fact that such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A. Then, the super reach effect is started within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of displaying the volume status display image VL. Then, by the processing of steps S701 to S706 shown in FIG. 13, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the start of the super reach effect is extended and displayed. As a result, even if the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the start of the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is extended and displayed, and the volume status display image VL is interrupted at the start timing of the super reach effect. It can be prevented from being erased with. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL is secured to be displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds) after the operation, but for example, the volume status is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start timing of the super reach effect. The display image VL may be displayed.

Further, immediately before the end of the super reach effect (for example, within the period from 3 seconds before the end to the end), the player may operate the stick controller 31A to the left or right. Also in this case, the display of the volume status display image VL is started based on the fact that such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A. Then, the super reach effect ends within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of displaying the volume status display image VL. , Step S601, step S602, step S604, and step S605 shown in FIG. 12 so that the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the end of the super reach effect is continuously displayed even after the end of the super reach effect. It has become. As a result, even if the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the end of the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL is continued, and the volume status display image VL is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation. It is possible to eliminate unnecessary processing of erasing once and displaying it again.

During the super reach production, as shown in FIG. 17 (A), the music corresponding to the reach type is played. For example, when the super reach notification is executed as shown in FIG. 23 (C), for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), the music corresponding to the reach type starts from the beginning, such as intro, verse, and B melody. Will be played back in sequence. Then, for example, between the effect shown in FIG. 23 (E) and the effect shown in FIG. 23 (F), the effect by the special sound effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, several seconds).

As the effect of the special sound effect, for example, a so-called SE (Sound Effect) effect such as an echo effect sound, a repeat sound, a noise sound, and a fade-in / fade-out sound may be executed. In addition, there may be no sound for the predetermined period. Further, it is preferable that the moving image played during the production by the super reach is also subjected to the effect for the predetermined period in addition to the output of the special sound effect. For example, if the video suddenly stops (becomes a still image), the screen is blacked out, or a noise display (for example, a sandstorm display on an analog TV) is used. good.

Then, for example, in response to a predetermined operation performed from the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the execution of the effect by the special sound effect, or in response to the elapse of a predetermined period, FIG. 23. The battle effect result shown in (H) is displayed, and the loss sound effect for notifying the loss is output from the speakers 8L and 8R together with this display. In the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 17B, rust is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a continuation of the music part played during the super reach production. In this way, by applying special effects to the audio and video before the battle effect result (result of the effect of notifying the success or failure of winning or losing) is displayed, it is possible to arouse the expectation of the player.

The period for executing the special effect may be predetermined for each variation pattern of the music-based reach, for example. Further, the music does not have to be played from the beginning (intro) during the production of the music-based reach, and the music may be started from the verse A, the verse B, or the like. Further, if a big hit occurs after the production of the music-based reach, it may be reproduced from the continuation of the portion reproduced during the production of the music-based reach during the first round execution. For example, the A melody may be reproduced during the reach effect, and the B melody following the A melody may be reproduced during the first round execution. Further, the music may be played halfway through the verse during the reach production, and the music may be played from the continuation of the verse during the execution of the first round.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, an example of production such as a large winning opening opening sound and a ball removal error display will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 24, it is assumed that the music A is selected as the music during the big hit, and the PV (Promotion Video) of the music A and the music A even during the round game from the first round to the final round (for example, the 15th round). , MV (Music Video), etc. shall be played. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the description will be made from the time when the stop flag is in the off state and the suppression flag is in the off state.

As shown in FIG. 24 (A), for example, when the round game of the tenth round is started, a large winning opening opening sound is output in accordance with the opening of the large winning opening. At this time, the large winning opening opening sound (opening sound) and the music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in an overlapping manner. The volume output level between the opening sound (opening sound) and the music is the normal level (third level). The volume output level may be changed after being changed in the volume status display process in step S161. Further, as the remaining winning number display, the remaining winning number display image NG indicating that the remaining winning number is "10" is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 24A, it is shown that the remaining number of winnings is "10" by displaying the images corresponding to 10 winning balls.

When a game ball enters the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7 and a winning is generated in the large winning opening, a normal winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 24 (B). At this time, the normal winning sound (winning sound) and the music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in an overlapping manner. The volume output level of the normal winning sound (winning sound) and the music is the normal level (third level). The volume output level may be changed after being changed in the volume status display process in step S161. Further, as the remaining winning number display, the remaining winning number display image NG indicating that the remaining winning number is "9" is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 24 (B), one of the displayed 10 winning ball compatible images is deleted, so that the remaining number of winning balls is "9". It is shown.

Here, when the lower plate is full of game balls, as shown in FIG. 24C, a message such as "ball removal error! Please remove the ball from the lower plate" and a caution mark are displayed as a ball removal error display. The ball removal error display image TG shown is displayed in a normal size. In addition, a ball removal error notification sound is output. At this time, the ball removal error notification sound and the music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in an overlapping manner. The volume output level of the ball removal error notification sound and the music is the normal level (third level). The volume output level may be changed after being changed in the volume status display process in step S161.

Here, when the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 5 seconds and detects the operation (lever pulling 5 seconds), the stop flag is turned on. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24 (D1), the display of the remaining winning numbers ends (the remaining winning number display image NG is deleted). In this state, the ball removal error notification sound and the music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the ball removal error display image TG is switched to the reduced size and continuously displayed. By ending the display of the number of remaining prizes, it becomes easier to visually recognize the moving image of the music A. Further, by switching the ball removal error display image TG to the reduced size, it becomes easier to visually recognize the moving image of the music A.

Then, even if the game ball enters the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7 after the stop flag is turned on and a winning is generated in the large winning opening, the normal winning sound ( The winning sound) is not output, and as shown in FIG. 24 (E1), only the ball removal error notification sound and the music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 24C, when the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 2 seconds and detects the operation (lever pulling 2 seconds), the suppression flag is turned on. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24 (D2), the display of the number of remaining winnings is changed to the suppression mode. Specifically, the brightness level of the winning number display image NG is low. In this state, the ball removal error notification sound and the music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The volume output level between the ball removal error notification sound and the music is a normal level (third level). The volume output level may be changed after being changed in the volume status display process in step S161. Further, the ball removal error display image TG is switched to the reduced size and continuously displayed. By changing the display of the number of remaining prizes to the suppression mode, it becomes easier to visually recognize the moving image of the music A. Further, by switching the ball removal error display image TG to the reduced size, it becomes easier to visually recognize the moving image of the music A.

Then, after the suppression flag is turned on, when the game ball enters the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7 and a winning is generated in the large winning opening, FIG. 24 (E2) shows. As shown, the speaker 8L and 8R output the ball removal error notification sound, the music, and the normal winning sound (winning sound). The volume output level of the normal winning sound output at this time is the lowest level. The volume output level between the ball removal error notification sound and the music is a normal level (third level). The volume output level may be changed after being changed in the volume status display process in step S161. Therefore, the normal winning sound is output at a volume lower than that of the ball removal error notification sound or the music.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24C, when the ball removal error display and the ball removal error notification sound are output, the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 5 seconds. When the operation (lever pull 5 seconds) is detected and the stop flag is turned on, the display of the number of remaining prizes is completed as shown in FIG. 24 (D1), and a prize is generated in the large prize opening. Although the normal winning sound (winning sound) is not output, the reduced size ball removal error display and the ball removal error notification sound are continuously output. As described above, in this embodiment, when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the non-executable mode of the predetermined effect during the ball removal error notification such as the ball removal error display and the output of the ball removal error notification sound. The ease of recognizing the ball removal error notification changes. Specifically, since the normal winning sound (winning sound) is not output, it becomes easier to recognize (make it easier to hear) the ball removal error notification sound. Further, by switching to the reduced size ball removal error display, it becomes difficult to recognize (visually recognize) the ball removal error display. In addition, although the ball removal error display is switched to the reduced size based on the detection of a specific operation such as lever pulling 5 seconds, it is not necessary to switch the ball removal error display to the reduced size. Even in this way, the ease of recognizing the ball removal error notification changes. Specifically, when the display of the number of remaining prizes is completed, it becomes easier to recognize (visually recognize) the ball removal error display.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24C, the player continuously presses the stick controller 31A for 2 seconds while the ball removal error display and the ball removal error notification sound are output. When the pull and the operation (lever pull 2 seconds) are detected and the suppression flag is turned on, the remaining winning number display is changed to the suppression mode as shown in FIG. 24 (D2), and the large winning opening is entered. Even if a prize is generated, the normal prize sound (winning sound) is output in a suppressed mode, while the ball removal error display and the ball removal error notification sound are continuously output. As described above, in this embodiment, when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the suppression mode during the ball removal error notification such as the ball removal error display and the output of the ball removal error notification sound, the recognition of the ball removal error notification. Ease changes. Specifically, when the volume output level of the normal winning sound (winning sound) becomes the lowest level, it becomes easier to recognize (make it easier to hear) the ball removal error notification sound. Further, by switching to the reduced size ball removal error display, it becomes difficult to recognize (visually recognize) the ball removal error display. In addition, although the ball removal error display is switched to the reduced size based on the detection of a specific operation such as lever pulling 2 seconds, it is not necessary to switch the ball removal error display to the reduced size. Even in this way, the ease of recognizing the ball removal error notification changes. Specifically, by lowering the brightness level of the remaining winning number display, it becomes easier to recognize (visually recognize) the ball removal error display.

When the ball removal error notification is not performed, the ball removal error display image TG is not displayed and the ball removal error notification sound is not output in the scene shown in FIG. 24 (C). In such a state, only the music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the lever pulling 5 seconds is detected and the stop flag is turned on, the subsequent winning sound and the large winning opening opening sound are not output. Therefore, when it is desired to clearly watch the selected music or the moving image of the music, a specific operation such as lever pulling for 5 seconds may be performed. Further, if a specific operation such as lever pulling for 2 seconds is performed, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the suppression mode, so that the selected music or the moving image of the music can be clearly viewed.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the music selected or the music selected by executing the processes of steps S628 and S629 to S631 shown in FIG. 16 in the jackpot gaming state, for example. It is possible to reproduce the moving image of the above, and further, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect such as the large winning opening winning effect shown in FIG. 20 and the large winning opening opening effect shown in FIG. 21 during the reproduction of the music or the moving image of the music. Further, by executing the processes of steps S423 to S426 shown in FIG. 14, that is, based on the detection of the specific action of the player, the stop flag is switched on / off, and the predetermined effect is executed. The presence or absence can be changed (see FIG. 15). Then, as shown in FIGS. 22B and 24, when the stop flag is turned on during the ball removal error notification, that is, when the execution mode at the time of stop (no execution of the predetermined effect) is changed, the ball removal error notification is performed. Can be continuously executed. In this way, during the execution of the abnormality notification such as the ball removal error notification, the predetermined effect such as the large winning opening winning effect or the large winning opening opening effect is executed, which hinders the abnormal notification and reduces the effect of the abnormal notification. It can be prevented from being lost. In addition, since the stop flag is turned on and the mode is changed so that the predetermined effect cannot be executed, the specific effect is executed by executing the specific effect such as the reproduction of the music or the moving image of the music. It is possible to prevent the effect of the specific effect from being reduced.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, it is possible to play a music selected or a moving image of the music by executing the processes of steps S628 and S629 to S631 shown in FIG. 16, for example, in the jackpot gaming state. Further, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect such as the large winning opening winning effect shown in FIG. 20 and the large winning opening opening effect shown in FIG. 21 while the music or the moving image of the music is being played. Further, by executing the processes of steps S414, S415, and S423 to S426 shown in FIG. 14, the stop flag and the suppression flag are switched on / off, and whether or not the predetermined effect is executed and the volume output of the predetermined effect are output. Execution modes such as level and brightness level can be changed (see FIG. 15). Then, during the ball removal error notification, for example, when the suppression flag is on, that is, when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the suppression mode, the ball removal error notification can be continuously executed. In this way, during the execution of the abnormality notification such as the ball removal error notification, the predetermined effect such as the large winning opening winning effect or the large winning opening opening effect is executed, which hinders the abnormal notification and reduces the effect of the abnormal notification. It can be prevented from being lost. Further, for example, since the suppression flag is turned on and the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the suppression mode, the specific effect is executed by executing the specific effect such as the reproduction of the music or the moving image of the music. It is possible to prevent the effect of the specific effect from being reduced.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, it is determined in step S622a shown in FIG. 16 that a big hit is being made (step S622a; Yes), and in step S628, a short period for the player's push button 31B. The image showing the music title can be moved by performing a predetermined operation such as a pressing operation (simple pressing) of. Further, in step S401 shown in FIG. 14, it is determined that a big hit is being made (step S401; Yes), and a specific operation such as an operation of continuously pulling the stick controller 31A of the player for 5 seconds is performed, so that in step S412. When it is determined that the timekeeping result is 5 seconds or more (step S412; Yes), or when a specific operation such as an operation of continuously pulling the stick controller 31A of the player for 2 seconds is performed, the timekeeping result is performed in step S421. When it is determined that is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds (step S421; Yes), the on / off state of the stop flag or the suppression flag can be switched, that is, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be changed. .. Since the player can change the execution mode of the predetermined effect by performing a specific operation different from the predetermined operation in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally changing the execution mode, and the effect of the effect is reduced. Can be prevented.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, for example, by the player within a period from 2 seconds before receiving the jackpot end designation command to the time when the jackpot end designation command is received. When the lever pulling operation is started, the timing result in the timing processing of the lever pulling operation does not exceed 2 seconds, so that the on / off state of the suppression flag is not switched, and the suppression setting of the predetermined effect and the suppression setting (step S424). , The timekeeping result is initialized without executing the process of the normal setting (step S426) of the predetermined effect. Further, for example, when the lever pulling operation by the player is started within the period from 5 seconds before receiving the jackpot end designation command to the time when the jackpot end designation command is received and the lever pulling operation is continued, the lever pulling operation is performed. Since the timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of is not more than 5 seconds, the on / off state of the stop flag is not switched, and the timekeeping result is initialized. Unless the on / off state of the suppression flag and the stop flag is switched, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is not changed. As described above, since the execution mode of the predetermined effect is not changed depending on the start timing of the specific operation such as the lever pulling operation by the player, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be preferably changed.

For example, if the lever pulling operation by the player is started within the next round waiting period (interval period) from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game, the lever pulling operation may be invalidated. .. For example, even if the lever pulling operation by the player is started within the waiting period for the next round, the timing processing of the lever pulling operation may not be performed, or the presence or absence of the lever pulling operation may not be determined. .. As described above, when the start timing of a specific operation such as the lever pulling operation by the player is within the waiting period for the next round, the execution mode of the predetermined effect may not be changed.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, for example, a production that outputs a winning sound notifying that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening (large winning opening winning effect), and the remaining number of winnings in the round game. Multiple predetermined effects such as a production that displays the number of remaining prizes (a production that displays the number of remaining prizes) and a production that outputs a sound that opens the large prize opening to notify that the large prize opening has been opened (production when the large prize opening is open). By switching the on / off state of the stop flag / suppression flag, the execution mode of a plurality of predetermined effects is changed. This makes it possible to improve the staging effect.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, when the ball removal error display and the ball removal error notification sound are output as shown in FIG. 24 (C), the player has the stick controller 31A. Is continuously pulled for 5 seconds, the operation (lever pulling 5 seconds) is detected, and the stop flag is turned on. Even if a prize is generated in the mouth, the normal winning sound (winning sound) is not output, while the ball removal error display and the ball removal error notification sound are continuously output. Further, as shown in FIG. 24C, when the ball removal error display and the ball removal error notification sound are output, the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 2 seconds, and the operation (lever) is performed. Since the suppression flag is turned on by detecting (2 seconds of pulling), the display of the number of remaining winnings is changed to the suppression mode as shown in FIG. 24 (D2), and even if a prize is generated in the large winning opening. While the normal winning sound (winning sound) is output in the suppressed mode, the ball removal error display and the ball removal error notification sound are continuously output. In this way, when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to a mode in which the predetermined effect cannot be executed during the abnormality notification such as the ball removal error notification, or during the abnormality notification such as the ball removal error notification, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed. Since the ease of recognizing the abnormality notification changes when the suppression mode is changed, the abnormality notification can be performed according to the change in the execution mode of the predetermined effect, and it is possible to prevent giving a sense of discomfort.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes music reproduction means realized by the staging control CPU 120 in cooperation with the voice control board 13 and the like. Further, the gaming machine is configured so that the music to be played in a specific period (for example, a period in the jackpot gaming state) can be selected from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 17C). Has been done. The music reproduction means can reproduce the music in a specific period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step S634 in FIG. 16), and is a part of the selected music at the time of music selection. A specific portion different from the beginning of the musical piece is reproduced (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 in FIG. 16). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when selecting the music.

The big hit period in the big hit game state is a period in which the opening of the big winning opening is repeated, that is, a round game period, but is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot period includes a fanfare effect period executed at the start of the jackpot game state, a period of repeating attacker opening (round game period), and an ending effect period executed at the end of the jackpot game state. It may be a period. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit game state and notifies that the big hit game state has been reached. The ending effect is an effect that is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state.

Further, the specific period is not limited to the period in the jackpot gaming state, and how to determine the period is arbitrary. For example, the specific period may be a super reach production period. In this case, the music determination process shown in FIG. 16 is transformed into a process of determining the music during the super reach period or before the period, and the determined music is transformed into the modified process or a process of controlling the reach effect. It may be reproduced in. Further, the specific period may be in a probabilistic state, a time saving state, or the like.

Further, the specific part is not limited to the "chorus" of the music as described above. Depending on the music, a part other than "rust" (such as a verse) may be used as a specific part. Further, the specific part may be the beginning part of the music. That is, the data used as the specific part may be different depending on the music.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and has been described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a structure of parts.

In the above embodiment, in the specific motion detection process shown in FIG. 14, when there is no lever pulling operation in step S402 (step S402; No), the timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of the lever pulling operation is 5 seconds or more (lever pulling). It is determined whether or not the time is 5 seconds or more (step S412), or whether or not the timekeeping result in the timekeeping process of the lever pulling operation is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds (step S421). Alternatively, in the case of Yes in step S421, the execution mode of the predetermined effect was changed. That is, the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be changed at the timing when the lever pulling operation is started and the lever is returned after 2 seconds or more or 5 seconds or more have elapsed. However, even if the lever pulling operation is continued without the lever being returned, the execution mode of the predetermined effect may be changed at the timing when the lever pulling operation is started and 2 seconds or 5 seconds have elapsed. For example, after setting the first vibration of the lever in step S405, the processing after step S422 is executed, and after setting the second vibration of the lever in step S407, the processing after step S413 is executed. You may. By doing so, the lever pulling operation is started, and the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed at the timing when 2 seconds or 5 seconds have elapsed.

Further, in the above embodiment, when a specific motion such as a player pulling the lever for 5 seconds or more or 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds is detected, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed. In the middle of detecting the specific motion of the player, for example, in the period when it is determined in step S402 that there is a lever pulling operation and the timing result is less than 5 seconds or less than 2 seconds, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is set. It may be the execution mode of the predetermined effect after the change. "During detection of specific operation" means the period from the start of specific operation to the detection of specific operation. In the above embodiment, the presence / absence of the specific operation is detected at the timing when the lever pulling operation is no longer detected, but the presence / absence of the specific operation is detected at the timing when 2 seconds or 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the lever pulling operation. It may be detected. In this case, "during detection of the specific operation" is a period from the start of the specific operation to the elapse of 2 seconds or 5 seconds. For example, when it is determined in step S404 that the timekeeping result is 2 seconds (step S404; Yes), the processes of steps S422 to S426 are executed, and in step S406 it is determined that the timekeeping result is 5 seconds. If this is the case (step S406; Yes), the processes of steps S413 to S415 may be executed.

FIG. 25 shows an example of production such as a large winning opening opening sound and a ball removal error display in the modified example. In the example shown in FIG. 25, it is assumed that the music A is selected as the jackpot music in the same manner as in the example shown in FIG. It is assumed that moving images such as PV (Promotion Video) and MV (Music Video) of the music A are played. Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 25, the description will be made from the time when the stop flag is in the off state and the suppression flag is in the off state.

For example, if the lower plate is full of game balls during the 10th round game, as shown in FIG. 25C, the ball removal error display is "Ball removal error! Please remove the ball from the lower plate." Error display image TG showing a message such as and a caution mark is displayed in a normal size. In addition, a ball removal error notification sound is output. At this time, the ball removal error notification sound and the music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R in an overlapping manner. The volume output level of the ball removal error notification sound and the music is the normal level (third level). The volume output level may be changed after being changed in the volume status display process in step S161.

Here, when the player starts the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A (lever pulling), the display of the remaining winning numbers is changed to the suppression mode as shown in FIG. 25 (B). Specifically, the brightness level of the winning number display image NG is low. In this state, when a prize is generated in the large winning opening, the speaker 8L and 8R output a ball removal error notification sound, a music piece, and a normal winning sound (winning sound). The volume output level of the normal winning sound output at this time is the lowest level. That is, when the lever pulling by the player is started, the execution mode of the predetermined effect becomes the suppression mode. Then, when the operation is completed (lever return) before 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A by the player, the remaining winning number display becomes the normal mode as shown in FIG. 25 (C2). Be changed. Specifically, the brightness level of the winning number display image NG becomes a high level. In this state, when a prize is generated in the large winning opening, the speaker 8L and 8R output a ball removal error notification sound, a music piece, and a normal winning sound (winning sound). The volume output level of the normal winning sound output at this time is the normal level. That is, if the lever is returned before 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the lever pull by the player, the execution mode of the predetermined effect returns to the same mode as before the lever pull is started. It should be noted that the state shown in FIG. 25 (B) may be maintained until 2 seconds have elapsed after the lever pulling is started again after the execution mode of the predetermined effect is returned.

Further, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A by the player, the suppression setting of the predetermined effect (step S424 in the above embodiment) is performed, so that the execution mode of the predetermined effect becomes the suppression mode. Along with the deterministic change, the display of the remaining winning numbers is completed (the winning number display image NG is deleted) as shown in FIG. 25 (C1). In this state, when a prize is generated in the large winning opening, the speaker 8L and 8R output the ball removal error notification sound and the music, but the normal winning sound (winning sound) is not output. That is, when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the lever pulling by the player, the execution mode of the predetermined effect becomes the mode in which the predetermined effect is not executed (execution mode when stopped). Then, when the operation is completed (lever return) before 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A by the player, the remaining winning number display is suppressed as shown in FIG. 25 (D2). It will be started. Specifically, the winning number display image NG having a low brightness level is displayed. In this state, when a prize is generated in the large winning opening, the speaker 8L and 8R output a ball removal error notification sound, a music piece, and a normal winning sound (winning sound). The volume output level of the normal winning sound output at this time is the lowest level. That is, if the lever is returned 2 seconds after the start of the lever pull by the player and before 5 seconds have passed, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is the suppression mode (2 seconds have passed since the lever pull was started). Return to the same mode as the later suppression mode). It should be noted that the state shown in FIG. 25 (C1) may be maintained until 3 seconds or 5 seconds have elapsed after the lever pulling is started again after the execution mode of the predetermined effect returns to the suppression mode.

Further, when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A by the player, the stop flag is turned on, so that the execution mode of the predetermined effect is not executed (execution mode at the time of stop). ) Will be definitively changed. In this way, during the detection of a specific motion such as lever pulling for 5 seconds or 2 seconds, the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the execution mode of the predetermined effect scheduled to be changed based on the detection of the specific motion. You may do it. With this configuration, the staging effect can be improved.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 25, it is not necessary to provide the suppression mode as the execution mode of the predetermined effect. In this case, when the player starts the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A (lever pulling) in the scene shown in FIG. 25 (A), the remaining winning number display ends (winning number display) as shown in FIG. 25 (C1). The image NG may be erased). Further, as the execution mode of the predetermined effect, it is not necessary to provide a mode in which the predetermined effect is not executed. In this case, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A by the player, the suppression setting of the predetermined effect is performed, so that the execution mode of the predetermined effect is deterministically changed to the suppression mode. Just do it.

Further, the image display device 5 may be able to display a control history for a big hit game state such as a continuous-chan history. Further, when the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type is either "15 rounds (15R)" or "5 rounds (5R)" may be included. For example, a plurality of jackpot types with different advantages for the player are set, such as "non-probability change (15R)", "non-probability change (5R)", "probability change (15R)", and "probability change (5R)". It may have been. As an example, during continuous chan, the first control history is displayed as a control history indicating that the jackpot type "probability change (15R)" has been controlled to the jackpot game state, and the jackpot type "probability change (5R)" jackpot game. The second control history is displayed as a control history indicating that the state has been controlled, and it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of other jackpot types ("non-probability change (15R)", "non-probability change (5R)"). The third control history may be displayed as the control history to be shown. The control history indicating that the game has been controlled to the jackpot gaming state of another jackpot type may be individually displayed according to the jackpot type. As the control history, by displaying the same number of history images as the number of times controlled in the jackpot game state, the number of controls to the jackpot game state corresponding to the history image may be shown, and the history image may be displayed. And a numerical image indicating the number of times of control may be displayed in combination to indicate the number of times of control to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the history image.

Further, for example, it may be possible to detect a player's special operation such as a player's pressing operation on a trigger button provided on the operation rod of the stick controller 31A. Then, based on the detection of the special movement of the player, the display mode of the control history to the big hit game state may be switched.

FIG. 26 shows an example of switching the display mode of the control history to the jackpot gaming state in the modified example. As shown in FIG. 26 (A), for example, three first history images RG1 are displayed as the first control history, which is the control history indicating that the control has been controlled to the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot type “probability change (15R)”. ing. As a result, it is shown that the jackpot game state of the jackpot type "probability change (15R)" is controlled three times during the continuous chan. Further, for example, seven second history images RG2 are displayed as the second control history, which is the control history indicating that the control has been controlled to the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot type “probability change (5R)”. As a result, it is shown that the jackpot game state of the jackpot type "probability change (5R)" is controlled 7 times during the continuous chan. Although not shown, when the third control history, which is the control history indicating that the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of "non-probability change (15R)" or "non-probability change (5R)", is displayed, The same number of third history images as the number of times controlled to the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot type "non-probability variation (15R)" or "non-probability variation (5R)" is displayed.

Here, when a player's special action such as a player's pressing operation with respect to the trigger button provided on the operation rod of the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 26B, the control history for the jackpot game state is displayed. The mode is switched. Specifically, the three first history images RG1 displayed as the first control history are a combination of one first history image RG1, a multiplication image indicating "x", and a numerical image indicating "3". Switch to the image. Further, the seven second history images RG2 displayed as the second control history are switched to an image in which one second history image RG2, a multiplication image indicating "x", and a numerical image indicating "7" are combined. .. In this way, by detecting the special movement of the player, from the first display mode, which is the display mode of the control history to the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 26 (A), the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 26 (B). It switches to the second display mode which is the display mode of the control history to.

Further, when the special movement of the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 26 (C), the display mode of the control history to the jackpot game state is switched. Specifically, three first history images are a combination of one first history image RG1 displayed as the first control history, a multiplication image indicating "x", and a numerical image indicating "3". Switch to RG1. Further, the image obtained by combining one second history image RG2 displayed as the second control history, the multiplication image indicating "x", and the numerical image indicating "7" is switched to the seven second history images RG2. .. In this way, by detecting the special movement of the player, from the second display mode, which is the display mode of the control history to the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 26 (B), the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 26 (C). It switches to the first display mode which is the display mode of the control history to. The display mode of the control history to the jackpot game state in the initial state may be the first display mode shown in FIG. 26 (C) or the second display mode shown in FIG. 26 (B). ..

By making it possible to switch the display mode of the control history to the jackpot game state based on the detection of the special movement of the player in this way, the control history can be displayed in the display mode according to the player's preference.

In the example shown in FIG. 26, the special operation is a pressing operation on the trigger button provided on the operation rod of the stick controller 31A, but the special operation is, for example, a pressing operation (simple pressing) on the push button 31B for a short period of time. It may be an operation such as pressing (long pressing) for a long period (for example, 1 second) for the push button 31B, and the stick controller 31A may be continuously pulled toward you for a predetermined time. It may be a specific operation such as prolongation. In the example shown in FIG. 26, the control history for the jackpot gaming state is displayed during the variable display, but the control history for the jackpot gaming state may be displayed during the jackpot gaming state or during the demo display.

In the above embodiment, the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 5 seconds during the ball removal error notification (abnormality notification) such as the ball removal error display and the output of the ball removal error notification sound, and the operation (lever pull). When the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed to the non-executable mode of the predetermined effect due to the detection of 5 seconds) and the stop flag being turned on, the ball removal error notification can be continuously executed. I did it. Further, during the ball removal error notification, the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 2 seconds, detects the operation (lever pulling 2 seconds), and the suppression flag is turned on. Is changed to the suppression mode, the ball removal error notification can be continuously executed. The abnormality notification is not limited to the above-mentioned ball removal error notification. Abnormal notifications include the large winning opening abnormal winning notification, which is executed when an abnormal winning entry occurs in the large winning opening, and the starting winning opening abnormal winning notification, which is executed when an abnormal winning entry occurs in the second starting winning opening. It may be a big prize opening input / output mismatch notification or other abnormality notification executed when the input / output of the game ball to the big winning opening does not match. Among the abnormality notifications, the ball removal error notification is less important than other abnormality notifications. Therefore, when the ball removal error notification is performed, the display size of the ball removal error display and the volume output level of the ball removal error notification sound may be different depending on the on / off state of the stop flag and the suppression flag. However, when anomaly notification of high importance is performed, the display size of the error display may be set to a predetermined size (maximum size, normal size, etc.) regardless of the on / off state of the stop flag or suppression flag. The volume output level of the error notification sound may be set to a predetermined level (maximum level, normal level, etc.).

In the above embodiment, the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 5 seconds, detects the operation (lever pulling 5 seconds), and the stop flag is turned on. The mode in which the predetermined effect can be executed (normal execution mode) shown in FIG. 15 is changed to an infeasible mode (execution mode when the predetermined effect is stopped). Specifically, when the stop flag is turned on, a winning sound is output to notify that the game ball has won a prize at the large winning opening, and the remaining winning number display indicating the remaining winning number in the round game is displayed. All of a plurality of predetermined effects, such as an effect to be performed and an effect of outputting a large winning opening opening sound for notifying that the large winning opening has been opened, are changed to a mode that cannot be executed at the same time. Further, the player continuously pulls the stick controller 31A for 2 seconds, detects the operation (lever pull 2 seconds), and the suppression flag is turned on, so that the execution mode of the predetermined effect is shown in FIG. The mode in which the predetermined effect can be executed (normal execution mode) is changed to the suppression mode (execution mode at the time of suppression). Specifically, when the suppression flag is turned on, a winning sound is output to notify that the game ball has won a prize at the large winning opening, and the remaining winning number display indicating the remaining winning number in the round game is displayed. All of a plurality of predetermined effects such as an effect to be performed and an effect of outputting a large winning opening opening sound for notifying that the large winning opening has been opened are all suppressed at the same time (volume output level is the lowest level, brightness level is low level). It was changed to.

However, when the stop flag or the suppression flag is turned on, it may be possible to individually set, for example, on the menu screen which of the plurality of predetermined effects is the infeasible mode or the suppression mode. The menu screen may be displayed on the image display device 5 based on the detection of the menu screen display operation by the player, for example, during the demo display. Then, when the menu screen is displayed, the execution mode of each predetermined effect when the specific operation is performed may be set by the execution mode setting operation by the player. As an example, the effect and the number of winnings that output a winning sound when the player detects a specific action of continuously pulling the stick controller 31A for 5 seconds and the stop flag is turned on by the execution mode setting operation by the player. While the effect of displaying is set to be infeasible, the effect of outputting the large winning opening opening sound may be set to be feasible. In addition, the player detects a specific action of continuously pulling the stick controller 31A for 2 seconds by the execution mode setting operation, and outputs a winning sound when the suppression flag is turned on and displays the number of winnings. While the effect of performing the above-mentioned effect is suppressed, the effect of outputting the large winning opening opening sound may be set to be feasible or infeasible.

Further, in the execution mode (suppression mode) at the time of suppression, as shown in FIG. 15, the volume output level for the winning sound and the large winning opening opening sound is the lowest level (for example, the lowest level and the lowest of the first to fifth levels). The level) is set, and the brightness level for the remaining winning number display is set to a low level. However, the volume output level for the winning sound and the large winning opening opening sound in the suppression mode is not limited to the lowest level, and may be another level. Further, the brightness level of the remaining winning number display in the suppression mode is not limited to the low level, and may be another level.

Further, the volume output level for the winning sound and the large winning opening opening sound and the brightness level for displaying the remaining number of winnings in the execution mode (suppression mode) at the time of suppression shown in FIG. 15 can be individually set, for example, on the menu screen. May be good. When the menu screen is displayed, the suppression mode for each predetermined effect may be set by the suppression mode setting operation by the player. As an example, the volume output level for the winning sound and the large winning opening opening sound in the suppressing mode is set to the second level by the suppression mode setting operation by the player, while the brightness level for the remaining winning number display is low level. May be set to. Similarly, the volume output level for the winning sound and the large winning opening opening sound and the brightness level for displaying the number of remaining winnings in the normal execution mode shown in FIG. 15 may be individually set on the menu screen. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, when an over-winning occurs in the final round, a notification effect related to the over-winning may be executed during the ending effect, or the first variable display after the end of the ending effect is performed. When it is called (when the ending effect is finished when there is no hold), the notification effect related to the over winning may be executed.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the volume status display image VL showing the adjustment status of the volume adjustment is displayed, but in addition to the volume status display image VL, the display screen of the image display device 5 or the display screen of the image display device 5 or , A brightness status display image showing the adjustment status of the brightness adjustment of the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 or the decorative LED may be displayed. Further, only the brightness status display image may be displayed instead of the volume status display image VL. For example, the volume status display process (step S161) shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 may be changed to a process that enables the volume status display image VL and the luminance status display image to be displayed. Further, instead of the volume status display image VL, a mode status display image indicating the mode status, which is the execution frequency of the effect such as a hold change notice, may be displayed. Further, the mode status display image may be displayed together with at least one of the volume status display image VL and the brightness status display image.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23C, the volume status display image VL is erased to make it invisible, but the volume status display image VL may be displayed in a mode that is difficult to see. .. For example, the volume status display image VL may be displayed in a semi-transparent display mode, or may be displayed in a very small and reduced display mode (micro display mode). Further, it may be notified that the volume can be adjusted at all times. For example, a telop display may be used to notify that the volume can be adjusted at all times. Further, the explanation effect display may be used to notify that the volume can be adjusted at all times. It should be noted that the execution of the telop display and the explanation effect display is not limited to the variable display, and may be possible in a customer waiting state (so-called waiting for a customer), a big hit game state, or the like.

In the above embodiment, the volume status display image VL is not displayed on the image display device 5 unless requested by the player during the super reach effect, but there is no request by the player in the jackpot game state. As long as the volume status display image VL may not be displayed. In this case, the volume status display process shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 may be transformed so as to be feasible during the big hit. For example, instead of the judgment process of whether or not the super reach effect is being produced in the volume status display process, the determination process of whether or not the jackpot effect is being performed is executed, or each operation flag or the like is transformed into an operation flag according to the jackpot effect. Therefore, the volume status display process can be executed during the big hit. When displaying the ending effect, the volume status display image VL may be displayed on the image display device 5 also during the ending effect period. According to such a modification, for example, it is possible to display the volume status display image VL (display the adjustment status of the staging adjustment) according to the player's request while suppressing the deterioration of the staging effect during the big hit. , The fun of the game can be improved.

Further, the detection control by selecting the music during the big hit may be prioritized over the detection control of the adjustment status. That is, it may be impossible to adjust the effect (for example, status display such as volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, and mode switching) while the music is being selected. In particular, it is effective when an operation for selecting a musical piece and an operation for adjusting an effect are performed by the same operating means (for example, a cross button or the like).

In the above embodiment, there are a plurality of methods for determining music at the time of music selection (for example, when a predetermined music determination operation is performed or when the large winning opening is closed in the first round, step S631 in FIG. 16 The song being selected is determined by.). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing music when selecting music.

Since there are a plurality of types of music determination operations, there may be a plurality of music determination methods. For example, there may be a plurality of configurations in which the operation content can be detected according to the operation by the player by using a non-contact sensor such as a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or an infrared sensor. In addition, the music selected is not limited to the example in which the selected song is determined when the large winning opening is closed in the first round, and the music is determined according to the closing of the large winning opening in any round other than the first round. It may be configured such that the music is played or the music is decided according to the end of the first hit. Further, there may be only one method for determining the music.

In the above embodiment, it is possible to select a musical piece in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, during the execution of the first round in the big hit game state). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing music when selecting music.

The advantageous state may be during a round other than the first round. Further, the advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state. For example, a special state such as a probabilistic state may be an advantageous state, and the number of first rounds (for example, "7") in which the maximum number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of big hit game states is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7") may be set. For example, the jackpot gaming state of "15") may be set as an advantageous state. Alternatively, the time saving state in which the upper limit of the variable display that can be executed among the plurality of time saving states is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), may be regarded as an advantageous state. The probabilistic state in which the jackpot probability is the first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50) among the plurality of probable change states may be regarded as an advantageous state. In addition, any gaming state that is advantageous to the player may be set as an advantageous state. Further, it may be possible to select a musical piece in a state other than the advantageous state.

In the above embodiment, when the music is selected, the display means (for example, the display area VA1 shown in FIG. 18B) for displaying the image corresponding to the music to be played in the specific period and corresponding to the specific unit. Is equipped with an image display device 5 or the like that displays a music-compatible image. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when selecting the music.

The image corresponding to the specific portion (musical piece compatible image) may be a moving image or a still image as described above. Further, the music-compatible image may not be displayed when the music is selected.

In the above embodiment, storage means for storing one song as voice data divided into a plurality of parts including specific part data indicating the sound of a specific part (for example, as shown in FIG. 18A), rust data. ROM 121, etc. that stores multiple audio data including
At the time of selecting a music, the music reproduction means reproduces a specific part of one music based on the specific part data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 16), and a plurality of music reproduction means are used in the specific period. (For example, the staging control CPU 120 executes step S634 in FIG. 16) by connecting the audio data divided into the two to play a single musical piece. According to such a configuration, the burden on the data capacity can be reduced.

As described above, the data of the music-compatible image may be stored in the ROM 121 or the like in a manner divided into each part of the music (as separate image data for each), similarly to the audio data of the music. In this way, the burden on the data capacity can be further reduced. Further, neither the audio data indicating one musical piece nor the image data corresponding to the musical piece may be stored in a plurality of divided modes.

Further, according to the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) described above, in the gaming state (first state) other than during the super reach effect, whether or not the player's stick controller 31A is operated (player's operation) is determined. Regardless of this, since the volume status display image VL (volume adjustment status) is visually displayed on the image display device 5, the volume status display image VL can always be visually recognized in a gaming state other than during the super reach effect. Further, in the game state (second state) during the super reach effect for executing the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is made invisible, and when the player's stick controller 31A is operated, the player Based on the operation of the stick controller 31A, the volume status display image VL is displayed until a predetermined period elapses after the operation (until the predetermined condition is satisfied). That is, in the gaming state during the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL can be kept to the minimum necessary. As a result, the volume status display image VL can be displayed according to the player's request while suppressing the deterioration of the effect of the super reach effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the super reach effect is an effect that suggests that the player will be in an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to display the volume status display image VL according to the request of the player while suppressing the deterioration of the effect of the super reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative symbol when the fluctuation is stopped, so that the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, that is, the visual recognition of the game result can be visually recognized. You can adjust the volume without disturbing it.

Further, in the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is displayed for a predetermined period (or from the start of display of the volume status display image VL) from the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the player. Since it is displayed, the display of the volume status display image VL can be kept to the minimum necessary. As a result, the volume status display image VL can be displayed according to the player's request while suppressing the deterioration of the effect of the super reach effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above description, the first state is a gaming state other than during the super reach effect, but the period before the execution of the super reach effect (before the start) or the period after the execution of the super reach effect (after the end). It may be in any of the above states. Further, the first state may be at least one of the period before the execution of the super reach effect (before the start) in one variation and the period after the execution (after the end) of the super reach effect in the one variation. Often, the second state may be the state of the period during which the super reach effect in one fluctuation is executed. Further, the second state may be a special state that tends to be an advantageous state such as a big hit game state. This special state is a probabilistic state or a time saving state. Further, the special state is a state in which the game ball is frequently changed from the first aspect in which the game ball does not win (or may pass or enter) to the variable winning ball device 6B to the second aspect in which it is easy to win. There may be.

In addition, according to the operation (movement of the player) of the stick controller 31A of the player before shifting from the game state (first state) other than the super reach effect to the game state (second state) during the super reach effect. The display of the volume status display image VL of the volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started, and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied when shifting from the first state to the second state, that is, the super reach effect is being performed, but the predetermined period after the operation. If (3 seconds) has not elapsed, the display of the volume status display image VL is extended from the time of detection or transition of the player's movement until a predetermined period elapses, so that the display of the volume status display image VL is super. Even after the reach production is in progress, the display can be extended for a predetermined period. That is, it is possible to prevent the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment started immediately before the start of the super reach effect from ending halfway at the start timing of the super reach effect, and the display of the volume status display image VL is erased halfway. It is possible to prevent the inviting feeling of strangeness. Further, it is not necessary for the player to operate the stick controller 31A again immediately after the super reach effect is started, and it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine.

Contrary to the above, the operation of the player's stick controller 31A (the player's The display of the volume status display image VL of the volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started according to the operation), and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied when shifting from the second state to the first state, that is, the super reach effect is completed. If the game is in a game state other than during the super reach effect, but the predetermined period (3 seconds) has not elapsed after the operation, the volume status display image VL will continue to be displayed even after the transition to the first state. It is possible to eliminate the process of erasing the display of the volume status display image VL when the period elapses. In other words, since the volume status display image VL is always displayed in the first state, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary processing of erasing the volume status display image VL once after a lapse of a predetermined period and then restarting the display. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the display of the volume status display image VL disappears for a moment at the timing when the predetermined period elapses.

In the above-described embodiment, as an example of the gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a function of variably displaying a special symbol or a decorative symbol and a function of displaying various staging images has been described. However, at least a part of the configuration and functions provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment can be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

In a slot machine, when the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state such as a regular bonus or a big bonus, the player can obtain more medals than the normal gaming state, which is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state. It becomes a game state. The special game state is not limited to regular bonuses and big bonuses, and it can be expected that the player will win more medals than the normal game state, and the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Just do it. As a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than such a normal gaming state, for example, an operation that satisfies the derivation condition of the notification target winning that occurs on the condition that the reel derivation conditions (for example, the stop order and the stop timing) are satisfied. By limiting the assist time (AT) in which the procedure is notified and the pull-in range of at least one of the reels, the symbol displayed when the stop switch is operated is controlled so that it is easy to stop, and the game is played. Challenge time (CT) that allows a person to derive a combination of winning symbols by pushing the button, challenge bonus (CB) with continuous challenge time, specific winning (for example, replay winning, single bonus winning, etc.) It may be a gaming state (so-called replay time (RT) or concentrated state) in which the probability that the occurrence of the above is allowed increases, and further, a gaming state in which these are combined.

The effects that can be executed in such a slot machine may include specific effects such as the music piece in the above embodiment and the moving image of the music piece, and predetermined effects that are executed during the special gaming state. It suffices if the slot machine can execute abnormality notification. Further, it is sufficient that the execution mode of the predetermined effect can be changed based on the detection of the specific operation in the slot machine.

In the above embodiment, the "ratio" and "probability" at which various decisions are made are 0% (never determined) or 100% (always), for example, 70:30. It may be set so that it does not become (determined), or at least one of the determination results is 0% (never determined) or 100% (always determined). It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, if the ratio of one of a plurality of decision results to be a decision result is higher than the ratio of other decision results, the ratio of one decision result is It may be included that it is 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of 1 as the decision result is 100%, the ratio of other decision results is 0%. Further, when the ratio of other decision results is 0%, if the ratio of 1 decision result is a predetermined ratio other than 100% but not 0%, the ratio of 1 decision result is the other decision result. It will be higher than the ratio.

The special symbol and the decorative symbol are not limited to those that are variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by using a plurality of LEDs, and during the variable display of the special symbol, only a specific (single) LED among the plurality of LEDs is displayed. Repeats on and off, and the other LEDs remain off. Then, when the variable display result is "missing", the LED that repeatedly turns on and off is maintained in a state of emitting (lighting) with a predetermined emission color, or by maintaining a state of being turned off. Stop display the special symbol. At this time, the other LEDs are kept off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the LEDs among the plurality of LEDs are lit. In this way, even if a specific (single) symbol is switched between display and non-display during variable display of a special symbol or decorative symbol, the other symbols remain hidden. good. Then, as the final stop symbol (fixed special symbol or fixed decorative symbol) that results in the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (stop display). Further, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by using a 7-segment LED, and during the variable display of the special symbol, a symbol indicating "-" is displayed (lit). It may be hidden (turned off) repeatedly so that other numbers and symbols are not displayed. Then, as a variable display result of the special symbol, the symbol indicating "-" is not stopped and displayed, and a predetermined lighting pattern including numbers indicating "1" to "9" and other symbols is obtained. By doing so, the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, the symbols that are not stopped and displayed as a variable display result can be switched between display and non-display, while the other symbols are maintained in the hidden state. You may.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined by the process of step S242 shown in FIG. 5 includes "probability variation", and the probability variation control condition is set based on the determination result of the jackpot type being "probability variation". It was explained that it was established and controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball that has won (entered) the large winning opening (second large winning opening) is detected by the probabilistic change detection switch in the probabilistic attacker provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area. The probability variation control condition is satisfied based on the above, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be controlled to the probability variation state. The big winning opening (second big winning opening) of the probabilistic attacker can change from the closed state to the open state when the number of executions of the round game in the big hit game state is a predetermined number of times (for example, "15"), and the round. When the number of times the game is executed is other than the predetermined number of times, it may be considered that the game cannot be changed to the open state while remaining in the closed state. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the specific region in the attacker, which is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the gaming area. It may be configured to be.

In the above embodiment, one variation pattern designation command is transmitted when the variable display is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the variation pattern indicating the variable display time, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, and the like. Although an example is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the side of the staging control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is variable before reaching the reach with the first command (or before the so-called second stop if the first command does not reach). A command indicating the display time and variable display mode is sent, and the second command is the type of reach, and the variable display time and variable after reaching the reach (or after the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached). A command indicating the display mode may be transmitted. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform the effect control in the variable display based on the variable display time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 120 selects the specific variable display mode to be executed at each timing. You may do it. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, in the next timer interrupt). ) You may send a second command. The variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

Further, in the above embodiment, a game machine using a game medium as an example is taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and is a game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming medium such as the above is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various staging operations including the staging image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 deviate from the gist of the present invention. It is possible to change and modify it arbitrarily as long as it does not. The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of the machine. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution form of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also the form that can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. , It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being able to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S634 shown in FIG. 16) that can execute the selected specific effect (for example, a song or a moving image of the song) in an advantageous state). And the predetermined effect execution means (for example, the large prize opening prize effect processing shown in FIG. 20) capable of executing the predetermined effect (for example, the large prize opening winning effect, the large winning opening opening effect, etc.) during the execution of the specific effect. The effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing when the large winning opening is opened shown in FIG. 21 and the changing means that can change whether or not the predetermined effect is executed (for example, steps S414, S415, and S423 to S426 shown in FIG. 14). An effect control CPU 120 that executes processing) and an abnormality notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the error notification process shown in FIG. 10) that can execute abnormality notification (for example, ball removal error notification). , A detection means capable of detecting a game medium used for a game (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) (for example, an out-ball detector 90710 shown in FIGS. 129, 133, etc.) and a detection signal from the detection means are transmitted. (For example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 129), a receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, etc.), and detection. An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the signal reception state (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 130) and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning opening). The game medium is based on the normal variable winning ball device 906B, which is the second starting winning opening, the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, which is the general winning area, and the special variable winning ball device 907, which is the large winning opening. The payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) and a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state, etc., specifically, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are all off. The number of gaming media detected by the detection means (for example, the number of hit balls, etc.) in the state of Predetermined information calculated based on (number, etc.) (for example, performance information in FIG. 109, etc.) can be displayed (for example). For example, it is provided with an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 133) capable of displaying performance, etc., and when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display by the information display means is restricted. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, an error is notified and the performance display is restricted, etc.), and the abnormality notification means is used when the presence or absence of execution of the predetermined effect is changed by the change means during the abnormality notification. (For example, when the stop flag is turned on), the abnormality notification can be continuously executed (for example, see FIG. 22B and FIG. 24).

Further, as the gaming machine of the present invention, there is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. ), And the specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S634 shown in FIG. 16) that can execute the selected specific effect (for example, music) in an advantageous state. Predetermined effect execution means (for example, the large winning opening winning effect processing shown in FIG. 20 and the large winning opening winning effect processing shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing when the large winning opening is opened, and the changing means that can change the execution mode of the predetermined effect (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 15) (for example, steps S423 to FIG. 14). An effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of S426 and an abnormality notification means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the error notification process shown in FIG. 10) that can execute an abnormality notification (for example, ball removal error notification). ), A detection means capable of detecting the game medium used for the game (for example, the game area 9010, etc.) (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 shown in FIGS. 129, 133, etc.), and a detection signal from the detection means. (For example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 129) and the receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, etc.) , An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 130) and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device serving as a first starting winning opening). 906A, normal variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, general winning opening 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, winning a prize in the special variable winning ball device 907 which is the big winning opening, etc.) A payout means for paying out the medium (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) and a predetermined state (for example, a normal state, etc.) different from the advantageous state. Depending on the number of gaming media detected by the detection means (for example, the number of hit balls, etc.) in the off state, etc., and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, winning a prize in each winning opening). Predetermined information calculated based on the number of prize balls, etc. (for example, performance information in FIG. 109, etc.) can be displayed. It is equipped with information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 133) that can display performance (for example, performance display is possible), and when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the information display means displays the information. Restrictions (for example, an error is notified and performance display is limited as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132), and the abnormality notification means is used when the execution mode of a predetermined effect is changed by the changing means during the abnormality notification. (For example, when the suppression flag is turned on), the abnormality notification can be continuously executed (for example, see FIG. 22B and FIG. 24).

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect from being executed during the execution of the specific effect, which hinders the specific effect and reduces the effect of the specific effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing an inaccurate display.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the execution of the specific effect, the execution of the predetermined effect, the change of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed, the change of the execution mode, etc. are restricted. May be good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from giving inaccurate information by performing the effect in an abnormal state. The limitation is not limited to not executing the effect, but may be such as lowering the execution rate of the effect or executing the effect in a manner capable of identifying that an abnormality has been detected.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the specific effect or the mode of the predetermined effect may be changed according to the calculated predetermined information. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the calculated predetermined information and improve the interest.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, even if an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means during the abnormality notification, the abnormality notification may be continuously executed. In addition, when an abnormality in the reception status is detected by the abnormality detection means during the abnormality notification, the mode of the abnormality notification is changed so that the abnormality in the reception status can be recognized by the abnormality notification. May be good.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of preventing display of inaccurate information, a game can be executed and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc.). ) Is a game machine that can be controlled (for example, a pachinko game machine, a slot machine, etc.) and can detect a game medium (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) used for the game (for example, FIG. 129, FIG. 133). The out-ball detector 90710, etc. shown in the above, the signal line to which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734, etc. shown in FIG. 129), and the receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the signal line 90734, etc.). For example, the main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, and the abnormality detection means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, the CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 130). Etc.), and the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning slot, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning slot, the general winning slot 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, etc. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on a special variable winning ball device 907, which is a large winning opening, and a predetermined state different from the above-mentioned advantageous state (for example, a predetermined state (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.)). For example, the number of gaming media (for example, the number of balls driven) detected by the detection means in a normal state or the like, specifically, a state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc. , Predetermined information calculated based on the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening) (for example, performance information in FIG. 109). Is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 133) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible), and when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the information display is performed. Examples thereof include gaming machines that limit the display by means (for example, notify an error and limit the performance display as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
As described above, the entry of the game medium into the general winning area has an effect on the game as compared with the entry of the game medium into the starting winning area where the variable display of the special symbol is executed by the entry of the game medium. Is low. Further, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but in this advantageous state, the game medium enters the specific winning area where the game medium can enter. Compared to the approach, the player's interest is low, and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Due to such circumstances, the game nails may be maintained on the game hall side so that it is substantially difficult for the game medium to enter the general winning area.

However, on the gaming machine maker side, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, it is desirable that the game field should be in a maintenance state of the game nails so that the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. It is necessary to raise the player's interest in the entry of the game medium into the general prize area and to make the player aware of the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general prize area.

Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area. In the gaming machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the gaming machine having a general winning area.

Hereinafter, other form examples will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 27 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 903a formed in a frame shape that is openably and closably provided on the gaming machine frame 903. The gaming machine frame 903 is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism. This outer frame is fixed to a so-called gaming island where a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are arranged side by side. By opening the gaming machine frame 903 with respect to the outer frame, a clerk or the like can see the back side of the gaming machine frame 903 and the inside of the gaming island.

The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area 9010 surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched and driven into the game area 9010 from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, the game area 9010 includes a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B. The game area 9010 is an area on the game board 902 through which a game ball can pass, and the left side is the left game area 9010A and the right side is the right game area 9010B with reference to the center of the game area 9010.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 27, on the right side of the game area 9010). The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and are identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", respectively. do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Not limited. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". .. The number of special symbol display devices may be one.

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game are supported. In the decorative symbol display area, which is a variable display unit divided into a plurality of, for example, three, the decorative symbol, which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified by each, is variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 905, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. Then, in response to the start of either the change of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A or the change of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special figure game, "left". , "Middle", and "Right", the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R start to change the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 905 are displayed. , The fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A or the special figure using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. The derivation display of the display result means that the identification information such as the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) to end the variable display.

In the image display device 905, as display areas to be the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, three areas may be provided so as to be bonded or separated, or to be bonded and separated. .. The display operation in the image display device 905 is controlled by the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 28. When the first special symbol display device 904A is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the image display device 905 to execute the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special symbol is executed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 904B, the image display device 905 executes the effect display along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumerical characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters. There are numbers "1" to "eight", English letters "A" to "H", eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters or symbols and a character image, and the like. Is composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure.). In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, decorative symbols (designs consisting of the characters "abrupt") and blank symbols (also referred to as "2R probable big hits") and blank symbols (also called "2R probable big hits") A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. Each of the decorative symbols has a corresponding symbol number. The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a losing combination can be configured.

During the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, from the one with the smallest symbol number to the one with the largest symbol number, from the top to the bottom. A flowing scroll display is performed, and when the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the decorative symbol having the minimum symbol number (for example, "1") is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the decorative symbol display area 905L on the "left"), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest number may be displayed subsequently.

At the lower right of the display screen of the image display device 905, fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B for displaying the fourth symbol following the decorative symbol, the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. The 4th symbol display area 905A for the 2nd special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the 2nd special symbol, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. A fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special figure is provided.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (however, to be exact, the variable display of the decorative symbol is specified as a variable pattern on the CPU 90120 side for effect control. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the command.) When performing the effect using the image display device 905, for example, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. The mode of production is diversifying, such as the performance of a moving object that shields all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 905, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, is the state of the fourth symbol currently being variablely displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 905? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not it is. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always variably displayed by a constant operation and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 905A and the 2nd special for the 1st special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 905B for a figure may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

In the variable display (variable display) of the fourth symbol, the fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B have a predetermined display color (for example, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is white, and the second special symbol is the second. 4 The symbol display area 905B is black), and is realized by continuing a blinking state in which lighting (display) and extinguishing (non-display) are repeated at predetermined time intervals. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol. Synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. Will remain. The display color may be different depending on the jackpot type. Further, when the missed symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the missed symbol. Will remain. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display) in the fourth symbol display area 905A.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. Will remain. The display color may be different depending on the jackpot type. Further, when the missed symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the missed symbol. Will remain. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display) in the fourth symbol display area 905B.

A start winning memory display area 905H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display is performed. Here, the hold of the variable display occurs when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A or the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B (starting winning). do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. It will be done.

As an example, the start winning memory display area 905H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied based on the occurrence of the start prize. There is. Then, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening, the display is hidden. One of the display parts in the mode (transparent color) (for example, the display part at the left end of the display parts in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. Further, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts in the embodiment is changed to a red display. After that, when either the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure (first start condition) or the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure (second start condition) is satisfied, for example. The display at the leftmost display portion is removed, and the display at each display portion is moved to the left one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to the blue display or the red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display parts whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

That is, when a start winning is generated, the holding information (object shown in a circle in FIGS. 27, 57, etc.) corresponding to the special figure game executed based on the starting winning is stored in the starting winning memory display area 905H. Display control that is newly displayed is performed. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left in the order in which the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information is satisfied (in the above example, it is also the order in which the start condition is satisfied). If a new start prize is generated when n hold information is displayed (when n special game games are held), the n + 1th hold information from the left corresponds to the new start prize. Will be newly displayed. Then, when the start condition of the reserved special figure game is satisfied, the leftmost reserved information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth (n ≧ 2) reserved information from the left is left one by one. It will be shifted to and displayed in the n-1st position.

The order in which the start conditions of the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions occur, and the start condition of the special figure game relating to the second special figure is higher than the start condition of the special figure game relating to the first special figure. It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 2 priority change). On the contrary, the start condition of the special figure game related to the first special figure is satisfied with priority over the start condition of the special figure game related to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority change). You can do it.

In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the player or the like may be able to recognize the special figure reserved memory number by displaying a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number. A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 905H or in place of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 27, together with the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special symbol hold storages is displayed on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A display device 9025A and a second hold display device 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A identifiablely displays the first hold storage number as the number of effective start winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. The second hold indicator 9025B identifiablely displays the second hold storage number as the number of valid start winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B. The first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B have, for example, the number (for example, 4) LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values (for example, "4") in each of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number, respectively. Is configured to include. Further, on the right side of the image display device 905, a movable accessory 901000 is provided.

The movable accessory 901000 has a built-in motor and lamp for operating the star-shaped member. The movable accessory 901000 is adapted to operate (rotate operation and lighting) when an effect of notifying a big hit, for example, a variable result advancement effect or a look-ahead advancement effect, which will be described later, is executed.

Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normally open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9027 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball does not enter or enters the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball enters the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory is on. It becomes an easy expansion and opening state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 28. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 28. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ) If the following, the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ) If the following, the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

Below the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907 is provided. The special variable winning ball device 907 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 28, and the large winning opening door changes between an open state and a closed state. Form the mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening when the solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door is in the off state. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 907 is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. 28. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In this way, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state. Figure When the start condition for starting the game is not satisfied, the variable display is held. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first hold storage is stored. The number is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second hold storage is stored. The number is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1. The added value of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number may be the total reserved storage number or the special figure reserved storage number.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 27, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display device 9020 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The normal design (also called "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). The ordinary symbol display 9020 variably displays a plurality of types of ordinary symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. The ordinary symbol display 9020 is not limited to a variable display of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-" as ordinary symbols, for example, "○" and "×". Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the indicated decorative lamps (or LEDs) or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as "left", "middle", and "right" in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gates 9041A and 9041B.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. There is a winning area.

The general winning openings 9050A to 9050D are composed of ball receiving members projecting forward (on the player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of the piece. Therefore, two or more game balls are not connected in the horizontal direction and pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the distance between the ball receiving members provided with the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D is such that at least one game ball can pass through. Further, a winning ball device for switching the opening and closing of the openings of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B for switching the opening and closing of the second starting winning opening) is provided. It is always open. Further, even if the game ball wins in the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, neither the start condition of the variable display of the special figure game nor the start condition of the variable display of the normal figure game is satisfied based on the prize.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the fact that the game balls have won a prize in the general prize opening, but the present invention is not limited to this. With the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, a variable winning ball device, for example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B for controlling the opening / closing of the second starting winning opening, or a special variable for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening. Activating the winning ball device 907 to facilitate the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening or the large winning opening may be a specific value given by the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

Further, the specific value given to the player may be different depending on the general winning opening. For example, when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, 5 Each prize ball is given, but if a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, ten prize balls are given (that is, specific values of different sizes are given. It may be granted). Further, the specific value given when a game ball wins a prize in the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is a predetermined number of prize balls, but the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening. When the game ball wins the 9050D, the normal variable winning ball device 906B or the special variable winning ball device 907 may be operated (that is, a specific value of a different type is given).

Further, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. For example, the winning ball may be executed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. Is given, and the variable winning ball device operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the type of specific value is different), so that different effects are executed. Is also good. In addition, there are cases where 10 prize balls are given according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and 5 prize balls are given according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. (That is, when the magnitude of the specific value is different), different effects may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 28, the winning of the game ball to the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, the third general winning opening 9050C, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the first general winning opening corresponding to each. It is detected by the mouth switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. When a game ball is detected by the first general prize opening switch 9024A, the second general prize opening switch 9024B, the third general prize opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general prize opening switch 9024D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls Is paid out as a prize ball.

As described above, in this embodiment, by providing the winning opening switches corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, the game ball wins a prize in the general winning openings in the game control microcomputer 90100. It is possible to detect not only what was done, but also which general winning opening the game ball won.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for each general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning opening provided in the left game area 9010A has been won) is provided for the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. , A common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that the general winning opening provided in the right game area 9010B has been won) is provided for the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. You can do it. In addition, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that one of the general winning openings has been won) is provided for all the general winning openings of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. You may be able to do it.

At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings. The game ball taken into the out port is collected on the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) connecting to the out port. The game balls that have won in each winning opening (1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening, 1st to 4th general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball set gutter (not shown) and are balls. It is designed to be collected on the game island via the collection passage. An out-ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out ball detector, the game ball driven into the game area 9010 (the game ball guided to the out opening without winning any winning opening, and the winning ball set by winning any winning opening. Game balls collected in the gutter) Detects all game balls. Every time a game ball is detected by the out ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 9012, so that the effect control CPU 90120 totals the number of game balls driven into the game area 9010, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. If the out-ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the value of the counter increases by a certain number (for example, 10). The out number increase signal may be output to the board 9012 so that the out number can be totaled in a fixed number unit (for example, 10 units) on the effect control CPU 90120 side.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and game effect lamps 909 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, ordinary winning ball device 906A, ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 903a, there is an upper plate 9060 that holds (stores) a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine so that it can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. It is provided. For example, an operation button 9030 that can be operated by a player by a pressing operation or the like is installed at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate 9060.

A keyhole 9061 for a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the upper plate 9060. By inserting the key corresponding to the keyhole 9061 into the keyhole 9061 and rotating the key in one direction, for example, counterclockwise, the glass door frame 903a can be opened forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903. Further, by inserting the key into the keyhole 9061 and rotating the key in another direction, for example, clockwise, the gaming machine frame 903 can be opened forward with respect to the outer frame. In the locking device, a spring is built in the keyhole 9061, and when the key is inserted into the keyhole 9061, rotated counterclockwise or clockwise, and then the key is released or pulled out, the direction in which the keyhole 9061 is turned is opposite. Turn in the direction and return to the neutral position. When the keyhole 9061 is in the neutral position, the glass door frame 903a can be closed and locked with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, and the gaming machine frame 903 can be closed and locked with respect to the outer frame. Is possible. In addition, by opening the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, maintenance of the gaming board (gauge board including game nails and winning openings) 902 (for example, measures to eliminate ball clogging). Alternatively, the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032, which will be described later, can be operated.

Immediately below the upper plate 9060, a lower plate 9062 for storing a game ball that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 9060 is provided, and in the lower right of the upper plate 9060, the game ball as a game medium is directed toward the game area. A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 9063 operated by a player or the like for firing is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle 9063 adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor included in the hitting ball launching device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

The operation button 9030 is a jog dial that can be pressed and is rotatable. The operation button 9030 is not limited to one that can be pressed or rotated, and may be one that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. It may be operable, or it may be capable of pressing and tilting operations such as a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 9030, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 9030 may be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation action performed on the operation button 9030 is a press detection switch (not shown) for detecting the press of the operation button 9030 and a rotary encoder (rotary encoder) for detecting the rotation direction and rotation amount of the operation button (jog dial) 9030. Not shown).

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the gaming ball that has passed through the first passing gate 9041A provided in the left gaming area 9010A and the second passing gate 9041B provided in the right gaming area 9010B becomes the first passing gate 9041A shown in FIG. 28. The normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9020, such as that it was detected by the corresponding first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B corresponding to the second pass gate 9041B, is After the establishment, the ordinary symbol game by the ordinary symbol display 9020 is started based on the establishment of the ordinary symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. To.

In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time, which is the normal symbol fluctuation time, elapses after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (deriving display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "hit the normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilted control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilted position. However, normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A, the game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 28. After the first start condition is satisfied, the game is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state. In the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B, the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 28. After the second start condition is satisfied, the game is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started and the predetermined time that becomes the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol Derived display of the confirmed special symbol (special symbol display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol (missing symbol) other than the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". ". The specific special symbol (big hit symbol) as the definite special symbol is different depending on the type of the jackpot. For example, the definite special symbol is different between the probable variable jackpot and the non-probable variable jackpot. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific state in which a round game advantageous to the player (simply also referred to as a "round") is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the jackpot gaming state controlled after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball device 907 is set to a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number as the first period. By opening the large winning opening in the period until (for example, 9) winning balls are generated, a round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. To. In this way, the opening / closing plate with the large winning opening open during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902, and then closes the large winning opening, thereby causing a special variable winning ball device. The 907 is changed to a second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the big hit state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is, for example, 15 times. It should be noted that a plurality of types of jackpot types with different numbers of executions of round games may be provided.

After the jackpot state ends, as one of the advantageous states advantageous to the player, time reduction control is executed in which the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. It is controlled to the time saving state in which the time is shortened, or to the probabilistic state in which the probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time shortening control.

Here, the normal state is a normal state as a game state different from a specific state such as a big hit game state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, when a system reset is performed). The same control as in the state where the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on is performed. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when either of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is satisfied first. Then, just finish. In addition, in the probabilistic state, in the variable display of each special figure game and decorative symbol, the probability that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is further controlled to the big hit game state is higher than in the normal state and the time saving state. improves. Such a probabilistic state continues until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" or a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of the special figure game is executed.

Jackpot A jackpot (type) that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the game state ends is also referred to as a probabilistic jackpot. A jackpot (type) that is controlled to a time-saving state without being controlled to a probability-changing state after the jackpot gaming state ends is also referred to as a non-probability-changing jackpot.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each normal symbol game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per normal", and control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the variable display result being "per normal". The second start condition is to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Controls that are advantageous to the player are performed by increasing the possibility of being established. In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state, which is advantageous for the player, is also referred to as a high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the big hit game state is more likely to occur than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the probabilistic state or the time saving state. The state in which the high opening control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state in which the high opening control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is used. , Of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started corresponding to the start of any special figure game. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may become a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variable symbol”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which fluctuations continue, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" (for example, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905R of "left" and "right") in advance. When the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumerical value of "7") that constitutes the specified jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that has not yet been stopped and displayed is displayed. In the display state where the decorative symbol is fluctuating in the symbol display area 905C, etc., or in all or part of the decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", "right", the decorative symbol is a big hit. It is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while constituting all or a part of the combination.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back a moving image different from the decorative pattern, and changing the variable mode of the decorative pattern, a different production operation from before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a change in the display mode of the character image, a change in the display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect display (or simply a reach effect). For the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) on the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909, and the like are brought into the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the previous operation mode. As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And, in each reach mode, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") is different. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are preset. Then, when the reach mode of super reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result becomes "big hit" (big hit reliability) is higher than that when the reach mode of normal reach appears.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". A variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed depending on the variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "pseudo-ream" and "slip" can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to the determination of the fluctuation pattern on the main board 9011 side. Whether or not it is decided.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, the decoration is different from the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream" or "slip", for example, displaying an effect image such as a predetermined character image or a message image. Notify the player that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state and that the variable display result may be a "big hit" due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect for doing so may be executed.

When the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and is predetermined. The definite decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination of is sometimes displayed as a stop. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "reachless loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

When the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the reach effect is executed or without the reach effect being executed, the definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach loss combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss". The definite decoration symbol that is a non-reach combination and the definite decoration symbol that is a reach loss combination are collectively referred to as a definite decoration symbol that is a loss combination (non-specific combination).

When the special symbol that is the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. Later, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 905 is "1". Any one of the decorative symbols from "8" is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Anything is fine.

In addition, after the decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the look-ahead that announces and notifies that the pending data whose special symbol display result is "big hit" is stored during the execution of the round in the jackpot game state is pre-reading. The notice effect may be executed.

As described above, the game area 9010 includes a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) to adjust the left game area 9010A. It is possible to switch between a left-handed shot that shoots a game ball toward the right side and a right-handed shot that shoots a game ball toward the right game area 9010B.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 9010A (when the game ball enters the left game area 9010A), the right game area is arranged by arranging a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). The game ball is designed to win a prize in the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game ball is fired at 9010B. In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is longer than when the gaming state is the probabilistic change state and the time reduction state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol". Since the probability of becoming is low, the ratio of the game ball launched into the left game area 9010A in the normal state to win the second start winning opening is extremely low as compared with the ratio of winning the first starting winning opening. There is.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the gaming ball is launched into the right gaming area 9010B (when the gaming ball enters the right gaming area 9010B), the left is due to the arrangement of a gaming nail or a gaming ball guiding member (not shown). Compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the game area 9010A, the rate at which the game ball wins in the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win in the first starting winning opening. There is. Therefore, even if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, the ratio of the game ball winning the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is left-handed in the normal state. Occasionally, it is extremely low compared to the rate at which the game ball wins in the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player will hit left in the normal state.

Further, the ratio of the game ball launched in the right game area 9010B to pass through the second passage gate 9041B is such that the game ball launched in the left game area 9010A is the first due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-passage gate 9041A. The ratio of the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B to the second start winning opening in the open state is the rate of the game fired in the left game area 9010A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins the second starting winning opening in the open state.

Then, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is shorter than in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol hit" is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the rate at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when hitting right in the probable change state and the time saving state is left in the probable changing state and the time saving state. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when hitting. Therefore, the player will hit right in the probable change state and the time saving state.

Further, the ratio of the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B to the large winning opening in the open state is that the game ball fired in the left game area 9010A is due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of winning a prize in the open large prize opening. Therefore, the player will hit right in the big hit game state. In this way, the player strikes left in the normal state, switches to right-handed when the big hit game state occurs, continues right-handed in the probable change state or time-saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and returns to the normal state. With the transition (for example, the end of the probabilistic state without the big hit game state or the time saving state), the player will return to left-handed.

Further, the ratio of the game ball launched in the left gaming area 9010A to the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left gaming area 9010A is the ratio of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050A. The game ball launched into the right game area 9010B due to the position where the general winning opening 9050B is provided and the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown) is the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050A. It is higher than the rate of winning 9050B. On the other hand, the ratio of the game ball launched in the right game area 9010B to the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D provided in the right game area 9010B is the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth. The game ball launched into the left game area 9010A due to the position where the general winning opening 9050D is provided and the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown) is the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 9050D.

For some or all of the plurality of general winning openings (first general winning opening 9050A and second general winning opening 9050B) provided in the left game area 9010A, only the game ball launched into the left game area 9010A It is possible to win a prize, and the game ball launched in the right game area 9010B may be configured not to win a prize, and a plurality of general prize openings (third general prize opening 9050C and fourth general prize opening) provided in the right game area 9010B may be set. For a part or all of 9050D), only the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B can win a prize, and the game ball fired in the left game area 9010A may not win a prize.

In this way, since the left-handed strike is performed in the normal state, there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B among the four general winning openings, and the big hit gaming state and Since right-handed strikes are performed in the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D among the four general winning openings. As the game area where the game ball is launched changes according to the game state and the like, the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win also changes. In the left game area 9010A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball can easily win, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probability change state and the time saving state. In the area 9010B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to win (or vice versa), so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening may change depending on the game state.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 28. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the staging control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The power supply board is a board that supplies power to each board such as the main board 9011 and the staging control board 9012. The power supply board is connected to the main board 9011, the staging control board 9012, and other boards such as the voice control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014, and the relay board 9015 to supply power. A power switch is provided on the power supply board, and when the power switch is turned on, power is turned on and power supply from the power supply board to each board is started. Further, by turning off the power switch, the power supply to each board is stopped. Further, the main board 9011 includes a payout control board. The payout control board may be provided separately from the main board 9011. The payout control board is a board for controlling the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board is composed of a ball payout device (not shown) or the like in response to reception of a prize ball number command (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 9011) in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set. The payout mechanism (the mechanism for paying out the prize balls) is driven to execute the payout of the prize balls.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a control function. From the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that captures detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9027 and 9028 is mounted.

Further, the switch circuit 90110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 (details will be described later) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 90100. As will be described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is for detecting an abnormality generated in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The staging control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, and receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 to receive an image display device 905, speakers 908L, and 908R. And various circuits for controlling the effect operation by the electric component for the effect such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 produces effects such as display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 909 and the like. It is equipped with a function to determine the control content for causing a predetermined effect operation to be performed on the electric component for use.

The audio control board 9013 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs audio from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 909 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives it.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main board 9011 has a first gate switch 9021A, a second gate switch 9021B, a first start port switch 9022A, a second start port switch 9022B, a count switch 9023, and a first general winning port switch 9024A. , The wiring for transmitting the detection signal from the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D is connected.

The first gate switch 9021A, the second gate switch 9021B, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D are, for example, Anything having an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor, may be used. Further, on the main board 9011, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display 9020, a first hold display 9025A, a second hold display 9025B, and a normal figure hold display 9025C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. Further, a wiring for transmitting a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is connected to the main board 9011.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the staging control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The main board 9011 is provided with, for example, a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 90100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 9011 toward the staging control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, and blocks the input of the signal from the relay board 9015 to the main board 9011. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the side of the staging control board 9012 or the relay board 9015 to the main board 9011 side.

The relay board 9015 may be provided with, for example, a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 9011 to the staging control board 9012. In each transmission direction regulation circuit, an anode is connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 9011, and a diode having a cathode connected to the effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 9012 and one end connected to the diode cathode. The other end is composed of a resistor connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulation circuit can block the input of the signal from the effect control board 9012 to the relay board 9015, and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the staging control board 9012 side to the main board 9011 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulation circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal on the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 90100 and the main board side connector on the main board 9011. By providing the above, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 9011 from the outside.

The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted / received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. It contains lamp control commands used to control lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

Such effect control commands include, for example, a game state specification command for designating a game state (normal state, probability change state, or time saving state), a variation start command for specifying a variation start in a special figure game, and a special in a special figure game. A variable pattern specification command that specifies a variation time of a symbol or a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol on the image display device 905, a variable display result notification command that specifies a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol, and a decorative symbol on the image display device 905. A decorative symbol stop command that specifies the stop of the variable display of, a jackpot start designation command that specifies the start or end of the jackpot game state, a jackpot end designation command, and a game ball wins in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. The start winning command that is output when, the general winning opening designation command that is output when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the big winning opening winning command that is output when the game ball wins in the big winning opening, etc. included.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and update of numerical data indicating random values independently of CPU 90103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 90104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 90101 by the CPU 90103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data in which the CPU 90103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The variable data read operation, the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. And transmission operation to output various signals is also performed.

In this way, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform the game control. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 90100 (or the CPU 90103) executes the game control computer 90100 (or the CPU 90103). (Or perform processing), specifically, the CPU 90103 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on other boards different from the main board 9011.

As shown in FIG. 28, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the effect control CPU 90120. The circuit 90124 and the I / O 90125 are mounted. As an example, in the staging control board 9012, the staging control CPU 90120 executes a staging control program read from the ROM 90121 to execute a process for controlling the staging operation by the staging electrical components. At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variation data to the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variation data, and the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored fluctuation data, reception operation for effect control CPU 90120 to receive input of various signals from outside of effect control board 9012 via I / O 90125, effect control CPU 90120 for I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the staging control board 9012 via the O90125 is also performed.

The effect control board 9012 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 9013. A wiring for transmitting an illuminated signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 9014, a wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 901000, and the like are connected. Further, on the staging control board 9012, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation button 9030 has been detected is transmitted from a press detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Further, on the staging control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode changeover switch 9031 described later, and operation in the display changeover switch 9032 described later. Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the unit (first position or second position) is also connected.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the staging control board 9012 includes an image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R, light emitters such as a game effect lamp 909 and decorative LEDs, an operation button 9030, a movable accessory 901000, and a staging accessory. In order to control the staging operation using the staging device (electric component for staging) including the movable member provided in the staging control pattern, a plurality of types of pattern data constituting the staging control pattern are stored in advance.

The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 28 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120 or the like. For example, the display control unit 90123 is for executing various effect displays such as variable display of decorative patterns and effect display in reach effect by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. To control. The display control unit 90123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 confirms, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode changeover switch 9031. Includes an input port for capturing various signals such as a enable signal and a signal for confirming the state of the display changeover switch 9032, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. It is composed. For example, from the output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command transmitted to the audio control board 9013 (sound signal), and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 9014. A command (drive signal) or the like to be transmitted to the movable accessory 901000 is output, such as (illumination signal) being output.

The voice control board 9013 is equipped with, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like. As an example, in the voice control board 9013, the sound number data shown in the sound effect signal transmitted from the staging control board 9012 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voices and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 908L and 908R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate a voice or a sound effect. The stored data in the voice data ROM may be composed of data showing the output mode of voice and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

For example, an input / output driver, a lamp driver, and the like are mounted on the lamp control board 9014. As an example, in the lamp control board 9014, the illumination signal transmitted from the staging control board 9012 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the illumination signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 909 or the like.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the generated abnormality is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 908L and 908R via the voice control board 9013, or the lamp control board 9014 is used. The lighting / extinguishing drive of the game effect lamp 909, the decorative LED, etc. is controlled via the light to notify by light, or an abnormal notification image (error message) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123. Notify by displaying. Examples of the abnormality include a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, and the like, which are detected by using the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 or the like.

The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is composed of one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is not limited to the sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches not corresponding to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 may be configured to detect an abnormality. One or more sensors and the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 are prepared according to each type of abnormality. The specific content of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 may be determined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like. Abnormalities that occur in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are phenomena that do not occur or are extremely unlikely to occur in normal games performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, magnetic abnormalities and vibration abnormalities that occur when there is an illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 901. Phenomena such as abnormal radio waves) and phenomena that can hinder the progress of games, and in particular, phenomena that require notification to players and employees of game halls (pachinko shops, etc.).

Examples of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 include a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, etc.). For example, these sensors and the like may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. A known method can be appropriately used for detecting the abnormality. When the game control microcomputer 90100 detects a magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc. based on the output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, the abnormality detection designation command for specifying that an abnormality has occurred is the main board. It is transmitted from 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the abnormality has occurred due to the display of the error message in the image display device 905, the output of the warning sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, the light emission mode when the abnormality occurs in the game effect lamp 909, and the like. Notification is performed. For example, when an abnormality occurs, as shown in FIG. 69 (f), an image of the characters "An error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

Here, not only the abnormality has occurred due to the notification means such as the image display device 905, the speaker 908L, 908R, and the game effect lamp 909, but also any of the types of magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, and opening of the front door. It may be possible to notify identifiable whether or not an abnormality has been detected.

The magnetic anomaly notification is an abnormality notification performed when a magnetic anomaly (an abnormality in which a magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 901, in which case, there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected. There are fraudulent acts such as moving the game medium with a magnet to make the winning opening win a prize, or clogging a predetermined area with the game medium to guide the game medium to the winning opening. Notification of a magnetic anomaly prevents such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a magnetic anomaly by determining whether the signal from the magnetic sensor exhibits a magnetic force equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (indicating a magnetic force → having a magnetic anomaly). When a magnetic anomaly is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the magnetic anomaly has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the staging control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the magnetic anomaly. For example, an image with the characters "A magnetic error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, an abnormality notification that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine provided with a special variable winning ball device 907. There is a fraudulent act of intentionally shaking the pachinko gaming machine to change the flow direction of the game medium toward the winning opening such as the large winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is an abnormality (vibration abnormality) due to vibration by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (strongness equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold). Shows vibration → There is vibration abnormality). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the vibration abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the staging control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the vibration abnormality. For example, an image with the characters "A vibration error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

The radio wave abnormality notification is a notification of an abnormality performed when a radio wave abnormality (an abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko gaming machine 901, in which case, there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected. By applying radio waves to the start port switch (1st start port switch 9022A and 2nd start port switch 9022B), count switch 9023, etc., these switches can be switched on / off to illegally generate prizes and win prize balls. There is cheating to get. By notifying the radio wave abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, etc.) is provided. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether or not the signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating reception of the predetermined radio wave → presence of radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the staging control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the radio wave abnormality. For example, an image with the characters "A radio wave error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

Both the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are configured by a DIP switch (Dual In-line Package switch), and are provided outside the game area of the game board 902. The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 configured by the DIP switch switch the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of the slide type, the position of the knob is set to one end side and the other end side. By switching to the side), the process (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 90120 can be switched. When the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the game machine frame 903, the glass door frame 903a covers the front surface of the game board 902, so that the player cannot operate the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032. It has become. The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are provided by the player via the glass door frame 903a in a state where the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the game machine frame 903 (the state shown in FIG. 27). It is not shown in FIG. 27 because it is installed in an invisible position.

As described above, the clerk of the game hall inserts the key into the keyhole 9061, opens the locking device (not shown), and opens the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the game machine frame 903. The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 provided on the game board 902 can be operated (dIP switch changeover). When the operation of the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 is completed, the glass door frame 903a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, and the key is inserted into the keyhole 9061 to lock the device (shown in the figure). ) Is closed.

When the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the first position, the voltage of the mode changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 90120 is in the Low state, and when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position, the effect control is performed. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is set to High. When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 has the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 in the first position, that is, the image display device 905 has information for the player (for example, a demo). It is specified that the game mode is to display the screen, etc.), and the information of the winning number management table, which will be described later, is not displayed on the image display device 905. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position, that is, the information for the clerk in the image display device 905 (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode is for displaying (the number of winnings to each winning opening, etc.), and the information of the winning number management table, which will be described later, is displayed on the image display device 905.

When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 90120 is in the Low state, and when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, the effect control is performed. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is set to High. When the voltage of the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 905 is informed of the number of winnings to the general winning opening. By specifying that the display is not permitted, it is prohibited to display the information based on the display control table (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) on the image display device 905, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 905 wins a prize in the general winning opening. It is specified that the permission to display the number is given, and the information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings to the general winning opening) is permitted to be displayed on the image display device 905. do.

In this embodiment, the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are provided on the front side (the surface facing the player) of the game board 902, but the mode changeover switch 9031 and / or the display changeover switch 9032 is used. , May be provided on the back surface side (game island side) of the game board 902. In such a configuration, by rotating the gaming machine frame 903 forward with respect to the outer frame, the mode changeover switch 9031 and / or the display changeover switch 9032 provided on the back surface side of the game board 902 Can be operated.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the staging control board 9012, there is a start winning command as described above. The start winning command includes a start winning opening designation command indicating whether the starting winning opening has occurred in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, or the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. There is a start winning judgment result designation command and the like indicating a big hit determination result and a big hit type determination result at the time of winning a game ball.

The CPU 90103 is the effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When a prize is detected, a random number for determining a big hit and a random number for determining a big hit type are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted random number for determining a big hit and a random number for determining a big hit type are used as the first random number in the random number storage area for the first special figure. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize), and a command for designating the "first starting winning opening" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. Further, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Judgment of whether or not the start prize is determined.

In this start winning determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, a start winning determination result specification command that specifies "missing" is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the extracted (stored) big hit type judgment random number is further added to the big hit type judgment table for the first special figure for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set. For example, a command for specifying "non-probability change jackpot" or a command for specifying "probability variation jackpot" is set as a command for specifying a determination result at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (designating the "first starting winning opening") and the starting winning determination result designation command are output to the staging control board 9012.

The CPU 90103 responds to the start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening (that is, the first starting winning opening) in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value. When an invalid start prize (invalid start prize) that is paid out but is not the target of the special figure game is detected, a command to specify the "first start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening designation command, and the judgment result at the start prize is specified. As a command, set blank data that specifies that it is not a valid start prize. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“first starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the staging control board 9012.

The CPU 90103 has a valid start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening, that is, a game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When the winning is detected, the big hit judgment random number and the big hit type judgment random number are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted big hit judgment random number and the big hit type judgment random number are used in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize), and a command for designating the "second starting winning opening" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. Further, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Executes the start winning judgment to determine whether or not.

In this start winning determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, a start winning determination result specification command that specifies "missing" is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the extracted (stored) big hit type judgment random number is further added to the big hit type judgment table for the second special figure for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set. For example, a command for specifying "non-probability change jackpot" or a command for specifying "probability variation jackpot" is set as a command for specifying a determination result at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command are output to the staging control board 9012.

The CPU 90103 responds to the start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (that is, the second starting winning opening) in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value. When an invalid start prize (invalid start prize) that is paid out but is not the target of the special figure game is detected, a command to specify the "second start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening designation command, and the judgment result at the start prize is specified. As a command, set blank data that specifies that it is not a valid start prize. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the staging control board 9012.

In this embodiment, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the start winning is determined based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, and based on the determination result. Although the look-ahead notice effect is executed, it is not limited to such a form, and the variation pattern of the variable display corresponding to the start prize is determined based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of the start prize. The look-ahead notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is a fluctuation pattern of super reach, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than the case where the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach. Then it is good.

Specifically, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining a variation pattern from the random number circuit 90104, and uses the extracted random number for determining a variation pattern for a big hit determination. Along with the random number and the random number for determining the jackpot type, the random numbers are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the random number storage area for the first special figure. Further, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern from the random number circuit 90104, and uses the extracted random number for determining a fluctuation pattern as a random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for jackpot determination. Along with the random number for type determination, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the random number storage area for the second special figure.

Here, the ROM 90101 corresponds to each of the deviation pattern determination table in which the random number range corresponding to each of the deviation variation patterns shown in FIG. 34 (A) is set and the jackpot variation pattern shown in FIG. 34 (B). The fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits in which the random number range is set is stored.

When the determination result of the start winning determination (display result specified by the start winning determination result specification command) is "missing", the CPU 90103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table and extracts (stores) it. The random number for determining the variation pattern is determined to be included in the random number range of which variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the random number for determining the variation pattern is specified, and the specified variation pattern is "non-reach off". , "Normal reach loss" or "Super reach loss", set the start winning variation pattern determination result specification command to specify which of the variation patterns.

On the other hand, the CPU 90103 changes for a big hit when the judgment result of the start winning judgment (display result specified by the start winning judgment result specification command) is either "non-probability variable jackpot" or "probable variable jackpot". With reference to the pattern determination table, it is determined which variation pattern random number range the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination random number is included in, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is specified. Then, a command for specifying a variation pattern at the time of starting winning, which specifies whether the specified variation pattern is a "normal reach jackpot" or a "super reach jackpot", is set.

When the CPU 90103 detects an invalid start winning, the CPU 90103 sets blank data for designating that it is not a valid start winning as a command for specifying a variation pattern at the time of starting winning.

Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set start winning variation pattern determination result designation command to the staging control board 9012 as a start winning command together with the start winning opening designation command and the start winning determination result designation command described above.

The effect control CPU 90120 is a start winning opening designation command designated by the "first starting winning opening" and a start winning determination result specification command including valid data that is not blank data (and a start including valid data that is not blank data). When the winning variation pattern determination result specification command) is received, the starting winning determination result specification command (and the starting winning variation pattern determination result specification command) is first held in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of storages (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize), and the start winning slot designation command designated by the "second starting winning slot" and valid data that is not blank data. When a start winning judgment result specification command including (and a start winning variation pattern determination result specification command including valid data other than blank data) is received, the start winning determination result specification command (and start winning variation pattern determination) is received. The result designation command) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure. The staging control CPU 90120 confirms the start winning determination result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area, so that the first special feature is set before the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to estimate the display result (and fluctuation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure and execute the look-ahead notice effect.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening designation command designated as the "first starting winning opening" and a starting winning determination result specification command including blank data (as well as a starting winning variation pattern determination result specification command including blank data). When the It is possible to store the winning history to the first starting winning opening in the winning history storage area, which will be described later, without storing it in the start winning command storage area (excluded from the execution target of the look-ahead notice effect). When the start winning opening designation command specified by "start winning opening" and the starting winning judgment result specification command including blank data (and the starting winning variation pattern judgment result specification command including blank data) are received, the second starting winning opening is entered. By specifying that an invalid start winning has occurred, the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) is not stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure (look-ahead). (Excluded from the execution target of the advance notice effect), it is possible to store the winning history in the second starting winning opening in the winning history storage area described later.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the staging control board 9012, there is a variation pattern designation command as described above. As shown below, when the main board 9011 starts the variable display of the special symbol, the main board 9011 determines the fluctuation pattern according to the special symbol display result to be derived and displayed, and notifies the effect control board 9012 of the fluctuation pattern. Outputs a command to specify a variation pattern. The effect control data corresponding to each variation pattern is stored in advance in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012, and the effect control CPU 90120 is for effect control corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern designation command. Select the data and execute the effect control according to the selected effect control data.

When the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the CPU 90103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure. In addition, among the random numbers for determining the variation pattern, the random numbers for determining the jackpot and the random numbers for determining the jackpot type in the first storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1), and the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent random numbers are read. The jackpot determination random number, the jackpot type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is started to determine whether or not the read out random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

In this start time determination, if the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command for specifying "missing", and together with the jackpot determination random number. It is determined which variation pattern random number set in the deviation pattern determination table includes the variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area, and the variation pattern determination random number corresponds to the random number. By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the "outlier fluctuation pattern" is determined.

When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the read big hit type judgment random number is further stored in the big hit type judgment table for the first special figure for each big hit type. It is judged which of the judgment values is matched. Then, a variable display result notification command that specifies the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for the big hit judgment and the random number for the fluctuation pattern judgment read from the head storage area are changed for the big hit. The "big hit variation pattern" is determined by determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 90103 outputs a set variable display result notification command and a variable pattern designation command for designating the determined variable pattern, together with the variable start command for designating the variable start of the first special figure.

When the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the CPU 90103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure. In addition, among the random numbers for determining the variation pattern, the random numbers for determining the jackpot and the random numbers for determining the jackpot type in the first storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1), and the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent random numbers are read. The jackpot determination random number, the jackpot type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is started to determine whether or not the read out random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

In this start time determination, if the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command for specifying "missing", and together with the jackpot determination random number. It is determined which variation pattern random number set in the deviation pattern determination table includes the variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area, and the variation pattern determination random number corresponds to the random number. By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the "outlier fluctuation pattern" is determined.

When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the read big hit type judgment random number is further stored in the big hit type judgment table for the second special figure for each big hit type. It is judged which of the judgment values is matched. Then, a variable display result notification command that specifies the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for the big hit judgment and the random number for the fluctuation pattern judgment read from the head storage area are changed for the big hit. The "big hit variation pattern" is determined by determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 90103 outputs a set variable display result notification command and a variable pattern designation command for designating the determined variable pattern, together with the variable start command for designating the variable start of the second special figure.

When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command for specifying the variation start of the first special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result specification commands (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure, the first storage area (reserved storage number). The start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) of the storage area corresponding to = 1 is deleted, and the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning) of the storage area after that is deleted. The time fluctuation pattern determination result specification command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the variation pattern in the ROM 90121, and decorates the ROM 90121 so that the reach state is established at the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the received variation pattern designation command. Controls the variable display of symbols. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern.

When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command for specifying the variation start of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result specification commands (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure, the first storage area (reserved storage number). The start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) of the storage area corresponding to = 1 is deleted, and the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning) of the storage area after that is deleted. The time fluctuation pattern determination result specification command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

Further, when the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D detects that the game ball has won in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the game ball is detected in any of the general winning openings. A general winning opening designation command for designating whether or not a prize has been won is output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the staging control board 9012. That is, when the game ball is detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A, a general winning opening designation command for designating a prize to the first general winning opening 9050A is output, and the game ball is output by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. When detected, a general winning opening designation command for designating a prize to the second general winning opening 9050B is output, and when a game ball is detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C, the third general winning opening 9050C is entered. A general winning opening designation command for designating a prize is output, and when a game ball is detected by the 4th general winning slot switch 9024D, a general winning slot designation command for specifying a prize for the 4th general winning slot 9050D is output. ..

Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and the winning of the game ball to which general winning opening based on the received general winning opening designation command. .. Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, which starting winning opening the game ball wins. It is designed to receive mouth specification commands. As a result, the effect control CPU 90120 stores information that can identify the general winning opening where the winning has occurred and information that can identify the starting winning opening where the winning has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122 according to the order in which the winning is generated. It is possible.

The effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the general winning opening designated by the received general winning opening designation command (general winning opening won by the game ball). Confirm and confirm whether the starting winning opening (starting winning opening won by the game ball) specified by the received starting winning opening designation command is either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The winning history for each general winning opening and each starting winning opening is stored in the RAM 90122. For example, if the game ball wins in the order of the second general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening 9050C, [the second general winning opening] The history of the winning opening, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening] is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122.

Further, when the winning to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 issues a starting winning opening designation command and a starting winning determination result designation command. , You may send it before the general winning opening designation command. For example, detection by any of the starting port switches 9022A and the second starting port switch 9022B, and by any of the general winning port switches 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D. When the detection is confirmed almost at the same time (for example, within the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the start winning opening designation command and the starting winning opening determination result designation command as the general winning slot designation command. It is better to give priority to sending first. With such a transmission order, it is understood that the effect control CPU 90120 has already received the start winning opening designation command and the starting winning opening determination result designation command when the general winning opening designation command is received. As a specific effect to be executed based on the winning of the general winning opening, it is possible to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the previously received start winning determination result designation command.

If the general winning opening is awarded multiple times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 shall transmit a plurality of general winning opening designation commands according to a predetermined priority. do. For example, when the detection by the first general winning opening switch 9024A and the detection by the second general winning opening switch 9024B are confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, within the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 90100 , You may give priority to the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the general winning opening that is more difficult to win. In addition, if the number of prize balls to be awarded differs depending on the general winning opening, the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the general winning opening with a larger number of winning openings may be given priority and sent first. good.

Further, when the count switch 9023 detects that the game ball has won the big prize opening, the big winning opening winning command specifying that the game ball has won the big winning opening is issued from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012. Is output to. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening based on the received large winning opening winning command, and the winning history to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening described above can be specified. Similar to the history, it is possible to store the winning history for the large winning opening in the winning history storage area.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state until receiving a jackpot end designation command for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to distinguish between the number of times the command is received and the number of times the general winning opening designation command is received. As a result, the number of winnings to the big winning opening and the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be separately aggregated during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and the aggregation result is shown in the image display device as shown in FIG. 33. It is also possible to display it on 905.

Further, when the game ball is launched in the game area 9010, the game ball usually wins a prize in any of the start winning opening, the general winning opening, and the large winning opening at a certain frequency. If the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed and the game ball is not won in any of the starting winning opening, the general winning opening, and the large winning opening for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), the game is played. There is a high possibility that the person is in a non-gaming state in which he / she is not playing a game. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and receives the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If not, it is possible to determine that the game has ended.

FIG. 29A is a diagram showing an example of the winning number information managed by the winning number management table stored in the RAM 90122. In this winning number management table, the number of winnings to each general winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of winnings to each general winning opening for each gaming state based on the big hit start designation command, the big hit end designation command, the game state designation command, and the general winning opening designation command. .. The game state specification command specifies the timing at which the game state changes (the game state specification command in this case specifies the controlled game state, and is transmitted at the end of the jackpot game state or the end of the time saving state, for example. ) Or, it is transmitted at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the game state specification command in this case specifies the game state when the special symbol game is executed).

In this example, the number of prizes to the second general winning opening 9050B is 50 (total for the entire period), of which the number of prizes in the normal state is 46, the number of prizes in the jackpot game state is 2, and the number of prizes in the probability change state. Is 1, and the number of prizes in the time-saving state is 1. That is, the number of winnings in the left-handed period is 46, and the number of winnings in the right-handed period is 4. In addition, the total number of winnings to the general winning opening is 108, of which 81 is the winning number in the left-handed period and 27 is the winning number in the right-handed period.

In this way, along with the number of winnings to each general winning opening, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are individually stored and displayed on the image display device 905 (or corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901). It is transmitted to a gaming device such as a card unit or a calling lamp device and displayed on a display device provided in the gaming device, or transmitted to an information management device and displayed on a display device provided in the information management device. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the ease of winning a game ball to each general winning opening in the game hall and use it for the maintenance of the game nail. For example, if the number of winnings of a game ball to a general winning opening is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail in the vicinity of the general winning opening is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is performed. It can be performed.

Number of winnings information of the number of winnings in the management table (number of winnings in each general winning opening, number of winnings in general winning openings in each game state, number of winnings in general winning openings in left-handed and right-handed periods, to general winning openings (Including the total number of winnings) is displayed on the image display device 905 when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position (in the case of maintenance mode), and is displayed in the case of the first position (in the case of the game mode). Do not show. The clerk at the amusement park switches the mode changeover switch 9031 from the first position to the second position to display the winning number information in the winning number management table, and uses this as a reference to perform maintenance on the game nails and to the general winning opening. Make the winning frequency of game balls appropriate. Then, after the maintenance is completed, the mode changeover switch 9031 is returned from the second position to the first position.

In this embodiment, the winning number information in the winning number management table does not depend on the gaming state (for example, the normal state, the probability change state, the time saving state, the jackpot game state), and the execution status of the special figure game (special symbol). Whether or not the variable display is executed, the number of reserved storages of the special figure game), and the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved storages of the normal figure game) Regardless of this, the image display device 905 is continuously displayed during the period when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayable on the image display device 905 according to the gaming state, for example, the mode changeover switch 9031. The operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state, and even if the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position, it is not displayed in the probability change state, the time saving state, and the big hit game state. You can do it.

Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayable on the image display device 905 according to the execution status of the special figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. Even if the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the reserved memory number of the special symbol game can be displayed only during the period of 0, even if the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. , The period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or the period during which the reserved storage number of the special symbol game is not 0 may not be displayed. Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayable on the image display device 905 according to the execution status of the normal figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. Even if the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed and the hold storage number of the normal figure game is 0, it can be displayed only, and the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. , The period during which the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed or the period during which the reserved storage number of the normal symbol game is not 0 may not be displayed.

The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 (settings of FIGS. 31 (1) to (3)). It is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command regardless of the setting on the screen). Further, the prize number information stored in the prize number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a game information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the game hall) after the business of the game hall is closed. Then, the information on the number of winnings for each gaming machine is stored in the gaming information management device for each business day. Further, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is deleted (reset) based on the execution of a specific effect corresponding to the winning history storage area described above in the winning history storage area. Even if it is not erased, the operation button after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, or in the state where the clerk reset operation (for example, the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905). It is erased by the operation of 9030).

For example, the clerk of the amusement park determines the operation button 9030 in the state where the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 (the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position (display setting) state). By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items stored in the winning number management table (the number of winnings of each general winning opening and the total number of winnings of general winning openings) can be reset to 0. It is possible.

FIG. 29B is a diagram showing an example of prize number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 90122. In this display control table, the number of winnings to each general winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of winnings to each general winning opening based on the general winning opening designation command. In this example, the total number of winnings to the general winning opening is 11, of which 3, the number of winnings to the first general winning opening 9050A is 3, the number of winnings to the second general winning opening 9050B is 5, and the number of winnings to the third general winning opening is 5. The number of prizes for the 9050C is 2, and the number of prizes for the 4th general prize opening 9050D is 1.

As shown in FIG. 30, the information on the number of winnings in the display control table (specifically, the display of the number of objects according to the total number of winnings) is when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the display setting). Case), and when the display setting of the general winning number is set by the operation button 9030, it is displayed on the image display device 905. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (in the case of non-display setting), the display control table wins a prize regardless of whether or not the display setting of the general prize number is set by the operation button 9030. Number information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of the display setting), when the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of the non-display setting). Does not display the winning number information in the display control table.

That is, when the clerk of the game hall sets the display prohibition setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 9032, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. There is. Only when the clerk of the game hall sets the display permission setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 9032, the winning number to the general winning opening is displayed according to the display setting operation of the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect) based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed. As for the effect, as shown in FIG. 30, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (execution permission setting) and the operation button 9030 is used to set the display of the number of general prizes (execution of the specific effect). It can be executed when the setting) has been performed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (execution prohibition setting), it depends on whether or not the display setting of the general prize number (execution setting of the specific effect) is performed by the operation button 9030. No specific effect is executed (execution is prohibited). Further, even if the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (execution permission setting), the general prize number display setting is not performed by the operation button 9030 (non-execution setting). No specific effect is executed.

That is, when the clerk of the game hall sets the execution permission of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 9032, the execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the execution setting operation of the player. Only when the clerk of the game hall sets the execution permission of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 9032, the specific effect can be executed according to the execution setting operation of the player.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the operation means for setting is also common. (Amusement place side: display changeover switch 9032, player side: operation button 9030). Not limited to such a form, whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening and whether or not to enable a specific effect may be individually set, and may be set by different operation means. May be.

The winning number information stored in the display control table is the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 (settings of FIGS. 31 (1) to (3)). It is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command regardless of the setting on the screen). In addition, the winning number information (the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings) stored in the display control table is such that the winning history of the above-mentioned winning history storage area corresponds to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the execution of the effect (A or B), it is not deleted, and when the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. It is deleted (reset to 0) when the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are not received for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute).

When the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed. The number of winnings is also reset to 0. For example, on the screen of FIG. 32, which will be described later, the coin-shaped object (winning correspondence display) displayed on the right side of the character of "general winning" is no longer displayed, and the number of displayed objects becomes 0. When the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are determined to end the game. If it is reset to 0 based on, then, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905, the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at that time ( For example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings) will be displayed.

Further, the clerk or the player of the game hall presses the operation button 9030 in a state where the winning number information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 905 (a state in which an object corresponding to the total winning number is displayed). By pressing for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items stored in the display control table (the total number of winnings of each general winning opening and the total winning of the general winning opening) regardless of the game end determination. The number) can be reset to 0, and the winning number information displayed on the image display device 905 is also reset to 0 (all the displayed objects are deleted).

As shown in FIG. 31, the display setting operation of the player is accepted by operating the operation button 9030 during the display of the demo screen which is not related to the progress of the special figure game and the progress of the normal figure game. A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are executed for a predetermined period (for example, 1). The demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905, and the screen of FIG. 31 (1) is displayed at predetermined intervals while the demo screen is being displayed.

On the screen of FIG. 31 (1), the message "Please press the enter button to set the display of the general prize number" is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed below it, and the operation button 9030 is pressed. An arrow prompting you to press is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 9030 according to the instruction, the selection screen of FIG. 31 (2) is displayed. On the selection screen, an icon containing the characters "display" and an icon containing the characters "do not display" are displayed, and the message "OK after selecting with the jog dial" is displayed, and the operation button 9030 ( An arrow prompting you to press the jog dial) after rotating it is displayed.

To display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, rotate the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the left to select an icon containing the characters "display" and enter the general winning opening. To hide the number of winnings, rotate the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the right to select an icon containing the characters "not displayed". In this example, the icon containing the characters "display" is selected.

Then, when the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "display" selected in FIG. 31 (2), as shown in FIG. 31 (3), "the number of general prizes is displayed." A message is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal demo screen shown in FIG. 31 (4). By this setting operation, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905, and the player can grasp this. Here, it is assumed that the total number of winnings (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings in FIG. 32) stored in the display control table at the time of completing the setting operation is immediately displayed. The total number of winnings is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 905 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You may do so.

On the other hand, if the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "not displayed" selected in FIG. 31 (2), the message "The general prize number is not displayed." Is displayed, and FIG. 31 (4). Return to the normal demo screen. By this setting operation, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905.

Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, on the game hall side, the winning number information stored in the display control table is transmitted to the image display device 905. The image display device 905 has a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening as shown in FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) only when the display is permitted. It shall be displayed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, when the game hall side does not permit the image display device 905 to display the winning number information stored in the display control table. As shown in FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3), the screen itself for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 30 described above, it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 9032 regardless of the display setting / non-display setting of the player. Will be done.

In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the game field and the player regarding whether or not to display the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening. In this embodiment, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position) on the game hall side. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the playground is prioritized over the intention of the player. Therefore, if the player does not want the player to know the number of winnings in the general winning opening, it is preferable to set the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 to the first position (non-display position).

Further, when the intention of the game hall is prioritized over the intention of the player, even though the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (in addition, Although it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening regardless of the setting on the player side), on the player side as shown in FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3). When the setting screen is displayed, it is misunderstood that the player can display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by his / her own setting operation.

In order to prevent such misidentification, in this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (generally regardless of the setting on the player side). When it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the winning opening), the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself of "it is possible to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening according to the setting operation on the player side" is not performed.

Display settings on the playground side (the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is the second position) and display settings on the player side (icons including the characters "display" on the selection screen of FIG. 31 (2)). When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 9030 in the selected state), as shown in FIG. 32 (1), at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 905. The characters "general prize" are displayed. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D), as shown in FIG. 32 (2), a coin-shaped object is to the right of the character of "general winning opening". (Prize correspondence display) is displayed.

The number of coin-shaped objects displayed on the image display device 905 corresponds to the total number of winnings in the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 32 (3), each time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D), the total number of winnings in the display control table is added by 1. As a result, the number of coin-shaped objects also increases. Further, the coin-shaped object contains the number "10", which indicates the number of prize balls given when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can also grasp the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening. The number of prize balls given when a game ball wins a prize in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, large winning opening) is stored in ROM 90121 in advance. And.

In this way, by displaying the objects corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and increasing the number of the displayed objects according to the increase in the number of winnings, the player can use the general winning opening. It is possible to easily grasp that the game ball has won a prize and the number of game balls won in the general winning opening.

When the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 90120, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings of the game balls to each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0 as described above. As a result, as shown in FIG. 32 (4), all the coin-shaped objects displayed on the right side of the characters of "general prize" are deleted. That is, it is notified that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is 0.

In this way, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in a non-gaming state, the number of winnings to the notified general winning opening is reset to 0 (general). By displaying that there is no winning in the winning opening), it is possible to prevent the player who subsequently plays the game with the gaming machine from knowing the number of winnings in the general winning opening. ..

In this embodiment, by setting the condition for determining the end of the game and the condition for shifting to the demo screen described above as a common condition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening notified at the time of transition to the demo screen is 0. Will be reset to. In this way, when the demo screen is displayed, the number of winnings to the notified general winning openings may be reset to 0.

As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). Is set not to display the number of general winnings on the player setting screen (FIG. 31), the display control for increasing the number of objects to be displayed for each winning in the general winning opening shown in FIG. 32 is not executed. .. In these cases, the characters "general winning number" shown in FIG. 32 are not displayed, and the coin-shaped object itself is also displayed regardless of the winning number to the general winning opening (total winning number in the display control table). Do not show.

If the number of objects (referred to as normal objects) to be displayed for each prize in the general winning opening is increased, the screen becomes difficult to see as the number of winnings increases, so that the number of normal objects has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object having a mode different from that of the normal object including the number "100") instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. As a result, it is possible to notify the predetermined number of winnings and the corresponding number of prize balls in the display area of one special object without requiring the display area of a predetermined number of normal objects.

Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the displayed object is increased by 1 for each winning to the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a plurality of objects to the general winning opening are shown. The object may be displayed according to the number of winnings. For example, the displayed object may be incremented by 1 for every 5 winnings in the general winning opening.

In addition, the display setting on the game hall side (the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters "display" on the selection screen of FIG. 31 (2)). When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 9030 with the icon selected), as shown in FIG. 33, the period controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In, the number of winnings to the general winning opening will be displayed together with the number of winnings to the large winning opening.

FIG. 33 (1) is a screen displayed on the image display device 905 when the jackpot game state is controlled. When the first round game is started, the characters "general winning number" are displayed, and on the right side, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed, and the "large winning number" is displayed. Character is displayed, and the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed on the right side. In this example, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls given when the game ball wins to the general winning opening is 10 [0 × 10]. Is displayed. Further, since the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the big hit game state is still 0 and the number of winning balls given when the game ball wins to the big winning opening is 15, it is displayed as [0 × 15]. Has been done. Further, in the big hit game state, the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [0 × 10] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the big winning opening [0 × 15]. Since the total number of and is 0, it is displayed as [total 0 balls].

As shown in FIG. 33 (2), as a result of performing the first round game, the game ball wins seven times in the large winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907), and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A). -The number of general prizes has been reduced to 1 and the number of large prizes has been updated to 7 due to the fact that the game ball has won a prize once in the 4th general prize opening 9050D). In addition, the total number of prize balls [1 × 10] given according to the winning of the general winning opening and the number of prize balls [7 × 15] given according to the winning of the large winning opening is 115. Therefore, it is displayed as [115 balls in total]. The number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [1 x 10 = 10 balls] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the large winning opening [7 x 15 = 105 balls]. And may be displayed individually.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (3), as a result of performing the second to fifteenth (final) round games, the game balls are totaled in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907) in the big hit game state. The number of general prizes was 3 and the number of large prizes was updated to 105 because the game balls won a total of 3 times in the general prize openings (1st general prize openings 9050A to 4th general prize openings 9050D) after winning 105 times. ing. In addition, in the big hit game state, the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [3 × 10] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the big winning opening [105 × 15]. Since the total number of and is 1605, it is displayed as [1605 balls in total].

In this way, by displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening separately from the number of winnings to the big winning opening during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state, the player can only display the number of winnings to the big winning opening. In addition, we will be interested in the number of prizes in the general prize openings. In addition, by displaying the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes in the large prize opening and the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes in the general prize opening separately, the player can win the prize in the large prize opening. You will be interested not only in the number of prize balls given according to the number of prize balls, but also in the number of prize balls given in response to the prizes in the general winning openings.

It should be noted that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state may be displayed on the image display device 905, not limited to the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state. The number of winnings to the general winning opening in the normal state may be displayed on the image display device 905. Further, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the right-handed period (big hit game state, probable change state, or time-saving state) may be displayed on the image display device 905, and the general winning in the left-handed period (normal state) may be displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 905. Further, the image display device 905 may display the number of winnings in the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times corresponding to the reserved storage number of the special drawing game).

As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). When is set not to display the general winning number on the player setting screen (FIG. 31), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 33 is displayed. Display control is not executed. In these cases, the character itself of "general winning number" shown in FIG. 33 is not displayed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the number of prize balls corresponding thereto during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state. , And the total number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winnings to the large winning opening are not displayed. Only the number of prizes to the large prize opening and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prizes are displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, an example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening is displayed on the object has been described, but the image display device 905 has the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening. It may not be displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 33, an example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls given according to the winning to the general winning opening are displayed has been described. These may not be displayed on the device 905.

In this way, it is possible to display only the number of winnings to the general winning opening and not to display the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening or the number of prize balls given according to the winning to the general winning opening. .. With such a configuration, when the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning openings is changed in the design process of the gaming machine, the display information of the image display device 905 must be changed according to the change. It is possible to prevent the situation of disappearing. On the contrary, only the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening may be displayed.

In this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side, the player setting shown in FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3). An example in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not notified that the number of winnings can be switched between display and non-display) has been described, but the display changeover switch 9032 is not limited to this form. Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screens shown in FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) are displayed (the number of winnings can be switched between display and non-display). (Notify the player that this is the case).

In such a configuration, even if the player is set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the player setting screen of FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3), even if the player is set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. The effect control CPU 90120 displays the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the playground side. Do not (priority is given to the playground setting). At this time, the image display device 905 may display that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to the priority of the playground setting.

When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen of FIG. 31 (1) is displayed (the number of winnings can be displayed / hidden). This is notified to the player), but the player's setting operation may be invalidated. For example, even when the operation button 9030 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 31 (1), the screen does not move to the selection screen of FIG. 31 (2), and the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed. It may not be possible to select whether or not.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game field setting is prioritized over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may be prioritized over the game field setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) are displayed. When the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "display" selected on the selection screen of FIG. 31 (2) so that it can be displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device. When the operation button 9030 is pressed while the icon displayed on 905 (display control of FIGS. 32 and 33 is executed) and the icon including the character "not displayed" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 31 (2), a general prize is awarded. The number of winnings in the mouth may not be displayed on the image display device 905 (the display control of FIGS. 32 and 33 is not executed).

Further, it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening according to the order of the accepted setting operations, with the amusement place setting and the player setting having the same priority. That is, it may be decided whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the general winning opening is subsequently won on the player setting screens of FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3). When the number is set to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed (display control of FIGS. 32 and 33 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) are set so that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently moved to the second position. When (display position) is set, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed (display control of FIGS. 32 and 33 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is subsequently displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3). When is set not to display, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control of FIGS. 32 and 33 is not executed). Further, even when the player setting screen of FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) is set to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently moved to the first position. When (non-display position) is set, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control of FIGS. 32 and 33 is not executed).

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905 by operating the display changeover switch 9032 by the clerk of the amusement park, and the player. By operating the operation button 9030, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905. By operating the switch 9032, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905, while on the player side, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905. It may not be possible to set whether or not to display (for example, the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) is not provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 only on the amusement park side.

On the contrary, by operating the operation button 9030, the player (and the clerk of the game hall) can set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905. On the other hand, it is possible that only the amusement park side is not provided with a means for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 (for example, the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided). In such a configuration, whether or not the player and the clerk of the game hall display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). It can be set. In this way, it may be possible for the player and the game hall to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905, but the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is pachinko. Information is displayed by being transmitted to an information display device provided corresponding to the game machine 901, for example, a display device of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko game machine 901, or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko game machine 901. It may be displayed on the device. Further, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the general winning opening for each gaming machine is transmitted in the information management device. The number of winnings may be stored and displayed on the display device. In addition, as a configuration in which the mode changeover switch 9031 is not provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 905), and the information display device or the information display device It may be displayed only in the information management device.

In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 by setting the mode changeover switch 9031, and is stored in the display control table by setting the display changeover switch 9032. An example in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 905 has been described. As described above, the winning number management table and the display control table are not provided with individual switches for display control. A common switch for performing display control of both the number management table and the display control table may be provided. For example, by setting the display setting to the common switch, both the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are displayed on the image display device 905, and the common switch is used. By setting the non-display setting, neither the winning number information stored in the winning number management table nor the winning number information stored in the display control table may be displayed on the image display device 905.

In FIG. 34 (A), when a special symbol (missing symbol) other than a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a definite special symbol, it is determined by the main board 9011 (microcomputer for game control 90100). The out-of-order fluctuation pattern is illustrated. Further, FIG. 34B exemplifies a jackpot variation pattern determined by the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) when a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. Has been done. Since the special figure fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 that has received the variation pattern designation command can execute the effect according to the special figure variation time.

Among the out-of-reach variation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are variation patterns that are non-reach out-of-reach effects, PX003 is a variation pattern that is a normal reach-out-out effect, and PX004 is a super-reach-out effect. It is a fluctuation pattern. Among the jackpot fluctuation patterns, PY003 is a variation pattern that is an effect mode of a normal reach jackpot, and PY004 is a variation pattern that is an effect mode of a super reach jackpot. Here, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the battle effect is executed after the reach state is established. The fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the battle effect is not executed after the reach state is established.

The battle effect is an effect that suggests whether or not a ally character and an enemy character will battle and win or lose a big hit. In PX004, which is a fluctuation pattern of out of super reach, a defeat effect is executed in which a ally character is defeated by an enemy character, whereas in PY004, which is a fluctuation pattern of a super reach jackpot, a ally character wins over an enemy character. The production is executed.

As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern designation command when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the special figure is executed in the game control microcomputer 90100. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed (before the stop display of the confirmed special symbol), the specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol of the variable display (that is, the jackpot symbol). It is possible to execute a fluctuation result notice effect that gives notice of the fact that it is controlled by the game state).

In the variation result advancement effect shown in FIG. 35 (a), the variation announcement effect of the first aspect in which only the audio effect in which the voice "Now is a chance!" Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed, and the audio effect are combined. It is possible to execute the fluctuation advance notice effect of the second aspect in which the accessory effect in which the movable accessory 901000 operates (rotating operation and lighting) is executed. Due to such a difference in the effect mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is satisfied).

The effect control CPU 90120 is based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: change result advance notice effect) based on the winning of the general winning opening is satisfied. The mode of the variation result notice effect is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning in the general winning opening is satisfied), the mode of the variation result notice effect is determined, and the determined mode is determined. The fluctuation result notice effect is executed at. As will be described later, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is not executed, the execution of the variable result advance notice effect is suspended or the variable result advance notice effect is performed. Do not execute.

For example, if the variable display result (variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specified by the last received variable display result notification command specifies "missing", the voice effect is performed at a rate of 80%. The change notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the change notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the variable display result (variable display result of the variable display currently being executed) specified by the variable display result notification command received last specifies "big hit", the voice effect is performed at a rate of 25%. The change notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the change notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 75%.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command and a starting winning prize when an effective starting winning entry to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs in the game control microcomputer 90100. Receives the time judgment result specification command. As a result, before the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a definite special symbol of variable display that has not been executed yet (that is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state). ) Is available for pre-reading notice.

In the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. 35 (b), the pre-reading advance notice effect of the first aspect in which only the voice effect in which the voice "Immediate chance!" Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed, and the movable combination along with the voice effect. It is possible to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect of the second aspect in which the accessory effect in which the object 901000 operates (rotational operation and lighting) is executed. Due to such a difference in the effect mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. There is.

The effect control CPU 90120 reads ahead based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect) based on the winning of the general winning opening is satisfied. Determine the mode of the notice production. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning in the general winning opening is satisfied), the mode of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, and the determined mode is used. The look-ahead notice effect is executed. As will be described later, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is suspended or the look-ahead notice effect is not executed.

For example, if the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area does not include the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "big hit" (all start winning that specifies "missing"). In the case of the time determination result designation command), the look-ahead advance notice effect of the first aspect accompanied only by the voice effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the look-ahead advance notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is performed at a rate of 15%. Perform a look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, if the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area includes the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "big hit", the voice effect is performed at a rate of 10%. The pre-reading notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 90%.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a specific effect executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. The variable result notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display being executed is a jackpot symbol is executed as the specific effect A in this embodiment. In addition, the look-ahead notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied becomes a big hit symbol, that is, whether or not the reserved memory includes the one determined to be a big hit is performed. It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not the specific effect can be executed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening is notified. When the setting is made (when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (execution permission setting), and the operation button 9030 is used to set the display of the general winning number (execution setting of the specific effect). Only when this is done), the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a specific effect.

As described above, each time the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command and the starting winning opening designation command, the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122. However, this winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are separately provided, for example, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second. When a prize is generated in the order of the general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 9050C, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area Winning history corresponding to the specific effect B Winning history of [1st general winning opening, 2nd general winning opening, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, 3rd general winning opening, 4th] Will be remembered.

In the effect mode in which only the specific effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (timing when a prize is generated in any of the winning openings). In), it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is decided based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. Further, in the effect mode in which only the specific effect B can be executed, each time the prize history is stored in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at the timing when a prize is generated in any of the prize openings), a prize is won. It is confirmed whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. Further, in the effect mode in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, each time the winning history is stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (any of them). (At the timing when a prize is awarded to the winning opening of The execution of the specific effect A is decided based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is satisfied in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B. , The execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning conditions corresponding to the specific effect B are satisfied.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect A execution flag when the execution of the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, as described above, the specific effect A according to the variable display result is executed. The mode (only the voice effect or both the voice effect and the accessory effect) is determined, the variation result advance notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect A execution flag is erased. That is, the specific effect A is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without suspending the change result advance notice effect.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the target of the variation result notice effect does not exist, so that the specific effect A is executed. Is put on hold and the specific effect A execution flag is left set. The effect control CPU 90120 can grasp that the execution of the specific effect A is determined by setting the specific effect A execution flag, but the specific effect A is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is satisfied, the mode of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, and the mode is set to the hold state. The specific effect A that has been set is executed, and the set specific effect A execution flag is deleted.

Not limited to such a form, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended. The execution of the specific effect A may be stopped without any reason, and the specific effect A may not be executed even when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied thereafter.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect B execution flag when the execution of the specific effect B (look-ahead advance notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, when the number of reserved storages (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved storages and the second reserved storages) is 1 or more at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, as described above, 1 The mode of the specific effect B (only the voice effect or both the voice effect and the character effect) is determined according to the above-mentioned start winning determination result, the pre-reading notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect is performed. B Clear the execution flag. That is, the specific effect B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without suspending the pre-reading notice effect.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, since the target of the pre-reading advance notice effect does not exist, the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag is set. Make it a state. The effect control CPU 90120 can grasp that the specific effect B is determined to be executed by the specific effect B execution flag being set, but the specific effect B is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the starting condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved storages is 1 or more) due to the occurrence of a prize in the starting winning opening, the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the starting winning determination result. The specific effect B that has been in the pending state is executed, and the set specific effect B execution flag is deleted.

Not limited to such a form, if the number of reserved storages is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without suspending the execution of the specific effect B, and then the execution of the specific effect B is stopped. Even when the start condition is satisfied and the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, the specific effect B may not be executed.

Further, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped (for example, when a power failure is detected), the effect control CPU 90120 has a winning history storage area (a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a winning history storage area). All the winning history stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B and the specific effect execution flag (specific effect A execution flag and specific effect B execution flag) are deleted. As a result, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 901 during the execution of the specific effect (variation result advance notice effect, look-ahead advance notice effect), or in a state where the specific effect has not yet been executed after the execution of the specific effect is decided. Is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted, but the specific effect that was being executed or the specific effect that was decided to be executed is not executed again. That is, during a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are erased so that the specific effect is not executed. When it is confirmed that the winning conditions have been satisfied based on the winning history since the power supply was started, a new specific effect is executed.

[First staging form]
In the first effect mode shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 90120 has a game ball in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning openings 9050D when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. Each time a prize is won, the winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established. When the first winning condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, which is the first winning condition). The winning history of any of them is included) is deleted.

On the other hand, in the staging control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, each time the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied. When the second winning condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, which is the second winning condition). The winning history of any of them is included) is deleted.

In the first effect form and the second effect form to the fourth effect form described later, (1) the ratio of the specific effect being executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening in the normal state is (2). ) It is higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state. In the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the player is usually more interested in the winning situation of the game ball in the second starting winning opening and the variable display of the decorative pattern than in the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Even if a specific effect is executed, it is difficult to create the same kind of interest as in the normal state. Therefore, in the probable change state or the time saving state, the execution rate of the specific effect is lowered as compared with the normal state, and the deterioration of the interest of the specific effect is suppressed.

In the second effect mode to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, unlike the first effect form, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is not determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect. In each of the second effect mode to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, a specific effect can be executed when the winning condition is satisfied. However, (2) the winning condition in the probable change state or the time saving state is (1) normal. A larger number of winnings is required than the winning conditions in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution rate of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than (2) the execution rate of the specific effect in the probable change state or the time saving state.

In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening. Contrary to the examples of the first effect mode to the fourth effect form, (2) the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state is (2). 1) In the normal state, the ratio may be higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

In the second effect mode to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, as in the first effect form, when the winning condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect. You may do so. For example, in the second effect mode to the fourth effect form, the first prize condition required in the normal state and the second prize condition required in the probability change state or the time saving state are the same prize conditions, and the first. By differentiating the lottery probability when the winning condition is satisfied in the normal state and the lottery probability when the winning condition is satisfied in the probable change state or the time saving state as in the production form, the ratio at which the specific effect is normally executed and the probability change The ratio at which the specific effect is executed in the state or the time saving state may be different.

Further, the specific effect may be executed at different ratios according to not only the gaming state but also the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate than the case where the display result of the variable display is an off symbol, and the specific effect may be executed at the start winning prize. When there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit, compared to a case where there is no hold memory determined to be a big hit at the time of starting prize (when only a hold memory determined to be off at the time of starting prize exists), A specific effect may be executed at a high rate. Further, the number of times the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type, or the specific effect of a different type is classified into various types. It may be possible to execute it only once each time).

[Second staging form]
In the second effect mode shown in FIG. 36, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 is a general of two or more of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning openings 9050D. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins one or more times in each winning opening. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the game state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 is used for two or more general winning openings from the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, respectively. The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game ball is won twice or more. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

As described above, in the second effect form, and the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the number of winnings to the general winning opening required to execute the specific effect in the normal state and the probability change state or Since the number of winnings to the general winning opening required to execute the specific effect in the time-saving state is different, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening according to the gaming state. ..

Further, in the second effect mode, in order to execute the specific effect, at least one game is played for each of two or more general prize openings out of the first general prize openings 9050A to the fourth general prize openings 9050D. The condition is that the ball wins. In this way, by setting the winning for each of the plurality of general winning openings as the execution condition of the specific effect, not only whether or not the general winning opening is won, but also the game ball is won in any of the general winning openings. You can be interested in what you did.

In the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode, which will be described later, the start of the jackpot game state is specified based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the jackpot game state. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the jackpot start designation command, both the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted. It is supposed to be.

Further, in the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode, which will be described later, the prize history in the prize history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the gaming state. .. Therefore, the fact that the first winning condition is satisfied means that the first winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state, and the winning history is not necessarily limited to the normal state. Based on this, the first winning condition is not always satisfied. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history in the winning history storage area in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the probable changing state or the time saving state is not necessarily satisfied. The second winning condition is not always satisfied based on the winning history of only the time saving state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probable change state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probable changing state or the time saving state to the normal state. Is also good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. You may try to confirm.

[Third production form]
In the third effect mode shown in FIG. 36, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established when the game ball has won a prize in the winning opening 9050D) three times or more in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 is connected to the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of 5 times or more. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history to the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). Will be set). If the winning condition is not satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the timer for the specific effect A times out), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted without executing the specific effect A. .. On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the winning condition is satisfied before the timer for the specific effect A times out), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is executed. Is erased.

In this way, the winning frequency (number of winnings within a predetermined period) required to execute the specific effect in the normal state and the winning frequency (predetermined period) required to execute the specific effect in the probabilistic state or the shortened time state. By different from the number of winnings in the game), it is possible to be interested in the frequency of winning in the general winning opening according to the playing state.

Further, in the third effect mode, when the specific effect A targeting the variable display executed at the time of winning the first general winning opening in the predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only the variable display period of 1). (When the winning conditions are satisfied by the winning history), a specific effect A targeting a variable display different from the variable display executed at the time of winning the first general winning opening in a predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed. In some cases (the winning condition is satisfied by the winning history in multiple variable display periods).

It should be noted that, as in the third effect mode, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times as a form in which the specific effect is executed when the number of prizes to the general winning opening in the predetermined period reaches a predetermined number. A specific effect may be executed when the number of winnings to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number during a certain period. For example, it is specified until all the reserved memories of the special figure game are exhausted, that is, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved storage number is executed. The production may be executed.

[Fourth staging form]
In the fourth effect mode shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening (either a first starting winning opening or a second starting winning opening) when the gaming state is (1) a normal state. , The starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D), and the game ball wins in this order. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established by winning the prize in the mouth. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a starting winning opening (first starting). One of the winning openings and the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D), and the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth). The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of the general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

In this way, the specific effect is executed on condition that the winning order to the general winning opening and other winning openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning opening is in a specific order. By doing so, it is possible to be interested not only in the winning status of the general winning opening but also in the winning order of the general winning opening and other winning openings.

It should be noted that the number of times the game ball wins consecutively in the general winning opening and the number of times the game ball wins consecutively in the other winning openings may be set to have a range. For example, the winning condition may be satisfied by winning three or more consecutively in the starting winning opening and then winning two or more consecutively in the general winning opening. In addition, which of the plurality of general winning openings has won the prize, or which of the plurality of other winning openings has won the prize may also be a winning condition. For example, the winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, and the second general winning opening 9050B. Is also good. In addition, the order is not limited to the order in which the general winning opening is awarded after the starting winning opening is won, but the winning condition is that the starting winning opening is won after the general winning opening is won. May hold.

Further, the winning condition may be satisfied based on the fact that the winning order of the game balls to the plurality of general winning openings is in a specific order. For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition is that the game ball wins a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. If the first winning condition) is satisfied and the gaming state is (2) a probable change state or a time-saving state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, and the third general winning opening further The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) may be established by winning a prize in a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D.

Further, the winning conditions may be satisfied based on the winning of the game balls to a plurality of general winning openings and the winning order of the game balls to one or a plurality of starting winning openings in a specific order. .. For example, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition is that the game ball wins in the order of the first general winning opening 9050A, the first starting winning opening, and the second general winning opening 9050B. When the first winning condition) is satisfied and the gaming state is (2) a probable change state or a time saving state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B, Further, even if the winning condition (the second winning condition) is satisfied by winning the game ball in the order of the third general winning opening 9050C, the second starting winning opening, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. good.

In addition, the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the starting winning opening is not limited to the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the large winning opening. The condition may be satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied based on the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the first passing gate 9041A or the second passing gate 9041B in a specific order. You may do so. In addition, when a specific area where the jackpot type (for example, probabilistic jackpot) is determined based on the entry of the game ball is provided, the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the specific area is specific. The winning conditions may be satisfied based on the order.

In the first effect mode to the fourth effect mode, an example of executing the fluctuation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) as the specific effect has been described, but the look-ahead advance notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. May be.

[Fifth production form to eighth production form]
In the fifth effect mode to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 37, unlike the first effect form to the fourth effect form, there are cases where (1) a normal state and (2) a probable change state or a time saving state. , The winning conditions are not different, and they are common winning conditions. In the examples of the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, the first prize condition in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, that is, the prize condition adopted in the normal state is provided as a common prize condition, respectively. ing. Then, (1) when the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the fluctuation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is a probable change state or a time saving state, a look-ahead advance notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as a specific effect. As a result, the type of the specific effect can be changed according to the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and the specific effect executed based on the game ball winning the general winning opening. You can improve your interest.

In the fifth effect mode shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution of the specific effect at a rate of 50% when the winning condition is satisfied. Then, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the specific effect A are executed. The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is executed. , And the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the specific effect A when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the normal state. Every time the specific effect A is executed, both the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the specific effect A is supported. Both the winning history in the winning history storage area and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted.

In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, the effect control CPU 90120 issues a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the jackpot game state. Is received, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both deleted. Further, in the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the gaming state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probable change state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probable changing state or the time saving state to the normal state. Is also good.

In the seventh effect mode, the timer for the specific effect is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. .. Then, when the timer for the specific effect times out, neither the specific effect A nor the specific effect B is executed, and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect B are recorded. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied before the timeout of the specific effect timer, (1) in the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning history and the specific effect B in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. (2) In the case of a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and the prize history and the specific effect of the prize history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. The winning history of the winning history storage area of B is deleted.

[9th production form to 12th production form]
In the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 38, unlike the first effect form to the eighth effect form, there are cases where (1) a normal state and (2) a probable change state or a time saving state. , The winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state, the fluctuation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the probable change state or the time saving state. If is satisfied, the pre-reading notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. As a result, the execution rate of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect can be different depending on the game state when the game ball wins the general prize opening, and the game ball wins the general prize opening. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific production performed based on the above.

In the ninth effect mode shown in FIG. 38, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a game ball in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B. Every time a player wins a prize, a prize condition (which is regarded as the first prize condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, in the staging control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, every time the game ball wins in either the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is decided at a rate of 20%. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the tenth effect mode shown in FIG. 38, the effect control CPU 90120 has one for both the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. When the game ball wins more than once, the winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 has two or more game balls in both the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied by winning the prize, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect mode, the effect control CPU 90120 issues a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the jackpot game state. Is received, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both deleted. Further, in the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect mode, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the gaming state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probable change state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probable changing state or the time saving state to the normal state. Is also good.

In the eleventh effect mode shown in FIG. 38, the effect control CPU 90120 enters the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B within 120 seconds when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. When the game ball wins a prize three times or more in total, the winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, in the staging control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, the game ball wins a total of five or more times in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. As a result, the winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the eleventh effect mode, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A. Then, when the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted without executing the specific effect A. On the other hand, if the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the timer for the specific effect A times out, the specific effect A is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted. Further, the timer for the specific effect B is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B. Then, when the timer for the specific effect B times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted without executing the specific effect B. On the other hand, if the second winning condition is satisfied in the probable change state or the time saving state before the timer for the specific effect B times out, the specific effect B is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted. Will be done.

In the twelfth effect mode shown in FIG. 38, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a first start winning opening, a first starting winning opening, and a second general winning opening 9050B. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in this order. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a second start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a third general winning opening 9050C, and a fourth general winning opening. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of 9050D. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

As in the 9th effect mode to the 12th effect form, the general winning openings (general winning openings and starting winning openings in the 12th effect form) that are the targets of winning the game ball for executing the specific effect are determined according to the game state. By making them different, the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the game state. In addition, in the 9th effect mode to the 12th effect form, in order to establish the target winning opening to be won in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state and the second winning condition in the probable change state or the time saving state. An example is shown in which the target winning openings to be won are all different, but the target winning openings in the normal state and the target winning openings in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state are partially different from each other. It may be common. For example, both the first winning condition and the second winning condition may include winning the second general winning opening 9050B.

[13th production form to 16th production form]
In the 13th effect mode to the 16th effect form shown in FIG. 39, the ratio of executing the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. However, when the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is higher.

Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is specifically a fixed decorative symbol (final stop) after the reach state is established in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach). It is the period until the symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is specifically the period during which the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) is executed. It is the period from the start of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) to the period before the reach state is established.

The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the 13th production form to the 16th production form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the first production form to the fourth production form, respectively. It has become. In any of the production forms, when the timing when the first prize condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is determined by the second prize condition. When the established timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or during the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A. In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[17th production form to 20th production form]
In the 17th effect mode to the 20th effect form shown in FIG. 40, when the timing at which the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the winning condition is satisfied. When (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is established, the specific effect B is executed.

The winning conditions in the 17th staging form to the 20th staging form are the same as the winning conditions (common winning conditions) in the 5th staging form to the 8th staging form, respectively. In any of the production forms, if the timing at which the winning condition (common winning condition) is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the winning condition is satisfied. If the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

[21st production form to 24th production form]
In the 21st effect mode to the 24th effect form shown in FIG. 41, when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed. If the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the 21st effect form to the 24th effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the 9th effect form to the 12th effect form, respectively. It has become. In any of the production forms, if the timing at which the first prize condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the second prize condition is satisfied. If the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, and different types of specific effect are executed according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied. It is possible to improve the interest when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

[25th production form and 26th production form]
In the 25th staging mode shown in FIG. 42, unlike the 1st staging mode to the 24th staging mode, the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D) is used regardless of the game state or the game period. The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a prize three times or more in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. Further, regardless of the game state or the game period, the second winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a total of five or more times in the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the 26th staging mode shown in FIG. 42, unlike the 1st staging mode to the 24th staging mode, the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general) is within 120 seconds regardless of the game state or the game period. The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball has won a prize in the winning opening 9050D) three times or more in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. In addition, regardless of the game state or the game period, the second prize is obtained by winning a total of five or more game balls in the general prize openings (first general prize opening 9050A to fourth general prize opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. The condition is satisfied. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In this way, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is performed by performing different effects according to the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency (the number of winnings within the predetermined period) regardless of the game state and the game period. And the frequency of winning can be interesting. In this example, the staging mode (output voice) differs depending on the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency, and the variable display to be notified is different (specific staging A: variable display being executed, Specific effect B: Variable display that has not been executed. For example, an effect that announces the display result of the variable display and an effect that is not related to the display result of the variable display may be executable, and the effect that suggests the gaming state or not is different (for example, high probability). It may be possible to execute an effect of notifying the state and an effect not related to the gaming state).

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a general winning opening designation command to generate a prize in the general winning opening, and the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It is possible to specify which of the game balls won the prize, and the winning of the starting winning opening was generated by receiving the start winning opening designation command, and the game was played in either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It is possible to specify whether or not the ball has won a prize, and it is possible to specify that a prize has occurred in the big prize opening by receiving the big winning opening winning command. Therefore, as the winning number management table, the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 43 can be stored and updated.

The second start winning opening is formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, and the opening control of the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is performed (the opening where the game ball can be won or is easy to win from the closed state where the game ball does not win or is difficult to win). By switching to the state), the game ball can be won. Further, the large winning opening is formed by the special variable winning ball device 907, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is open-controlled (the game ball can win or is easy to win from the closed state where the game ball does not win or it is difficult to win. By switching to the open state), the game ball can be won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43, the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball device 907 are classified into a winning opening for a game ball by operating the accessory. On the other hand, the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D and the 1st starting winning opening are always open, and the game ball can be won regardless of the operation of the accessory. It is classified into.

In the prize number management table of FIG. 43, a game ball has won a prize in each of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening. The number of prize balls sometimes given (the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening, 10, 10, 10, 10, 2, 2, 15 in this example) is stored. Then, for each winning opening, the number of winnings (11,36,22,14,754,315,420), which is the number of times the game ball has won in the winning opening, is multiplied by the number of winning balls. The number of payouts (the total number of balls paid out due to the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 in this example) is stored.

Then, as the winning ratio, (1) the number of winnings of each winning opening (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420, respectively) with respect to the total number of winnings of each winning opening (1572 in this example). And (2) the total number of winnings in each winning opening (1572 in this example), the non-role winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D and the 1st starting winning opening) The ratio of the number of winnings (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754), the ratio of the number of winnings (315 + 420) of the character winning opening (second starting winning opening and the large winning opening), and (3) the total number of winnings of each winning opening (3) In this example, the ratio of the number of winnings other than the large winning opening (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754 + 315) to 1572) and the ratio of the number of winnings of the large winning opening (420) are stored.

In addition, as the payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts for each winning slot (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300, respectively) with respect to the total number of payouts for each winning slot (9268 in this example). And (2) the total number of payouts of each winning opening (9268 in this example), the non-role winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D and the 1st starting winning opening) The ratio of the number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508), the ratio of the number of payouts (630 + 6300) of the bonus winning openings (second starting winning opening and large winning opening), and (3) the total number of payouts of each winning opening (3) In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts other than the large winning opening (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508 + 630) to 9268) and the ratio of the number of payouts of the large winning opening (6300) are stored.

Here, as described above, during the period when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is set to the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 90120 displays each information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Displayed on the device 905. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall is paid out by winning the game ball in the character winning opening for the total number of balls (9268) paid out by winning the game ball in each winning opening. It is possible to grasp the ratio of the number of balls (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) (hereinafter referred to as "first payout ratio", which is 74.77% in this example). In addition, the total number of balls paid out due to the winning of the game ball in each winning opening (9268) is the number of balls paid out due to the winning of the game ball in the large winning opening (6300). The ratio (hereinafter referred to as "second payout ratio", which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

Here, when the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 90120 shall notify to that effect in a identifiable manner. .. In the example of FIG. 43, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted in a thick frame. Further, when the second payout ratio is higher than a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60%), the effect control CPU 90120 shall notify to that effect in a identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 43, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted in a thick frame.

As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 905, and the comparison result with the predetermined first reference ratio and the second reference ratio can be obtained. It can be displayed in a graspable manner. Even if the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio are displayed on the image display device 905 by, for example, the setting of the display changeover switch 9032 and the setting operation by the operation button 9030, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031. At best, when the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the settings on the playground side or the player side. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the gaming state, and may be displayed, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs the calculated first payout ratio and the second payout ratio to a gaming device (for example, a card unit or a call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901 for gaming. In the device, the received first payout ratio and the second payout ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management device such as a hall computer, and in the information management device, the first payout ratio and the second payout of each gaming machine. It is possible to store the ratio and display it on the display device.

Further, when the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs the general winning opening designation command, the starting winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command to the effect control CPU 90120, the external output information corresponding to these commands is output. Information that can identify which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D the game ball has won, and the winning to the starting winning opening has occurred. Information that can identify whether the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and information that can identify that a prize has occurred in the large winning opening, the corresponding gaming device. It shall be output to an external device such as (card unit, call lamp device) or information management device (hall computer).

This makes it possible to specify the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the starting winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that has received the information in the above, it is possible to store the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 43 for each gaming machine and update it. This makes it possible to grasp the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine. Further, for each gaming machine, it is possible to grasp whether or not the first payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether or not the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

Further, regarding the aggregation period of the prize number information (value of each item in FIG. 29 or FIG. 43) stored in the prize number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901, if no setting is made for the total period, the pachinko machine It is a period from the start of the power supply of the gaming machine 901 to the stop of the power supply. As the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 was stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table was reset (the number of winnings to each winning opening became 0), and the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 was resumed. Occasionally, the number of winnings to each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is 0. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is deleted without being backed up.

The aggregation period of the winning number information (value of each item in FIG. 29 or FIG. 43) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be set on the game hall side, for example, an operation. It is possible to set the aggregation period (for example, 10 hours, 3 hours, etc.) related to the gaming machine by using the button 9030. Further, in the gaming device (card unit or call lamp device), the clerk of the game hall inputs a desired totaling period by an input device or the like, and the input totaling period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 901, and the totaling period is transmitted. It may be set as (stored in RAM 90122). Further, in the information management device (hall computer), the manager of the game hall inputs a desired totaling period by an input device or the like, and the input totaling period is each pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a pachinko machine selected as a setting target). It may be transmitted to the gaming machine 901) and set as the aggregation period (stored in the RAM 90122). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a winning number management table for each set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours) is created, and these are displayed on the image display device 905, or a gaming device (card) provided correspondingly. It is possible to output to a unit (unit, call lamp device) and display it on the display device of the gaming device, or output it to an information management device (hall computer) and display it on the display device of the information management device. ..

In addition, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is based on the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the starting winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command output from the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the external device that stores and updates information (values of each item in FIG. 29 or FIG. 43), by setting the aggregation period by the input device provided in the external device, for each set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours). It is possible to create a winning number management table and display it on a display device provided in an external device. For example, when the external device is a gaming device (card unit or call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning number management table for each predetermined period related to the corresponding gaming machine is displayed on the display device. If the external device is an information management device that manages game information for each gaming machine, it is possible to display the winning number management table for each predetermined period on the display device for each gaming machine. It becomes.

[27th production form]
Both the specific effect A and the specific effect B described above foretell the variable display result in the special figure game depending on the effect mode, but are executed in connection with the winning of the game ball to the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. As a specific effect, it is also possible to execute an effect not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game. FIG. 44 illustrates a specific effect C (point-giving effect) as an effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game.

In the 27th effect mode shown in FIG. 45 and the 29th effect mode described later, each time the game ball wins a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124. It is determined whether or not the specific effect C is executed based on the random number for execution determination, and if it is determined to be executed, the specific effect C is executed. When the specific effect C is executed, the total points of the point storage areas formed in the RAM 90122 are incremented by 1, and as shown in FIG. 44, the image display device 905 has an image including the characters "1point". 902000 is displayed.

That is, every time a game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed as to whether or not one point is awarded, and the lottery is won. In this case, the point-giving effect in which one point is given is executed. Benefits are given to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

For example, when the total points reach 5 (when winning 5 times), the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server. The player can access the image providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. .. Further, when the total points reach 10 (when winning 10 times), the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server. The player can access the music providing server by reading (capturing) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

In the 27th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period), the rate is 80%. Execute the specific effect C. The effect control CPU 90120 issues a variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game and a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

As with the specific effect A and the specific effect B, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C is provided. Every time the specific effect C is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition) is won. History is included) is deleted.

Here, the total points of the point storage area formed in the RAM 90122 are set to 10 regardless of the winning history of the winning history storage area (even if the winning history of the winning history storage area is deleted). After reaching (in this example, after the two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), it is reset to 0, and is added again by 1 as the specific effect C is executed.

In the 27th effect mode and the 29th effect mode, which will be described later, a specific effect is performed based on (1) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The ratio of execution is lower than the ratio of (2) the specific effect being executed based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). It is set. During the period (1), the player usually wins a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 905, the speakers 908L, and the 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the period (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period of (2), the player is able to execute a specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game that is normally of interest is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the period of (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

Further, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point granting effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game, the execution status of the special figure game and the number of reserved memories are determined. However, it is possible to execute a specific effect at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when an effect related to a variable display result in a special figure game is adopted as a specific effect, the timing at which the game ball wins in the general winning opening is determined by (2) the variable display of the special symbol is executed. If the period is not set (outside the symbol change period), there is no target for the change result notice at this timing. Therefore, the execution is suspended until the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the prize in the general winning opening is stopped) or the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied (general prize). The specific effect is not executed at the timing when the prize is won in the mouth, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the frequency of execution of the specific effect may decrease, or the timing of winning a prize and the timing of execution of the specific effect may deviate from each other, resulting in a decrease in interest. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game as the specific effect.

In the 27th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). If it is within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period). Is also good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 27th staging form, (1) the game ball is specified based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The rate at which the effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on (2) the game ball winning the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period). May be set to be high.

[28th production form]
In the 28th staging mode, unlike the 27th staging mode, it is not determined whether or not the specific staging is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific staging extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the 28th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). , Does not execute the specific effect A.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the specific effect A is either a first aspect in which only the voice effect is executed or a second aspect in which the character effect is executed together with the voice effect. This is a variable result notice effect that suggests the possibility that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display for which the start condition is satisfied, before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the specific effect B is either a first aspect in which only the voice effect is executed or a second aspect in which the character effect is executed together with the voice effect. This is a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the specific effect C has a variable display display result (whether or not it becomes a big hit symbol) and a variable display display result (whether or not it becomes a hit symbol) related to the special figure game. It is a production that is not related to any of the above), and points are given to the player according to the winning of the general winning opening.

As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the specific effect A is not executed (the above-mentioned "" The process of "holding the execution of the specific effect A and executing it when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied" is not performed), and it is specified only during the period of (1). The effect A is executed. Each time the specific effect A is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition) is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the 28th effect mode, as a specific effect, the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is executed. I am trying to increase my interest in specific productions. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), there is a target of the fluctuation result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then specified when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied. When the effect A is executed, the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may be different from each other, which may rather reduce the interest. Therefore, in the 28th effect mode, when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), the specific effect A is not executed.

In the 28th staging mode, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and in the case of the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%. In such a form, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (in the general winning opening). The specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the prize), and then the specific effect A is executed when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied. In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is either the case of (1) (within the symbol variation period) or the period of (2) (outside the symbol variation period). Also, the specific effect A may be executed, and the specific effect A may be executed at different ratios.

Further, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), the special feature being executed is further executed. The execution ratio of the specific effect A may be different depending on the variable display result of the figure game, whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed, and the like. For example, when the effect control CPU 90120 decides to use the fixed decoration symbol as the big hit symbol, the specific effect A is executed at a rate of 80%, and the fixed decoration symbol is set as the off symbol. If it has been decided, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th production form]
In the 29th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved storages (for example, the number of reserved storages and the number of second reserved storages). When (2) the number of reserved storages is 0 but the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the reserved storage number is 0 and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (3). If it is outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

That is, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, or at least it is decided to execute the variable display of the special symbol ((1) or (2) above). In the case of the period of), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening. If it has not been decided to execute the above (in the case of the period (3) above), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

Every time the specific effect C is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition) is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the 29th effect mode, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening ((1) above). Or (in the case of the period of (2)), the ratio at which the specific effect is executed is that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening. It is set lower than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed when the decision to execute is not made (when the period is the period (3) above). During the periods (1) and (2), the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the variation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. , The player is usually more interested in these effects including the variable display of the decorative pattern than the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period of (3), the player is able to execute a specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game that is normally of interest is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the periods of (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

Further, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point granting effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game, the execution status of the special figure game and the number of reserved memories are determined. However, it is possible to execute a specific effect at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when a look-ahead notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more is adopted as the specific effect, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the number of reserved memories. When is 0, there is no pre-reading notice target at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the prize in the general winning opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more (the general winning opening is won). The specific effect is not executed at the timing, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the frequency of execution of the specific effect may decrease, or the timing of winning a prize and the timing of execution of the specific effect may deviate from each other, resulting in a decrease in interest. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game as the specific effect.

In the 29th effect mode, the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When it is decided to execute (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the specific effect C is not executed, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the special symbol is not executed. The specific effect C may be executed only when it is not decided to execute the variable display of (3). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 29th staging form, is the variable display of the special symbol executed at the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D? Or, at least when it is decided to execute the variable display of the special symbol (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the rate at which the specific effect is executed. If it is not and the decision to execute the variable display of the special symbol is not made (in the case of the period of (3) above), it may be set to be higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed.

In addition, the timing at which the variable display related to the special figure game is started (the timing when the start condition is satisfied) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and include simultaneous). In the case of, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the variable display is started, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is related to the special figure game of. In addition, the timing when the game ball wins the start winning opening (the timing when the starting condition is satisfied) and the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and including simultaneous). In some cases, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the number of reserved storages has increased, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect A or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is related to the special figure game of.

[30th staging form]
In the thirtieth staging mode, unlike the 29th staging mode, it is not determined whether or not the specific staging is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific staging extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the thirtieth production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved storages (for example, the number of reserved storages and the number of second reserved storages). If the total number of reserved storages (which is the total number of reserved storages) is within the period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved storages is 0. Is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), (3) the period during which the reserved storage number is 0 and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). If is, the specific effect B is not executed.

As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2) or (3), the specific effect B is not executed. (The above-mentioned process of "holding the execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of held storages becomes 1 or more" is not performed), and only when the period is (1). The specific effect B is executed. Every time the specific effect B is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition) is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the thirtieth effect mode, as a specific effect, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) related to the variable display result of the special figure game held at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening is executed. I try to increase my interest in staging. However, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (2) or (3) where the number of reserved memories is 0, there is no pre-reading notice target at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the specific effect B is set when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. If it is executed, there is a possibility that the interest will be rather lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Therefore, in the thirtieth effect mode, when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (the period in which the number of reserved memories is 0), the specific effect B is not executed. ..

In the 30th staging mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory). Will execute the specific effect B at a rate of 80%, and if it is during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without hold memory), execute the specific effect B at a rate of 20%. You may do so. In such a form, when a prize is awarded to the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding memory), the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended. Every time (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (1) (within the period with hold memory) and the period (2) or (3) (within the period without hold memory). ), In each case, the specific effect B may be executed, and the specific effect B may be executed at different ratios.

Further, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the period with the holding memory), the holding is further performed. The execution ratio of the specific effect B differs depending on the variable display result of the special figure game related to memory and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the execution of the special figure game related to the reserved memory. You may do so. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the start winning command storage area (that is, the variable display result of the special figure game is a big hit symbol) when the start winning determination result specification command for designating the “big hit” is stored in the start winning command storage area. If there is), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "big hit" is not stored in the starting winning command storage area (that is,). If there is no hold memory in which the variable display result of the special figure game is a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[31st production form]
In the 31st staging mode shown in FIG. 46, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (1). If it is within the symbol variation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). In some cases, the specific effect C (point-giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) and the period (2). It is supposed to execute different types of specific effects. As a result, it is possible to make the general winning opening interested in the production performed when the game ball wins a prize, and to improve the interest. In addition, every time the specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning openings 9050A to 4th, which are the winning conditions). (Including the winning history to any of the general winning openings 9050D) is deleted.

In the 31st effect mode, the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is executed for the specific effect. I try to improve my interest. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), there is a target of the fluctuation result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, if no specific effect is executed, the frequency of executing the specific effect will decrease. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the special effect game is related. If the specific effect A is executed when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may be different from each other, which may reduce the interest.

In the 31st staging mode, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable in the normal figure game is changed instead of the specific staging A. By executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result, such a problem can be avoided. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which a specific effect of any type is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%) for each prize in the general winning opening, but for each winning in the general winning opening, any type is used. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

[32nd production form]
In the 32nd production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved storages (for example, the number of reserved storages and the number of second reserved storages). If the total number of reserved storages (which is the total number of reserved storages) is within the period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved storages is 0. Is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of reserved storages is 0. In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect C (point granting effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1), the period (2), and ( Different types of specific effects are executed depending on the period of 3). As a result, it is possible to make the general winning opening interested in the production performed when the game ball wins a prize, and to improve the interest. Each time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general prize that is a winning condition). The winning history of any of the mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning mouth 9050D is included) is deleted.

In the 32nd staging mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the pre-reading notice exists, the specific staging B (pre-reading notice) is used. When the effect) is executed and it is within the period of (2), that is, when the target of the look-ahead notice does not exist but the target of the change result notice exists, the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) Is executed, that is, when neither the target of the look-ahead notice nor the target of the fluctuation result notice exists in the period of (3), the specific effect C (point-giving effect) is executed.

In this way, by selecting a specific effect that can be executed immediately when the game ball wins in the general winning opening and executing this, the interest when the game ball wins in the general winning opening is appropriately improved. I try to let you. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which a specific effect of any type is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%) for each prize in the general winning opening, but for each winning in the general winning opening, any type is used. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

In the 32nd staging mode, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. Regardless of that, that is, regardless of whether or not the target of the fluctuation result notice exists, the look-ahead notice effect is executed. That is, in the case of "there are both the target of the fluctuation result notice and the target of the look-ahead notice", the look-ahead notice effect is preferentially executed. Not limited to such a form, when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing, the fluctuation result notice When the effect is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed at that timing, the look-ahead notice effect may be executed. That is, when "the target of the fluctuation result notice and the target of the look-ahead notice exist", the fluctuation result notice effect may be preferentially executed.

[Variation example of the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form]
In the 27th effect mode to the 32nd effect mode, the execution ratio of the specific effect may be different depending on the state when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. The "state" referred to here is a state generated as a result of a game in a gaming machine and is a state based on the game in the gaming machine. The execution ratio of the specific effect shall be different according to the classification of the state. For example, in the 27th effect mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is within (1) the symbol fluctuation period, if the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect is performed at a rate of 30%. C is executed, and if the gaming state at that time is a probability change state or a time saving state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the (2) symbol fluctuation period, if the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100%. If the gaming state at that time is a probable change state or a time saving state, the specific effect C shall be executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

Further, in the 27th effect mode to the 32nd effect mode, the type of the specific effect to be executed may be different depending on the state when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. For example, in the 31st effect mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is within the (1) symbol variation period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect A (variation result notice). The effect) is executed, and if the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the (2) symbol fluctuation period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect C (point giving effect) is executed. If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead advance notice effect) is executed. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

In this way, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the classification of the state for different types of the specific effect is (1) the game state is the normal state, or (2) the game state is the probable change state or the time saving state. Or, it is not limited to (1) whether the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, and (2) whether the number of reserved storages is 0. For example, it may be classified as (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, or (2) the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. Further, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is executed. It may be the division. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good. Further, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may be different according to the difference in these categories.

As with the other specific effects A and B, which are executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, the specific effect C (point-giving effect) can be switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. It has become like. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 31). It can only be executed if. In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player with respect to whether or not the specific effect C is executed.

In addition, the specific effect C (point awarding effect) is not limited to the one in which 1 point is given for each winning in the general winning opening, and 2 points or 3 points are given for each winning in the general winning opening. It may be something that is done. The number of points awarded may differ depending on, for example, which general winning opening the gaming ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening, for example. The gaming state may be different depending on the classification of whether it is a normal state, a probabilistic state, or a time-saving state.

Further, in the specific effect C (point awarding effect), points may be given according to factors other than winning the general winning opening. For example, points are given according to the winning to the starting winning opening. It may be done, or points may be given according to the establishment of the reach state or the like.

[33rd production form]
FIG. 47 exemplifies a specific effect D (gauge update effect) as an effect in which the effect mode changes stepwise according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 47, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) means that the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 displayed on the image display device 905 is set in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is a production that can be changed step by step from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages.

In the example of FIG. 47 (a), the filling region 902100a (black portion in the gauge image) in the gauge image 902100 is set to 0 steps according to the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. It has increased from (a state in which the white part occupies 10/10) to one stage (a state in which the black part occupies 1/10 and the white part occupies 9/10) (gauge +1). Further, in the example of FIG. 47 (b), the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 has 0 to 3 stages (black portion) according to the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. Occupies 3/10 and the white part occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

In this way, when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 increases according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and reaches 10 stages (the black part in the gauge image occupies 10/10). In that case, the player shall be given a privilege. For example, as in the above-mentioned specific effect C, the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server, and the player can obtain the desired image or music on the image providing server or music. It can be downloaded from the providing server to the information terminal.

Not limited to this, when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 905, and a special music is output as a BGM during the game. It may be possible. Alternatively, a variable result notice effect for notifying the possibility that the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game executed at the timing when the filling area 902100a reaches 10 stages may become a big hit symbol may be executed. It is also possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the possibility that the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game held at the timing when the area 902100a reaches 10 stages becomes a big hit symbol.

That is, the privilege provided when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages may be an effect not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game. It may be an effect related to the variable display result in the game or the variable display result in the normal figure game. Further, the effect may be related to the gaming state, or may be an effect not related to the gaming state. Further, a different effect may be executed every time the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages. Further, different effects may be executed depending on the gaming state or the like when the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages.

When the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages, a message to that effect is notified by displaying a message on the image display device 905, audio output from the speakers 908L, 908R, etc., and then the gauge image 902100. The filling region 902100a in is reset to the 0 stage. After the reset, the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 will be increased again according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening.

In the 33rd effect mode to the 37th effect mode shown in FIGS. 48 to 49, each time the game ball wins a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the identification extracted from the random number circuit 90124. Based on the random number for determining the effect execution, it is determined whether or not to increase the stage of the filling region 902100a (hereinafter referred to as the gauge level) in the gauge image 902100 by one step. Increase by one step. That is, every time a game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the gauge level by one level. If you win, the gauge level will increase by one level.

In the 33rd effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) a rate of 80% during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increases the gauge level by one level. The effect control CPU 90120 issues a variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game and a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

Similar to the specific effect A to the specific effect C, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) are accompanied. The winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories from the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 33rd effect form, and the 34th effect form, the 36th effect form, and the 37th effect form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening is performed during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball is that (2) the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Based on that, the gauge level is set lower than the rate of increase. During the period (1), the player usually wins a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 905, the speakers 908L, and the 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is able to increase the gauge level by increasing the gauge level because the production corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (1), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 33rd effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). When it is within the period), the gauge level is not increased, and (2) it is possible to increase the gauge level when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Is also good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 33rd effect form, (1) the gauge is based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on (2) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). It may be set to be.

[34th production form]
In the 34th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

The effect control CPU 90120 issues a variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game and a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and until the variable display of the special symbol is completed (the confirmed special symbol is). It is possible to specify the remaining time (until the stop is displayed). For example, by setting the variation time of the special symbol specified by the variation pattern specification command as the value of the variation time timer when the variation start command and the variation pattern specification command are received, the effect control CPU 90120 has the variation time. The remaining time until the timer value times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the special symbol ends (until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed). Further, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (final stopped symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 34th staging mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3) when the symbol is stopped for less than 10 seconds. It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed will be, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (3), it may adversely affect the interest of the specific production. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (3), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 34th staging mode, the gauge level is increased when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). It is possible, and in the case of the period (3), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 34th staging form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3). ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening when it takes less than 10 seconds to stop the symbol.

Further, in the 34th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game being executed and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 has a decorative pattern that is executed when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). If the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and if the display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, while the first general prize is awarded. When the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning mouth 9050D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is the jackpot symbol. May increase the gauge level at a rate of 30%, and increase the gauge level at a rate of 10% when the displayed result is an out-of-order symbol.

[35th production form]
As described above, the specific effect B is exemplified as the look-ahead advance notice effect for notifying the variable display result in the reserved special figure game. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 35 (b), is the start winning judgment result specification command for specifying "big hit" included in the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area? Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect mode of the look-ahead notice effect is the first aspect (voice effect only) or the second aspect (voice effect and character effect). That is, in the look-ahead notice effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target change) that is the target of the look-ahead notice is not notified to the player, and the player grasps the target change. It has become difficult.

As a look-ahead notice effect, it is also possible to adopt an effect of notifying the target change. For example, as described above, in the start prize storage display area 905H, a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied based on the occurrence of the start prize. Is provided. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the start winning determination result specification command, if it is a command that specifies "big hit", the display portion corresponding to the command is displayed corresponding to the command that specifies "off". It is possible to execute a hold change effect that is displayed in a special mode (for example, gold) different from that of the part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to the display portion displayed in a special mode, and the player can grasp the remaining variable display number of times to be executed until the target variation.

For example, if the command specifies "big hit" when the start winning judgment result specification command is received, the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 30%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a normal manner. On the other hand, if the command specifies "missing" when the start winning judgment result specification command is received, the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 95%. The display part corresponding to the command shall be displayed in a normal manner. In this way, when the display part corresponding to the hold memory generated by the start prize is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start prize, the display part in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). Every), it will move to the left, and when the start condition of the variable display game (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) corresponding to the display part of the special mode is satisfied, the special mode The display part disappears from the start winning memory display area 905H. In such an aspect, the hold change effect is executed during the period from the start winning to the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game corresponding to the starting winning.

That is, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied according to the order in which the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the hold change effect is executed, so that the display portion displayed in the special mode (the target of the hold change effect) is executed. Depending on the number of display parts in the normal mode (display information corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that is not the target of the hold change effect) existing to the left of the display information corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display). , It becomes possible to grasp the number of remaining variable display games until the variable display that is the target of the hold change effect is executed.

The timing for displaying the display portion in a special mode is not limited to the start winning prize. For example, at the time of winning a start, the display portion may be displayed in a normal mode, and the display portion may be changed from the normal mode to a special mode after a predetermined effect is performed. May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing when the shift to the left). In these aspects, from the timing when the display part corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice changes from the normal state to the special mode, until the start condition of the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is satisfied. During the period, the pending change effect is being executed.

In the 35th effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed and the target change is also executed. If there is no period (when there is no display portion of a special aspect in the hold change effect and it is not the execution period of the target change), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more. In the case of the period (when there are two or more special figure games for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the ratio is 40%. Increases the gauge level by one level.

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 1. If it is during the period (when there is one special figure game for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge is at a rate of 20%. The level increases by one level.

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the pre-reading notice effect (in the hold change effect). During the period during which the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special aspect is executed), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 35th effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is up to (3) the target change. When the remaining variable display count is 1, the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening (during the period). In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening. Further, in the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target change than the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the periods of (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 35th staging mode, the gauge level is increased when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). It is possible, and if it is the period of (3) and (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 35th effect mode, the rate at which the gauge level increases when (2) the remaining variable display count until the target fluctuation is 2 or more is (3) the remaining variable until the target fluctuation. It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of impressions is 1, and (4) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the execution period of the target fluctuation.

Further, in the 35th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4). In the case of (?), The gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the variable display result in the target fluctuation is displayed. If it becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and if the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%. When the timing when the game ball wins in any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 20%, and the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4). In the case of the period of, if the variable display result in the target fluctuation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 15%, and if the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 10%. May be increased.

[36th production form]
In the 36th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (2) variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed. In that case, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%.

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (3) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed. In the period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed and the reach state is reached. In the case of the period after the establishment, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 36th staging mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is general after (4) the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of a game ball in the winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the reach state is not established, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 36th staging mode, the gauge level is increased when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3). It is possible, and in the case of the period (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 36th staging form, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach fluctuation is executed and before the reach state is established is (4). ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is executed and the period after the reach state is established.

[37th production form]
In the 37th staging mode shown in FIG. 49, the rate of increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level increases by one level at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 37th staging mode, the rate at which the gauge level increases differs between (1) within the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period, and further, the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening The rate at which the gauge level increases differs between the case where the game ball wins the 9050C and the case where the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the rate at which the gauge level increases differs depending on the general winning opening where the game ball wins, the player becomes interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won, and improves the interest. be able to.

For example, the first general prize provided near the edge of the game area 9010 rather than the prize of the game ball to the second general prize opening 9050B and the third general prize opening 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the opening 9050A and the 4th general winning opening 9050D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening 9050A and the 4th general winning opening 9050D. By making the gauge level higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when a game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening 9050B and the 3rd general winning opening 9050C, the interest in winning the general winning opening that is more difficult to win is made. It is good to increase it.

In addition, in the 37th staging form, when a game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening or the 4th general winning opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and the 2nd general winning opening or the 3rd general winning opening can be used. If the game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 37th production form, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening 9050B. Alternatively, it may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C.

[38th production form]
In the 38th effect mode to the 42nd effect mode shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, it is not determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124. Further, in the 38th staging mode to the 42nd staging mode, the gauge level that increases with one winning of the general winning opening is not limited to one stage. For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the gauge level may be increased by three steps according to one winning in the general winning opening.

In the 38th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1), and (2) the gauge level is three steps during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increase (gauge +3).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 38th effect form, and the 39th effect form, the 41st effect form, and the 42nd effect form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening is performed during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of the game ball is (2) that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period). It is set to be less than the number of gauge level steps that increase based on. During the period (1), the player usually wins a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 905, the speakers 908L, and the 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (1), it may adversely affect the interest of the specific production. On the other hand, in the period of (2), the player is increased by increasing the gauge level because the production corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. Is in a situation where it is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (1), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 38th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). If it is within the period), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), and (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (2). In the case of (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps may be set to, for example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 38th staging form, (1) the gauge is based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The number of stages in which the level increases is (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). May be set to increase.

In addition, as a privilege given when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a privilege having a different value may be given. For example, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a two-dimensional code that can download only images may be displayed, or a two-dimensional code that can download images and music may be displayed. At this time, the privilege value given to the latter is larger than that to the former. The number of stages in which the gauge level increases may indicate the magnitude of the privilege value given when the gauge level reaches 10 stages. For example, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). In addition, when the privilege value is small, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), and when the benefit value is large, the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. For example, the rate of increase is 40% (the rate of changing only one step is 60%), and (2) the privilege value is small when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period). For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is 50% (the rate of changing only one step is 50%), and when the privilege value is large, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 80%. (The rate of changing only one step is 20%).

[39th production form]
In the 39th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by 3 steps (gauge +3). The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps (gauge +2). The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least four or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 39th staging mode, the number of gauge level stages that increase based on (2) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3) less than 10 seconds until the symbol is stopped. It is sometimes set higher than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed will be, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (3), it may adversely affect the interest of the specific production. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (3), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 39th production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the case of the period (3), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step). Is 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 39th staging form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (2). 3) The gauge level may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level is increased based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped in less than 10 seconds.

Further, in the 39th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game being executed and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 has a decorative pattern that is executed when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). If the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and if the display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps, while the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general If the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is the jackpot symbol, the gauge level is set to two levels. If the number is increased and the displayed result is out of order, the gauge level may be increased by one step.

[40th production form]
In the 40th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed and the target change is also executed. If there is no period (when there is no display part of a special aspect in the hold change effect and it is not the execution period of the target change), the gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge +4).

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more. If the period is (when there are two or more special figure games for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge level is 3. Increase in stages (gauge +3).

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 1. If it is during the period (when there is 1 special figure game for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge level is increased by 2 steps. (Gauge +2).

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the pre-reading notice effect (in the hold change effect). The gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1) during the period during which the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special aspect is executed).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of three or more times to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 40th staging mode, (2) the number of gauge level steps that increase based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the target change. When the remaining variable display count up to 1 is 1, the number of gauge level increases that increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (target change) It is set to be larger than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening during the execution period of. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening. Further, in the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target change than the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 40th production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level is set to 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period of (3) and (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (only one step). The rate of change may be 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 40th effect mode, (2) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the number of remaining variable displays until the target fluctuation is 2 or more is (3) the remaining until the target fluctuation. It may be set to be less than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the variable display count is 1, and (4) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases during the execution period of the target fluctuation.

Further, in the 40th staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4). In the case of (?), The gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the variable display result in the target fluctuation is displayed. If it becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 4 steps, and if the variable display result is out of order, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and either the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D. When the timing when the game ball wins the prize is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and the variable display result becomes an off symbol. The gauge level is increased by two steps, and when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (4), the variable display in the target fluctuation. If the result is a big hit symbol, the gauge level may be increased by two steps, and if the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level may be increased by one step.

[41st production form]
In the 41st staging mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge +4). Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (2) variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed. In that case, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps (gauge +3).

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (3) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed. In the case of the period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by two steps (gauge +3), and (4) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed and the reach state is established. For subsequent periods, the gauge level increases by one level (gauge +1).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of three or more times to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 41st staging mode, the number of gauge level stages that increase based on (3) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is (4) after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. It is set to be larger than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (4), it may adversely affect the interest of the specific production. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the reach state is not established, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 41st production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the case of the period (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step). Is 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 41st staging form, (3) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is executed and the reach state is not established is (3). 4) The gauge level may be set to be less than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases during the period in which the reach fluctuation is executed and in the period after the reach state is established.

[42nd production form]
In the 42nd staging mode shown in FIG. 51, the number of steps for increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). , Gauge level increases by 1 level (gauge +1). On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by 2 steps (gauge +2).

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increases the gauge level by 3 levels (gauge +3). On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increases the gauge level by 4 levels (gauge +4).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of three or more times to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 42nd staging mode, the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased is different between (1) within the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period, and further, the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning The number of stages of the gauge level to be increased is different depending on whether the game ball wins the mouth 9050C or the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the number of gauge level stages to be increased differs depending on the general winning opening that the game ball has won, the player becomes interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the interest is improved. Can be made to.

For example, the first general prize provided near the edge of the game area 9010 rather than the prize of the game ball to the second general prize opening 9050B and the third general prize opening 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the opening 9050A and the 4th general winning opening 9050D, the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening 9050A and the 4th general winning opening 9050D. By increasing the number more than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening 9050B and the 3rd general winning opening 9050C, the winning in the general winning opening that is more difficult to win It's a good idea to enhance your interest.

In the 42nd production mode, when a game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening or the 4th general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by 2 steps or more is, for example, 80% (the rate of changing only 1 step is 20). %), And when a game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening or the 3rd general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by 2 steps or more is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only 1 step is 80%). Is also good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 42nd staging form, the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening. It may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C.

[Modification example of 33rd effect form to 42nd effect form]
The division as a reference for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level in the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form, and the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form are determined. The criteria for this is not limited to the above example. For example, the division for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level and the division for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased are as follows: (1) the gaming state is the normal state, or (2) the gaming state is. It may be classified as whether it is a probable change state or a time saving state. Further, it may be classified into (1) whether the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, and (2) whether the number of reserved storages is 0. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good.

The gauge image 902100 is displayed even when the filling region 902100a is in the minimum 0 stage, but a condition for displaying the gauge image 902100 may be provided. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when the gaming state is in the normal state, and an effect of increasing the gauge level can be executed, but the gauge image 902100 is not displayed when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state (gauge). The effect of increasing the level may not be executed).

The display of the gauge image 902100 and the effect of increasing the gauge level are executed during the period when the predetermined effect is executed, and may not be executed during the period when the predetermined effect is not executed. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening only during the period when the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 905 is a predetermined background image (predetermined effect stage period). Or the gauge level may be increased. Further, the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening only during the period when the display portion in the starting prize storage display area 905H is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, white suggesting that the display portion may change to a special mode). When this is done, the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is simultaneously executed at the timing when the RTC (real-time clock) (not shown) provided on the effect control board 9012 reaches a predetermined time (when the game machine of the same model reaches a predetermined time). When the effect) is executed, the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening during the execution period of the simultaneous effect.

Further, when the gauge level is increased, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. At this time, different effect sounds may be output according to the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased. For example, when the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, it is compared with the case where the gauge level is increased by 1 step. The volume of the staging sound may be increased.

Further, it is preferable to output the effect sound that increases the gauge level at a volume different from the effect sound related to the special figure game and the effect sound related to the normal figure game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be higher than the volume of the effect sound related to the normal figure game, but may be lower than the volume of the effect sound related to the special figure game. Further, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be higher than the volume of the effect sound related to the special figure game, but may be lower than the volume of the error sound for notifying the gaming machine error.

Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be different depending on the state. For example, the volume in the normal state may be louder than the volume in the probabilistic state or the time saving state.

In addition, the specific effect whose effect mode changes stepwise according to the winning of the general winning opening is not limited to the specific effect D that changes the gauge level, and the mode of the displayed character is stepwise. It may change (for example, the size of the displayed character increases or the items owned by the character change), and the characters that the player can select are gradually increased. Is also good. Further, the mode and position of the movable accessory may be changed stepwise, and the emission color of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed stepwise. Further, the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R may be changed stepwise.

The specific effect D (gauge update effect) can be switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. 30, like the other specific effects A to C executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It has become like. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 31). It can only be executed if. In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player with respect to whether or not the specific effect D is executed.

[43rd production form]
The above-mentioned specific effects A to D are all effects performed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not win the general winning opening. You can do it. For example, in the staging control CPU 90120, when the game ball does not win any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D during the 10-minute game period, as shown in FIG. 52, It is possible to execute a specific effect E for displaying an image imitating the form of a general winning opening and a notification image 902200 or the like including the characters "There is no general winning" on the image display device 905.

In this way, the specific effect is not limited to the effect executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening, but the effect executed based on the fact that the game ball does not win in the general winning opening (general winning). It may be a production that suggests the difficulty of winning a prize in the mouth). That is, the specific effect may be an effect related to a game event of winning a game ball to a general winning opening (an effect executed when a game event occurs or a game event does not occur).

In the 43rd effect mode shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period during which the game ball has not won a prize in the general winning opening. When the value of the non-winning determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command and a general winning opening from the game control microcomputer 90100. When either the designated command or the large winning opening winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer and the timer is started. Then, if the general winning opening designation command is received before the non-winning determination timer times out (10 minutes before the timer set), 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and then again. Start the timer.

On the other hand, when the non-winning determination timer times out because the general winning opening designation command is not received before the non-winning determination timer times out, the notification image 902200 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. The specific effect E to be displayed is executed. When the specific effect E is executed, 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the broadcast image 902200) is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The value of the non-winning determination timer in this case is a value according to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative pattern, and executes the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If the command is not received, the game end determination is performed to determine that the game is completed, and the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended, the processing due to the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed during the period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the processing caused by the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, the detection of the timeout when the timer value becomes 0). Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command while the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended. , Restarts the update of the non-winning judgment timer.

That is, the non-winning determination timer is updated during the period in which the player is playing the game (the game end determination is not made), and is generally 10 minutes during the period in which the player is playing the game. When the number of winnings to the winning opening becomes 0, a time-out occurs (the time-out is detected by the effect control CPU 90120). As a result, when the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed if the general winning opening is not won for 10 minutes.

In the above-mentioned production mode, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game based on whether or not the game ball is launched toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. You can do it. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game according to whether or not the hitting ball operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the firing motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

In this way, if the general winning opening is not won in the predetermined period (10-minute game period) even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed. Notify that no prize has been awarded to the general prize opening. By this notification, the player can grasp that no prize has been generated in the general winning opening and can use it as a reference (for example, a judgment material for selecting a table) when playing a game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the specific effect E is executed frequently), the game nails are used so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening is higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on the machine.

Further, if the general winning opening is not won even though the game is played by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is not played by the player. When no prize has been won in the general winning opening, the non-winning determination timer is paused (so that the CPU 90120 for effect control does not execute the process based on the timeout of the non-winning determination timer). Execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the general winning opening has not been won because the game has not been performed by the player. In this case, the game The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than when it is determined that the general winning opening has not been won even though the game is being played by the person.

[44th production form]
As the specific effect E, it is not limited to the one that notifies that the general winning opening has not been won within the predetermined period (the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than 1), but is not limited to the general effect within the predetermined period. It may be possible to notify identifiable that the number of winnings to the winning opening is less than a predetermined number. In the 44th effect mode, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening in a predetermined period. When the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command and a general winning opening from the game control microcomputer 90100. When either the designated command or the large winning opening winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer and the timer is started. At this time, the value of the winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122 is set to 0. Then, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area every time the general winning opening designation command is received during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer set).

Then, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect control CPU 90120 is within a predetermined period in the specific effect E. Notify that the number of winnings is less than a predetermined number and / or notify the number of winnings within a predetermined period. For example, the message "The number of general prizes for 30 minutes is less than 3" and / or the message "The number of general prizes for 30 minutes is only 1" is displayed on the image display device 905.

When the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is set again as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect E. On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or more than a predetermined predetermined number (for example, 3), the winning number determination timer does not execute the specific effect E. Set the value to 30 minutes again and start the timer again.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and executes the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If the command is not received, the game end determination is performed to determine that the game is completed, and the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended, the processing due to the time-out of the winning number determination timer (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed during the period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the winning number determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the process of timing out the winning number determination timer (specifically, the detection of the timeout when the timer value becomes 0). Execution of the specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command while the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended. , Resume updating the winning number determination timer.

That is, the winning number determination timer is updated during the period in which the player is playing the game (the game end determination is not made), and 30 minutes have elapsed within the period in which the player is playing the game. (The time-out is detected by the effect control CPU 90120). At the time of the time-out, the specific effect E is executed only when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes is less than the predetermined number.

In the above-mentioned production mode, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game based on whether or not the game ball is launched toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. You can do it. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game according to whether or not the hitting ball operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the firing motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

In this way, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period (30-minute game period) is less than the predetermined number even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed. It is notified that the number of winnings to the general winning openings in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. By this notification, the player can grasp that the frequency of winning a prize in the general winning opening is low and can use it as a reference (for example, a judgment material for selecting a table) when playing a game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the specific effect E is executed frequently), the game nails are used so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening is higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on the machine.

Further, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is performed by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is performed by the player. If the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the winning number determination timer is paused (the effect control CPU 90120 executes processing based on the timeout of the winning number determination timer). By not doing so), the execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

Even if it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the game is not performed by the player, the specific effect E may be executed. , In this case, the specific effect is lower than the case where it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is played by the player. E may be executed.

[45th production form]
In the 43rd effect mode and the 44th effect mode, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning openings within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time. Although it was decided to execute the specific effect E regardless of the above, the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be different depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 45th staging mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out). However, (1) the specific effect E is executed when it is in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is not executed when it is in the probability change state or the time-saving state.

The gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1). ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. May be. In this way, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E at different ratios according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[46th production form]
In the 43rd effect mode and the 44th effect mode, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning openings within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time. Regardless of the above, it was decided to execute the specific effect E in a common mode, but the effect mode of the specific effect E may be different depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 46th staging mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out). However, (1) the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output) in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is performed in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state. It is executed in two modes (image display only).

Specifically, the first aspect of the specific effect E is to notify the image display device 905 of the fact by displaying an image indicating that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. It is a mode in which the voice is output by the voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the second aspect of the specific effect E is a mode in which the notification is performed only by the image display and not by the voice output.

The gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1). ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode at a rate of, for example, 80% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), and (2) in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state. May execute the specific effect E in the first aspect at a rate of, for example, 20% (execution in the second aspect at a rate of 80%). As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E in a different mode according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modifications of the 43rd production form to the 46th production form]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect mode to the 46th effect mode is the display setting table of FIG. 30 like the other specific effects A to D executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. According to this, the presence or absence of execution can be switched. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 31). It can only be executed if. In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player with respect to whether or not the specific effect E is executed.

For example, if the game hall side does not want to execute the specific effect E, by switching the display changeover switch 9032 to the non-display setting (first position), the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player setting. .. With such a configuration, the intention of the amusement park side is prioritized and reflected regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning the general winning opening. Can be made to.

Further, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect mode, the value of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect mode, and the value of the winning number counter area, which are stored in the RAM 90122, are both electric. It is not backed up at the time of disconnection, and when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, it is erased accordingly. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect mode and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect mode are both invalid. Therefore, the value of the timer is not referred to until the predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 90120. Further, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the 44th effect mode becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is restarted.

In this way, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is erased without being backed up, and when the power supply is restarted, the addition is started again from 0. become. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a control burden that requires a backup means in the event of a power failure.

As in the 45th effect mode and the 46th effect form, the classification for making the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the effect mode of the specific effect E different is (1) whether the gaming state is the normal state or (2). ) The gaming state is not limited to the probabilistic state or the time saving state. For example, it may be classified as (1) whether the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, and (2) whether the number of reserved storages is 0. Further, it may be classified into (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation and (2) the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. Further, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is executed. It may be the division. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good. Further, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the mode of the specific effect E may be different depending on the difference in these categories.

The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect mode to the 46th effect mode is executed when the number of prizes to the general winning opening in the predetermined game period is less than the predetermined number. Not limited to such a form, among the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, only a specific general winning opening is targeted, and the number of winnings to the specific general winning opening in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when the number is less. For example, only the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, which have a higher frequency of winning a game ball than the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, are targeted for the general winning opening 9050C during a predetermined game period. The number of winnings may be counted, and the specific effect E may be executed when the counted number of winnings is less than a predetermined number.

Further, in the 43rd effect mode to the 46th effect form, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening within a certain period of time (10 minutes or 30 minutes) is less than the predetermined number, the specific effect E is executed. However, the period for determining the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not limited to this. The period may be defined by the number of times the special figure game is executed, and may be, for example, a period in which the variable display related to the special figure game is executed 100 times. Further, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the present time, or may be a period specified by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). Further, the period may be a period controlled to a predetermined gaming state, for example, a period controlled to a normal state (a period during which the game is played by left-handed strike), a probable change state or a shortened time. It may be a period controlled by the state (a period during which the game is played by right-handed hitting).

Further, the following method may be used as a method for determining whether or not the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

(A) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number for the predetermined number of balls shot in the game area 9010. While the launch motor included in the hitting ball launching device is being driven, approximately 100 gaming balls are launched into the gaming area 9010 in one minute. Therefore, for example, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening for the number of hit balls of 1000 shots (corresponding to the game period of 10 minutes) is less than the predetermined number, the specific effect E may be executed. .. In addition, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 9010 is calculated, and when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio, the specific effect E is executed. May be.

Further, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 differs depending on whether the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio or greater than or equal to the predetermined ratio. You may try to execute a specific effect. For example, if the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is low, the character A appears and the frequency of winning to the general winning opening is low. Character B appears when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 9010 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio. Then, it is notified that the winning frequency to the general winning opening is at a medium level, and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is higher than the medium ratio. In the case of the ratio, the character C may appear to notify that the winning frequency to the general winning opening is high.

(B) It may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. For example, if 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning in the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes. When the number is less than 30 (three prizes), the specific effect E may be executed. Further, whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening for the predetermined number of shot balls (for example, 1000 shots) fired in the game area 9010 is less than the predetermined number. May be determined, and the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is calculated, and the ratio is predetermined. When the ratio is lower than the ratio of, the specific effect E may be executed. Further, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is lower than the predetermined ratio, or more than the predetermined ratio. In some cases, different aspects of the specific effect may be executed.

In this way, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number. It should be noted that such a form can be applied even in the case where a different number of prize balls are paid out depending on the general prize opening in which the game ball is won.

(C) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number (for example, 5) with respect to the predetermined number of winnings to the starting winning opening (for example, 100). The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize to the general prize opening is more than the predetermined number for the predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10000) paid out according to the prize to the starting prize opening. It may be determined whether or not the number is small, and the prize balls paid out according to the prizes to the general prize openings for the number of prize balls paid out according to the prizes to the starting prize opening. The specific effect E may be executed when the ratio of the numbers is calculated and the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize to the general prize opening to the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize to the starting prize opening is lower than the predetermined ratio. And, depending on the case where the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio, a specific effect of a different aspect may be executed.

Further, for example, the total number of prize balls paid out during the predetermined period when the gaming state is in the normal state (according to the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning of the starting winning opening and the winning of the general winning opening). Calculate the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the prizes to the general winning openings to the total number of prize balls paid out), and when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio , The specific effect E may be executed. Further, the specific effect of different modes may be executed according to the ratio.

(D) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number (for example, twice) for the predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the game machine. , The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the consumption amount in the game machine may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In such a form, a different predetermined number (for example, 4 yen is twice, 1 yen is 8) depending on the rental unit price (for example, 4 yen or 1 yen) of the game medium used for the game machine. (Times, etc.), or different predetermined ratios (for example, 2 times / 1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times / 1000 yen for 1 yen, etc.) are applied. In addition, the specific effect of different modes is executed depending on whether the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the consumption amount of the gaming machine is lower than the predetermined ratio or more than the predetermined ratio. You may try to do it.

[47th production form]
In the 47th effect mode shown in FIG. 56, a character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, and within the period in which the character is displayed, the first starting winning opening is entered. Effective start winning of the game ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value) and the game to the second starting winning opening. Based on the occurrence of any of the valid start winnings of the ball (that is, the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening when the number of second reserved storage corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value). In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold change effect of changing the display portion corresponding to the hold variable display game including the variable display game based on the generated effective start prize from the normal mode to the special mode is executed. ..

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 holds the display portion corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize to be displayed in a special mode from the beginning without going through the normal mode, based on the occurrence of the effective start prize. You may try to perform a change effect. For example, when a new effective start prize is generated, the displayed character takes an action such as swinging up a cane, and the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the new effective start prize. May be displayed in a special mode instead of the normal mode (from the beginning of the display of the hold information, the hold information in the special mode corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is finally satisfied exists).

Here, in the 47th effect mode, and in the 48th effect mode and the 49th effect mode, which will be described later, each time the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening, the random number circuit 90124 A random number for character determination is extracted from. Then, based on the extracted random numbers for character determination, whether or not to make a character appear, and when making a character appear, which of characters A to C to appear is determined in the character determination table of FIG. 54. Determined at the indicated rate.

It should be noted that the random number for character determination may be extracted by the effect control CPU 90120 only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting a random number for character determination on the condition that the character is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to limit the character from appearing during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state. .. Further, by not extracting the random number for character determination after the reach state is established within the period in which the variable display game is executed, it is possible to prevent the character from appearing after the reach state is established.

In the example of FIG. 54, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the character A appears at a rate of 10% when the general winning opening designation command for designating the winning to the first general winning opening 9050A is received. It is decided to make character B appear at a rate of 30%, and to make character C appear at a rate of 60%. In addition, when receiving the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the second general winning opening 9050B, it is decided that no character will appear at a rate of 50%, and character A will appear at a rate of 35%. It is decided to make the character B appear at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to make the character C appear at a rate of 5%.

Further, when the CPU 90120 for effect control receives the general winning opening designation command for designating the winning to the third general winning opening 9050C, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 90%, and 10%. It is decided to make character C appear at a rate. In addition, when receiving the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the 4th general winning opening 9050D, it is decided that no character will appear at a rate of 75%, and character C will appear at a rate of 25%. Decide to let.

That is, in this example, when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left gaming area 9010A, the third general winning opening 9010B provided in the right gaming area 9010B. Characters will appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in either the general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The player fires a game ball in the left game area 9010A when the game state is in the normal state, and fires the game ball in the right game area 9010B when the game state is in the probability change state or the time saving state. Characters will appear at a higher rate than in the state or the time saving state.

Then, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, the specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect)) is based on the fact that the predetermined conditions (effective start winning, reach state) are satisfied during the period in which the character is displayed. , Specific effect G (variation result notice effect by dialogue)) is executed, so in these effect forms, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the probable change state or the time saving state. Specific effects can be executed at a rate.

As described above, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous as compared with the probabilistic state and the time saving state, and the player's interest in the game, for example, the variable display of the special figure game is low. By increasing the frequency of execution, we are trying to improve the interest. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, it is advantageous as compared with the normal state, and the player is highly interested in the game, for example, the variable display of the special figure game, so that the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are high. If the price remains high, it may spoil the interest. Therefore, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set low.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 54, even when a game ball wins in the same general winning opening, the ratio of characters appearing may be different depending on the game state, for example, a normal state. In the case where the character appears at a rate of 50% when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B, 10% when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. Characters may appear at the rate of.

Further, the character can appear only in the normal state, and the character may not appear in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. In this way, to "make the execution ratio of the effect in one state different from the execution ratio of the effect in the other state", the effect can be executed only in one state, and the effect is not executed in the other state. Shall be included. Further, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 54, the appearance ratio of the character in the probabilistic state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance ratio of the character in the normal state.

Further, in the example of FIG. 54, when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A, the character appears at a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B. There is. Further, when the game ball wins in the 4th general winning opening 9050D, the character appears at a higher rate than in the case where the game ball wins in the 3rd general winning opening 9050C. In this embodiment, when the game ball is launched into the left game area 9010A, the game ball wins more frequently in the second general prize opening 9050B than in the first general prize opening 9050A, and in the right game area 9010B. When the game ball is launched, the game ball wins more frequently in the third general winning opening 9050C than in the fourth general winning opening 9050D. That is, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where it is difficult for the game ball to win, the character appears at a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win. On the contrary, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win, the character has a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where it is difficult for the game ball to win. You may make it appear.

Further, in the example of FIG. 54, the character that may be displayed when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B, which the game ball frequently wins in the normal state, is Although the characters are A to C, they may be displayed when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, which are frequently won in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. Character C is the only character with. In the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, which are the game states in which the game interest is higher than the normal state, the situation that "the character appears but the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the character display period elapses" occurs, which causes the interest. Since it is possible that the display period will be reduced, only the character C having the longest display period can be displayed.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 54, even when a game ball wins in the same general winning opening, the characters appearing may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, the first character may appear. 2 Characters A to C may be displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 9050B, but the character when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. It may be possible that only C is displayed. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 54, the number of characters that may be displayed in the probabilistic state and the normal state is larger than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. May be.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a display period of each character displayed on the image display device 905. It is assumed that all of the characters A to C are immediately displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when the character to be displayed is determined based on the winning of the general winning opening. That is, since the character is displayed immediately after the winning of the general winning opening, the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning opening has occurred.

When character A is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied within 1 minute from the start of display (effective start winning, reach state is established), from the start of display of character A. If the character A is erased from the screen at the timing when 1 minute has elapsed, and (2) the predetermined condition is satisfied within 1 minute from the start of the display, the specific effect (specific effect F (pending change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is satisfied. ), Character A is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (including a condition related to the effect executed with the progress of the game). Even if a valid start prize is generated, if the number of pending variable display games including the variable display game corresponding to the valid start prize is 1, the start condition is satisfied for the variable display game. Since the start condition is satisfied (the hold information is deleted) immediately after the game is played, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the hold change effect by the displayed character. Therefore, if the number of holdings of the variable display game after the effective start winning is less than the predetermined number (1 in this example), the holding change effect is not executed, and the number of holdings of the variable display game after the valid starting winning is the predetermined number. If there are more than 1 in this example, the hold change effect may be executed.

Further, the character may be erased even when the game transitions to the big hit game state or when the game end determination is performed by the above-mentioned effect control CPU 90120. Further, the character displayed on the image display device 905 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped shall not be displayed again after the power supply is restarted. That is, it is assumed that the backup process for displaying the character displayed before the power failure on the image display device 905 again after restarting the power supply is not performed.

It should be noted that when the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed, the appearing character performs a predetermined action (that is, with the change in the mode of the displayed object), and the hold memory is stored. It shall include both cases where the mode of the corresponding display site has changed and cases where it has not changed. Further, the timing at which the specific effect F (hold change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (e), the appearing character 903000 (book). In the example, it is set as character A, but in each hold memory due to the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001 possessed by the character B may appear or the character C may appear in the specific effect F (hold change effect). This is the timing when the action effect that covers the corresponding display portion is performed for a certain period of time (the predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

Further, the fact that the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed means that the appearing character 903100 (in this example, the character B is used, but the specific effect G) is executed, as shown in FIGS. 58 (f) and 58 (g). (In some cases, character A may appear or character C may appear) in (variation result advance notice effect) means that a predetermined line is emitted, and the timing at which the specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect) ends is. This is the timing when the character's dialogue is displayed for a certain period of time (the predetermined dialogue display period has elapsed).

When the character B is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (effective start winning, reach state is established) within 2 minutes from the start of the display, the display of the character B is started. When the character B is erased from the screen at the timing when 2 minutes have passed, and (2) the predetermined condition is satisfied within 2 minutes from the start of the display, the specific effect (specific effect F (pending change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is satisfied. ), Character B is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

When character C is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) if the predetermined conditions (effective start winning, establishment of reach state) are not satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, from the start of display of character C. Character C is erased from the screen at the timing when 3 minutes have passed, and (2) if a predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, a specific effect (specific effect F (pending change effect)) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is satisfied. ), Character C is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

In this way, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, the character is immediately displayed on the image display device 905, so that the player is in a state after the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. You can make them recognize that. Further, the period in which the character is displayed is a specific period in which the specific effect can be executed by satisfying the predetermined condition, and even if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period in which the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect based on the above is not executed, the player recognizes that "the specific effect will be executed if the specified condition is satisfied while the character is displayed", and the game is played in order to satisfy the predetermined condition. It will be done, and the fun of the game will be enhanced until the specific production is executed.

Further, since the display period differs depending on the displayed character, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is displayed. The player who confirms the type of the character can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period in which a predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest until the specific production is executed.

Further, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the setting ratio for a specific period in which a predetermined condition must be satisfied differs depending on the general winning opening, so that the player can place the game ball in any of the general winning openings. You will be interested in winning a prize.

(Specific example of specific staging F (pending change staging))
In the 47th effect mode shown in FIG. 56, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905 and an effective start winning is generated, the character displayed as the specific effect F is displayed. A pending change effect with the action of is executed. As described above, the occurrence of the effective start winning is the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening in the state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value, and the second. A game ball is won in the second starting winning opening when the number of second reserved storage corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

The effect control CPU 90120 has received a start winning opening designation command designated as a "first starting winning opening" or a "second starting winning opening", and a starting winning determination result specification command including valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of a valid start prize. FIG. 57 shows a specific example of the hold change effect in the 47th effect mode.

In FIG. 57 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, a scroll display in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 2. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, among the variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied. Is displayed in the normal mode, and it is assumed that the display portion (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied is displayed in the normal mode.

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 decides to make the character A appear at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B (see FIG. 54). In FIG. 57 (b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the character 903000 (character A) having the cane 903001 on the image display device 905. Character A shall appear on the screen immediately after the general prize.

Then, within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, it is assumed that the effective start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In FIG. 57 (c), the number of reserved storages becomes 3 accordingly, and the display portion (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. Whether or not the effect control CPU 90120, which has detected the occurrence of the effective start winning, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, changes the display portion corresponding to each of the three reserved storages from the normal mode to the special mode. Is determined respectively.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is a command for specifying each start winning determination result (not blank data) stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure and the start winning command storage area for the second special figure. It contains valid data). Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (d), with respect to the start winning determination result designation command for designating the "big hit", the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. It is decided that the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed as the normal mode at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, regarding the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "missing", it was decided to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 90%. Determines not to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command in the normal mode.

In this example, regarding the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first and second, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command should not be changed as the normal mode. Only for the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game that is determined to be (no pending change) and the start condition is satisfied, the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. It is assumed that it has been decided to let it (with pending changes).

Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (e), in the effect control CPU 90120, the character 903000 (character A) directs the tip of the cane 903001 toward the start winning memory display area 905H, and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001. This causes an action effect in which the display portion corresponding to each reserved memory is surrounded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (f), the effect control CPU 90120 has a normal mode of displaying the left end and the second display portion from the left based on the above-mentioned determination as the action effect is executed. With respect to the third display portion from the left, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the above-mentioned determination. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period of time, the character 903000 (character A) holding the cane 903001 and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001 are erased from the screen.

As a result of the change in the mode of the display part accompanying this action effect, for the player, the character 903000 (character A) that appeared based on the winning of the general winning opening took action, and as a result, the third display part from the left. Recognizes that has changed from a normal mode to a special mode, and expects a variable display game that is executed three times after the currently executed variable display game.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 57 (c) and 57 (d), with respect to the start winning judgment result designation command corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is not satisfied, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is usually used. When it is decided not to change the mode as it is (no change on hold), even after the action effect shown in FIG. 57 (e) is performed, as shown in FIG. 57 (g), three hold memories are stored. All of the three corresponding holding sites have not changed in the normal manner.

In this way, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed triggered by "the effective start winning is generated within the period in which the character is displayed", so that the effective start winning is generated in the character display period. It is possible to make people interested in whether or not it is, and it is possible to enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening until the specific production is executed. In addition, a game ball is placed in the general winning opening due to the effect configuration of notifying the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied, triggered by the event of winning the general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to further enhance the interest from winning a prize to the execution of a specific production.

Further, with the action of the character 903000 (character A), whether the display mode of any of the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied changes from the normal mode to the special mode. Whether or not, and if it changes, it is possible to pay attention to which display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, by suggesting a variable display game that the player can expect, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, a common object (character A's action) is an effect that suggests a prize in the general winning opening (character A's appearance) and an effect that suggests a display result of a variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied (character A's action). By being composed of the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening to the time when the specific effect is executed. Then, the appearance of the character and the action are related to the appearance of the character and the action by suggesting that the winning to the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied are suggested by a common object. It can increase the interest of the player.

The specific effect F (hold change effect) is a variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize (effective start prize that triggers the determination that a predetermined condition is satisfied) that triggered the execution of the hold change effect (the effective start prize). The display result is announced by targeting each of the pending variable display games including the variable display game in which the start condition is finally satisfied. Targeting only the variable display game (variable display game in which the start condition was finally satisfied) corresponding to the effective start prize (effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was satisfied) The display result may be announced. On the contrary, the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize (effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was satisfied) that triggered the execution of the hold change effect (finally, the start condition). The display result may be announced by targeting the variable display game excluding the variable display game in which is established.

(Character erasure process)
Similar to the specific effect A to the specific effect D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (holding change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 erases the displayed character from the screen and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the first). 4 The history of winning one or more times to the general winning opening 9050D and the history of winning one or more times to any of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are deleted (the winning history of FIG. 56). Reset condition).

Further, if the displayed character is erased after the lapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect F, the winning history (at least) of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F is accompanied by this. The first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D (including one or more winning histories) is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 56).

FIG. 59A is a timing chart showing a display period of each character when the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the variable display game of the decorative symbol is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. When the variable display 1 is executed, at the timing of (1), any of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. To.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing of (2) when one minute has passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. During this period, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, but with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not hidden but is continuously displayed. There is. If the effective start prize is generated within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is hidden after the action effect is completed.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is hidden at the timing of (3) when 2 minutes have passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, and further, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, but the variable display 1 ends, the variable display 2 starts, and the variable display 2 starts. With the end of the display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the effective start prize is generated within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is hidden after the action effect is completed.

When the displayed character is character C, the character C is hidden at the timing when 5 minutes have passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. In this example, since the effective start prize is generated at the timing of (4) before 5 minutes have passed from the appearance of the character C, the action effect is executed without the character being hidden, and the action is performed. At the timing of the end of the effect (5), the display portion corresponding to one or more reserved memories is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and further, the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts, but it is variable. Character C is not hidden when the display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. It is displayed continuously.

In this way, once the character is displayed, it will continue to be displayed until "a predetermined condition is satisfied" or "a predetermined period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition". ing. Then, the character is hidden at the earlier timing of "the predetermined condition is satisfied" and "the predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied".

[48th production form]
In the 48th effect mode shown in FIG. 56, the character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening, and the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed. Based on this, the dialogue corresponding to the display result of the variable display game (variable display game of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach state) being executed is displayed. That is, the display control of the character is the same as that of the 47th effect mode, but the predetermined condition to be satisfied within the display period of the character and the type of the specific effect executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specific effect G (variation result notice effect))
In the 48th effect mode shown in FIG. 56, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905 and the reach state is established, the character displayed as the specific effect G is displayed. The fluctuation result notice effect with the dialogue display is executed. As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is determined that the reach state is established when the variable display game with the reach state is executed and the remaining time of the variable display game with the reach state reaches a predetermined timing for establishing the reach state. It is possible to grasp and execute the specific effect G if the character is displayed at this time. FIG. 58 shows a specific example of the variation result advance notice effect in the 48th effect mode.

In FIG. 58 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, a scroll display in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 decides to make the character B appear at a rate of 30% based on the fact that the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A (see FIG. 54). In FIG. 58 (b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the character 903100 (character B) having the cane 903101 on the image display device 905. Character B shall appear on the screen immediately after the general prize.

Then, in FIG. 58 (c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "2" on the left, "1" on the right, and "3" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

Then, it is assumed that the reach state is established and the predetermined condition is satisfied within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B. In FIG. 58 (e), the character 903050 of "reach!" Is displayed at the upper part of the screen as the reach state is established. The effect control CPU 90120, which has detected the establishment of the reach state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines the dialogue of the character B.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether the display result of the variable display game of the decorative pattern being executed is determined to be a jackpot combination or a loss combination. It should be noted that it may be confirmed whether the last variation pattern specification command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is the variation pattern specification command for big hits or the variation pattern specification command for loss. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), when it is decided that the display result of the variable display game is a jackpot combination, the character displaying the line of "chance!" At a rate of 25%. It is decided to display it horizontally, and it is decided to display the line of "super heat !!" next to the character being displayed at a rate of 75%. On the other hand, if it is decided that the display result of the variable display game is a lost combination, it is decided that the line of "chance!" Is displayed next to the character being displayed at a rate of 90%. It is decided to display the line of "Gekijou !!" next to the character being displayed at a rate of%.

In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line of "super heat !!" next to the character being displayed. Based on this determination, as shown in FIG. 58 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 produces an effect in which the character 903100 (character B) swings up the cane 903101 and emits the line 903102, which is "heat !!". To execute. When the dialogue 903102 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the character 903100 (character B) holding the cane 903101 and the dialogue 903102 uttered from the character 903100 are erased from the screen.

As a result, for the player, the dialogue of the character 903100 (character B) that appears based on the winning of the general winning opening may result in the final stop display of the decorative pattern that is a big hit combination as a result of the reach effect. You can grasp that it is expensive.

In this way, is the reach state established during the character display period by executing the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) triggered by "the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed"? It is possible to make people interested in whether or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest from the time when the game ball wins the general winning opening until the specific production is executed. In addition, with the event of winning a prize in the general winning slot that is not related to the progress of the variable display game, the display result of the variable display game for which the display result has not yet been derived and displayed is announced, and the game is played in the general winning slot. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the time the ball wins until the specific production is executed. In addition, the dialogue of the character 903000 (character A) can be focused on, and the interest of the character display effect can be improved.

In addition, the effect suggesting a prize in the general winning opening (appearance of character B) and the effect suggesting the display result of the variable display game in which the display result is not derived and displayed (character B's dialogue) are common objects. By being composed of (character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening to the time when the specific effect is executed. Then, the winning to the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game that has not been confirmed are suggested by a common object, so that the player's appearance regarding the appearance of the character and the dialogue can be suggested. You can increase your interest.

In the 48th effect mode, the specific effect G in which the character utters a predetermined line is executed when the reach state is established, that is, the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined mode. The specific effect G may be executed not only in such a form but also when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, for example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, a predetermined advance notice effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up advance notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed. The specific effect G may be executed.

Further, in the 48th staging form, an example in which the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is described regardless of the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern executed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening is in a predetermined mode. For example, the game ball wins in the general winning opening. The character may be displayed on condition that the variable display of the decorative symbol executed at that time is in the reach state (the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is executed).

(Character erasure process)
Similar to the specific effect A to the specific effect D and the specific effect F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 erases the displayed character from the screen and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the first). 4 The winning history of one or more times to the general winning opening 9050D is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 56).

Further, if the displayed character is erased after the lapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect G, the winning history (at least) of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G is accompanied by this. The first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D (including one or more winning histories) is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 56).

FIG. 59B is a timing chart showing a display period of each character when the specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the variable display game of the decorative symbol is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4, and the reach effect is executed only in the variable display 4 among them, and the reach state is reached. Shall hold. When the variable display 1 is executed, at the timing of (11), any of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. To.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing (12) when one minute has passed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the reach state is established within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is hidden after the dialogue display effect is completed.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is hidden at the timing (13) when 2 minutes have passed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the reach state is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is hidden after the dialogue display effect is completed.

When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is hidden at the timing when 5 minutes have passed from the appearance without the reach state being established. In this example, since the reach state is established at the timing of (14) before 5 minutes have passed from the appearance of the character C, the dialogue display effect is executed without the character being hidden. During this period, the character C is hidden as the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. It should not be displayed continuously.

[49th production form]
In the 47th effect mode and the 48th effect form described above, an example is shown in which a specific effect is executed as long as a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of character A to C is displayed. However, only when a character of a specific type is displayed, a specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

For example, in the 49th staging mode shown in FIG. 56, the specific staging F (holding change staging) is executed based on the occurrence of the effective start winning within the period in which either the character A or B is displayed. Even if a valid start winning is generated within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (holding change effect) is not executed. Further, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed based on the fact that the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed, and the character A or B is temporarily displayed. Even if the reach state is established within the certain period, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is not executed.

In this way, the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect to be executed according to the type of the displayed character, that is, the notification mode for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening, and the predetermined conditions. The type of specific effect executed based on the establishment may be different.

Although the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect to be executed are common regardless of the type of the displayed character, the specific conditions to be executed when the predetermined conditions are satisfied according to the type of the displayed character. The type of production may be different. For example, if a valid start winning is generated within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is not executed). However, if a valid start winning is generated within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed (the specific effect F (hold change effect) is not executed). May be.

In addition, the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect differ depending on the type of the displayed character, but it is executed when the predetermined conditions corresponding to each are satisfied regardless of the type of the displayed character. The types of specific effects may be the same. For example, if a valid start winning is generated within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (even if the reach state is established within that period, it is specified. Although the effect F is not executed), the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed even if the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed (a valid start prize is tentatively generated within that period). However, the specific effect F may not be executed).

In addition, if an effective start prize is generated before the establishment of (1) reach state within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action is performed. After executing, the character is erased, and (2) if the reach state is established before the effective start prize, the character being displayed is executed after the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) in which the displayed character utters a line. You may try to erase it. In this way, the possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character is set so that the predetermined condition that is satisfied earlier among the plurality of predetermined conditions is satisfied. The specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

In addition, if an effective start prize is generated before the establishment of (1) reach state within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action is performed. The character is erased after execution, and (2) the character is erased after executing the specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action even when the reach state is established before the effective start winning. You may try to do it. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character, and when any of the predetermined conditions is satisfied, a specific effect is given. You may try to do it.

[Modifications of the 47th production form to the 49th production form]
In the example of FIG. 55, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed within a predetermined specific period after the character is displayed, the character is deleted before the end of the specific period. However, the character is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may be continuously displayed until the end of the specific period even after the specific effect is executed. good.

In such a form, the specific effect may be executed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period in which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on the winning of the general winning opening, the character C does not disappear from the screen and continues for 5 minutes when the character C is displayed even if the valid start winning is generated. Is displayed, and the specific effect F (hold change effect) may be executed every time a valid start prize is generated in the 5 minutes.

In the example of FIG. 55, an example in which the display period of the character is a predetermined fixed period (1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes) has been described, but the display period of the character is not limited to such a form, for example. , The period until the variable display game executed a predetermined number of times is executed, or the period until the variable display game executed when the character is displayed ends, and the character is displayed. It may be a period until the end of the game state (for example, a normal state, a probable change state or a time saving state, a big hit game state).

Further, regardless of the display period, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, once such a character is displayed, it is assumed that the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

Further, the display period of the character may be determined before the type of the character to be displayed is determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 determines which of 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes the character display period is to be determined. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. If, if character B is selected at a rate of 70%, character A is selected at a rate of 15%, character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, then the character C may be selected at a rate of 70%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, a different display period may be determined depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won, or depending on the game state.

In addition, the predetermined conditions that should be established in order to make the specific effect feasible are not limited to the above-mentioned effective start winning and the establishment of the reach state, but also the occurrence of a big hit game state, a predetermined type of big hit game state (for example, a probability variation big hit, or Occurrence of a jackpot with the largest number of rounds), the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, and the number of consecutive jackpot game states (consecutive number = probability change state or time reduction after the end of the jackpot game state) The number of consecutive big hit game states controlled by the state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, the end of the big hit game state, the control to a predetermined game state (for example, a probable change state), and the display result are a loss combination. Others such as that the variable display game has been played a predetermined number of times, that the variable display game of the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach" ("loss without reach") has been played a predetermined number of times, that the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined number, etc. Any condition may be used as long as it is a condition, that is, a condition that is satisfied with the game. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol (the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) such as the period controlled by the jackpot game state is executed. It may be performed during a period that has not been done.

In the 47th effect mode and the 49th effect mode, an example is shown in which the advance notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is the hold change effect. Not limited to, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (b) described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot hold, an effect of only voice is executed, or an effect of voice and a movable accessory 901000 is executed. It may be a pre-reading advance notice effect in which the ratio of the staging is different, or it may be a chance eye advance notice effect as shown in the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form described later. Further, the countdown notice effect may be used in which the player is notified of the remaining variable display number of times up to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice.

In the 47th effect mode and the 49th effect mode, after the character is displayed in the general winning opening based on the winning of the game ball, the effective start winning is generated, so that the displayed character is the mode of the hold information. An example of executing a hold change effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a form, and when a game ball wins a general winning opening, a start winning judgment corresponding to each held variable display game is made. Check the result specification command and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command, and if there is a variable display game or a variable display game with a reach state where the display result is a big hit, the rate is higher than when it does not exist. You may make a character appear. Further, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the ratio of the appearance of a specific character may be higher than in the case where the display result does not exist. Further, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, and a case where the display result does not exist. Then, when a valid start prize is generated after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable that the displayed character executes a hold change effect that changes the mode of the hold information.

Further, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, when the character is controlled to the big hit game state, the displayed character is erased, and the game ball is placed in the general winning opening during the period controlled to the big hit game state. Even if the character wins a prize, the specific effect may not be executed by preventing a new character from appearing. As a result, the player's consciousness is concentrated on various effects (for example, fanfare effect, round-time effect, ending effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state, and these various effects are not disturbed. be able to.

In the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, an example in which a specific effect is always executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character has been described, but the display of the character is not limited to such a form. Even if a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio. For example, if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character B, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 50%. Is executed, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%. The execution ratio may be different.

Here, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, if a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening while the character is displayed, the display of the new character based on the winning in the general winning opening is displayed. It shall not be performed, and the character already displayed shall be continuously displayed. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to display the character and the character to be displayed at the ratio shown in FIG. 54, provided that none of the characters is displayed when the game ball wins the general winning opening. It is assumed that the character is displayed based on the determination.

Not limited to such a form, if a character is displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed is replaced (already displayed). The character may be deleted), and the character based on the later general prize may be displayed.

Also, comparing the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed with the display period of the character based on the later general prize, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is longer. If it is long, it will continue to be displayed, and the character based on the later general prize will not be displayed. If the display period of the character based on the later general prize is longer, it will be replaced with the character based on the previous general prize (already). The displayed character may be deleted), and the character based on the later general prize may be displayed.

In such a form, when the character based on the later general prize is displayed instead of the character based on the previous general prize (the character already displayed is deleted), the display period of the character based on the later general prize is displayed. May be added to the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed (the period in which both are added is set as the display period of the newly displayed character).

Further, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect form, if the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening within the display period of the character, the new character is not displayed based on the winning in the general winning opening. , The remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed may be extended. The period to be extended here (time to be added to the remaining display period) may be a display period (for example, 1 minute if the character A is displayed) specified for the character that has already been displayed. Further, even when a prize is won in the general winning opening within the display period of the character, one of the characters is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 54, and the determined character (however, newly displayed) is set. The display period (for example, 2 minutes for the character B) corresponding to the character that is not removed may be added to the remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed.

(Display of multiple characters)
Also, if a character is displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (without erasing the already displayed character) will be displayed later. Characters based on the general prize may also be displayed. For example, if a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening when character A is displayed and it is determined that character B is newly displayed, a new character is added to the already displayed character A. B may also be displayed on the image display device 905.

In such a form, the period obtained by adding the display period of the character based on the later general prize to the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is set as the common display period of both characters. May be. In this case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, the specific effect is executed and either one character or both characters are erased. Further, if the common display period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition, both characters are deleted.

Further, in a state where both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 905, the first predetermined condition (for example, effective) corresponding to the first character is first obtained. When the first specific effect (for example, specific effect F (holding change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed together with the establishment of the start winning prize, the first character is erased and only the second character is displayed. The displayed state is reached, and then the second predetermined condition (for example, the reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, and the second specific effect (for example, the specific effect G (variation result) based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition is satisfied. When the notice effect)) is executed, the second character may also be deleted. Here, the first character and the second character may be characters of the same type.

In such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be a common condition (for example, the occurrence of a valid start prize), and in that case, both the first character and the second character are used. While displayed on the image display device 905, the first specific effect by the first character and the second specification by the second character are based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of a valid start prize only once). Both of the effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are erased.

Further, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, specific effect F (holding change effect)), in which case both the first character and the second character are image display devices. When the first predetermined condition (for example, effective start winning) corresponding to the first character is satisfied in the state displayed on the 905, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect)) is executed, and the first When one character is erased and only the second character is displayed, and then the second predetermined condition corresponding to the second character (for example, the reach state) is satisfied, the same type of specific effect (specific effect F (specific effect F)) is satisfied. The hold change effect)) may be executed so that the second character is erased.

Further, as in the 49th effect mode, if the first character (character A or B) is displayed, the first specific effect (specific effect) is obtained according to the establishment of the first condition (occurrence of a valid start prize). F) can be executed, and the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed according to the establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state) as long as the second character (character C) is displayed. It is assumed that only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed at the same time). Here, when the second specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character when the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is higher than when the first specific effect is executed. It shall be displayed with priority over the character. For example, when it is decided to display the second character based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening when the first character is displayed, the first character is erased and the second character is displayed. Shall be newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, the control to display the first character instead of the second character is not performed.

On the other hand, when the configuration is such that the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 at the same time, the first specific effect is executed according to the satisfaction of the first condition, and the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of. However, when both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are intended for the same variable display game and the execution periods overlap (for example, both are variable result advance notice effects of the same variable display game and reach. (When it is executed immediately after the state is established), the second specific effect shall be executed with priority over the first specific effect, and at this time, the first specific effect shall not be executed.

[50th staging form]
In the 50th effect mode shown in FIG. 60, a button icon 904000 is newly displayed on the image display device 905 (see FIG. 61 and the like) every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and the displayed button icon 904000 is displayed. The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the number of. Here, each of the specific effects in the present effect mode prompts the player to perform some operation, and is an effect that can announce the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the player's movement. As specific effects, three types are provided: a cut-in notice effect (specific effect H), a pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (specific effect I), and a chance eye advance notice effect (specific effect J).

The display information condition of FIG. 60 is the number of button icons 904000 displayed in order to execute each specific effect, and if at least the number of button icons 904000 shown in the display information condition is not displayed, each specific effect is specified. No production is performed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is not executed unless two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and the chance eye notice effect is If the button icon 904000 is not displayed 3 or more, it will not be executed.

The button icon 904000 displayed on the image display device 905 can be incremented by 1 each time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) can be displayed on the image display device 905. Suppose there is. Then, when the specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the number of display of the button icon 904000 required for executing the specific effect from the number of display of the button icon 904000 before the execution of the specific effect is generated. It will be displayed on the image display device 905 after the execution of the specific effect. For example, if (1) the cut-in notice effect (the number of required button icons to be displayed = 1) is executed while the five button icons 904000 are displayed, the button icon after the cut-in notice effect is executed will be displayed. The number of 904000 displays is 4, and when (2) pseudo-continuous notice effect (number of required button icon displays = 2) is executed, the number of 904000 display of button icons after execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is 3. , (3) When the chance eye notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 3) is executed, the number of displayed button icons 904000 after the chance eye notice effect is executed becomes 2.

(Cut-in notice production)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect of notifying the display result of the variable display of the variable display pattern by the content of the characters displayed on the screen after the reach state is established. As shown in FIG. 60, the cut-in notice effect is when (1) a variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state while (1) one or more button icons 904000 are displayed. The player is notified to perform a predetermined continuous striking operation, and (3) the player can perform the predetermined continuous striking operation.

If the variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state while no button icon 904000 is displayed, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified and the cut-in notice is given. No production is performed. Further, in the variable display game of the fluctuation pattern not accompanied by the reach state, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

Further, in the cut-in notice effect, the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is executed, and then the player operates the operation button 9030 a plurality of times, so that the reach effect is executed. The condition is that the variable display game is executed according to the variable pattern to be played. A specific mode of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

In FIG. 61 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolled in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

The effect control CPU 90120 displays the first button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 61B, the screen is updated from the state in which the button icon 904000 is not displayed to the state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed. In addition, with the display of one or more button icons 904000 on the screen in total, the character 904000a of "cut-in" indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" is added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition referred to here is that (1) a variable display game of a variation pattern accompanied by a reach state is executed while (1) one or more button icons 904000 are displayed.

Then, in FIG. 61 (c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "4" on the left, "2" on the right, and "8" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display game is a reach variation pattern accompanied by a reach state, based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game, for the game control microcomputer. Confirm based on the fluctuation pattern specification command received from 90100. Then, when the variable display game to be started has a reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in notice effect is satisfied.

Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the character 904080 of "reach!" When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. 61 (e). Then, based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), the characters "continuous hit!", A plurality of downward arrows, and the operation button 9030 are imitated in order from the top in the center of the screen. The image and the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 consisting of a time bar suggesting the remaining period during which the operation is valid are displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 9030 should be continuously performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 erases one button icon 904000 required for executing the cut-in notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 along with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is deleted from the screen as the specific effect that can be executed does not exist.

It is assumed that the player who recognizes the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 continuously presses the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times or more. The effect control CPU 90120 updates the display of the time bar according to the elapsed time from displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. When the time bar is displayed, it is in a state of 5 stages out of 5 stages, and it is assumed that the time bar is decremented by 1 stage every 1 second after the display. As shown in FIG. 61 (g), in the effect control CPU 90120, the operation buttons 9030 are pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches 0 of the 5 stages (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operation is performed, the cut-in mode is determined, and the cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 905.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 is when the display result of the variable display game to be executed becomes the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 61 (h) when the continuous hit suggestion condition is satisfied. Decided to display the characters "Chance!" At a rate of 20% and the characters "Fever !!" at a rate of 80%, and the display result of the variable display game to be executed is a lost combination. In the case of the final stop symbol, it is decided to display the characters "chance!" At a rate of 80% and the characters "heat !!" at a rate of 20%.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a cut-in notice effect for displaying the screen including the determined characters on the image display device 905. In the example of FIG. 61 (i), the characters 904200 of "heat !!" are displayed large on the entire screen.

If the operation button 9030 is not operated more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the start of displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 904100, the effect control CPU 90120 "chance!" And none of the characters "Fever !!" shall be displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo-ream notice production)
The pseudo-continuous notice effect provided as the specific effect I is as if the decorative pattern once temporarily stopped is scrolled up and down again in one variable display game to re-variate it as if it were multiple times. It is an effect that makes it look as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed continuously. When re-variation is performed, a pseudo-continuous symbol is used as a decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C according to each symbol stop operation of the player (composed of the characters "NEXT" in this example). Shall be suspended.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect, (1) a variable display game was executed with a fluctuation pattern of 8 seconds or more while (1) two or more button icons 904000 were displayed. In this case, it is notified to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can execute each predetermined symbol stop operation.

Further, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the player operates the operation button 9030 three times (performs each symbol stop operation three times) within the period in which one variable display game is executed. It requires a certain operation time, and is conditioned on the execution of a variable display game having a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of a certain time (8 seconds in this example) or more. A specific mode of the pseudo-continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63.

In FIG. 62 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scrolled in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, one button icon 904000 is displayed at the left end of the screen, and "cut after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied". The character 904000a of "cut-in" indicating that "in-notice effect can be executed" is displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the second button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 62B, the screen is updated from the state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed to the state in which two button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, with the display of two or more button icons 904000 on the screen in total, the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" indicating that "pseudo-ream notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" is added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition here is that (1) the variable display game is executed with a fluctuation pattern of 8 seconds or more while (1) two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. be.

Then, in FIG. 62 (c), it is assumed that after the second button icon 904000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "5" on the left, "1" on the right, and "7" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 receives from the game control microcomputer 90100 whether or not the fluctuation time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Check based on the fluctuation pattern specification command. Then, when the fluctuation time of the variable display game to be started is 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is satisfied.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state, as shown in FIG. 62 (d). Determines to temporarily stop the pseudo-link symbol (execute re-variation) with a probability of 15%, and decide not to temporarily stop the pseudo-link symbol (do not execute re-variation) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state, it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (re-variation is executed) with a probability of 100%.

When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the effect control CPU 90120 temporarily stops the decorative symbol in the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L according to each symbol stop operation of the player, and the decorative symbol. , The decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R is determined, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C.

As described above, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command and the variable display result. The final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the notification command. When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-ream symbol, the "left" and "right" decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R according to each symbol stop operation of the player are determined and confirmed. It may be different from or the same as the "left" and "right" decorative symbols constituting the decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

When it is decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L and the "right" decorative symbol according to each symbol stop operation of the player. In the area 905R and the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C, the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols constituting the determined fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) are oscillated and stopped, respectively. Decide on that. That is, when the re-variation is not performed, it is decided to swing and stop the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

In this way, when the presence / absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbol for re-variation are determined, the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, as shown in FIG. 62 (e). Along with this, there is no variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the display portion at the left end is in the non-display mode. With the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 62 (f), the characters "press!", The downward arrow, and the operation button 9030 are added to the "left" decorative pattern display area 905L in order from the top. The operation suggestion information 904050 composed of the imitated image is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 905L on the "left".

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 erases the two button icons 904000 required for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 along with the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and as the specific effect that can be executed does not exist, the character 904000a of "cut-in" and the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" are deleted from the screen.

"Left" decoration As shown in FIG. 62 (g), the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the design display area 905L presses the operation button 9030 to display the "left" decoration. The decorative symbol (“1” in this example) is stopped swinging in the symbol display area 905L. The rocking stop is a state in which the decorative pattern is not scrolled in the vertical direction, but is not completely stopped and is swinging (the final stop display is not displayed). Here, the decorative symbol to be oscillated and stopped is a "left" decorative symbol constituting a predetermined combination of temporary stop symbols when it is decided to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, and is a pseudo. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbol, it is the "left" decorative symbol constituting the combination of the predetermined fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

When the "left" decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the staging control CPU 90120 then displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R, as shown in FIG. 62 (g). .. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 905R on the "right" side.

"Right" decoration As shown in FIG. 62 (h), the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the symbol display area 905R presses the operation button 9030 to display the "right" decoration. The decorative symbol (“2” in this example) is stopped swinging in the symbol display area 905R. Here, the decorative symbol to be oscillated and stopped is a "right" decorative symbol constituting a predetermined combination of temporary stop symbols when it is decided to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, and is a pseudo. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbol, it is the "right" decorative symbol constituting the combination of the predetermined fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

When the "right" decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the staging control CPU 90120 then displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C, as shown in FIG. 62 (h). .. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C.

It is assumed that the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905C of "middle" presses the operation button 9030.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol based on the table of FIG. 62 (d), it is “middle” as shown in FIG. 63 (i). In the decorative symbol display area 905C of the above, the pseudo-continuous symbol composed of the characters "NEXT" is stopped swinging. As a result, the predetermined combination of the "left", "middle", and "right" temporary stop symbols is displayed as a temporary stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (j), after the temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the decorative symbol changes (for example,) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". (Scroll display in the vertical direction) is restarted. After the re-variation, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is displayed as the final stop in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The display result of the game will be confirmed.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90120 has decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-linking symbol based on the table of FIG. 62 (d), as shown in FIG. 63 (k), it is "medium". The "middle" decorative symbol constituting the combination of the predetermined decorative symbols (final stop symbols) determined in advance in the decorative symbol display area 905C is oscillated and stopped. As a result, the combination of the predetermined "left", "right", and "middle" fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is oscillated and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (l), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are set in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed.

The staging control CPU 90120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol even if the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. In that case, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols determined in advance shall be displayed as a temporary stop and the re-variation shall be executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols is automatically displayed as a temporary stop even if the operation is not performed, and the re-variation is executed. And.

In this example, when two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the operation suggestion condition that the variable display game is executed by the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is satisfied, the operation suggestion condition is satisfied. The operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by a reach state (that is, regardless of the effect mode of the specified fluctuation pattern), but the present invention is not limited to such a form. It may be an operation suggestion condition that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state. In such an operation suggestion condition, when the display result of the variable display game accompanied by the reach state becomes a big hit, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is out of order. It is good to set it to.

Further, when the presence / absence of execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is set in advance for each variation pattern determined on the game control microcomputer 90100 side, that is, by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100. In the case where the pseudo-ream symbol is specified to be temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 is designated to temporarily stop the pseudo-ream symbol when two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. Receiving a variable pattern specification command (executing a variable display game with a variable pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous notice effect) may be an operation suggestion condition, regardless of the specified variable pattern as in the above example. , The operation suggestion condition may be that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed with a fluctuation time of a predetermined time or more.

(Chance eye notice production)
The chance eye notice effect provided as the specific effect J is different from the display result of the decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination as the display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game that is the target of the look-ahead advance notice. By displaying the chance eye, which is the display result, at the final stop, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game, which is the target of the pre-reading notice.

In this example, the same odd number of decorative symbols is finally stopped and displayed in the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C, and "left" is displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R. By displaying an even-numbered decorative symbol that is one larger than the odd-numbered decorative symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C of the "middle", the "left", "middle", and "middle" that are the chance eyes are displayed. It is assumed that the combination of the decorative patterns on the right is completed.

That is, the combination of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols, which is a chance in this example, is any one of "112", "334", "556", and "778". It is possible to display the final stop display of the combination of decorative symbols that is a chance eye according to the player's operation to stop all the symbols.

As shown in FIG. 60, the chance eye notice effect is as follows: (1) a variable display game with 3 or more button icons 904000 is displayed, and (2) a variable display game with a reach state is held, and the variable display game is held. When none of the variable display games executed before the display game is accompanied by a reach state, a notification is given to perform a predetermined all symbol stop operation, and (3) the player performs a predetermined all symbol stop operation. It becomes feasible by doing.

In addition, in the chance eye notice effect, in one variable display game, the combination of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols swings when the player operates the operation button 9030 only once. It will be stopped. That is, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect in which each symbol stop operation for swinging and stopping each of the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols is required three times in one variable display game. The operation required in one variable display game (all symbol stop operation) is only once. A specific mode of the chance eye notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65.

In FIG. 64 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, a scroll display in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 3. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, each display portion (left end, second from left, and 3 from left) corresponding to 3 variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is satisfied. It is assumed that each of the second) is displayed in the normal mode.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the start winning command determination command for specifying the start winning command and the start winning command storage area for the second special figure, which are stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure. Check the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command, and among the 3 pending variable display games, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (display part on the left end) where the start condition is first satisfied. Is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (second display part from the left) where the start condition is satisfied is the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied third. It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (third display portion from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern.

Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize a plurality of times (at least twice or more) in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, two button icons 904000 are displayed at the left end of the screen, and "predetermined". The character 904000a of "cut-in" indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the operation suggestion condition is satisfied" and "the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied". The character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" indicating the above is displayed.

The effect control CPU 90120 displays a third button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 64 (b), the screen is updated from the state in which the two button icons 904000 are displayed to the state in which the three button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, with the display of three or more button icons 904000 on the screen in total, the character 904000c of "chance eye" indicating that "the chance eye notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" is added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition referred to here is (1) a variable display game with a reach state is held while (1) 3 or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and the variable display game is held. None of the variable display games run prior to that are accompanied by a reach state.

Then, in FIG. 64 (c), it is assumed that after the third button icon 904000 is displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "5" on the left, "9" in the middle, and "6" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is a non-reach variation pattern in which the variation pattern of the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied is not accompanied by the reach state, based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Of the two pending variable display games, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (display portion at the left end) where the start condition is satisfied first is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (second display portion from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the chance eye notice effect is satisfied.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 is executed twice before the held variable display game of the reach fluctuation pattern (including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied). For each of the variable display games), it is determined to request the player to stop all symbols after the variable display is started. In addition, whether the display result of the holdable reach variation pattern variable display game is a jackpot combination or a loss combination is determined by the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game or the start winning variation pattern. Check based on the judgment result specification command.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (d), when the display result of the held variable display game of the reach fluctuation pattern is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied are satisfied. Depending on the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eye (loss combination other than the chance eye) at a rate of 25%, and the pending reach fluctuation pattern is variable. If the display result of the display game is a lost combination, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% according to the player's operation to stop all symbols in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. Decided to stop non-chance eyes at a rate of 75%.

When the effect control CPU 90120 is determined to stop the chance eye, the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 905L constituting the chance eye according to the player's operation to stop all the symbols. And an odd number of decorative symbols to be stopped at 905C, and an even number of decorative symbols to be stopped swinging in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R are determined.

When it is decided not to stop the chance eye, the effect control CPU 90120 has a "left" decorative symbol display area 905L and a "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C according to the player's all symbol stop operation. In the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R, the decorative symbols that make up the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance eye are swung according to the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command. Decide to stop. That is, it is decided to swing and stop the definite decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is a non-chance eye, according to the player's operation to stop all symbols.

In this way, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol when the chance eye stop is performed are determined, as shown in FIG. 64 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Along with this, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display portion from the left is the non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 64 (f), the characters "Stop all symbols!" 904200 are displayed in large size in the center of the screen, and the characters "Press!" Are displayed downward in order from the top. The operation suggestion information 904050 composed of the arrow and the image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbol in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". do. In the chance eye notice effect, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect described above, by operating the operation button 9030 only once, all the decorative symbol display areas 905L of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed. The decorative design is stopped at 905C and 905R.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is accompanied by the display of the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050, and among the displayed button icons 904000, the three buttons required to execute the chance eye advance notice effect. Erase the icon 904000. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and as there is no specific effect that can be executed, the character 904000a of "cut-in", the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren", and the "chance eye" Character 904000c is erased from the screen.

Next, it is assumed that the player who recognizes the characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of "Stop all symbols!" Presses the operation button 9030.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to stop the non-chance eye based on the table of FIG. 64 (d), as shown in FIG. 64 (g), "left", In the "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the combination of fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) that does not become a chance is shaken according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Stop moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (h), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are set in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern for the non-chance eye, a combination of "4" on the left, "9" on the middle, and "7" on the right, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

If the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of "Stop all symbols!", The effect control CPU 90120 is a player. If it is decided to stop the non-chance eye according to the stop operation of all symbols, the fixed decorative symbol that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (final stop symbol) The combination of the above shall be stopped swinging.

Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the player is required to stop all symbols for the next variable display game, and the start condition of the next variable display game is set. Even when it is established, it is determined whether or not there is a chance stop as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 65 (i), when the display result of the held variable display game of the reach fluctuation pattern is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. Depending on the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance eyes at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eyes at a rate of 25%, and the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach fluctuation pattern is a loss combination In the case of, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% and the non-chance eye at a rate of 75% according to the player's operation to stop all symbols. Decide to stop.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 operates to stop all symbols of the player when it is decided to stop the chance eyes or when it is decided to stop the non-chance eyes, as in the previous variable display game. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped swinging is determined according to the above.

In this way, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol when the chance eye stop is performed are determined, as shown in FIG. 65 (j), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Along with this, there is only one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the second display portion from the left is the non-display mode. With the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 65 (k), the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050 are displayed in the center of the screen. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbol in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". do.

Next, it is assumed that the player who recognizes the characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of "Stop all symbols!" Presses the operation button 9030.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to stop the chance eye based on the table of FIG. 65 (i), as shown in FIG. 65 (l), "left", " In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "middle" and "right", the combination of decorative symbols constituting the determined chance eye is oscillated and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (m), after a predetermined period of rocking stop, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are set in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed. Here, as a definite decoration symbol for the chance eye, a combination of "1" on the left, "1" on the middle, and "2" on the right, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

If the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of "Stop all symbols!", The effect control CPU 90120 is a player. Even if it is decided to stop the chance eye according to the operation to stop all the symbols, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop) that does not become the chance eye according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. The combination of symbols) shall be stopped swinging.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 is determined to require the player to stop all symbols for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern that is the target of the chance eye advance notice effect. Therefore, when the start condition of the next variable display game is satisfied, it is not determined whether or not the chance is stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the character 904080 of "reach!" When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. 65 (o).

In the 50th effect mode described above, the cut-in advance notice effect, the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, and the chance eye advance notice effect are all states after the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, that is, the button icon 904000. In the displayed state, it can be executed by the operation of the player according to each notice effect. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is executed on condition that the player operates the game ball after the game ball has won the general prize opening, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general prize opening.

Further, each time the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the button icon 904000 displayed on the screen increases, so that the player can play the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening. It is possible to recognize that the prize has been won.

Further, if the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is satisfied while one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, a notification is given to prompt the repeated hit operation as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is satisfied in the state of being set, a notification prompting each symbol stop operation is given as an operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and a chance eye is displayed with 3 or more button icons 904000 displayed. When the operation suggestion condition of the advance notice effect is satisfied, a notification prompting the stop operation of all symbols is given as an operation corresponding to the chance eye advance notice effect, so that the player can execute the specific effect by performing any operation. Can be grasped.

Further, according to the display number of the button icon 904000, when the display number is 1 or more, the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed, and when the display number is 2 or more, the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" is displayed and the display number. When the number is 3 or more, the character 904000c of the "chance eye" is displayed, so that the player can grasp the type of the specific effect that can be executed according to the number of the displayed button icons 904000. As a result, it is possible to be interested in the number of winning games of the game ball to the general winning opening.

It should be noted that the type of specific effect that can be executed and the operation required to execute the specific effect may be notified. For example, according to the display number of the button icon 904000, when the display number is 1 or more, the character "continuous hit" is displayed next to the character 904000a of "cut-in", and when the display number is 2 or more, the character "pseudo-ream" is displayed. The character "stop all symbols" is displayed next to the character 904000b, and when the number of displays is 3 or more, the character "stop all symbols" is displayed next to the character 904000c of "chance eye", so that the player can use it. It is possible to grasp the operation required according to the type of specific effect that can be executed.

Here, in this embodiment, there is a case where the operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of the plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously satisfied. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is 8. It may take more than a second. In this case, a notification prompting a continuous hit operation for executing the cut-in notice effect (display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100) and a stop operation for each symbol for executing the pseudo continuous notice effect are urged. The question is which of the notifications (display of the operation suggestion information 904050 in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R) should be performed. In this embodiment, the one with the larger number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, the notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (two or more button icons 904000 are required) is the notification prompting the continuous hit operation for executing the cut-in advance notice effect (one or more button icon 904000 is required). It shall be given priority over.

Further, in the state where 3 or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game of the non-reach variation pattern is satisfied, the variation time of the non-reach variation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and , The pending variable display game may have a reach fluctuation pattern, and in this case, a notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R). Operation suggestion information 904050 display) or notification prompting all symbol stop operation for executing chance eye notice effect (display of characters 904200 and operation suggestion information 904050 in each variable display game). The question is whether to do. In this case, the notification prompting the stop operation of all symbols for executing the chance eye advance notice effect (3 or more button icons 904000 are required) is the notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (button icon 904000). Is required to be 2 or more).

Further, in this embodiment, the number of displayed button icons 904000 is the number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect (1 for cut-in notice effect, 2, 2 chance for pseudo-continuous notice effect). If there are more than 3) in the case of the eye notice effect, the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect from the number of button icons 904000 initially displayed is the specific. It will continue to be displayed even after the production is executed.

For example, if the chance eye notice effect is executed while four or more button icons 904000 are displayed, one button icon 904000 that is continuously displayed remains even after the chance eye notice effect is executed. The character 904000a of "cut-in" remains displayed on the screen. After that, when the variable display game of the reach fluctuation pattern is started, the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is satisfied, and the notification for prompting the continuous hit operation is performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is satisfied (the number of button icons 904000 is confirmed). (I also try to check the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game), but not limited to this form, is the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect satisfied when the variable display game is being executed? It may be determined whether or not. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and if it is displayed, the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 for causing repeated hits is provided. It may be displayed. Further, in the effect control CPU 90120, whether or not two or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivative display of the display result) reaches a predetermined time (for example, the remaining 10 seconds). If it is displayed, the operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 holds a variable display game (including a variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize) with a reach state at the timing when the effective start prize is generated, and the variable display game thereof. When none of the variable display games executed before is accompanied by a reach state, it is determined whether or not 3 or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and if they are displayed, all symbols are stopped. The characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 for displaying "Stop all symbols!" May be displayed. That is, in the variable display game executed at the timing when the display number of the button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined predetermined number (without waiting for the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game to be executed next), a predetermined number is specified. Notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed has a reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. Further, in the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous hitting suggestion information 904100 for making the continuous hitting may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 remains until the end of the variable display game being executed (deriving display of the display result) at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is determined whether or not the time is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining), and if it is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivative display of the display result) is the predetermined time (for example). At the timing when the remaining 10 seconds), the operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 provides a variable display game with a reach state (a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 3 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. (Including) is pending, and it is determined whether or not any of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is not accompanied by a reach state, and a variable display game with a reach state is determined. If is on hold and none of the variable display games executed prior to the variable display game are accompanied by a reach state, the all symbol stop operation is performed in the executed variable display game. The characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 for displaying "Stop all symbols!" May be displayed. That is, in the variable display game executed at the timing when the display number of the button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined predetermined number (without waiting for the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game to be executed next), a predetermined number is specified. Notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

Further, in the 50th staging mode, the operation suggestion conditions for notifying the user to perform a predetermined operation (continuous striking operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) are all conditions related to the variable display game (display mode and). (Fluctuating time), and an example in which a specific effect is executed during the execution of a variable display game due to a predetermined operation has been described, but the operation suggestion condition is, for example, a hit, not limited to such a form. It may be a condition related to the game state (for example, whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state, whether or not the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit, and whether or not the number of rounds is more than a predetermined number, etc.), and it may be a big hit. A specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the game state. For example, when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number within the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state, a notification is given to the player to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. Occasionally, an effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot gaming state is a probabilistic jackpot or whether or not the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state is greater than a predetermined number may be executed. Further, when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number within the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state (however, the effect mode is set in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game state is the probabilistic state). A notification may be given to urge the player to perform a predetermined operation, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect of notifying whether or not the game state is a probable change state may be executed.

Further, in the 50th effect mode, even when the number of displayed button icons 904000 is 1, a notification for prompting a continuous striking operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous striking operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and unless the number of displayed button icons 904000 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), a notification prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example,). No notification is performed to prompt any of the continuous hit operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operation), and the specific effect is not executed (for example, any of the cut-in advance notice effect, the pseudo continuous advance notice effect, and the chance eye advance notice effect). The specific effect of is not executed either).

(Example of one notification)
Further, in the 50th staging mode, in order to stop the temporary stop symbol in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, three operations are performed for each area, but the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is performed. ) May be stopped in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, so that the operation may be performed three times for each area. That is, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines the definite decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905L on the "left", and the operation button 9030 is displayed. The left symbol constituting the final stop symbol is oscillated and stopped in response to the operation of, then the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905R on the "right", and the final stop is performed in response to the operation of the operation button 9030. The right symbol constituting the symbol is oscillated and stopped, and finally, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905C of "middle", and the middle symbol constituting the final stop symbol is formed according to the operation of the operation button 9030. May be made to stop swinging. In such a configuration, when the combination of jackpot symbols becomes the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 905L, 905R, of "left", "right", and "middle" are used according to the player's three operations. By sequentially stopping the same decorative pattern on the 905C, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player's operation.

In the "left", "right", and "middle" symbol display areas, a combination of special decorative symbols that is different from the combination of normal decorative symbols (for example, images of alphanumerical characters "1" to "8") is placed. By stopping, a notification is given to urge the player to perform a predetermined operation, and depending on the player's predetermined operation, whether the display result of the variable display game is a big hit or a miss (or a probable variable big hit). It is also possible to execute a specific effect to notify (whether it will be a non-probability change jackpot, etc.). For example, the special decorative symbol, which is an image imitating the operation button 9030, is stopped in the "left" and "right" symbol display areas (or the normal decoration is displayed in the "left" and "right" symbol display areas. Stop the symbol), and stop the image of the characters "Repeat hit!" In the "Medium" symbol display area. Then, when the player who recognizes the image of the character "continuous hit!" Performs the continuous hit operation, the display result of the variable display game (for example, the image of the character "big hit!" Or "missing" is displayed on the image display device 905. An image of the characters "" may be displayed.

Further, in such a form, according to the image of the character stopped in the "middle" symbol display area (according to the notification mode suggesting to perform a predetermined operation), the variable display game The ratio of the displayed result to be a big hit (or the ratio of being a probable variable big hit) may be different. For example, the operation button 9030 is made longer than when the image of the characters "Repeat hit!", Which suggests that the operation button 9030 is pressed repeatedly in the "middle" symbol display area, is stopped as a special symbol. The rate at which the display result becomes a big hit may be higher when the image of the character "long press!", Which suggests the operation of pressing once, is stopped as a special symbol. In this way, the effect of notifying the display result of the variable display game according to the operation of the player may be executed as a specific effect without going through the reach state. In addition, during the period when the variable display game of 1 is executed, the combination of the special decorative symbols is stopped multiple times in the symbol display areas of "left", "right", and "middle", and the special decorative symbol is stopped. The player may perform a predetermined operation each time the combination of the above is stopped. In this case, a preview effect suggesting a display result may be executed for each predetermined operation (excluding the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. ..

In the 50th effect mode, each symbol stop operation is effective on condition that the general winning opening is won two or more times, and a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation to enter the general winning opening. An example is shown in which the all-symbol stop operation is effective on condition that the prize is won three times or more, and the chance eye notice effect is executed according to the all-symbol stop operation. The condition that the operation is valid) may be conditional on winning four or more times in the general winning opening.

[51st production form]
In the 51st effect mode shown in FIG. 60, unlike the 50th effect mode, the specific effect that can be executed is different depending on the gaming state. In the 51st effect mode, the cut-in notice effect that requires a continuous striking operation can be executed in any of the normal state, the probabilistic change state, and the time saving state. On the other hand, the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation can be executed only when the game state is in the normal state, and the chance eye advance notice effect that requires all symbol stop operations is in a probable change state or a time-saving state. It can be executed only when.

In the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the operation suggestion condition may be satisfied at the same time in the normal state. In this case, the pseudo-continuous notice effect requiring a larger number of button icons 904000 is executed. Each symbol stop operation for this is preferentially prompted. On the other hand, since the playable game states are different between the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect and the chance eye advance notice effect, the operation suggestion condition is not satisfied at the same time.

Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the normal state is 3 or more, the character 904000a of "cut-in" and "pseudo-ream" are not executed because the chance eye notice effect is not executed in the normal state. Character 904000b is displayed, but the character 904000c of "chance eye" is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the probabilistic change state or the time reduction state is 3 or more, the character "cut-in" is not executed in the probabilistic change state or the time reduction state. The 904000a and the "chance eye" character 904000c are displayed, but the "pseudo-ren" character 904000b is not displayed.

In this way, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect that can be executed differs depending on the game state when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, so that it is appropriate according to the game state. It is possible to make the taste different.

In addition, in this effect mode, the advance notice effect requiring a larger number of button icons 904000 is preferentially executed, but the advance notice effect is not limited to such a form, and the player can expect a higher advance notice effect. It may be executed with priority. For example, if the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect and the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-ream advance notice are satisfied for the same variable display game, the notice effect with a higher ratio of big hits (for example, the pseudo-ream advance notice effect). ) Should be prioritized and executed.

[52nd production form]
In the 52nd effect mode shown in FIG. 66, unlike the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 904000 is not displayed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and the game ball to the general winning opening is displayed. Whether or not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c for each prize, and when displaying, the character 904000a of "cut-in", the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren", and the character 904000c of "chance eye" It determines which of the above is displayed. In FIG. 67 (A), whether or not any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed according to the winning of each general winning opening, and when displaying, which of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed. The display information judgment table for determining is shown.

When the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A, the effect control CPU 90120 decides to display the character 904000a of "cut-in" on the screen at a rate of 25%, and "cut-in" at a rate of 75%. It is decided to display the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" on the screen. In addition, when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B, it is decided not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c at a rate of 50%, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 25%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" on the screen at a rate of 25%.

In addition, when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C, it is decided that none of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 80%, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 904000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 10%. In addition, when a game ball wins in the 4th general winning opening 9050D, it is decided not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c at a rate of 70%, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 904000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 20%.

Then, as in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode described above, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started while the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed, the continuous striking operation is performed. A cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hitting operation, and a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is started while the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" is displayed. In that case, the player is notified to perform each symbol stop operation, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation, and the reach fluctuation pattern is variable in the state where the character 904000c of "chance eye" is displayed. If the display game is on hold and all the variable display games executed before it have a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the player is notified to perform the all symbol stop operation and responds to the all symbol stop operation. Execute a chance eye notice production.

In the example of FIG. 67 (A), when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A, any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and the game ball is displayed in the second general winning opening 9050B. If a prize is won, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and if a game ball is won in the third general winning opening 9050C, any one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 20%. When a game ball wins a prize in the fourth general winning opening 50C, any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 30%.

In this way, depending on the general winning opening in which the game ball has won, the ratio of notifying the type of the specific effect that can be executed and the ratio of the specific effect that can be executed are different. It is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether the game ball enters the game.

Further, the game ball launched in the left game area 9010A is easier to win in the second general winning opening 9050B than in the first general winning opening 9050A, and the game ball launched in the right game area 9010B is easier to win in the fourth general winning opening 9010B. If it is configured so that it is easier to win the third general winning opening 9050C than the 9050D, it is more difficult to win the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A in the normal state, if it is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state). When the game ball wins the 4th general winning opening 9050D), the ratio of the specific effect being executed is high.

Further, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" may be displayed. However, the character 904000c of "chance eye" is not displayed. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the 3rd general winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D, either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000c of "chance eye" may be displayed. However, the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" is not displayed.

In this way, the game ball enters any of the general winning openings because the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed are different depending on the general winning opening that the game ball has won. You can pay attention to what you do and improve your interest.

Further, when the game state is the normal state, the game ball is fired in the left game area 9010A, and when the game state is in the probable change state or the time saving state, the game ball is fired in the right game area 9010B. In the normal state in which the game ball wins in the 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, the characters 904000a to 904000c are more than in the probable change state or the time saving state in which the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The ratio of displaying any of the above is high, and the ratio of executing the specific effect is high.

Since the interest is likely to decline when the game state is in the normal state, the decline in interest is prevented by increasing the ratio at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the ratio at which the specific effect is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is a probable change state or a time-saving state, the player's interest is directed to the special figure game or the normal figure game. Since there are cases where the characters 904000a to 904000c appear, the ratio at which the specific effect is executed is set to be lower than the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately differ the interest of winning a game ball in the general winning opening according to the game state.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 67 (A), when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the ratio of characters 904000a to 904000c appearing and the specific effect are executed as compared with the case where the gaming state is in the normal state. The ratio may be increased, and contrary to the example shown in FIG. 67 (A), when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first general winning opening is won. The characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the mouth 9050A or the second general winning mouth 9050B. Further, in FIG. 67 (A), the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed only when the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is won, but similarly, the third general winning opening 9050C Alternatively, a specific effect that can be executed only at the time of winning the 4th general winning opening 9050D may be provided.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 67 (A), as shown in FIG. 67 (B), a game ball is awarded for each winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When the game state at that time is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are higher than when the game state when the game ball wins is a probable change state or a time saving state. May be made higher. Contrary to the example shown in FIG. 67 (B), when the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state, when the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the normal state. Characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate than that. Further, in FIG. 67B, a specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the normal state may be provided, and the specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the probable change state or the time saving state may be provided. May be provided.

It should be noted that the rate of displaying characters 904000a to 904000c and the rate of executing a specific effect are not limited to different cases depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probabilistic state, or a time saving state. For example, whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, whether or not the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, and the number of consecutive jackpot game states (consecutive number = end of the jackpot game state). Whether or not the number of consecutive jackpot game states controlled to the probabilistic state or the time-saving state +1) has reached a predetermined number of times, and whether or not the variable display game in which the display result is a loss combination has continued a predetermined number of times, "Non- Variable display of variation pattern of "reach" ("loss without reach") Character 904000a ~ The ratio at which 904000c is displayed and the ratio at which the specific effect is executed may be different.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 905]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 may be set as follows. Hereinafter, the maximum width of the image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 is defined as (X + 1) pixels, and the maximum height is defined as (Y + 1) pixels. Then, the coordinates of the pixels in the upper left corner of the display screen are set to (0,0), and the coordinates of the pixels in the lower right corner of the display screen are set to (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 68A, the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as the vertices is defined as the first area α, and the coordinates (a + 1,0) are defined. The rectangular area defined by the coordinates (X, Y) as the vertices is defined as the second area β. There is no overlapping region between the first area α and the second area β. Further, in this example, the second area β is a wider area than the first area α.

In the first area α, there are prizes related to the number of prizes in each prize opening, such as the number of prizes in the general prize openings, the number of prizes in the first start prize openings, and the number of prizes in the second start prize openings. Numerical information can be displayed. As shown in FIG. 68A, the second area β includes an error message display area 5E, a fourth symbol display area 905A, 905B, a decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, and a start winning memory display area 905H. Is provided. In the examples of FIGS. 68 and 69, the background image can be visually recognized in the second area β, but the background image cannot be visually recognized in the first area α.

In this example, the entire image of the background image stored in the ROM 90121 as the effect data has an overall width of (X + 1) pixels as shown in FIGS. 70 (b) and 70 (c) described later, and is the entire image. It is an image in which the height is (Y + 1) pixels, the character D is climbing near the top of the mountain, and the character E is climbing near the foot of the mountain. In the examples of FIGS. 68 (b) (c) and 69 (e) (f), the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices]. Of these, only the area corresponding to the second area β [a rectangular area defined by the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is visible to the player. Of the entire area of the background image, the area corresponding to the first area α [the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] is invisible to the player.

Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 68 (b) (c) and 69 (e) (f), the player is defined with the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area can be visually recognized, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices cannot be visually recognized.

In the examples of FIGS. 68 (b) (c) and 69 (e) (f), "today's general prize number" which is the total number of prizes to the general prize opening on the day (1) in the first area α. And (2) "Today's navel winning number" which is the total number of winnings to the first starting winning opening on the day, and (3) "Today's total number of winnings to the second starting winning opening on the day" Three items of "Electric chew winning number" are displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the effect control CPU 90120, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening, a game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When a general winning opening designation command is received and a winning entry occurs in the starting winning slot, the starting winning slot that specifies whether the game ball has won the first starting winning slot or the second starting winning slot. Receive a mouth specification command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can individually total the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) "Today's general prizes" is 70, (2) "Today's navel prizes" is 521, and (3) "Today's electric chew prizes" is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the number of winnings in the starting winning opening in a comparable manner, it becomes possible to relatively grasp the winning status in each winning opening.

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (e), in the second area β, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 905A, and is decorated. The decorative symbol is variably displayed in the symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Further, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one hold information corresponding to one hold of the special figure game. The image of the fourth symbol in the variable display, the image of the decorative symbol in the variable display, and the image of the hold information are all displayed only in the second area β.

It is assumed that the display layer of the fourth symbol, the display layer of the decorative symbol, and the display layer of the reserved information are all higher than the display layer of the background image. Here, the fact that the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image means that when one image and another image are superimposed and displayed, the visibility of one image is visually recognized by another image. It means that display control is performed in preference to gender. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 68 (b) (c) and 69 (e) (f), one of the area and the background image in which each image of the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information is displayed. Although the part area overlaps, in this case, regarding the overlapping area, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the reserved information whose display layer is higher than the background image can be easily visually recognized (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information appear to be displayed in front of the background image (on the player side).

Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 68 (a) and 69 (f), the area where the decorative symbol is displayed and the area where the error message is displayed overlap, but in this case, the overlapping area With respect to the above, the display control is performed so that the error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative symbol is easy to see (including visible), while the decorative symbol is difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative pattern (on the player side).

As a display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β visible to the player in the entire area of the background image, only the area corresponding to the second area β in the entire area of the background image is used as the background. It is set in the display layer of the image, and the area corresponding to the first area α in the entire area of the background image is not set in the display layer of the background image (that is, [coordinates (a + 1,0) and coordinates (X,) in the background image). It is also possible to use image data of only [a rectangular area defined with Y) as a vertex].

Further, as another display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β visible to the player in the entire area of the background image, the entire area of the background image is set in the display layer of the background image (that is,). The entire background image [using the image data of the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is the first in the display layer higher than the display layer of the background image. By setting another background image for winning number information (for example, a white and plain image) in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer cannot be visually recognized. You can do it. In such a configuration, it is easy to see the image of the display layer lower than the display layer having a predetermined transparency in another background image (for example, a white and plain image) for the winning number information. , It becomes invisible when it is 0%), the image of the lower display layer may be visible, and by setting a predetermined transparency, the background image of the lower display layer may be visible. The area corresponding to the first area α becomes visible, and the character E becomes visible.

Further, the display layer of the winning number information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the visibility of the winning number information does not deteriorate due to the display of other information in the first area α. Further, the display layer of the winning number information may be the same display layer as the error message in which the display area does not exist in the first area α, or may be a display layer higher than the error message, and may be higher than the error message. May be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer of the winning number information is the highest among all the display layers, and is displayed in the display area of other information (whether it is displayed in the first area α or the second area β). However, the visibility may not be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), since the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are all performed in the second area β, these images are displayed. Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 905, the number of prizes to the general prize opening (“today's general prizes”) and the first start prize as the prize number information displayed in the first area α. The visibility of the number of winnings to the mouth (“Today's number of winnings”) and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening (“Today's number of electric chew winnings”) is not impaired. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information.

When the image display device 905 is performing the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information, if a prize is given to the general winning opening, FIG. 68 ( As shown in d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command by the effect control CPU 90120 (“Today's general winning opening number”). Is updated. In this way, if a prize is generated in the general prize opening while the fourth symbol is variablely displayed, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the hold information is displayed, the general prize displayed in the first area α is displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth is updated without disturbing visibility. That is, the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information do not hinder the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning opening has occurred and that the number of winnings of the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the display result is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol ends and the display result stops. At the same time, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends and the display result is stopped and displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the fourth symbol display area 905A remains lit (displayed) in a display color reminiscent of the detachment (the display result is stopped and displayed), and is used as a definite decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the out-of-order symbols "5, 3, 1" are stopped and displayed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed (in the state where the display result is derived and displayed) and the stopped display (the display result is derived and displayed). Since all the decorative symbols (in the state) are displayed in the second area β, the number of winnings displayed in the first area α depending on the display of these images on the image display device 905. As information, the number of winnings to the general winning opening ("Today's general winning number"), the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening ("Today's number of Heso winnings"), and the winning to the second starting winning opening The visibility of the number (“Today's number of winnings in the electric chew”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Then, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are performed in the image display device 905, as shown in FIG. 68 (d). , The number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“today's general winning number”) is updated based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command. In this way, if a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are being performed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is increased. , Updated without disturbing visibility. That is, the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol do not hinder the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning opening has occurred and that the number of winnings of the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

In the example of FIGS. 68 (b), (c), and (d), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility, but the first starting winning opening is used. Even when a prize is awarded, the first start winning opening is won regardless of the variable display and stop display of the 4th symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, as in the case of the general winning opening. The numbers are updated without disturbing visibility. Further, even when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening, the variable display and the stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol do not depend on the case of the general winning opening. The number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility.

As shown in FIGS. 69 (e) and 69 (f), when the effect control CPU 90120 receives an abnormality detection designation command that specifies that an abnormality has occurred, an error message (in this example, "an error has occurred" occurs in the image display device 905. The image of the characters "I did.") Is displayed. As described above, the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative pattern. Therefore, if the effect control CPU 90120 receives the abnormality detection designation command when the decorative symbol is variably displayed or when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the area where the decorative symbol is displayed and an error occur. With respect to the overlap range with the area where the message is displayed, the display control is performed so that the error message is easy to see (including visible) and the decorative pattern is difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 69 (b), when viewed from the player, the error message is in front of (or the player side) the decorative symbol during the variable display (or the decorative symbol in the stopped display state). It looks like it is being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 69 (f), since the error message is displayed in the second area β, the error message may be displayed in the image display device 905 in the first area α. The number of winnings to the general winning opening ("Today's general winning number"), the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening ("Today's Heso winning number"), and the number of winnings displayed in 2 The visibility of the number of winnings to the starting winning opening (“Today's number of winnings for the electric chew”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the display of the error message.

Then, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the error message is being displayed in the image display device 905, the effect control CPU 90120 is a general winning as shown in FIG. 69 (g). Based on the reception of the mouth designation command, the number of winnings to the general winning mouth displayed in the first area α (“today's general winning number”) is updated. In this way, if a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the error message is being displayed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is not hindered in visibility. Will be updated. That is, depending on the display of the error message, the visibility when the winning number information is updated is not hindered. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning opening has occurred and that the number of winnings of the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

In the example of FIGS. 69 (f) and 69 (g), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility, but the winning in the first starting winning opening is shown. When it occurs, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility, regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. Further, even when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is hindered in visibility regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. It will be updated without any problems.

Further, in the example of FIG. 69 (f), the character "An error has occurred" is displayed, which simply notifies that an error has occurred based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Not limited to this, different error messages may be displayed depending on the type of abnormality specified by the abnormality detection specification command. For example, when an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a magnetic anomaly has occurred is received, the text "A magnetic error has occurred." Is displayed and an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a vibration abnormality has occurred is received. Occasionally, the text "Vibration error has occurred." May be displayed, and when an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a radio error has occurred is received, the text "Radio error has occurred." May be displayed. ..

In this example, as shown in FIG. 68A, the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as the vertices is defined as the first area α, and the coordinates (a + 1). , 0) and the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices are defined as the second area β, but the first area where the winning number information can be displayed, the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the hold The second area in which the information and the error message can be displayed is not limited to the rectangular area, and may be any area on the screen that does not overlap with each other.

(Display / non-display setting of winning number information)
As described with reference to FIG. 30, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 for operating the glass door frame 903a by opening it forward (the clerk of the game hall can operate it but the player cannot operate it) is the display position (second). Position), and when the player's setting screen (see FIG. 31) is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening by the player's operation, the general winning opening is set. Information on the number of winnings related to the number of winnings, etc. is to be displayed.

The examples shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 are display modes of the screen in a state where the setting to display the winning number information is made in this way, and when the setting to display the winning number information is made. In the first area α, not only the number of winnings to the general winning opening, but also the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening (so-called “navel”) and the winning to the second starting winning opening (so-called “Denchu”). The number shall also be displayed. That is, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening according to the operation of the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 30, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to be hidden (first position), the winning number information (the number of winnings to the general winning opening) is set by the operation button 9030. , And whether or not the setting to display the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening, etc.) is set, the winning number information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. Do not show. Further, even if the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), the setting to display the winning number information is not made by the operation button 9030 (in the case of the non-display setting). ), The winning number information is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 905.

The example shown in FIGS. 70 (b) and 70 (c) is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting for not displaying the winning number information is made in this way, and the setting for not displaying the winning number information is made. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed in the first area α, and the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening (so-called “navel”) and the second starting winning opening (so-called “electric chew”). The number of winnings to is not displayed either.

In this way, by making it possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information according to the setting operation on the game hall side and according to the setting operation on the player side, it is possible to set according to the convenience of the game field side. In addition, the winning number information can be displayed according to the judgment of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 70 (a), (b), and (c), when the setting is such that the winning number information is not displayed, the error message display area 5E is compared with the case where the winning number information is displayed. Each area of the fourth symbol display area 905A, 905B, the decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, and the start winning prize storage display area 905H is common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information displayed in the second area β are the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number. It does not change with the setting that does not display information. This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change that sets whether or not to display the winning number information.

On the other hand, when the setting is such that the winning number information is not displayed, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a), (b), and (c), the winning number information is set to be displayed (display examples of FIGS. 68 and 69). Unlike, the background image can be visually recognized in the first area α and the second area β. In the example of FIGS. 70 (a), (b), and (c), the first area of the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices]. Area corresponding to α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0,0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] and area corresponding to second area β [coordinates (a + 1,0) and coordinates ( Both of the rectangular areas defined with X, Y) as the vertices], that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

Therefore, in the example of FIGS. 70 (a), (b), and (c), the player is a character included in the rectangular region defined by the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. In addition to being able to visually recognize D, the character E included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is also visible.

In this way, regarding the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. While reducing the control burden by not changing (commonly) with the setting that does not, for other images (background image), it is visible with the setting that displays the winning number information and the setting that does not display the winning number information. By making the range different, we are trying to improve the interest when the winning number information is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when the image display device 905 is performing variable display of the fourth symbol, variable display of the decorative symbol, and display of reserved information, a prize is won in the general winning opening. Even when the above occurs, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed because the information on the number of winnings is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), when the image display device 905 is performing the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol, a prize is also generated in the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 70 (d), since the winning number information is not displayed, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed.

In addition, in the example of FIGS. 70 (b), (c), and (d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed even when the winning to the general winning opening occurs, but the winning number information is shown. If it is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings to the 1st starting winning opening is not displayed even when the winning to the 1st starting winning opening occurs, and the winning to the 2nd starting winning opening occurs. However, the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in each winning opening according to the operation of the player.

(Each item of prize number information)
FIG. 71 shows an example of items of the winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. Note that FIG. 71 shows items related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening, but similarly to the items related to the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. Items related to the number of winnings can be displayed in the first area α.

It is possible to display "Today's general winning number (A1)", which is the total number of winnings to each general winning opening from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and adds the value of the general winning number counter by 1 each time the general winning opening designation command is received. By doing so, A1 can be aggregated.

In addition, it is possible to display the "today's general winning ratio (referred to as A2)", which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs since the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the value of the out number counter every time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. The total number of outs can be totaled by adding one by one, and A2 can be totaled by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs.

In addition, it is possible to display "today's general prize ball number (A3)" which is the total value of the prize balls given based on the prizes to each general prize opening from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In addition, it is possible to display "Today's general prize ball ratio (referred to as A4)", which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

The ROM 90121 stores the number of prize balls defined for each of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, and the large winning opening. .. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and the general prize opening designation command is designated each time the general winning opening designation command is received. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize balls to the value of the general prize ball counter, A3 can be totaled. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening. The total number of prize balls can be totaled by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize openings specified by each command to the value of the prize ball counter for each large prize opening command that specifies the prize. By calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls, A4 can be totaled.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies whether the current game state is the low base state or the high base state by designating the game state by the game state designation command, and wins a prize in the low base state. The number information (B1 to B4) and the winning number information (C1 to C4) in the high base state can be separately aggregated.

Specifically, it is possible to display the "general winning number in the low base state (referred to as B1)", which is the total number of winnings in each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general winning number in a high base state (referred to as C1)" which is the total value of the winning numbers.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 shall set the value of the low-base medium general winning number counter and the value of the high-base medium general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. .. Then, during the period in which the game state specified by the received game state designation command is in the normal state, B1 is added by adding the value of the low-base medium general prize number counter by 1 each time the general prize opening designation command is received. During the period when the game state specified by the received game state specification command is either the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the value of the high-base medium general prize number counter is set for each reception of the general prize opening designation command. By adding one by one, C1 can be totaled.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general winning ratio in the low base state (referred to as B2)", which is the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, and the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general winning ratio in a high base state (referred to as C2)".

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low-base medium-out number counter and the value of the high-base medium-out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. Then, in the normal state, the number of low-base medium-outs can be totaled by adding the value of the low-base medium-out number counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out-ball detector is received. B2 can be aggregated by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the number of high-base medium-outs can be totaled by adding the value of the high-base medium-out number counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out-ball detector is received. It is possible to aggregate C2 by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of high-base medium outs.

In addition, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the low base state (referred to as B3)", which is the total number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the low base state, and the high base state. It is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the high base state (referred to as C3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the state.

The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low-base medium general prize ball counter and the value of the high-base medium general prize ball counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. And. Then, during the period when the game state specified by the received game state designation command is in the normal state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening designated by the received general winning opening designation command is set to the low base medium general prize ball number counter. B3 (“general prize ball number in low base state”) can be totaled by adding to the value of, and the game state specified by the received game state specification command is either a probabilistic state or a time saving state. During the period, C3 (“the number of general prize balls in the high base state” is obtained by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize openings specified by the received general prize opening designation command to the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter. ") Can be aggregated.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio in the low base state (referred to as B4)", which is the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state, with respect to the number of prize balls in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio in a high base state (referred to as C4)" which is the ratio of C3.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 shall set the value of the low-base medium prize ball counter and the value of the high-base medium prize ball counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. .. Then, in the normal state, each time the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings designated by each command is given to the low base middle prize. By adding to the value of the number of balls counter, it is possible to total the number of low-base middle prize balls, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of low-base middle prize balls, B4 ("low base state" General prize ball ratio ") can be aggregated. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings specified by each command is increased each time the starting winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball count counter, the number of high base middle prize balls can be totaled, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base middle prize balls, C4 ("high") It is possible to aggregate the "general prize ball ratio in the base state").

In this way, since the information related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be aggregated for each gaming state, the player can grasp the information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), attention is paid to the items B1 to B4, and when the gaming state is a high base state (probability change state or time saving state), attention is paid to the items C1 to C4. Become.

The effect control CPU 90120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α when the gaming state is in the low base state, but does not display the items C1 to C4 when the gaming state is in the high base state. , C1 to C4 items may be displayed in the first area α, while items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. Further, although the items B1 to B4 and the items C1 to C4 are displayed in the first area α regardless of the gaming state, the items B1 to B4 are visually recognized more than the items C1 to C4 in the low base state. The items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner that is easier to see (for example, larger) than the items B1 to B4 in a high base state.

(Aggregation of prize number information during the set period)
Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can aggregate information on the number of winnings in the period set by the player, and is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening in the set period. D1) ”can be displayed in the first area α.

When the aggregation period corresponding to the operation of the player shown in FIG. 72, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 and aggregates. The value of the timer is set in the set period (aggregation period according to the operation of the player), and the aggregation timer is started. Then, each time the general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is added by 1 during the set period, and when the totaling timer times out (when the set totaling period has elapsed), the general winning is performed during the set period. The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

During the period when the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period after the last detection signal is received from the out ball detector), the aggregation timer is updated, while the period during which the number of outs is not increasing (for example,). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last detection signal was received from the out-ball detector), the aggregation timer may not be updated and may be stopped. In this way, the period during which the game ball is not fired in the game area 9010 may be excluded from the aggregation period.

Further, when the aggregation timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the aggregation timer is set again during the set period (player's). It is set to the aggregation period according to the operation), and the aggregation timer starts again. Then, the value of the general winning number counter is added every time the general winning opening designation command is received, and when the totaling timer times out again (when the set totaling period has elapsed again), the general winning number counter during the set period The value of is displayed as D1 in the first area α. In this way, for each aggregation period set by the player, D1 corresponding to the aggregation period is displayed.

Further, it is possible to display the "general winning ratio (referred to as D2)" which is the ratio of D1 to the number of outs of the gaming machine in the set period. When the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 during the set period, the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 during the set period is set to 0. By adding the value of the out number counter during the set period by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received, the number of outs in the set period can be totaled and set. D2 can be aggregated by calculating the ratio of D1 to the number of outs in the period.

Further, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls (referred to as D3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the set period. Further, it is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio (referred to as D4)" which is the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period.

When the aggregation period corresponding to the operation of the player shown in FIG. 72, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and at the same time, sets it to 0. The value of the aggregation timer is set in the set period (aggregation period according to the operation of the player), and the aggregation timer is started. Then, each time a general winning slot designation command is received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning slot designated by the general winning slot designation command is added to the value of the general winning slot counter during the set period, and the totaling timer is set. The value of the general prize ball count counter during the set period when the time-out occurs (when the set aggregation period has elapsed) is displayed in the first area α as D3.

When the total timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the total timer is set again during the set period (player). (Aggregation period according to the operation of) is set, and the aggregation timer starts again. Then, the value of the general prize ball counter is added every time the general prize opening designation command is received, and when the totaling timer times out again (when the set totaling period has elapsed again), the general prize ball during the set period The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3. In this way, for each aggregation period set by the player, D3 corresponding to the aggregation period is displayed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 during the set period, the effect control CPU 90120 is also stored in the RAM 90122 during the set period. The value of is set to 0, and the winning slot specified by each command is received each time the starting winning slot designation command, the general winning slot designation command, and the large winning slot winning command that specifies the winning to the grand winning slot are received. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the above to the value of the prize ball counter during the set period, the number of prize balls in the set period can be totaled, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period. It is possible to total D4 by calculating.

Since the general winning opening designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120 specifies which general winning opening the game ball has won, the effect control CPU 90120 has the first general winning opening 9050A to the first. 4 The number of winnings to the general winning openings 9050D is aggregated individually, and the items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4 and D1 to D4 are aggregated for each general winning opening, and the aggregated value is calculated. It is possible to display it in the first area α.

Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and related to the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening. Which of the items is to be displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined according to the gaming state or the like. For example, items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening It may be possible to select which of the related items to be displayed in the first area α by an operation on the playground side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), and the player side. It may be possible to select by the operation of (for example, the operation using the operation button 9030).

In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening For each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the ROM 90121 stores the reference value in association with each item. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the aggregated value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the aggregated value has not reached the reference value. As shown in FIG. 72 (4) described later, it is possible to display a message notifying that the aggregated value of the item displayed in the first area α does not reach the reference value of the item. .. As a result, the player grasps whether or not the aggregated value of the item displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value as compared with the reference value of the item, and selects the gaming machine. It can be used as a judgment material (whether or not the game on the gaming machine should be continued).

Next, a method of setting the aggregation period will be described with reference to FIG. 72. For example, the aggregation period setting screen of FIG. 72 further sets the aggregation period when the selection screen of FIG. 31 (2) described above is selected to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. A screen that is displayed when a selection screen for selecting whether or not to select is displayed, and when the selection to set the aggregation period is made on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed). And.

On the setting screen of FIG. 72 (1), the message "Please set the aggregation period" is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed below it. On the setting screen, an icon containing the characters "10 minutes", an icon containing the characters "30 minutes", and an icon containing the characters "60 minutes" are displayed, and it is called "OK after selecting with the jog dial". A message is displayed, and an arrow prompting the user to press the operation button 9030 (jog dial) after rotating the operation button 9030 is displayed.

To set the aggregation period to 10 minutes, rotate the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the left to select the icon containing the characters "10 minutes", and then press the operation button 9030 to "set". The message "The period is 10 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 10 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. Further, when the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 72 (1), when the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character “30 minutes” selected, FIG. 72 (2) As shown in, the message "The setting period is 30 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 30 minutes. When setting the aggregation period to 60 minutes, by rotating the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the right and pressing the operation button 9030 with the icon including the character "60 minutes" selected, the operation button 9030 is pressed. The message "The setting period is 60 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

In this way, it is possible to set a desired aggregation period according to the operation of the player. In the example of FIG. 72, 30 minutes is set as the aggregation period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72 (3), the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is displayed as the "general winning number (D1) in the set period" in the first area α. In the example of FIG. 72 (3), 30 is stored as a reference value for the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the aggregated value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is stored. Since it is 37, the aggregated value exceeds the reference value. Therefore, there is no notification that the aggregated value has not reached the reference value.

On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 72 (4), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is totaled. Since the value is 29, the aggregated value has not reached the reference value. Therefore, a notification that the aggregated value has not reached the standard value (display of a message "below the standard value (30 times / 30 minutes)") is given.

(Items related to the number of winnings in the starting prize opening)
In addition, since the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command for designating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won when a winning is generated in the starting winning opening. By the same method as the aggregation process when the general prize opening designation command that specifies which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings was won is received, "Today's number of winnings to the 1st starting winning opening (A1) Equivalent) ”,“ Today's 1st starting prize opening ratio (equivalent to A2) ”,“ Today's number of prize balls awarded based on winning the 1st starting winning opening (equivalent to A3) ”, And "The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the prize to the first start prize opening of the day to the total number of prize balls of the day (equivalent to A4)", and "Today's second start prize opening" Number of prizes (equivalent to A1) ”,“ Today's prize ratio to the second start prize opening (equivalent to A2) ”,“ Number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize to the second start prize opening (Equivalent to A3) ”and“ Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's winning to the second starting prize opening to today's total number of prize balls (equivalent to A4) ”. Therefore, it can be displayed in the first area α.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B2)", "the first in the low base state". The number of prize balls awarded based on the winning of one starting prize opening (corresponding to B3), and the first starting winning opening in the low base state with respect to the number of prize balls awarded in the low base state. The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning (corresponding to B4), "the number of winnings to the second start winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)", and "the second start in the low base state". Winning ratio to winning opening (equivalent to B2) "," Number of prize balls awarded based on winning to the second starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B3) ", and" Granted in the low base state The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the second starting winning opening in the low base state to the number of prize balls (corresponding to B4) "can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. Is.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)", "the first in the high base state". The number of prize balls awarded based on the winning of one starting prize opening (corresponding to C3), and the first starting winning opening in the high base state with respect to the number of prize balls awarded in the high base state. The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning (corresponding to C4), "the number of winnings to the second start winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)", and "the second start in the high base state". Winning ratio to winning opening (equivalent to C2) "," Number of prize balls awarded based on winning to the second starting winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C3) ", and" Granted in the high base state The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the second starting winning opening in the high base state to the number of prize balls (corresponding to C4) "can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. Is.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the set period (corresponding to D1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the set period (corresponding to D2)", "the first starting winning in the set period". Awarded based on the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning of the mouth (corresponding to D3), and "Granted based on the winning of the first starting winning mouth in the set period for the number of prize balls granted in the set period" "Ratio of the number of winning balls (corresponding to D4)", "Number of winnings to the second starting winning slot in the set period (corresponding to D1)", "Ratio to winning the second starting winning slot in the set period (equivalent to D1)" "Equivalent to D2)", "Number of prize balls awarded based on winning the second starting prize opening in the set period (corresponding to D3)", and "Setting for the number of prize balls awarded in the set period" The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the second starting winning opening in the period (corresponding to D4) ”can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α.

(Display of role ratio (combination ratio), role ratio)
Further, in the gaming machine 901, also in the gaming control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011, each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, the following , Also called "entry area"), the number of game balls entering the area is totaled. Further, in the gaming machine 901, predetermined information such as a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio can be displayed on the display monitors 9029 shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 provided on the main board 9011.

As described above, it is usual for the gaming machine manufacturer to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming medium enters the general winning area at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the gaming machine having a general winning area. Hereinafter, the display of the accessory ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the totalization of game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 9011 will be described.

The main board 9011 shown in FIG. 75 is a board that controls games. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), the main board 9011 is enclosed in a board case 90201, and a display monitor 9029 is arranged in the center of the back surface side of the main board 9011. The display monitor 9029 is arranged in front of the main board 9011 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 9011 cannot be visually recognized when the glass door frame 903a is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 9011 is the back side of the game board 902 when the glass door frame 903a is opened. This is the front of the door, which is different from the front of the gaming machine 901. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 9011 and the front surface of the gaming machine 901 may be common.

On the main board 9011, information regarding the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), and the large winning opening ( The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls for winning the prize (attacker) are input and totaled, and the display monitor 9029 is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls for winning the large winning opening (attacker). The ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls (ratio) (%). The role ratio (%) is displayed. The role-ream (combined ratio) is the ratio of the total number of prize-winning balls to the number of prize-winning balls (the number of consecutive prize-winning balls below) by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below). Is the ratio. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), and the big winning opening. It is the sum of the number of prize balls due to winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the expected winning ratio of the gaming ball changes as the passable width of the gaming ball changes. be. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning percentage of game balls is a certain amount.

As a method of totaling and calculating information on winning a game, the number of prize balls (general prize balls) by winning the first starting opening (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls, the first 2 The number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the starting prize opening (Denchu), and the special electric role prize, which is the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker). The number of balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and 10 sets, that is, 60,000 winning combinations (combinations) (%) and winning ratios (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. Furthermore, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 66,000 11 sets of storage is stored, and the cumulative combination (combination) (%) and combination (%) within the range of these numerical values are stored. Can be calculated.

The display monitor 9029 sets the combination (combination) (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces, and the cumulative combination (relationship) (%) and the combination ratio (%) for a predetermined time (for example, 30). It can be switched and displayed every second). That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first starting opening (navel) and the winning to the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls will change depending on the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying 60,000 winning combination (relationship ratio) (%) is reflected in the 60000 winning combination (%) displayed thereafter. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the role ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces and the role ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (Heso), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the total prize balls Such discrepancies can be prevented by inputting numbers and performing aggregation at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, display timing of 60,000 winning combinations (combination) (%)). ..

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating the prize ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. Further, the number of winning balls for a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. Further, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. Therefore, the combination (relationship ratio) can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Roles (relationship) = [Number of consecutive winning balls / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (1)
Role ratio = [(number of consecutive winning balls + number of winning balls) / total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 decimal point rounded down by dividing 42000 by 60,000).
However, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then divide this 4200000 by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be divided by 1000.

In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but in order to calculate the bonus ratio over a long period of time, a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down to the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used for the game machine becomes easy, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, a decimal number. Calculate 234 in the notation. Similarly, the lower 1 byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, and the number of winning balls is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

The third calculation method facilitates the calculation by the microcomputer used in the gaming machine, but causes an error of + 12%. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is close to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 90201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 9011 and the display monitor 9029 can be visually recognized. The board case 90201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 9011 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 9011. The display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front of the display monitor 9029. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is not obstructed by the heat radiation hole. In addition, the "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 9011 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to visually recognize the main board 9011 and the main board 9011.

Further, the board case 90201 is provided with a seal for displaying the type, model, specifications, etc. of the main board 9011. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to obstruct the display of the display monitor 9029. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76, when the display monitor 9029 is arranged in the first part of the main board 9011 (for example, the central part of the main board 9011), the second part is different from the first part in the main board 9011. Even if other electric components or the like are arranged in a portion (for example, a peripheral portion of the main board 9011), a hole portion, a heat radiation hole, or a seal is arranged in a portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main board 9011. good. In particular, the heat dissipation hole is preferably provided in the vicinity of the display monitor 9029 in order to release the heat generated by the display monitor 9029. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat dissipation hole is arranged at a position not directly in front of the display monitor 9029. According to this, since the display monitor 9029 does not interfere with the visibility, it is easy to confirm the information regarding the winning.

Further, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap with the portion of the substrate case 90201 corresponding to the second part of the main substrate 9011. Specifically, the portion of the board case 90201 corresponding to the second portion of the main board 9011 does not overlap with the hole portion to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. To. According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being obstructed by the wiring.

Further, the main board 9011 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying the error of the gaming machine, but in order to avoid misidentification with the 7-segment display monitor 9029, the main board 9011 should be separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components. It is preferable to arrange them so as to sandwich them. The other electronic components referred to here are preferably large-scale control components such as CPUs.

In addition, a storage area in which information related to winning a game is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total information related to winning a game stored in a ring buffer equipped with 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball). The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be described further later. In addition, the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is used. Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, the abnormality count error display, the warning display, and the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, the abnormality count error display and the warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after the initialization process is performed. The abnormal count error display and warning display will be further described later.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1987/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. Since it is necessary to avoid the calculation with a decimal point when performing the calculation in the game control microcomputer 90100, it is replaced with the following calculation formula. In the division of 1987/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, the decimal point is rounded down, and 1987/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 9029. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of bonus balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 90100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the fractions truncated, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 69% → 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the winning combination (%) (or the winning combination (continuous ratio) (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, since the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter, the combination ratio (%) and the combination ratio (relationship ratio) (%) are displayed on the display monitor 9029. Even if it is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, there is a possibility that an error may be large, even if it is notified by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value. good.

Further, the display monitor 9029 displays the combination ratio (%) and the combination (relationship) (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). indicate. In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is calculated after 30 seconds. If it is displayed as a value of (%), there is a risk that the value of the combination (%) and the value of the combination (%) will deviate from each other. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the combination (relationship ratio) (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 9029 shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 (A), the numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under specific conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits.

Further, in the above calculation method, an example of totaling the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls for the bonus, and the number of winning balls for the continuous bonus on the counter is shown. A sensor provided detects that the game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection result, each prize ball number is individually totaled, and then a counter for the number of winning balls and a counter for the number of consecutive winning balls. You may calculate the value to be aggregated in. In addition, a sensor individually provided for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric chew merge, are used, and based on the detection result. The value to be aggregated in the counter of the number of balls acquired as a bonus and the counter of the number of balls acquired as a continuous bonus may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio will be specifically described. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which the sensor provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew detects that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result.

As shown in FIG. 75, a display monitor 9029 is connected to the main board 9011 in the gaming machine 901. As shown in FIG. 76, the main board 9011 is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board 902 (see FIG. 27) provided in the gaming machine frame 903 in the gaming machine 901. On the back side of the game board 902, in addition to the main board 9011, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided. There is. The main board 9011 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 9011. The main board 9011 may overlap with each of these peripheral boards. In particular, the main board 9011 may be overlapped so as to be on the upper side of each peripheral board.

The RAM 90102 in the main board 9011 has a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, and the like. A third general prize number counter, a fourth general prize number counter, and a large prize number counter are provided.

The first gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first gate switch 9021A. The second gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 9021B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 9022A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 9022B.

The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

Further, a clear switch is connected to the main board 9011. The clear switch is arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 at a position where employees and the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, the combination (combination ratio) stored in the RAM 90102 and the data used for the combination ratio, which will be described later, are cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the combination (relationship) or the combination ratio, and the calculation of the combination (relationship) or the combination ratio has to be redone. Is. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal combination (combination ratio) or combination ratio. When the clear switch is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing the data.

Further, RTC90106 is provided on the main board 9011. The main board 9011 can detect the current time by RTC90106. The RTC90106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by making initial settings, but in this embodiment, the RTC90106 can measure the business hours of the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 77 (A), the main board 9011 is housed in the board case 90201. A caulking pin 9011B is attached to the board case 90201. By providing the caulking pin 9011B, the main board 9011 is completely enclosed in the board case 90201, and fraudulent acts against the main board 9011 are prevented. The substrate case 90201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as “crimped substrate case”).

Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011. Further, a sealing sticker 9011S is attached to the substrate case 90201 to prove that the main substrate 9011 is enclosed. The sealing seal 9011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 90201. The seal seal 9011S is arranged at a position away from the main board 9011, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 9029. As described above, the display monitor 9029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal seal 9011S.

The display monitor 9029 includes a four-digit display unit of a first display unit 9029A, a second display unit 9029B, a third display unit 9029C, and a fourth display unit 9029D. The first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

On the display monitor 9029, each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 77 (B) is displayed. The aggregation period is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B of the upper two digits, and the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D of the lower two digits. In display No1, a short-term combination (combination ratio) is displayed, and in display No2, a short-term combination ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total cumulative combination (combination ratio) is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 60,000. The period for calculating the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio is once reset. do.

In the above example, the winning combination (relationship ratio) and the winning combination ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the role ream (relationship ratio) may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls, and the role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the big winning opening in the big hit game state. It may be the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the winning of.

When the short-term combination (combination) of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B. Further, when the short-term combination (relationship) of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term combination (relationship) is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B. When the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B.

When the total cumulative combination (relationship) of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In that case, "A7." Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B. Further, when the total cumulative combination (relationship) of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative combination (relationship) is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. When the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D.

The main board 9011 is a game ball that has entered the attacker, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening in calculating the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination. The number of intrusions is being totaled. In the main processing, the CPU 90103 includes a first gate switch 9021A and a second gate switch 9021B, a first start port switch 9022A and a second start port switch 9022B, a count switch 9023, and a first general winning port switch 9024A to a fourth general. A state confirmation process for confirming the state (presence / absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning opening switch 9024D is performed.

In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the values of the first gate pass count counter and the second gate pass count counter are added, and the first start port switch 9022A, When the detection signal is output from the 2nd start port switch 9022B, the values of the 1st start winning number counter and the 2nd start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 9023, the detection signal is output. When the value of the large winning number counter is added and the detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. Is the number of game balls entering each entry area (each winning) by adding the values of the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, the third general winning number counter, and the fourth general winning number counter. The number of winning game balls to the mouth) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 90102.

In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (included in the switch state confirmation process). ) Therefore, it is possible to total the number of game balls entering each approach area without executing a separate totaling program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to an increase in the number of execution programs. ..

The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the number of prize balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 90102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening and the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 78, the number of prize balls for each winning opening classified here is a general winning opening prize ball (a prize ball by winning a prize from the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening (sode)). 1st start winning prize ball (prize ball by winning the 1st starting prize opening (heso)), ordinary electric role prize ball (prize ball by winning the electric chew), special electric role prize ball (winning to the attacker) It is the number of prize balls. The RAM 90102 also stores the total number of prize balls. In the CPU 90103, the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the first starting opening are totaled individually. The number of game ball winnings may be aggregated. Further, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting opening prize ball are calculated separately. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 90102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of these prize balls. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas consisting of a counter having a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area consisting of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

Further, the RAM 90102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total total for each winning opening. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of counters of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

Further, the RAM 90102 is provided with a combination (combination) combination / ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and the total total combination ratio and combination (relationship). In the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011, the winning ratio and the winning combination (continuous ratio) for 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of winning balls based on the number of winning balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. Stores 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and combination (relationship) in the combination (relationship) combination storage area. The combination (relationship) combination storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination (relationship) of 10 sets and the total cumulative total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. For example, when storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and combination (relationship) as an integer, a counter with a maximum of 1 byte can store the combination with a margin.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU in the main board. The CPU 90103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in registers, ROM 90101, RAM 90102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 79, the address / data signal line of the ROM 90101 is a built-in ROM area of a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; hereinafter the same) in the memory space. Is assigned to. The CPU 90103 performs various control processes in the built-in ROM area.

Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the built-in register area of FE00H to FEBFH in the memory space. The CPU 90103 reads data from the built-in register and writes data to the register via the built-in register area.

Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 90102 is assigned to the RWM area (built-in RAM area) of F000H to F3FFH in the memory space. The CPU 90103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 90102 and write data to the RAM 90 102. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, a used area program area, a used area data area, a non-used area program area, and a non-used area data area are assigned to the built-in ROM area. In addition, a free area is allocated between the used area program area and the used area data area. Similarly, free space is allocated between the used area data area and the unused area program area, and between the unused area program area and the unused area data area. The CPU 90103 specifies this built-in ROM area and reads data from the ROM 90101.

Of these, the used area program area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 90103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction. The data of the game-related program related to the progress of the game is stored. The game-related program stored in the used area program area includes a game control program, which is a program for controlling the game, and a special symbol display output program, which is a program for displaying special figures, ordinary figures, and the like. There is. These game control programs and special symbol display output programs are stored in the used area program area. The game control program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program that controls the progress of the game, such as a big hit lottery program for lottery for the transition to the big hit game state.

The unused area program area is composed of instruction data (operation code) for the CPU 90103 to calculate the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio, and supplementary data (operator) necessary for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction. Data of a program for calculating and displaying a combination (relationship) and a combination ratio (hereinafter, may be referred to as a combination (relationship) combination ratio related program) is stored. The role-ream (relationship) role-ratio-related program includes a role-relationship (relationship) role-ratio calculation program for calculating the role-relationship (relationship) and role-ratio, and a display monitor for the role-relationship (relationship) and role-ratio. A combination (combination ratio) combination display output program for displaying in 9029 is included. In the unused area program area, a combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program and a combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program are stored. The combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program is a program different from the progress of the game.

Here, the used area program area and the non-used area program area will be further described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a configuration of a used area program area and a non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. As shown in FIG. 81, in the used area program area, "switch input processing", "digit output processing 1", "jump processing to the unused area (digit output processing 2)", and "error detection processing" are used as game-related programs. "Random number update processing" "Special map processing" "Program processing" "Information output processing" "Prize ball processing" "Test terminal processing" "Vorient processing" "Memory display processing" "Error notification processing" "Unused area (role) Each program of "jump processing to ratio calculation processing)" is stored. Further, in the non-used program area, each program of the combination (combination) "digit output processing 2", "jump processing to the used area (error detection processing)", and "role ratio calculation processing" is stored. In the CPU 90103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared and executed by one interrupt process. Further, in the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2, the LEDs in the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, and the display monitor 9029 are displayed by dynamic lighting. However, static lighting may be used instead of dynamic lighting.

Of these processes, the program that performs "digit output process 1" corresponds to the special symbol display output program, and the program that performs "digit output process 2" corresponds to the combination (combination) combination display output program. .. Further, a program that performs from "error detection processing" to "error notification processing" (hereinafter, also referred to as "game progress control processing") corresponds to a game control program, and a program that performs "role ratio calculation processing" is a combination. (Continuous ratio) Corresponds to the combination ratio calculation program. In the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program, the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio are calculated, and the display pattern when the calculated combination (relationship) and the combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, in other words. The light emission patterns of the plurality of LEDs (1st segment SG1 to 7th segment SG7 and dot SG8 shown in FIG. 93) on the display monitor 9029 are determined.

In the used area data area, reference data (for example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) referred to by the control program stored in the used program area is stored. Further, in the unused area data area, data used for displaying the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the unused area data area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a combination storage area for the total total number of winning combinations. Further, in the unused area data area, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls (for 10 sets) for each winning opening. A total storage area and 10 sets of combination (combination) combination storage areas are provided.

In this embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data with a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. is doing.

In addition, the used area program area in which the special symbol display output program and the game control program are stored in the built-in ROM area of the CPU 90103, the combination (relationship) combination display output program, and the combination (relationship) combination calculation program A higher-level address (starting address) different from the stored unused area program area is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, the upper address of the subroutine in the used area program area in which the special symbol display output program and the game control program are stored is “00”. The upper address of the subroutine in the unused area program area in which the combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program and the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program are stored is set to "01". As described above, the upper address of the program stored in the unused area program area is different from the upper address of the program stored in the used area program area.

As call instructions for each of these programs, "CALLF" and "CALLmn" are used for the programs stored in the used area program area. Further, only "CALLmn" is used for the program stored in the unused area program area, and "CALLF" is not used. The special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the used area program area are called by "CALLF" or "CALLMn", but here, they are called by "CALLF". In addition, the combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program stored in the unused area program area and the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program are called by "CALLmn" and are not called by "CALLF". do not have. Comparing these calling instructions, "CALLF" is a calling instruction having a shorter tone and a lighter capacity than "CALLMn".

Further, the CPU 90103 includes a Q register. The Q register is a dedicated register for storing the upper address in the built-in ROM area as a fixed value. By providing the Q register, it is possible to call a program without the upper address. A fixed value corresponding to the upper address is set in the Q register. For example, a fixed value "00" is set when calling a program stored in the used area program area, and a fixed value "01" is set when calling a program stored in the non-used area program area. The program. In this way, the Q register can execute the program in the unused area program area by setting a fixed value in the upper address of the unused area program area after setting a fixed value in the upper address of the used area program area. It is possible.

Next, the execution order of the programs in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 90103 will be described. In principle, the CPU 90103 executes the program in the order of the addresses. Therefore, referring to FIG. 81, when executing the program, the CPU 90103 first executes the "switch input process" in the used area program area, and then performs the "digit output process 1" according to the special symbol display output program. Run. When starting interrupt processing, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. In the "digit output process 1", the CPU 90103 uses the digit signals for the special figure and the normal figure obtained in the previous routine as the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display device 9020. Execute the process to output to.

After executing the "digit output process 1", the CPU 90103 jumps from the used area program area to the unused area program area, and executes the "digit output process 2" according to the combination (combination) combination display output program. .. When jumping from the used area program area to the unused area program area, a fixed value "01" is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes a process of outputting a digit signal about the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 9029. Therefore, the "digit output process 1" and the "digit output process 2" are continuously executed.

After performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 jumps from the unused area program area to the used area program area, and performs processing according to the game control program. When jumping from the unused area program area to the used area program area, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. The CPU 90103 has "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special drawing processing", "normal drawing processing", "information output processing", "prize ball processing", "test terminal processing", and "solenoid processing" in the processing according to the game control program. "Memory display processing" and "error notification processing" are executed in sequence. The CPU 90103 generates a digit signal for a special figure, a normal figure, or the like by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 90103 executes "error notification processing", and when the processing corresponding to the third program is completed, jumps from the used area program to the non-used area program, and "combined" according to the combination (combination) combination ratio calculation program. Execute "ratio calculation process". The CPU 90103 calculates the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning combination by the "combination ratio calculation process", and generates a digit signal for the winning combination (continuous ratio), the winning combination, and the like. In this way, the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 is completed.

In this way, the CPU 90103 executes the "digit output process 1" and the "digit output process 2" in one interrupt process, and displays the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol. Display of special figures and ordinary figures on the device 9020, and display of the combination (combination) and combination ratio on the display monitor 9029.

Next, the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing other configurations of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. In this example, as shown in FIG. 83, in the used area program area, "switch input processing", "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special drawing processing", "general drawing processing", "information output processing", and "award" Each program of ball processing, test terminal processing, solenoid processing, storage display processing, error notification processing, and digit output processing 1 is stored. Further, each program of "digit output processing 2" and "combination ratio calculation processing" is stored in the unused program area.

Next, the execution order of the programs in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 90103 in this example will be described. Referring to FIG. 83, in executing the program, the CPU 90103 first executes the “switch input process” in the used area program area, and then performs the process according to the third program. The CPU 90103 has "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special drawing processing", "normal drawing processing", "information output processing", "prize ball processing", "test terminal processing", and "solenoid processing" in the processing according to the game control program. "Memory display processing" and "error notification processing" are executed in sequence. The CPU 90103 generates a digit signal for a special figure, a normal figure, or the like by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 130 subsequently executes the "digit output process 1" according to the special symbol display output program. In the "digit output process 1", the CPU 90103 uses the digit signals for the special figure and the normal figure obtained in the previous routine as the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display device 9020. Execute the process to output to. However, a digit signal for a special figure or a normal figure obtained in this routine may be output.

Then, the CPU 90103 shifts to the unused area program area as it is, and executes the "digit output process 2" according to the combination (combination) combination display output program. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes a process of outputting a digit signal about the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 9029. Therefore, the "digit output process 1" and the "digit output process 2" are continuously executed.

After that, the CPU 90103 executes the digit output process 2 and then executes the "combination ratio calculation process" according to the combination (combination) combination ratio calculation program. The CPU 90103 calculates the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning combination by the "combination ratio calculation process", and generates a digit signal for the winning combination (continuous ratio), the winning combination, and the like. In this way, the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 is completed.

In this way, the CPU 90103 executes the "digit output process 1" and the "digit output process 2" in one interrupt process, and displays the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol. Display of special figures and ordinary figures on the device 9020, and display of the combination (combination) and combination ratio on the display monitor 9029.

For example, regarding the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area, the configuration shown in FIG. 81 is referred to as an area configuration pattern A, and the configuration shown in FIG. 83 is referred to as an area configuration pattern B. Further, the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area is an area configuration pattern in which the jump processing between the used area program area and the non-used area program area is excluded from the configuration shown in FIG. Let it be C.

In this case, in the area configuration pattern A, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), in one cycle of the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103, the special symbol display output program → the combination (combination) combination ratio display output program → the game control program → The processing is executed in the order of the combination (relationship ratio) combination ratio calculation program. Further, in the area configuration pattern B, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), in the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103, the game control program → the special symbol display output program → the combination (combination) combination ratio display output program → the combination ( Processing is executed in the order of the combination ratio calculation program. Further, in the area configuration pattern C, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), a special symbol display output program → a game control program → a combination (relationship) combination display output program → a combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program. Processing is executed in the order of. Hereinafter, the interrupt processing showing the procedure in FIG. 84 (A) is referred to as a first interrupt process, the interrupt process showing the procedure in FIG. 84 (B) is referred to as a second interrupt process, and the interrupt process showing the procedure in FIG. 84 (C) is referred to. The processing is called the third interrupt processing.

Next, the control for displaying the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 9029 by the main board 9011 will be described. Here, the main board 9011 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items related to the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio. FIG. 85A is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor. As shown in FIG. 85 (A), when the display on the display monitor 9029 is started, the short-term combination (combination ratio) of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term combination (relationship ratio) of the display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term combination (combination ratio) of the display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 85 (B-1), the character "y" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Character is displayed. Further, the short-term combination (relationship ratio) is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the short-term combination (relationship) is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "1." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term combination (relationship ratio) of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 85 (B-2), the character "y" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "3." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of the display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination (combination ratio) of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination (relationship ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination (combination ratio) of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 85 (B-3), the character "A" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and "6" is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. The characters "." Are displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination (relationship ratio) is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative combination (relationship ratio) is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 85 (B-4), the character "A" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term combination (combination ratio) of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 85 (B-5). After that, the display of the short-term combination (relationship) of display No. 1 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term combination (combination ratio) of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 9029 switches and displays the short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination (relationship), and total cumulative combination ratio every 30 seconds.

Further, the content displayed on the display monitor 9029 is not limited to the above content and can be appropriately determined. For example, in the above example, characters such as "y" and "A" are displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and numerical values are displayed on the second display unit 9029B to the fourth display unit 9029D. Characters may be displayed on the display unit 9029B, and numerical values may be displayed on the first display unit 9029A, the third display unit 9029C, and the fourth display unit 9029D.

Further, a numerical value may be displayed on all of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D, and a predetermined ratio or the like and a classification or the like may be indicated only by the numerical value. Alternatively, characters may be displayed in two places of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D, and numerical values may be displayed in the other two places. Further, a numerical range of characters may be set so that only characters are displayed on the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, "0" to "30" may be displayed as "P", "31" to "60" may be displayed as "Q", and "61" to "100" may be displayed as "R". The characters to be displayed are not limited to English characters, but may be hiragana, katakana, kanji, or the like. Further, instead of the characters, a symbol having no meaning may be displayed.

Further, when displaying a numerical value or the like on the display monitor 9029, the color or display mode may be changed according to the displayed numerical value. For example, when displaying the combination ratio, if the displayed combination ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it may be displayed in "blue", and if it exceeds the predetermined value, it may be displayed in "red". Further, when the displayed combination ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it may be lit and displayed, and when it exceeds the predetermined value, it may be blinked. In the blinking display, any of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D may be blinked. For example, the entire first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D may be blinked, the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, or the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. You may make two of them blink. The display unit that is not blinking may be turned on or off.

Further, in the main board 9011, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the total and total storage area for 10 sets and the storage area for the combination (relationship) combination ratio that stores the combination ratio and the combination ratio (relation ratio) for 10 sets and total total are updated respectively. ..

In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 86, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", "87", and "66", respectively. "117" "45" "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is "27", "81", and "", respectively. Update to 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily erased and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 shown in FIG. 75 includes a door opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a. The opening of the glass door frame 903a does not correspond to an abnormality when it is performed by an employee, but it often corresponds to an abnormality when it is performed by a person other than the employee. Therefore, in this embodiment, the door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 903a is included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. When the door opening sensor detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a, the door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main board 9011.

Door opening includes normal opening of the glass door frame 903a by an employee and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 903a by a person other than the employee. Here, the door opening is detected on the assumption that the abnormal glass door frame 903a is opened. Further, even if the employee opens the glass door frame 903a normally, the door opening is detected, but the employee or the like recognizes the opening of the glass door frame 903a. Since there are many, it is possible to prevent any particular problems from occurring.

Subsequently, the control regarding the combination (combination ratio) and the display of the combination ratio executed on the main board 9011 will be described. On the main board 9011, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled and then makes the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 90102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used for displaying the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 90102 is maintained without being cleared. To. The data used for displaying the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 90102 is cleared by operating the clear switch. In addition, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. After making the initial settings, the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. The combination (combination) / combination-related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing. Further, among the combination (relationship) / combination ratio related processing, the combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program is executed in the display switching control process (step S90209 in FIG. 90), and the combination (relationship) / combination ratio display output program is executed in other processing. (Ratio) The combination ratio calculation program is executed. The winning combination calculation process in the winning combination (continuous ratio) winning combination calculation program includes other processing of the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning combination calculation. However, in the combination ratio calculation process, the combination (relationship) and combination ratio calculation processing is performed, and a program corresponding to other processing in the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program may be separately prepared. good.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination (combination) / combination-related processing. On the main board 9011, as shown in FIG. 87, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation is detected in the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio related processing (step S90101). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S90101; YES), preparation for warning display is performed (step S90102), and the process proceeds to step S90103. Further, when the clear switch operation signal is not transmitted and the abnormal operation is not detected (step S90101; NO), the winning information is acquired (step S90103). As for the winning information, the game ball is detected by any one of the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. Obtained by.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within the business hours (step S90104). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured and determined by RTC90106. As a result, when the current time is within the business hours (step S90104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105). Whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed is determined by whether or not an opening signal is transmitted from the door opening sensor.

As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor and the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105; YES), the attacker wins more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time. It is determined whether or not the signal is present (step S90106). The unit time and the predetermined number of balls here are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a prize cannot be won in a normal game. Specifically, since the maximum number of launches of the game ball is 100 per minute, it can be appropriately determined, for example, up to 100 per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is 5 when the unit time is 1 second, or the predetermined number is 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by RTC90106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

As a result, when the attacker does not win more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time (step S90106; NO), the number of prize balls is added according to the prize information acquired in step S90103. Processing is performed (step S90107). The prize ball number addition process is performed when the warning display preparation is not performed. Here, if the warning display preparation is being made, the combination (combination) / combination-related processing is terminated as it is. In the prize ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), the general winning opening (heso), the ordinary electric role prize ball (electric chew), and the special electric role prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area shown in FIG. 78. Add the number of prize balls.

Further, in the prize ball number addition process, a general prize opening (sode), a general winning opening (heso), a normal electric prize ball (electric chew), and a special electric prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. Calculate the total number of prize balls for each prize ball. Here, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer becomes 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move it. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. In addition, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is erased.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has timed up (calculation timer = 0) (step S90108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not timed up (step S90108; NO), the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio-related processing is terminated as it is. If the calculation timer is timed up (step S90108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S90109).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (total prize balls) obtained by adding in step S90107 is the calculated execution number (step S90110). The number of calculation executions may be an appropriate number, but for example, as a reference for moving the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The number can be slightly smaller than the total number of prize balls of 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the number of calculation executions is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum number of payout balls from 6000.

As a result, if the number of prize balls (total prize balls) is not the calculated execution number (step S90110; NO), the combination (combination) / combination-related processing is terminated as it is. Further, when the number of prize balls is the calculated execution number (step S90110; YES), the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning combination ratio are calculated (step S90111). Here, the short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination, cumulative combination (relationship) (total cumulative combination (relationship)), and cumulative combination (total cumulative combination ratio) are calculated respectively. Therefore, the short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination (relationship), and cumulative combination ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, preparations for displaying the combination (relationship) / combination ratio are performed (step S90112), and the combination (relationship) / combination ratio related processing is completed.

If it is determined in step S90104 that it is not within business hours (step S90104; NO), and if it is determined in step S90105 that the door frame is not closed (step S90105; NO), the attacker is made per unit time in step S90106. When it is determined that the game balls have won more than a predetermined number of balls (step S90106; YES), preparation for displaying an abnormal count error is performed (step S90113).

Next, the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio display control process will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio display control processing. As shown in FIG. 88, in the combination (relationship) / combination display control process, it is determined whether or not the combination (relationship) / combination display is ready (step S90201). When it is determined that the combination (combination) / combination display preparation process has not been completed (step S90201; NO), it is determined whether or not the abnormality count error display preparation has been completed (step S90202).

As a result, when it is determined that the preparation for displaying the abnormal count error is completed (step S90202; YES), the abnormal count error is displayed (step S90203). The abnormal count error display can be appropriately performed. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and "0" and "1" can be displayed in the lower two digits. Further, when displaying an abnormality count error, a predetermined abnormality count error display may be performed on another display device, for example, an image display device 905, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, or the like. Then, the game effect lamp 909 may be turned on, blinked, or the like in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on the 7-segment display for displaying the error of the gaming machine provided on the main board 9011. Further, these may be combined.

When the abnormal count error is displayed, the combination (combination) / combination display control process is terminated. Further, in step S90202, when it is determined that it is not determined whether or not the abnormality count error display preparation is completed (step S90202; NO), it is determined whether or not the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204).

As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204; YES), the warning display is performed (step S90205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and "0" and "6" can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 9029 may be blinked or may be displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 9029 in order to indicate that the warning is given. Alternatively, the display may be performed by increasing the brightness of the display of the display monitor 9029. As described above, it is preferable that the warning display is made more conspicuous than other displays. After displaying the abnormal count error, the process may proceed to the determination of whether or not the warning preparation is completed (step S90204). Here, when it is determined that the warning preparation is completed (step S90204; YES)), the abnormality count error display and the warning display are performed. In order to display the abnormal count error and the warning on the display monitor 9029, for example, the abnormal count error display and the warning display may be repeated for several seconds, for example, at intervals of 5 seconds. Further, it may be displayed by another display method.

Further, when displaying a warning, a predetermined warning may be displayed on another display device, for example, an image display device 905, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, or the like, or a game. The effect lamp 909 may be turned on, blinked, or the like in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on the 7-segment display for displaying the error of the gaming machine provided on the main board 9011. Further, these may be combined.

When the warning is displayed, the combination (combination) / combination control process is terminated. Also, when it is determined in step S90204 that the warning display preparation is not completed (step S90204; NO), the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio control process is also terminated.

Further, when it is determined that the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio display preparation is completed (step S90201; YES), the display restriction confirmation process is performed (step S90206). In the display restriction confirmation process, a process of determining whether or not to restrict the display of the combination (relationship) / combination ratio is executed. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the display restriction confirmation process.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the display restriction confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not an error requiring door opening is detected (step S90301). The door opening error is an error that requires the gaming machine frame 903 to be opened forward from the outer frame in order to clear the error. Except for the abnormal count error, the errors that occur in the gaming machine 901 include, for example, various errors shown in FIG. 91. Each of these errors will be briefly described.

Error 1: Magnet error A magnet error (magnetic error) is an error caused by detecting a magnetic abnormality. When a magnet error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 9011 to the hall computer. The magnet error is canceled by turning off the power switch. Further, the security information is output until the power switch is turned off.
Error 2: Prize ball abnormality error The prize ball abnormality error is an error caused by detecting a predetermined number, for example, 2000 or more abnormal prize balls. An abnormal prize ball is, for example, a prize ball paid out when a game ball wins a prize in excess of the count number of the large prize opening. The prize ball abnormality error is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 3: Prize ball error The prize ball error is an error that occurs when the winning of the game ball to the winning opening is detected but the winning ball is not paid out. The prize ball error is an error that occurs when an abnormality in the payout switch is detected or an abnormality in the payout case is detected. The prize ball error is canceled by eliminating the error that has occurred, such as canceling the error.
Error 4: Ball out error The ball out error is an error that occurs when the ball out is detected and the game ball to be paid out is not on the back side of the game board 902 when the winning of the game ball to the winning opening is detected. The ball out error is an error that is canceled when the supply of the game ball is started.
Error 5: Radio wave abnormality error The radio wave abnormality error is an error caused by detecting a radio wave abnormality. The radio wave abnormality error is an error that is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 6: Main board communication failure error The main board communication failure error is an error caused by a communication failure between the main board 9011 and the payout control board. The main board communication failure error is an error that is canceled when the communication between the main board 9011 and the payout control board is restored.
Error 7: Card unit error The card unit error is an error caused by poor communication between the main board 9011 and the card unit. The card unit error is an error that is canceled when the communication between the main board 9011 and the card unit is restored.
Error 8: Full tank error A full tank error is an error that occurs when the plate (upper plate or lower plate) on which the game ball is to be paid out becomes full and the game ball cannot be paid out. The full tank error is cleared when the game ball is removed from the plate on which the game ball is paid out and the tank is no longer full.
Error 9: Character first start error The character first start error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected when the character is started for the first time. The first-time activation error of the accessory is canceled by pressing the operation button 9030.
Error 10: Unauthorized winning error An illegal winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball invades a large winning opening other than during operation. In the gaming machine 901, since the large winning opening is only the special variable winning ball device 907, an illegal winning error is not detected, and it is an error that occurs in a gaming machine having two or more large winning openings. When an illegal winning error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 9011 to the hall computer. The fraudulent winning error is cleared after a predetermined time, for example, 3 minutes has elapsed from the output of this security information.
Error 11: RTC-RAM error error The RTC-RAM error error is an error that occurs when the power switch is turned on, an RTC error is detected, and a backup failure is detected. The RTC-RAM abnormality error is cleared after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds has elapsed from the occurrence.
Error 12: RAM clear error A RAM clear error is an error that causes a cold start when the power is turned on. When a RAM clear error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 9011 to the hall computer. The time for outputting the security information is, for example, 30 seconds. The RAM clear error is cleared after a predetermined time, for example, 31 seconds has elapsed since the error occurred.
Error 13: Vibration detection device error error The vibration detection device error error is an error detected when vibration occurs in the game machine. The vibration detection device abnormality error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds has elapsed from the occurrence.
Error 14: Door opening error The door opening error is an error that occurs when the glass door frame 903a is opened from the gaming machine frame 903, or when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame. The door opening error is cleared when the opened glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is closed.

Of these errors, errors 1 to 7 are door opening-required errors that require opening from the outer frame of the gaming machine frame 903 in order to clear the error. On the other hand, errors 8 to 13 are errors that do not require opening of the gaming machine frame 903 from the outer frame in order to clear the error, and are not errors requiring door opening. Since the error 14 is a door opening error, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the gaming machine frame 903 needs to be opened.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 89, it is determined whether or not the door opening required error is detected, in other words, whether or not any of the door opening required errors of errors 1 to 7 is detected (step S90301). If an error requiring door opening is detected (step S90301; YES), it is determined whether or not the error requiring door opening is set (step S90302).

Here, if the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90302; NO), the door opening required error flag is set (step S90303). If the door opening error flag is set (step S90302; YES), the process proceeds to step S90304 as it is.

Next, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is set (step S90304). The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time for which the limit of the combination (combination) combination ratio display is continued after the error requiring door opening is canceled. The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time in the set state, and does not measure the time in the reset state.

The time required to continue limiting the combination (combination) combination ratio display after the door opening required error is canceled can be, for example, the time required to cancel the door opening required error or a time somewhat longer than that time. Specifically, it may be 1 minute or 2 minutes, or 5 minutes or 10 minutes. Further, it may be a long time of 30 minutes or more. Further, the time required to cancel the door opening error may be uniformly fixed, or may be set according to the type of the door opening error. For example, for errors 1, 2, 5, etc. that are cleared by turning off the power switch, the time required to clear the door opening error needs to be shortened, and the error that has occurred needs to be resolved. May increase the time required to clear the door opening error.

If it is determined in step S90304 that the measurement timer is set (step S90304; YES), the measurement timer is reset (step S90305). If it is determined that the measurement timer is not set (step S90304; NO), the process proceeds to step S90306 as it is. When the door opening required error is detected, the state in which the measurement timer is set is the state in which the door opening required error is once canceled and then the door opening required error occurs again. Therefore, by resetting the measurement timer in step S90305, if the door opening required error is detected again during the time measurement by the measurement timer, the door opening required error detected later is cleared. The time can be measured with a measurement timer.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S90306). As a result, when the door opening required error flag is set (step S90306; YES), the combination (combination) combination ratio display restriction is executed (step S90307), and the display restriction confirmation process is terminated. If the door opening error flag is not set (step S90306; NO), the display restriction confirmation process is terminated as it is. As a restriction on the display of the combination (relationship) combination ratio, for example, the display of the combination (relationship) combination ratio is stopped.

If it is determined in step S90301 that the door opening required error has not been detected (step S90301; NO), it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S90308). As a result, if it is determined that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90308; NO), the process proceeds to step S90306.

When it is determined in step S90308 that the door opening required error flag is set (step S90308; YES), the door opening required error is once detected and then the door opening required error is cleared. (Step S90309). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is set (step S90310).

When the measurement timer is not set (step S90310; NO), it is immediately after the door opening error is cleared. In other words, it is in a state where this flow flows only after the error requiring door opening is cleared. At this time, the measurement time t (measurement timer = t) is set in the measurement timer (step S90311). The measurement time t corresponds to the time for continuing the limitation of the combination (combination) combination ratio display after the error requiring door opening is canceled.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is timed up (t = 0) (step S90312). Further, when the measurement timer is set in step S90310 (step S90310; YES), it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is timed up (t = 0) as it is (step S90312).

When passing through step S90311, the measurement timer is not 0 (time is not up) (step S90312; NO), so the process proceeds to step S90306 as it is. Further, after the measurement timer is set, it is determined in step S90310 that the measurement timer is set (step S90310; YES). In this case, the measurement time decreases with the loop of the flow, and it is determined that the measurement timer is timed up when the time t has elapsed since the measurement timer was set.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is timed up (t = 0) (step S90312). Here, when the measurement timer is timed up (step S90312; YES), the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag are cleared (step S90313). If the measurement timer has not timed up (step S90312; NO), the process proceeds to step S90306 as it is without clearing the measurement timer and the door opening error flag.

If the user does not go through step S90313, the door opening error flag is not cleared, so it is determined that the door opening error flag is set in step S90306 (step S90306: YES). Therefore, the combination (relationship) combination ratio display restriction is executed. Further, when passing through step S90313, since the door opening required error flag is cleared, it is determined in step S90306 that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90306; NO). Therefore, the combination (combination) combination ratio display restriction is not executed. In this way, in the display restriction confirmation process, it is determined whether or not to execute the combination (combination) combination ratio display restriction. In summary, in the display restriction confirmation process, during the detection of the door opening required error and from the cancellation of the door opening required error until the measurement time (= the time to continue the restriction of the combination (combination) combination ratio display) elapses. At the time of, the combination (relationship) combination ratio display is limited, and at other times, the combination (relationship) combination ratio display is not restricted.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 88, it is determined whether or not to execute the display restriction based on the determination performed in the display restriction confirmation process shown in step S90206 (step S90207). As a result, when the display restriction is executed (step S90207; YES), the display restriction is executed (step S90208), and the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio is restricted. Then, the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio display control process is terminated.

If the display restriction is not executed (step S90207; NO), the display switching control process is executed (step S90209), and the combination (combination) / combination display control process is terminated. The display switching control process is executed by the procedure shown in FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the display switching control process. As shown in FIG. 90, in the display switching control process, first, it is determined whether or not the short-term combination (combination) display is performed on the display monitor 9029 (step S90401). When the short-term combination (relationship) display is performed (step S90401; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term combination (relationship) display was started. (Step S90402). The predetermined time here can be set to any time, for example, 30 seconds (30000 ms). Further, the predetermined time may be a time shorter than 30 seconds such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, or a time longer than 30 seconds such as 1 minute (60 seconds) or 10 minutes (600 seconds).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90402; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term combination (relationship) display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90402; YES), the short-term combination ratio display control is performed (step S90403), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the short-term combination ratio display control, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the short-term combination ratio display is set.

Further, in step S90401, when it is determined that the short-term combination (combination) display is not performed (step S90401; NO), it is determined whether or not the short-term combination ratio display is performed (step S90404). .. When the short-term combination ratio display is performed (step S90404; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term combination ratio display was started (step S90405).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90405; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term role ratio display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90404; YES), the cumulative combination (combination) display control is performed (step S90406), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the cumulative combination (relationship) display control, the cumulative combination (relationship) is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time from the start of the cumulative combination (relationship) display. ..

Further, in step S90404, when it is determined that the short-term combination ratio display is not performed (step S90404; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative combination (relationship) display is performed (step S90407). .. When the cumulative combination (relationship) display is performed (step S90407; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative combination (relationship) display was started. (Step S90408).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90408; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination (combination) display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90408; YES), the cumulative combination display control is performed (step S90409), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the cumulative combination ratio display control, the cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the cumulative combination ratio display is set.

Further, in step S90407, when it is determined that the cumulative combination (relationship) display is not performed (step S90407; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative combination ratio display is performed (step S90410). .. When the cumulative combination ratio display is performed (step S90410; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative combination display was started (step S90411).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90411; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination (combination) display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90411; YES), the short-term combination (combination) display control is performed (step S90412), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the short-term combination (relationship) display control, the short-term combination (relationship) is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time from the start of the short-term combination (relationship) display. .. In this way, the display switching control process is terminated.

In the short-term combination display control in step S90403 described above, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed. Similarly, in the cumulative combination (relationship) display control in step S90406, the cumulative combination (relationship) display control in step S90409, and the short-term combination (relationship) display control in step S90412, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed. Will be done.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared, and the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are executed in one cycle of the interrupt process in the CPU 90103. One cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 is about 4 ms, and the time required for the game progress control process (game control program) is, for example, about 2 ms.

FIG. 92 (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor or the like, and FIG. 92 (B) is the signal flow when the first interrupt process is executed. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the display state of the monitor and the like. Here, a symbol (character) corresponding to "0" is displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1) and "y" is displayed on the display monitor 9029 (SEG2) in the first cycle, and the first special symbol is displayed in the second cycle. Assume an example in which a symbol (character) corresponding to "1" is displayed on the symbol display device 904A and "6." is displayed on the display monitor 9029.

In the third interrupt process shown in FIG. 84 (C), the game progress process (game progress process) is performed between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (combination (combination) combination ratio display output program). The game control program) is executed. Therefore, a difference of about 2 ms occurs between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (combination (combination) combination ratio display output program), which is shown in FIG. 92 (A). As such, there is a delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, in the first cycle, the symbol corresponding to "0" is clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1), but the display monitor 9029 (SEG2) has a display problem. Specifically, the problem with respect to the example of trying to display the character corresponding to "y" on the display monitor 9029 is as follows. As shown in FIG. 93, the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D in the display monitor 9029 include seven segments and eight LEDs arranged in the lower right dot. Assuming that these LEDs are the 1st segment SG1, the 2nd segment SG2, the 3rd segment SG3, the 4th segment SG4, the 5th segment SG5, the 6th segment SG6, the 7th segment SG7, and the dot SG8, the 2nd segment SG2 and the second The 3rd segment SG3, the 4th segment SG4, the 6th segment SG6, and the 7th segment SG7 are displayed lightly. This problem occurs, for example, because the control for not turning on the display monitor 9029 in the cycle before the first cycle has penetrated to the first cycle. Regarding the characters corresponding to "6." displayed in the second cycle, the second segment SG2, the fourth segment SG4, the sixth segment SG6, and the seventh segment SG7 were clearly displayed, but the first segment was displayed. SG1, 5th segment SG5, and dot SG8 are displayed lightly. This problem also occurs, for example, because the control of lighting the LED of the character corresponding to "y" on the display monitor 9029 in the first cycle has penetrated to the second cycle.

On the other hand, in the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 92 (B), the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) is followed by the digit output process 2 (combination (combination) combination display output program). .. Therefore, there is almost no difference between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (combination (combination) combination ratio display output program), and FIG. 92 (B) shows. As shown in, there is almost no delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, in the first cycle, the symbol corresponding to "0" was clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1). Further, on the display monitor 9029 (SEG2), all the characters corresponding to "y" were clearly displayed. In this way, in the first interrupt process, it is possible to prevent a display defect on the LED of the display monitor 9029.

As described above, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination (relationship), and cumulative combination ratio are displayed by the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011. .. Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011 that controls the game so as not to interfere with the visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails) and windmills provided on the game board.

Further, the display monitor 9029 is arranged in front of the main board 9011 when visually recognizing it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being hindered. Further, the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole provided in the board case 90201 is not directly in front of the board case 9011. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be prevented from being obscured by the heat dissipation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being hindered.

Further, the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 9011. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be prevented from being obscured by peripheral boards such as the staging control board 9012. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being hindered.

In addition, the display monitor 9029 displays the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination regarding the relationship between the prize balls paid out by the passage of the electric chew or the attacker and the prize balls paid out by the passage of the general winning opening. can do. Further, the display monitor 9029 can switch and display predetermined information such as short-term combination (relationship) and cumulative combination (relationship) at predetermined intervals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

In addition, the display monitor 9029 displays the winning combination (continuous ratio) (short-term winning combination (continuous ratio)) and the winning ratio (short-term winning ratio) for each 6000 prize balls. It is possible to easily recognize the numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit, such as the number being 6000. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10,000. Alternatively, time may be used as a unit instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

In addition, the display monitor 9029 has a combination (relationship) (short-term combination (relationship)) and a combination (short-term combination ratio) for each prize ball number of 6000, as well as a cumulative combination (relationship). And the cumulative combination ratio is switched and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term combination (relationship) or short-term combination ratio with the cumulative combination (relationship) or cumulative combination ratio for each predetermined unit. Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011 housed in the crimped board case. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of fraud such as falsifying the display on the display monitor 9029.

Further, the gaming machine 901 is provided with a detection means for detecting and detecting fraud that makes it impossible to display appropriate predetermined information. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside the business hours of the game hall, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open, and winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of winnings. The gaming machine 901 operates during the business hours of the game hall, and it is highly probable that the counting of prize balls during the hours other than the business hours is a fraudulent act. Further, the gaming machine 901 plays a game with the door frame closed, and it is highly probable that the counting of prize balls while the door frame is open is a fraudulent act.

Further, during the game of the gaming machine 901, the gaming ball cannot be launched beyond a certain speed. For example, the maximum number of launches of a game ball is 100 per minute. Therefore, the upper limit of winning a game ball in one minute is almost 100. Therefore, for example, if 100 or more game balls are detected in 1 minute or 20 or more in 12 seconds, the probability of cheating is extremely high.

In the game machine 901, in order to detect fraud, a prize ball when the game ball is not closed during business hours, when the glass door frame 903a is not closed, or when the attacker wins more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time. The addition of numbers is excluded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress falsification of information such as role ratios and role ratios due to these frauds. In addition, instead of the number of prize balls when the attacker has won more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time, fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 90102 reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area of the ring buffer is erased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

Further, the ring buffer is provided with a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and when the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer moves to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the tenth storage area is stored. It will be erased. Therefore, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity. In addition, it is possible to increase the amount of data that remains without being erased.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with the data in the ninth storage area. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area thereof, is erased in the ring buffer. Therefore, since the amount of data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent a shortage of the capacity of the ring buffer, and it is possible to calculate the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio with a large amount of data.

When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only a part of the data in the tenth storage area is erased, but also all the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area is erased. good. In this case, it is possible to more preferably prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer. Further, a part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all the data in the ring buffer may be erased, and then a part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

Further, in the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer is described, but the data other than the ring buffer, for example, the storage area for storing the total cumulative total is also erased in part or all in the same manner. You may.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, each data of the short-term combination (relationship), the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination (relationship), and the cumulative combination ratio is displayed every 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. The cycle for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate cycle. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be hourly. In addition, the displayed data may be data other than short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination (relationship), and cumulative combination ratio data, or may be only a part of these data. good.

In addition, when displaying each data of short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination (relationship), and cumulative combination ratio every 30 seconds, the short-term combination (relationship) is not included. The display is different from the data in. Specifically, short-term roles (relationships) are displayed in red, and other data are displayed in green. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that new data is displayed from the short-term role ream (relationship ratio).

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, a warning display is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation. The clear switch is a so-called emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the combination (combination ratio) or the calculation of the combination ratio. When this switch is operated, the data of the combination (combination) and the combination ratio can be falsified, so that the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the gaming machine 901, since this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, fraud such as falsification of data can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, and the third general winning opening switch 9024C. , The winning combination (relationship ratio) and the winning combination ratio are calculated based on the number of prize balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. For example, using a sensor individually provided for the attacker (count switch 9023) and a sensor provided after the discharge passages for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric chew merge. Based on the detection result, when the counter of the number of winning balls and the counter of the number of consecutive winning balls are totaled to calculate the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination, it is specified from which winning opening. It is difficult to do so, and there is a risk that the calculation of the winning combination and the winning combination (relationship) will become complicated. In this regard, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A, the second general winning port switch 9024B, the third general winning port switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning port switch 9024C. By detecting that the game medium has won a prize with the switch 9024D and calculating the winning combination (relationship ratio) and the winning combination ratio based on the number of prize balls obtained from the detection result, based on the winning of each winning opening. You can judge the number of prize balls. Therefore, the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio can be easily calculated and can be calculated accurately.

Further, when an error requiring door opening occurs, it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 from the outer frame in order to clear the error. When the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the main board 9011 provided on the gaming machine frame 903 can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be visually recognized by, for example, a player located outside the gaming machine 901.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, when an error requiring door opening occurs, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio to the display monitor 9029 is restricted. Therefore, even if an error requiring door opening occurs and the display monitor 9029 can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio.

Further, the restriction on the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 9029 is executed when an error requiring door opening occurs. Therefore, due to the occurrence of an error requiring door opening, the gaming machine frame 903 needs to be opened, so that even when the player can see the display monitor 9029 from the outside of the gaming machine 901, the player can see it. It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio (relationship ratio) from being seen.

In the above-mentioned game machine 901, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio is restricted to the display monitor 9029 when the door opening required error occurs, but after the door opening required error occurs, the game is played. When the machine frame 903 is opened, the restriction of the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 9029 may be executed. Even if the restriction on the display of the combination (relationship) combination ratio to the display monitor 9029 is executed when the frame 903 for the gaming machine is opened after the error requiring door opening occurs, the combination (relationship) is applied to the player. Ratio) It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio from being seen.

Further, the limitation of the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio on the display monitor 9029 is measured by a measurement timer for a predetermined time after the door opening error is canceled, specifically, after the door opening error is canceled. It is executed until the duration is elapsed. Therefore, immediately after the door opening required error is cleared, the gaming machine frame 903 is in a state of being opened even though the door opening required error is cleared. At this time, the player or the like can visually recognize the display monitor 9029 from the outside of the gaming machine 901. In this regard, by continuing to limit the combination (combination) combination ratio display until the duration measured by the measurement timer elapses after the door opening error is cleared, the player can be seen from the outside of the gaming machine 901. It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio (relationship ratio) from being seen.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the duration is measured after the door opening required error is cleared, but after the door opening required error is cleared, the duration is set after the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. You may measure. In this case, the duration may be set uniformly regardless of the type of the door opening required error, or may be set according to the type of the door opening required error. Further, the time may be shorter than the duration measured after the door opening error is cleared.

The above error requiring door opening is an example, and may be another embodiment. For example, if the error clearing method is different and the error can be cleared without opening the gaming machine frame 903 by the error 1 to the error 7, these may be regarded as an error other than the door opening required error. On the contrary, if the errors 8 to 13 are errors in which the error cannot be cleared unless the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, these may be regarded as door opening required errors. Further, an error other than the error shown in FIG. 91, for example, an error that the game ball cannot be launched from the hitting ball launching device, an error that the ball lending cannot be performed, an error that the game board moves, and the like can be opened by the release procedure. It may be an error required. Further, even if it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 in order to clear the error, an error in which the detection of the error is often found outside the business hours of the amusement park, for example, a display abnormality of the image display device 905. In the case of an error that normally requires repair outside business hours, such as an error such as an error, a ROM check screen error, or an error that the electric chew or the big prize opening does not open, it may be treated as an error other than the door opening required error.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the display restriction mode is canceled, but the display restriction may be another mode. For example, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio may be made thinner or smaller, or the display monitor 9029 may display a display different from the combination (relationship) combination ratio. As the display different from the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio, an error display may be performed, or for example, a display such as turning on all the segments may be performed.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, since the main board 9011 and the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 are provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine frame 903, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the combination ( Although the display of the combination ratio is restricted, other aspects may be used. For example, the main board 9011 may be provided on the surface of the gaming board 902 at a position where the glass door frame 903a cannot be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 when the glass door frame 903a is closed. In this case, the display monitor 9029 may also be provided on the surface of the gaming board 902 at a position where the glass door frame 903a cannot be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 when the glass door frame 903a is closed. In the gaming machine of this aspect, instead of limiting the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the combination (combination) when the glass door frame 903a is opened. The display of the combination ratio) combination ratio may be restricted. Further, regarding the continuation of the restriction on the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio, the opening / closing of the glass door frame 903a may be a condition instead of the opening / closing of the gaming machine frame 903. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine 901, the CPU 90103 stores the special symbol display output program and the game control program in the used area program area in the built-in ROM area, and the combination (combination) combination display output program in the non-used area program area. And the role-relationship (relationship) role-ratio display program is stored. In this way, the special symbol display output program and the game control program, and the combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program and the combination (relationship) combination ratio display program are stored in different areas. It is possible to facilitate the test of the program related to the game. Further, in the CPU 90103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared and executed by one interrupt process. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the digit output processing.

Further, in order to make the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 common, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are continuously executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), in the first interrupt processing, the special symbol display output program → the combination (combination) combination display output program → the game control program → the combination (combination) combination ratio. The programs are executed in the order of the calculation program. Further, in the second interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the game control program → the special symbol display output program → the combination (relationship) combination display output program → the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program. The programs are executed in the order of. Therefore, in both the first interrupt processing and the second interrupt processing, between the special symbol display output program (first interrupt processing) and the combination (combination) combination ratio display output program (second interrupt processing). The game control program (game progress control processing) and the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program (combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation processing) are not sandwiched. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the digit output process 2 and the like from being delayed, the LED display defects in the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, and the display monitor 9029 can be prevented. It can be prevented, and patterns and characters can be clearly displayed.

When the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared, the execution procedure of the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 84 (A) or the second interrupt process shown in FIG. 84 (B) is included. Just do it. For example, any program may be executed before or after the execution order of the first interrupt processing or the second interrupt processing.

Further, in the first interrupt processing and the second interrupt processing, the combination (combination) combination ratio calculation program is executed after the game control program is executed. For this reason, before calculating the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio, processing related to the main part of the game such as a lottery for the transition to the big hit game state is executed. Therefore, the delay of the game can be suppressed.

Further, in the first interrupt processing and the second interrupt processing, the combination (combination) combination display output program is executed after the special symbol display output program is executed. In addition, after executing the special symbol display output program, before the combination (relationship) combination display output program is executed, a specific program such as a game control program or a combination (relationship) combination calculation program is executed. Is not running. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED display from being defective in the display monitor 9029.

Further, the special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the used area are called by using "CALLF" having a short tone. On the other hand, the call using "CALLmn" is performed for the combination (combination) combination ratio display output program and the combination (combination) combination ratio calculation program stored in the unused area, and the tone is changed. No short "CALLF" call is made. Therefore, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Further, the combination (relationship) combination ratio displayed on the display monitor 9029 is determined by the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation process in the unused area. The combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program and the combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program are programs that are not related to the progress of the game. Since "CALLmn", which has a relatively long tone, is used for a program that is not related to the progress of the game, waste in the processing of the program can be reduced.

Further, in the non-used area, the call is made by "CALLmn", which has a relatively long tone, so that in the used area, the call can be made by "CALLF", which has a short tone. Therefore, it is possible to use a short-toned and highly versatile instruction such as "CALLF" for a program related to game control executed in the used area.

Further, since the CPU 90103 includes a Q register and calls the program by the Q register, the program can be called without specifying the upper address. However, since the upper address is set as a fixed value, for example, even if it can be used in the used area program area, it may not be used in the non-used area program area, and the versatility may be lowered.

In this regard, the upper address of the used area program area in the CPU 90103 is "00", the upper address of the non-used area program area is "01", and the upper address of the non-used area program area is the upper address of the used area program area. It is different from the address. Further, when calling the program stored in the used area program area, the Q register is set to the fixed value "00". Therefore, since the Q register can be used when calling the program stored in the used area program area, the program stored in the used area program area can be called only by specifying a lower address. Further, since the upper address of the unused area program area is different from the upper address of the used area program area, the call of the program stored in the unused area program area by the Q register is prevented. Further, when calling the program stored in the unused area program area, the Q register is set to the fixed value "01". Therefore, since the Q register can be used even in the unused area program area, the Q register can be used also in the unused area program area while ensuring the versatility of the Q register.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the display monitor 9029 is arranged in the center of the back surface side of the main board 9011 in front of the main board 9011 when visually recognizing it, but the display monitor is easy to see from an oblique direction. May be arranged. Hereinafter, a plurality of examples will be specifically described with respect to a mode in which the display monitor is arranged so as to be easily visible from an oblique direction (hereinafter referred to as “display monitor arrangement mode”).

The first display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a first display monitor arrangement mode, the second display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a second display monitor arrangement mode, and the nth display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as an nth display monitor arrangement mode. A main board 9011 similar to the main board 9011 shown in FIG. 77 (A) is used in each display monitor arrangement mode, and the main boards 9011 all have the same structure. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 77 (A), the main substrate 9011 is housed in the substrate case 90202. Further, in the description of the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, the left and right sides are based on the direction in which the main board 9011 is viewed from the front. Therefore, the side where the gaming machine frame 903 opens from the outer frame is on the left side.

[First display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 94, in the first display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129A is provided on the back surface side of the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130A is provided on the base member 90129A. The display monitor 90130A is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129A and the main substrate 9011.

The base member 90129A has a triangular column whose bottom surface is a right triangle, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the vertical direction. The side surface of the triangular pillar including one side forming the right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle on the bottom surface of the triangular pillar having the shape formed by the base member 90129A is overlapped with the back surface of the main substrate 9011, and the other side forming the right-angled portion in the right-angled triangle. The side surface of the triangular pillar including one side extends in a direction perpendicular to the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The side surface of the triangular prism (hereinafter referred to as "inclined surface") including the side facing the right-angled portion in the right triangle is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011.

The display monitor 90130A is provided on an inclined surface of the base member 90129A. The orientation of the display monitor 90130A is inclined with respect to the back surface of the main board 9011. FIG. 95 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame to which the main board is attached is open from the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 95, when the display monitor 90130A opens the gaming machine frame 903 to which the main board 9011 is attached from the outer frame 903A, the display monitor 90130A is between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. It is arranged so that it faces the front when viewed from the open part.

When the display monitor 90130A arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130A faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is located in. For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relation (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens the role-relation (combination) role. You can check the ratio. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

[Second display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 96A is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 96A, in the second display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129B is provided on the back surface side of the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130B is provided on the base member 90129B. The display monitor 90130B is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129B and the main substrate 9011.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main board 9011 is attached to the back surface of the gaming board 902 (see FIG. 28) provided in the gaming machine frame 903. The base member 90129B has a plate shape and is erected on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. Further, the main substrate 9011 and the base member 90129B are substantially orthogonal to each other. The display monitor 90130B is provided on the side surface of the base member 90129B. Therefore, in the display monitor 90130B, the surface of the upright portion erected on the main board 9011 provided in the gaming machine frame 903 on the open portion side of the door frame faces the open portion of the door frame. Have been placed. Further, the display monitor 90130B is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main board 9011.

The display monitor 90130B arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main board 9011 so as to face a direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main board 9011. Further, the main board 9011 is attached to the back surface of the gaming board 902 provided in the gaming machine frame 903. For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relation (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens the role-relation (combination) role. You can check the ratio. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

In the first and second display monitor arrangement modes, the base members 90129A and 90129B are housed in the substrate case 90202, but even if the base members 90129A and 90129B are formed so as to project to the outside of the substrate case 90202. good.

[Third display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 96B is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 96B, in the third display monitor arrangement mode, the embedded inclined surface 9011K is formed on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The buried inclined surface 9011K is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011.

The buried inclined surface 9011K is formed as a part of the printed base material in the main substrate 9011. A display monitor 90130C is provided on the buried inclined surface 9011K of the main board 9011. Since the display monitor 90130C is provided on the buried inclined surface 9011K, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the front surface is viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. It is arranged so that it faces. Further, the main board 9011 and the display monitor 90130C are housed in the case 90202.

When the display monitor 90130C arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130C faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is located in. For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relation (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens the role-relation (combination) role. You can check the ratio. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

[4th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 97A is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 97A, in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 90129D from the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 are provided on the back surface of the main board 9011. A first display monitor 90130D1 to a fourth display monitor 90130D4 are provided on each of the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4. The display monitor 90130D is formed by the first display monitor 90130D1 to the fourth display monitor 90130D4. The display monitor 90130D is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129 and the main substrate 9011.

The first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 all have a common shape. This shape will be described with reference to the first base member 90129D1. The first base member 90129D1 has a triangular column whose bottom surface is a right triangle. The first base member 90129D1 has the same shape as the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode, but is smaller than the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode.

Specifically, the inclined surface of the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode has the same size as the size of the four 7 segments and the dot at the lower right (see FIG. 77 (A)). On the other hand, the inclined surface of the first base member 90129D1 has the same size as the size of one 7-segment and the dot at the lower right. The first display monitor 90130D1 provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 90129D1 can display one 7 segment and a dot at the lower right.

The first base member 90129D1 is arranged at a position slightly to the left of the substantially center position in the height direction of the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The second base member 90129D2 is arranged on the right side of the first base member 90129D1, and the third base member 90129D3 is on the right side opposite to the left side where the first base member 90129D1 is arranged in the second base member 90129D2. Is located in. The fourth base member 90129D4 is arranged on the right side opposite to the left side where the second base member 90129D2 is arranged in the third base member 90129D3. In this way, the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 are arranged side by side along the substantially horizontal direction.

A second display monitor 90130D2 is provided on the inclined surface of the second base member 90129D2. Similarly, a third display monitor 90130D3 and a fourth display monitor 90130D4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the third base member 90129D3 and the fourth base member 90129D4. The first display monitor 90130D1 provided on the first base member 90129D1 displays the contents corresponding to the first display unit 9029A of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 77 (A).

The second display monitor 90130D2 provided on the second base member 90129D2 displays the content corresponding to the second display unit 9029B of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 77 (A). The third display monitor 90130D3 provided on the third base member 90129D3 displays the content corresponding to the third display unit 9029C of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 77 (A). The fourth display monitor 90130D4 provided on the fourth base member 90129D4 displays the content corresponding to the fourth display unit 9029D of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 77 (A).

When the display monitor 90130D arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130D faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is located in. For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relation (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens the role-relation (combination) role. You can check the ratio. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

[Fifth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 97B, in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 90129E from the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are provided on the back surface of the main board 9011. A first display monitor 90130E1 to a fourth display monitor 90130E4 are provided on each of the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4. The display monitor 90130E is formed by the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4. The display monitor 90130E is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129 and the main substrate 9011.

The first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 all have a shape common to the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. Further, the first display monitors 90130E1 to the fourth display monitors 90130E4 are the first base members in the same manner as the first display monitors 90130D1 to the fourth display monitors 90130D4 provided in the first base members 90129D1 to the fourth base members 90129D4. It is provided in each of 90129E1 to 90129E4 of the fourth base member.

The first base member 90129E1 is arranged above the back surface of the main substrate 9011 at a substantially central position in the width direction. The second base member 90129E2 is arranged below the first base member 90129E1, and the third base member 90129E3 is arranged below the second base member 90129E2. The fourth base member 90129E4 is arranged below the third base member 90129E3. In this way, the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged side by side along the substantially vertical direction. In this way, the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction.

A first display monitor 90130E1 is provided on an inclined surface of the first base member 90129E1. Similarly, a second display monitor 90130E2, a third display monitor 90130E3, and a fourth display monitor 90130E4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the second base member 90129E2, the third base member 90129E3, and the fourth base member 90129E4, respectively. There is. The first display monitors 90130E1 to the fourth display monitors 90130E4 provided on the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 have first display units 9029A to fourth display units of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 77 (A). The contents corresponding to 9029D are displayed respectively. Further, since the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction, the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 are also arranged in the vertical direction. Therefore, the four-digit displays on the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

When the display monitor 90130E arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130E faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is located in. For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relation (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens the role-relation (combination) role. You can check the ratio. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

[6th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 98 (A) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 98 (A), in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129F is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 for accommodating the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130F is provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129F. There is. The four-digit displays on the display monitor 90130F are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130F may be arranged horizontally.

The base member 90129F has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Further, the display monitor 90130F provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129F includes four 7 segments and a dot at the lower right (see FIG. 77 (A)). The board case 90202 includes a board case main body 90202A and a lid body 90202B. The base member 90129F is provided on the board case 90202 so as to straddle the board case main body 90202A and the lid body 90202B of the board case 90202.

The display monitor 90130F arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 and is arranged along the left-right direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 903 can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relationship (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens the role-relationship (relationship) role ratio. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

[7th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 98 (B) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 98B, in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129G is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 accommodating the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130G is provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129G. There is. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130G is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130G may be arranged horizontally. Similar to the base member 90129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129G is provided on the substrate case 90202 so as to straddle the substrate case main body 90202A and the lid body 90202B of the substrate case 90202.

The base member 90129G has a triangular columnar shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the depth direction of the gaming machine 901. The right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle forming the bottom surface of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side opposite to the left side on which the gaming machine frame 903 opens. Therefore, the upper surface of the base member 90129G is an inclined surface that descends from the opposite side (right side) of the side (left side) where the gaming machine frame 903 opens toward the side where the gaming machine frame 903 opens. A display monitor 90130G is provided on this inclined surface.

The display monitor 90130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 and is arranged along the left-right direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 903 can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relationship (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens it. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

Further, the upper surface of the base member 90129G provided with the display monitor 90130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode faces the side where the gaming machine frame 903 opens from the side opposite to the side where the gaming machine frame 903 opens. It is an inclined surface that descends. Therefore, when the display monitor 90130G is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the display monitor 90130G can be easily seen. Therefore, it is possible to more easily perform the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

[8th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 99A is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 99A, in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129H is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 accommodating the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130H is provided on the left side surface of the base member 90129H. Has been done. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130H is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130H may be arranged horizontally.

The base member 90129H has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Further, the display monitor 90130H provided on the left side surface of the base member 90129H includes four 7 segments and a dot at the lower right (see FIG. 77 (A)). The board case 90202 includes a board case main body 90202A and a lid body 90202B. The base member 90129H is provided on the board case 90202 so as to straddle the board case main body 90202A and the lid body 90202B of the board case 90202.

The display monitor 90130H arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 and is arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 90130H can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relationship (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens it. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

[9th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 99B is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 99B, in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129I is provided on the right-hand surface of the substrate case 90202 accommodating the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130I is provided on the right side surface of the base member 90129I. It is provided. The base member 90129I is provided on the board case 90202 so as to straddle the board case main body 90202A and the lid body 90202B of the board case 90202, similarly to the base member 90129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode.

The base member 90129I has a triangular columnar shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the depth direction of the gaming machine 901. The right-angled part of the right triangle that forms the bottom of the triangular prism is located on the right side. Therefore, the left side surface of the base member 90129I is an inclined surface that moves toward the right side from the upper side to the lower side. A display monitor 90130I is provided on this inclined surface. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130I is arranged vertically side by side. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130I may be arranged horizontally.

The display monitor 90130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 and is arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 90130I can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relationship (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens it. Can be confirmed. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

Further, the left side surface of the base member 90129I provided with the display monitor 90130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is an inclined surface that moves to the right side as it descends. Therefore, when the display monitor 90130I is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the display monitor 90130I can be easily seen. Therefore, it is possible to more easily perform the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

Further, the display monitors 90130A to 90130I arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode all have the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. It may be provided in the adjusting means which makes it adjustable. The adjusting means includes, for example, a fixed portion fixed to the base members 90129A to 90129I or the buried inclined surface 9011K, and a mounting portion movable with respect to the fixed portion, and the display monitors 90130A to 90130I are provided on the mounting portion. It suffices to make sure that either one is attached. The adjusting means may be a manual type that can be manually operated by a clerk or the like by opening the gaming machine frame 903, or an electric type that operates a motor or actuator provided in the adjusting means. But it may be. Further, in the case of an electric type, a person who can operate from an office or the like via a communication device or the like may be used.

The range in which the mounting portion can be moved may be, for example, a movement range associated with movement in the up, down, left, and right directions, or may be a movement range associated with rotational movement around an arbitrary rotation axis. Further, the movement range may be a combination of the movement ranges associated with these movements. Since the display monitors 90130A to 90130I are provided as adjusting means for adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame, the gaming field where the gaming machine 901 is installed. Can be adjusted according to your wishes.

Although the arrangement of the display monitors is shown in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode described above, these arrangement modes may be combined. For example, the display monitor may be arranged so as to straddle the left side surface from the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 by combining the eighth display monitor arrangement mode and the ninth display monitor arrangement mode.

[A game machine equipped with a blade-type variable winning ball device]
In the above example, a variable display game (special figure game) that performs variable display is executed, and when the display result of the variable display in the variable display game (special figure game) becomes a big hit, the big hit game state is controlled. I explained about the Digipachi type game machine. On the other hand, as a so-called honey-type gaming machine in which the jackpot gaming state is controlled by the gaming ball passing through a specific region (V region) provided inside the blade-type variable winning ball device that can be opened and closed. good. Hereinafter, an example in which the present invention is applied to a honey-mono type gaming machine will be described. Hereinafter, the differences between the honey-mono type and the above-mentioned gaming machine 901 will be mainly described, and common explanations may be omitted.

FIG. 100 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a blade-type variable winning ball device, and FIG. 101 is a front view of a variable winning ball device provided on a gaming board as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 100, the pachinko gaming machine 90501 has a glass door frame 90502 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 90502, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 90503. At the bottom of the hit ball supply plate 90503, there is a surplus ball tray 90504 that stores the game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 90503, and the speed at which the hit ball launcher launches the game ball (that is, the strength of the spring that plays the game ball). A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 90505 for adjusting the ball is provided.

The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher by rotating the operation knob 90505. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 90505 to the right, the speed of the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher gradually increases, and when the speed exceeds a predetermined speed, the launched game ball is launched. Enters the left side area of the game area 90507 from above through the hitting rail. Further, when the operation knob 90505 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 90507 from above. Therefore, by changing the amount of rotation while the operation knob 90505 is rotated to the right, the momentum of the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher can be adjusted, and the area where the game ball is driven can be adjusted. ..

A game board is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 90502. The game board is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, a game area 90507 divided by a guide rail is formed on the front surface of the game board.

A blade-type variable winning ball device 90520 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 90507. Below the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, a first starting winning opening 90511, a second starting winning opening 90512, and a variable winning ball device 90515 forming a third starting winning opening 90513 are provided. The winning ball entered in the first starting winning opening 90511 is detected by the first starting opening switch 90511a, and the winning ball entered in the second starting winning opening 90512 is detected by the second starting opening switch 90512a, respectively, on the back surface of the game board. Guided by. Further, the winning ball that has entered the third starting winning opening 90513, which can be won by opening the variable winning ball device 90515, is detected by the third starting opening switch 90513a and guided to the back surface of the game board. The variable winning ball device 90515 is opened by the solenoid 90515a. Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 90511, the second starting winning opening 90512, and the third starting winning opening 90513 may be collectively referred to as a "starting winning opening" or may be referred to as a starting winning opening 90511, 90512, 90513. .. Further, the first start port switch 90511a, the second start port switch 90512a, and the third start port switch 90513a may be collectively referred to as a "start port switch" or may be referred to as a start port switch 90511a, 90512a, 90513a. .. When a game ball wins a prize at the starting prize opening, a predetermined number, for example, five game balls are paid out as prize balls. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball in the starting winning opening may be the same, or may be different for each starting winning opening. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening 90511 and the second starting winning opening 90512 is set to 5, and the prize ball when the game ball wins in the third starting winning opening 90513. The number of payouts may be two.

When the game ball wins in the start winning opening and is detected by the starting opening switch, the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By opening / closing control, the left open door 90576A on the left side moves to the left from the initial position, and the right open door 90576B on the right side moves to the right from the initial position, so that the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is in the open state. When the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B return to the initial positions, the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is closed. The state in which the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520 operates in response to the winning detection of the starting port switch in this way is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 may be referred to as an accessory. Further, various accessories are provided on the game board, and hereinafter, the term "accessories" means a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520.

On the back side of the inside of the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, an effect display device 90509 using an LCD or the like for displaying the effect is provided. The effect display device 90509 variablely displays (variates) the effect symbol as the identification information. In this embodiment, the effect display device 90509 has, for example, three variable display units (design display areas) of "left", "middle", and "right".

To the right of the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, a special symbol display 90508 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided. The special symbol display 90508 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.

Above the special symbol display 90508, a special symbol start storage display 90518 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls having a game ball in the starting winning opening, that is, the starting storage number is provided. The special symbol start memory display 90518 displays up to four start memory numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol start storage display 90518 increments the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is a valid start prize in the start winning openings 90511, 90512, 90513. Then, each time the variable display is started on the special symbol display 90508, the number of LEDs in the lit state is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the special symbol start storage display 90518 shifts the lighting state each time the variable display is started by the special symbol display 90508. As will be described later, since the start storage number is also displayed on the effect display device 90509, it is not necessary to provide the special symbol start storage display 90518.

On the left side of the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, a normal symbol display 90510 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. When the game ball passes through the gate 90532 provided on the right side of the game area 90507 and is detected by the gate switch 90532a, the normal symbol (in this example, the numerical display by the 7-segment LED) is displayed on the normal symbol display 90510. The variable display starts. In this embodiment, in the case of a hit, "7" is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, and in the case of a miss, a stop display other than "7" is displayed. In the case of a hit, the variable winning ball device is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. The probability of hitting a normal symbol is, for example, 12/13. Above the normal symbol display 90510, a normal symbol start storage display 90541 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of passing balls that have passed through the gate 90532 is provided. Each time the gate 90532 passes, the normal symbol start storage display 90541 increments the LED that lights up by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 90510 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

On the right side of the variable winning ball device 90515, a large winning opening is provided in which the opening / closing plate 90516 is opened by the solenoid 90521 in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The opening / closing plate 90516 is a means for opening / closing the large winning opening. The winning ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 90523. When a game ball wins a prize at the large prize opening, a predetermined number, for example, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Decorative lamps that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 90507, and an out port 90526 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize is provided at the lower part.

Further, two speakers 90527 that emit sound effects are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 90507. A top frame lamp 90528a, a left frame lamp 90528b, and a right frame lamp 90528c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 90507. Further, decorative LEDs are installed around each structure (blade type variable winning ball device 90520 or the like) in the game area 90507. The top frame lamp 90528a, the left frame lamp 90528b, the right frame lamp 90528c, and the decorative LED are examples of decorative light emitters provided in the gaming machine.

The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 90507 through the hit ball rail, and then falls in the game area 90507. When the hit ball enters the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, if the variable display of the symbol can be started, the special symbol starts to be variablely displayed on the special symbol display 90508, and the effect symbol is displayed on the effect display device 90509. Starts variable display. If the variable display of the symbol is not in a state where the variable display can be started, and the start winning memory number, which is the hold storage of the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 90508, is not the upper limit number, the starting winning memory number is incremented by 1. That is, the number of lit LEDs in the special symbol start storage display 90518 is increased by 1.

The variable display of the special symbol (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 90508 is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of stopping is a jackpot symbol (specific display result: specifically, for example, "3", "7"), the first jackpot gaming state (without going through the starting operation state) of the jackpot gaming states It shifts to the big hit game state to be started). Further, in the case of a small hit symbol (specifically, "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", "9"), the process shifts to the starting operation state. do. When a game ball wins a prize in a special area provided inside the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 in the starting operation state, the state shifts to the second big hit game state (the big hit game state started after passing through the starting operation state). .. It should be noted that the gaming state before shifting to the jackpot gaming state is the normal state. In addition, after the jackpot game state is completed, the state shifts to a normal state or a time-saving state (a state in which the variable winning ball device 90515 is easily released by shortening the average fluctuation time of the special symbol or the staging symbol). do. The time saving state can be continued until the variable winning ball device 90515 is opened a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, and when the transition condition to the jackpot gaming state is satisfied until the variable winning ball device 90515 is opened 100 times. The gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the big hit gaming state. Further, when the variable winning ball device 90515 is opened 100 times without satisfying the transition condition to the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, the gate 90532 is provided on the right side of the game area 90507. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the time is controlled to be shortened, it is better to shoot the game ball aiming at the right side of the game area 90507 (so-called right-handed hit) in order to let the game ball pass through the gate 90532. It will be advantageous. Further, as shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 90507. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the big hit game, the game ball is launched (so-called right-handed) aiming at the right side of the game area in order to win the game ball in the big prize opening. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game ball is launched (so-called left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 90507 if it is not in the time saving state or the big hit game (in the normal state).

Further, a left gate 90517 is provided on the left side of the game area 90507, and a game ball that has passed through the left gate 90517 is detected by the left gate switch 90517a. Further, a right gate 90519 is provided on the right side of the game area 90507, and a game ball that has passed through the right gate 90519 is detected by the right gate switch 90519a.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined game state is changed, control is performed to change the game state based on the passage of the game ball through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519. Specifically, in this embodiment, the jackpot game is started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, or when the game ball wins in the specific winning slot 90566 in the blade type variable winning ball device 90520. Instead, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate. In this embodiment, since the big prize opening is provided on the right side of the game area 90507 (it is hit right during the big hit game), it is a big hit based on the fact that the game ball passes through the right gate 90519. The game is started. It should be noted that the big hit game is not started based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519, but when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, or when the special prize in the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is specified. The jackpot game may be started immediately when the game ball wins in the mouth 90566, or the jackpot game may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, in this embodiment, even when the big hit game is finished, a new variation display can be started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519. Specifically, in this embodiment, since the player is hit left in the normal state and hit right in the time-saving state, the game ball has passed through the left gate 90517 when controlled to the normal state after the end of the big hit game. Based on this, a new fluctuation display can be started, and if it is controlled to a time-saving state after the big hit game ends, it is shifted to a time-saving state based on the passing of the game ball through the right gate 90519, and a new fluctuation is made. The display shifts to a state where it can be started. It should be noted that, instead of shifting to a state in which a new variation display can be started based on the passage of the game ball through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519, when the big hit game is finished or the big hit game is finished. It is also possible to shift to a state in which a new variable display can be started when a predetermined time has elapsed.

Next, the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 will be described. The blade-type variable winning ball device (feature) 90520 is in a state in which a game ball can enter when the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B are opened by driving the opening / closing motor 90575. The game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 passes through the passage port and the like and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 90520. In addition, in FIG. 101, the state where the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 90520 (difficult to enter) is shown by a solid line, and the left open door 90576A and the right open door are shown. The state in which the 90576B is open and the game ball can enter the accessory 90520 (easy to enter) is shown by a virtual line.

A left movable member 90577 and a right movable member 90578 are provided on both the left and right sides of the accessory 90520, respectively. The moving portion of the left movable member 90577 is the left movable portion 90577A, and the moving portion of the right movable member 90578 is the right movable portion 90578A. The left movable portion 90577A is moved by the left movable portion drive solenoid 90577B, and the right movable portion 90578A is moved by the right movable portion drive solenoid 90578B. The left movable portion 90577A and the right movable portion 90578A move in the vertical direction, respectively.

At the bottom of the accessory 90520, a specific winning opening 90566 forming a specific area is provided. Further, an outlet is provided at the back of the position where the specific winning opening 90566 is provided in the accessory 90520, and inside the accessory 90520, there is a passage for distributing the game ball to the specific winning opening 90566 or the exit. It is provided. The specific winning opening 90566 is provided with a specific area switch 90566A, the game ball winning in the specific winning opening 90566 is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, and the game ball winning in the outlier is detected by the outlier area switch. Will be done. When a game ball wins a prize at the specific winning opening 90566 and the exit opening, a predetermined number, for example, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball at the specific winning opening 90566 and the exit opening may be the same or different. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the specific winning opening 90566 may be 10, and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the outlier may be 3. Further, when a game ball enters the exit, the prize ball may not be paid out (the number of prize balls is 0).

On condition that the game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 wins the specific winning opening 90566 and is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, it is possible to shift to the second big hit gaming state. Further, when the game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 wins a prize at the exit, it is not possible to shift to the second big hit game state.

An example of how to proceed with the game in this gaming machine 90501 will be described. In the gaming machine 90501, when a game ball wins in any of the first starting winning opening 90511, the second starting winning opening 90512, and the third starting winning opening 90513 in the normal state, it is either a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. A lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as a "big hit lottery") is executed. As a result of the big hit lottery, it is decided as a big hit, a small hit or a miss. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 90508.

When the result of the big hit lottery is decided to be a big hit, after the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the big hit) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 90508, the game state is changed from the normal state to the big hit game state (first). It shifts to the jackpot game state). In the big hit game state, the big winning opening by the opening / closing plate 90516 is controlled to open / close 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening allowable time is 29 seconds). In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the big hit game state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, any of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, and 16 rounds) may be determined by lottery or the like. If the result of the big hit lottery is decided to be a big hit, the accessory 90520 is not controlled to the open state. Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a big hit, the accessory 90520 may be controlled to the open state.

When the result of the big hit lottery is decided to be a small hit, after the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the small hit) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 90508, the accessory 90520 is controlled to be in the open state. The starting operation is started. In the starting operation state, the accessory 90520 is in the open state for 0.9 seconds. The number of times of opening (opening number) is once, twice or three times. In the starting operation state, when the game ball wins the accessory 90520, and the game ball wins the specific winning opening 90566 and is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, a V winning occurs. When the V prize is generated, the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state (second jackpot gaming state). If the game ball enters the exit and the V prize does not occur, the game does not shift to the second big hit game state. That is, it becomes out of place and maintains a normal state.

If the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be out of order, the special symbol display 90508 may stop and display the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the out of place), and then the accessory 90520 may be controlled to be in the open state. do not have. In this case, the gaming state does not shift to the jackpot gaming state, and the normal state is maintained.

The jackpot includes a non-time-saving jackpot and a time-saving jackpot. In either case, when the change of the special symbol is completed, the game directly shifts to the 16-round jackpot game state (first jackpot game state) without going through the starting operation state, but in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the jackpot game ends. Later, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving state (on the other hand, in the case of a non-time-saving jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is the normal state).

There are three types of small hits, from the first small hit to the third small hit. The first small hit is a small hit that the accessory 90520 opens once in the starting operation state, the second small hit is a small hit that the accessory 90520 opens twice, and the third small hit is the accessory. It is a small hit that 90520 opens three times. Further, in the case of disengagement, the accessory 90520 does not perform the opening operation.

In addition, when the accessory 90520 wins a V in the first small hit or the second small hit, the second big hit becomes a non-time-saving big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state ends, it is normal. Move to the state. In addition, the second big hit when the accessory 90520 wins a V in the third small hit is a time-saving big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state is completed, the time-saving state is entered.

Further, the gaming machine 90501 is provided with a main board and a display monitor similar to the main board 9011 and the display monitor 9029 provided in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, and the main board is used as a combination (combination) or a combination. The ratio is calculated and the calculated combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor. The display monitor is arranged in front of the main board on the main board when the main board is visually recognized so as not to interfere with the visibility. This point is the same as the above-mentioned gaming machine 901. Further, the combination (combination ratio), the calculation procedure of the combination ratio, the display procedure, and the like are the same as those of the above-mentioned gaming machine 901.

The combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio in the gaming machine 90501 can be obtained by the above equations (1) and (2). The number of prize-winning balls in the gaming machine 90501 is determined by winning a game ball for a variable winning ball device 90515, a specific winning opening 90566 and an exit opening in the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, and a large winning opening provided with an opening / closing plate 90516. The total number of game balls to be paid out.

Further, the number of consecutive prize-winning balls in the gaming machine 90501 is the number of the gaming balls paid out by winning the game ball to the large winning opening provided with the opening / closing plate 90516 when the first big hit game state is executed. Refers to the total number. Further, when the second big hit game state is executed, the game ball paid out by winning the game ball for the big winning opening provided with the opening / closing plate 90516 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "big winning opening winning"). The total number may be the total number, or the game balls paid out by the big prize opening prize, and the specific winning opening 90566 and the deviation in the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 at the time of V winning which triggered the transition to the second big hit game state. It may be the total number of game balls paid out by winning a game ball for the mouth (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "trigger prize").

The "at the time of V winning that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state" in the opportunity winning may be at the time of opening the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 where the V winning occurred, or the V winning occurred. A series of opening by winning a prize at the starting winning opening that triggered the opening of the blade type variable winning ball device may be included. For example, when the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is opened by winning a game ball to the third starting winning opening 90513 in which the number of times the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is opened is 3, and there is a V prize at the time of opening. The opportunity winning prize may be a winning of a game ball for a specific winning opening 90566 and an outlier of the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 at the time of opening the three times.

In addition, when the number of consecutive prize winning balls is the total number of game balls paid out by the large winning opening winning and the opportunity winning, the winning of the specific winning opening 90566 and the outlier of the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is the trigger winning. Whether or not it depends on whether or not the V prize that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state occurs. For this reason, the total number of game balls paid out by winning a prize for the specific winning opening 90566 and the outlier of the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 (hereinafter referred to as "the number of temporary memory opportunity winning winning balls") is temporarily stored, and the second big hit game. Even if the number of temporary memory trigger prize balls is added to the number of consecutive bonus winning prize balls as the total number of game balls paid out by the trigger prize when the V prize that triggered the transition to the state occurs. good. The timing for adding the temporary memory opportunity winning prize balls to the number of consecutive prize winning balls may be an appropriate timing. For example, it may be a timing to shift to the second big hit game state and count the number of prize balls of the game ball paid out by the big prize opening prize, or the count of the number of prize balls of the game ball paid out by the big winning opening prize. At the time of starting, the timing may be set immediately before displaying the winning combination (relationship ratio) on the display monitor 9029 while counting or after counting the number of prize balls of the game balls paid out by the big winning opening prize.

Further, after the temporary memory trigger prize ball is memorized, when the V prize that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur, the temporary memory trigger prize ball may be deleted. When the game ball wins in the specific winning opening 90566, the V winning that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state has occurred, so that the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is substantially out of alignment. The total number of game balls paid out by winning a prize in the mouth may be temporarily stored. The judgment that the V prize that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur is that, for example, the V prize does not occur after a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the blade type variable winning ball device 90520. can do.

In addition, as the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio displayed on the display monitor, the short-term combination (relationship), the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination (relationship), and the cumulative combination ratio are the same as in the above-mentioned game machine 901. And so on. Further, the display monitor may be attached to the main board in the same manner as the above-mentioned gaming machine 901. Further, as the arrangement mode of the display monitor, various arrangement modes described in the mounting mode for the gaming machine 901 may be used.

The above-mentioned gaming machine 90501 is a gaming machine provided with a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520. In a gaming machine provided with such a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio are displayed on the main board. Further, the display monitor is provided on the main board that controls the game so as not to interfere with the visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails) and windmills provided on the game board.

Further, in the gaming machine 90501 provided with the blade type variable winning ball device 90520, the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination ratio are calculated in a mode different from that of the gaming machine 901. Even in the gaming machine 90501 provided with such a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination ratio can be calculated and displayed on a display monitor mounted on the main board.

Further, in the gaming machine 90501, among the starting winning openings for opening and closing the blade type variable winning ball device 90520, the variable winning ball device 90515 is used as the third starting winning opening 90513, but the starting winning opening is the first starting winning opening. Only those that are not provided with a variable winning ball device such as the opening 90511 and the second starting winning opening 90512 may be used. Further, the starting winning opening may be only a variable winning ball device such as the third starting winning opening 90513.

The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to the third start winning opening 90513 is added to the number of winning prize balls used to calculate the winning combination, but the first starting winning opening 90511 and the second starting winning opening 90511 and the second. The number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the starting winning opening 90512 is not added to the number of prize balls for winning the prize and the number of prize balls for winning the continuous prize.

Further, in the gaming machine 90501, a big hit lottery is executed by winning a game ball in the starting winning opening, but the big hit lottery is not executed even if the starting winning opening is won, and the variable winning ball device 90520 is always opened. It may be an embodiment in which the operation is performed. Further, instead of the big hit lottery, the lottery for the number of times the variable winning ball device 90520 is opened may be performed, or both the big hit lottery and the lottery for the number of times the variable winning ball device 90520 is opened may be performed. .. Further, in the lottery for the number of openings, the number of times such as once, twice, three times, etc. may be drawn, and 0 times may be included as the target of the number of openings.

Further, the gaming machine 90501 is set to a jackpot gaming state (first jackpot gaming state and second jackpot gaming state), and the gaming machine 90501 is provided with a blade type variable winning ball device 90520 and an opening / closing plate 90516. There is a winning slot. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state may be set, and only the blade-type variable winning ball device may be provided without providing the jackpot. In this case, in the big hit game state, the blade-type variable winning ball device may open / close or open for a certain period of time.

Further, in the embodiment in which only the blade type variable winning ball device is provided, V winning may be set as a continuation condition of the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game shifts to the big hit game state, the maximum continuation round may be set so that the continuation of the next round is decided when a V prize is won in one round.

(Modification example of display control of winning number information and display items)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α has been described. However, for example, items related to the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 9041A and 9041B, a pass gate designation command for specifying which gate the game ball has passed through is issued from the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) to the effect control board 9012 (effect). By transmitting to the control CPU 90120), the effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B and display it in the first area α.

For example, the number of times of passing through the gate (corresponding to A1) of today and today's gate can be determined by the same method as the aggregation process when the general winning opening designation command for specifying which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings has been won is received. Gate passage ratio (corresponding to A2), number of gate passages in low base state (corresponding to B1), gate passage ratio in low base state (corresponding to B2), number of gate passages in high base state (corresponding to C1), high base The gate passage ratio of the state (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passages in the set period (corresponding to D1), and the gate passage ratio in the set period (corresponding to D2) can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. .. Further, these items can be aggregated for each gate (for each of the gates 9041A and 9041B) and displayed in the first area α.

(2) Further, since the effect control CPU 90120 receives the big prize opening winning command from the game control microcomputer 90100, the number of winnings to the big winning opening can be totaled and the winning to the big winning opening can be counted. The number of prize balls given based on the total can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

For example, by the same method as the aggregation process when the general winning opening designation command for specifying which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings is received is received, "Today's number of winning entries in the large winning openings (A1). "Equivalent)", "Today's prize-winning ratio (equivalent to A2)", "Number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize-winning (equivalent to A3)", "Today's total "Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's prizes to the prizeballs to the number of prizeballs (equivalent to A4)", "Number of prizes to the prizeballs in the set period (equivalent to D1)" , "Ratio of prizes to the big prize opening in the set period (equivalent to D2)", "Number of prize balls given based on the prize to the big prize opening in the set period (equivalent to D3)", and "In the set period The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the prizes to the large winning openings in the set period to the number of prize balls given (corresponding to D4) "can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. be.

Here, "the ratio of the number of prize balls given based on today's prizes to the big prize opening to today's total prize balls (equivalent to A4)" and "the prize balls given during the set period" When the "ratio of the number of prize balls (corresponding to D4) given based on the winning of the big prize opening in the set period to the number" is higher than the predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), a notification to that effect is given. You may try to do it. For example, in the first area α, the message "The prize ball ratio of the big prize opening exceeds the reference value (60%)" may be displayed.

Further, the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the second starting winning opening controlled by the normal variable winning ball device 906B and the opening / closing control by the special variable winning ball device 907 with respect to the total number of prize balls. When the ratio to the total number of prize balls given based on the winning of the large winning opening is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 70%), a notification to that effect may be given. For example, a message such as "The prize ball ratio of the prize ball exceeds the reference value (70%)" may be displayed in the first area α.

(3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side, the effect control CPU 90120 receives each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each approach area. An example of totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area has been described. However, in the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side of the game control microcomputer 9011 on the main board 9011 side, the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side enters each approach area. The number of entry of the game ball is totaled, or the effect control CPU 90120 enters each approach area based on each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each approach area. It is also possible to aggregate the numbers.

The number of game balls entering each approach area (counter value corresponding to each switch) aggregated by the game control microcomputer 90100 or the effect control CPU 90120 on the main board 9011 side is transmitted to the effect control CPU 90120. Then, it can be displayed on the image display device 905. For example, by outputting a command for designating the total number of approaches to each approach area from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 enters each approach area based on the command. It is possible to specify the number of intrusions and display them in the first area α.

It should be noted that the number of entries into each approach area aggregated on the game control microcomputer 90100 side is displayed on the main board 9011 such as the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. It may be displayed in. Further, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening does not reach a predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B is used. It is also possible to notify the fact by performing a specific display different from the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The display device provided on the main board 9011 for displaying the aggregated results is not limited to the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, etc., in order to display the aggregated results. It may be a display device provided exclusively for the device. Further, the display device may have any form such as a lamp, an LED, a 7-segment display, a liquid crystal display device, an EL panel, and a light guide plate.

The value of each counter stored in the RAM 90102 (the number of entries into each approach area) can be, for example, the game state flag (probability change state, time saving state, etc.) stored in the RAM 90102 can be specified by the game control microcomputer 90100. When the reset operation for resetting the game state (flag corresponding to the game state) is performed by the game hall side (for example, a clerk), it is displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, it may be output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012 and displayed on the image display device 905 for a certain period of time. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 9011. The reset button is provided on the back surface side (game island side) of the game board 902, and the game board 902 is rotated forward with respect to the game machine frame 903 by using the hinge mechanism of the game machine frame 903. By doing so, the reset button provided on the back surface side of the game board 902 can be operated.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example in which the winning number information (D1 to D4) in the aggregation period set by the player can be displayed in the first area α has been described, but the example is described in advance regardless of the operation of the player. The totaling period is set in the gaming machine (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored or set by the operation of the game hall side), and the number of winnings in the set totaling period. Information (corresponding to D1 to D4) may be displayed in the first area α. For example, the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (for example, 60 times / 60 minutes). In that case, it may be notified to that effect.

(5) Further, if the winning of a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period, the first area α may be notified to that effect. For example, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening has not occurred for 10 minutes, the message "No general winning for 10 minutes" may be displayed in the first area α. This predetermined period may be set by an operation on the playground side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), and an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 9030). It may be possible to set by.

(6) The above embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine provided with a distribution device such that the winning ratios to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening are a specific ratio (for example, 1: 1). , Information on the number of winnings related to the number of winnings to each winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117434 has a configuration in which the gaming balls accepted by the distribution device are alternately distributed to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. By providing the distribution device, it is possible to alternately distribute the game balls accepted by the distribution device to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening. Also for a gaming machine in which the distribution device alternately distributes the game balls to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening, the above embodiment is applied, and the winning number information related to the winning number to each winning opening is first. It can be displayed in the area α. However, since the number of winnings to the general winning opening is automatically determined according to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening is displayed as described above. There is no need to let it.

(7) In FIG. 72, the totaling period can be set according to the operation of the player, but the winning number information is reset according to the operation of the player, and the totaling of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You may do so. For example, when the player performs an operation to start counting, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is reset to 0, and then the effect control CPU 90120 issues a general winning opening designation command. The number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by 1 each time it is received.

Further, the aggregation period once set may be changed according to the operation of the player before the lapse of the set period. For example, although the totaling period is initially set to 30 minutes, the player may perform a resetting operation before the set period elapses to shorten the totaling period to 10 minutes in order to know the totaling result quickly. In addition, although the aggregation period was initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation result for a longer period, the player performs a reset operation before the set period elapses to extend the aggregation period to 30 minutes. Is also good. Further, the aggregation period once set may be extended according to the operation of the player after the set period has elapsed. For example, after 10 minutes, which is the set aggregation period, has elapsed and the aggregation result for that 10 minutes is displayed once, the player performs an extension operation in order to grasp the aggregation result for a longer aggregation period. The aggregation period may be extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both a 10-minute aggregation result and a 60-minute aggregation result including the 10-minute aggregation result can be obtained).

(8) In the demo screen displayed on the image display device 905, or in the first area α in the state where the game is being performed (the state in which the game end determination is not made and the demo screen is not displayed). , An image explaining which of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening is the winning opening provided on the game board surface may be displayed. Also, the number of prize balls in each winning opening may be notified.

(9) In the above embodiment, the game field setting is prioritized over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may be prioritized over the game field setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) are displayed. When the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "display" selected on the selection screen of FIG. 31 (2) so that it can be displayed on the image display device 905, the winning number information is displayed on the image display device 905. (Display control of FIGS. 68 and 69 is executed), and when the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "not displayed" selected on the selection screen of FIG. 31 (2), the winning number information is displayed as an image. It may not be displayed on the device 905 (the display control of FIG. 70 is executed).

Further, the game hall setting and the player setting may be given the same priority, and it may be determined whether or not to display the winning number information according to the order of the received setting operations. That is, it may be decided whether or not to display the winning number information with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) thereafter. When set, the winning number information is displayed (display control in FIGS. 68 and 69 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) are set so that the winning number information is not displayed, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently moved to the second position (display position). If is, the winning number information is displayed (display control of FIGS. 68 and 69 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the setting that does not display the winning number information on the player setting screens of FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) thereafter. If is, the winning number information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 70 is executed). Further, even when the player setting screen of FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) is set to display the winning number information, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently moved to the first position (non-display position). ), The winning number information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 70 is executed).

Further, in this embodiment, the clerk of the game hall can operate the display changeover switch 9032 to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905, and the player can set the operation button 9030. It is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by operating, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a clerk at the amusement park can operate the display changeover switch 9032. While it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905, the player cannot set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, FIGS. 31 (1) to 3). The setting screen on the player side as shown in (3) may not be provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 only on the playground side.

On the contrary, the player (and the clerk of the game hall) can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by operating the operation button 9030, while the game field. It is also possible not to provide a means that allows only the side to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided). In such a configuration, the player and the clerk of the game hall can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). .. In this way, it may be possible for the player and the game hall to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation.

(10) Note that the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 71 and the like is the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031. Is displayed on the image display device 905 only in the maintenance mode in which is the display position (second position), and the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the non-display position (first position). In the mode, it may not be displayed on the image display device 905. That is, it may be treated in the same manner as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG. 29 (a).

As described above, the information on the number of winnings related to the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. Information that can be displayed on the image display device 905 only when the information is performed may be information that the player cannot normally see. For example, a state in which a player can play a game (for example, a state in which a demo screen is displayed), a state in which a game end determination is not performed (a state in which a special figure game is being executed, a normal figure game). Is information that is not displayed on the image display device 905 in the state where It may be possible to display only (before), or it may be possible to display only for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) when an operation for stopping the power supply of the gaming machine is performed. good.

(11) Further, the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 71 or the like can be obtained in either the maintenance mode or the game mode. It may be possible to display on the image display device 905 even in the mode of. In such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only in the first area α. It may be possible to display the winning number information. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be different depending on the period during which the game is not performed and the period during which the game may be performed.

In addition, in the maintenance mode, the winning number information of all the aggregated items is displayed, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the game hall side or the operation of the player) or Information on the number of winnings of the predetermined main item) may be displayed. That is, the item of the winning number information to be displayed may be different depending on the period during which the game is not performed and the period during which the game may be performed.

(12) Further, in the game mode, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the game end determination, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β. On the other hand, during the period when the game end determination is not performed and it is determined that the game is in progress, the winning number information may be displayed only in the first area α. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be different between the period in which it is determined that the game is not performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

In addition, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the game end judgment, the winning number information of all the aggregated items is displayed, but the game end judgment is not performed and the game is played. During the period determined to be medium, the winning number information of some items (items set by the game playground side or the operation of the player or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the item of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which it is determined that the game is not performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

(13) In the above embodiment, the winning number information is displayed with respect to the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information) (setting to display the winning number information). The setting for displaying the winning number information and the number of winnings for other images (background image) are not changed (commoned) between FIG. 68 and FIG. 69) and the setting for not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 70). The visible range is different depending on the setting that does not display the information, but the setting is not limited to such a form, and as shown in FIG. 73, the setting that displays the winning number information (FIG. 73 (a)). By setting not to display the winning number information (FIG. 73 (b)), the display position and display range (image size) of all images including the background image other than the winning number information may be shared. .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control burden due to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information.

(14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (image size) of the decorative pattern are set to display the winning number information (FIGS. 68 and 69) and the setting not to display the winning number information (FIG. 70). ), But the display position and display range of the decorative pattern may be different depending on the display / non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 74, in the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 74 (a)), the setting for displaying the winning number information is not displayed rather than the interval between the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (FIG. 74 (FIG. 74). The intervals between the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in b)) may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, the variable display of the decorative pattern may be executed using the entire screen. In this example, the decorative symbol display area 905L in the case where the winning number information is not displayed is included in the first area α. In this way, when the winning number information is not displayed, the variable display or the stop display of the decorative symbol in the first area α may be allowed. In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest by performing the production using the entire screen.

(15) In the above embodiment, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and radio wave abnormality are exemplified as the error of the gaming machine, but the error of the gaming machine is not limited to these, and the error of the gaming machine is an abnormality of opening the front door and an abnormality of the payout mechanism. (Abnormality of prize balls, etc.), Abnormal winning of the large winning opening (abnormality of detecting winning in the large winning opening even though the large winning opening is not open), or malfunction of various parts of the pachinko gaming machine 901. And so on.

[Other variants]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. It should be noted that the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-mentioned effects forms may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machines shown in each of the above-mentioned effects forms and the following modification examples are shown. The control and configuration of the pachinko / pachislot machines may be arbitrarily combined.

In the above embodiment, the game balls that do not pass through the gate 9041B due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the members that define the flow direction of the game balls are the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It is possible to win one of them. With such a configuration, even if the game ball does not pass through the gate 9041B in the probable change state or the time saving state, it is possible to expect a prize in the general winning opening provided on the downstream side of the gate 9041B. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, the game ball that has not passed through the gate 9041B may win a prize in either the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D at a higher rate than the game ball that has passed through the gate 9041B. .. With such a configuration, even if the game ball passes through the gate 9041B infrequently in a probabilistic state or a time-saving state, it is possible to expect a prize in the general winning opening provided on the downstream side of the gate 9041B. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in games. Furthermore, by executing a specific effect based on the winning of the general winning opening, it is possible to further enhance the entertainment of the game.

In the above embodiment, executing the specific effect at different ratios according to the gaming state includes that the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game state and the specific effect is not executed in another game state. .. Further, in the above embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect at different ratios according to the game period, the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game period, and the specific effect may not be executed in another game period. included.

In the above embodiment, in order to execute the effect at a higher rate in the first state than in the second state different from the first state, the effect can be executed only in the first state. In the second state, the effect is not executed. Here, the classification of the first state and the second state is, in addition to the above-mentioned classification according to the game state, the classification according to the number of reserved memories, and the classification according to the execution period of the special figure game (special figure game). Classification according to the type of variation pattern (for example, whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with reach effect), or classification according to the type of variation pattern. , Classification of whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect), Category according to a specific effect timing (for example, before the establishment of the reach state in the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect) There are classifications such as whether it is before or after the establishment, or whether it is before or after the execution of the pseudo-continuous production in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous production).

In the first effect mode to the twelfth effect form, the specific effect may be executed only in one of (1) a normal state and (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state. For example, (1) the specific effect may be executed only in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect may not be executed in the case of the probabilistic change state or the time saving state. Further, in the 13th effect mode to the 24th effect form, either (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, and (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. It may be possible to execute a specific effect only in one case. For example, (1) the specific effect can be executed only in the case of the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, and (2) the specific effect is specified in the case of the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. You may not execute the production.

In the first effect mode to the twelfth effect mode, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the execution state is executed depending on whether the gaming state is (1) a normal state, or (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state. Although the type of specific effect is different, when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, whether or not the specific effect is executed and the specific effect to be executed are based on the same effect execution conditions as when the game state is the normal state. The type may be determined, or the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the effect execution conditions common to those in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. .. Further, the classification of the gaming state is not limited to (1) a normal state, (2) a probabilistic state or a time saving state, and for example, (1) a high base state or (2). It may be a category of whether it is in a high base state, or it may be a category of (1) a jackpot gaming state or (2) a jackpot gaming state.

In the thirteenth effect mode to the twenty-fourth effect mode, the game period is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, or (2) outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation. Whether or not the specific effect is executed and the type of the specific effect to be executed are determined according to the period, but the game period is not limited to such a division, and for example, (1) the number of reserved storages. May be a period of 1 or less, or (2) a period of 2 or more reserved storages, and (1) a period during which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. (2) It may be a division as to whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed.

Further, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is executed. It may be the division. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good.

In the first to fourth effect forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth effect forms, only one of the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed as the specific effect, but both the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed. May be feasible. That is, when the winning condition is satisfied, one of the fluctuation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect that meets the predetermined condition is executed (for example, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or less, the change result advance notice effect is executed. However, if the number of reserved storages is 2 or more, the look-ahead advance notice effect may be executed), or both of them may be executed at the same time. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect is an effect of changing the mode of the display information (display part) corresponding to the hold storage, it is referred to as the above-mentioned fluctuation result advance notice effect (only the voice effect, or the voice effect and the character effect). The look-ahead notice effect can be executed at the same time, and the player can grasp that both the change result notice effect and the look-ahead notice effect have been executed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, if the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied is a big hit symbol, the variable result advance notice effect is prioritized and executed, and the variable display display result executed when the winning condition is satisfied is executed. If there is a hold memory that is determined to be a big hit in the start winning determination, although it is an out-of-order symbol, it is preferable to give priority to the pre-reading advance notice effect.

In the above embodiment, it is set whether or not to display the winning number by the operation button 9030 only during the period determined by the effect control CPU 90120 to be in the non-gaming state (only when the demo screen is displayed). Although the possible examples have been described, the execution status of the special figure game (special symbol) is not limited to such a form, regardless of the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state). Whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memory of the special figure game), the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memory of the normal figure game) ), It may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings by using the operation button 9030. That is, whether or not to display the number of winnings by the operation button 9030 even during the period in which the game is performed, for example, the period in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed or the period in which the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. It may be configurable. In such a configuration, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is set to be displayed, it does not depend on the gaming state (for example, the normal state, the probability change state, the time saving state, the big hit game state), and the special figure. The execution status of the game (whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the number of reserved storages of the special symbol game), the execution status of the normal diagram game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, etc.) The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of pending memories of the normal game.

In the above embodiment, there is no limit on the period during which the display changeover switch 9032 can be operated. Therefore, if the glass door frame 903a can be opened on the playground side, the display changeover switch 9032 is operated. , It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. Not limited to such a form, the period during which the setting operation can be performed on the playground side may be limited. For example, in a configuration in which the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided, even when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the amusement park side, the setting screens shown in FIGS. 31 (1) to 31 (3) are displayed. The operation button 9030 shall be used for selection and determination. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state), or whether or not the execution status of the special figure game (variable display of the special symbol is executed). , The number of reserved memories of the special figure game) and the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the normal figure game), from FIG. 31 (1). The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, the period controlled by the jackpot game state, the period controlled by the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the period during which the special figure game is executed, the period during which the reserved memory number of the special figure game is not 0, etc. are shown in the figure. The setting screens shown in 31 (1) to (3) may not be displayed, and the setting operation on the playground side may be prohibited.

In the above embodiment, only when the player is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening by switching the display changeover switch 9032 which cannot be operated (the operation unit is set to the second position). , The setting screen (FIGS. 31 (1) to (3)) for allowing the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed. Regardless of the form, it is possible for both the player side and the game hall side to set whether or not to display the number of prizes to the general winning opening as a configuration that does not provide a display changeover switch 9032 that can be operated only by the game hall side. This is a common setting screen (similar to FIGS. 31 (1) to (3), and is used to select and determine whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by operating the operation button 9030. The screen) may be displayed. In the configuration for displaying such a common setting screen, even if the clerk of the game hall is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the player subsequently determines the number of winnings in the general winning opening. When the setting is set to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the setting received later.

In addition, when the setting is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening by switching the display changeover switch 9032 which can be operated only on the playground side (the operation unit is set to the second position), and when the operation button 9030 is operated, it is general. Common information (for example, the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table) is displayed on the image display device 905 when the number of winnings to the winning openings is set to be displayed. You may let it. In such a configuration, even if the setting is such that the common information is not displayed by switching the display changeover switch 9032, if the setting is made to display the common information by operating the operation button 9030 thereafter, the setting is made. By applying the later accepted settings, common information may be displayed on the image display device 905.

In the above embodiment, a limit may be provided for a period (game state) in which the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, in the period in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed during the period from the establishment of the reach state to the derivation display of the confirmed decorative symbol. .. Further, in a predetermined gaming state such as a probability change state or a time saving state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall side determines whether the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed or not displayed in which period (game state). It may be possible to set it, or it may be possible to set it by a setting means (for example, an operation button 9030) on the player side.

In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the player inputs a player ID (for example, an ID of a recording medium owned by the player or an ID for personal identification registered on the website) by the operation button 9030. By doing so, it is possible to aggregate game data including the number of winnings to the general winning opening after the player ID is input, and to operate the operation button 9030 when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is finished. Then, the game data aggregated from the input of the player ID and thereafter may be output to the image display device 905 as a two-dimensional code. The player captures a two-dimensional code (information that can identify the player ID and game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, so that the information terminal and an information management server connected to the Internet are connected. Communication is performed with the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code, and the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the information management server. The game data managed by is updated. The player can access the information management server from the information terminal and check the stored game data (game data associated with the player ID), and as a result, win a prize in the general winning opening. It becomes possible to grasp the number. In such a form, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 905 may be set by the setting means on the game hall side (for example, the display changeover switch 9032), and the setting means on the player side. It may be possible to set by (for example, the operation button 9030).

In such a form, the player may be given a privilege according to the number of winnings to the general winning opening stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening exceeds a predetermined number, the player with the player ID is given a background image, application software, etc. that can be used on the information terminal as a privilege. Is also good. Further, points corresponding to the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be given to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. Then, the player may be able to exchange a part or all of the possessed points for the privilege.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening is described, but the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed, and the game ball wins in the general winning opening. It may be a notification of what has been done. For example, the winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, and the sound effect or voice of the winning notification may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. You can do it. In such a configuration, as in the above embodiment, whether or not to notify the general winning opening that the game ball has won is set by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall side. It may be possible, or it may be possible to set it by a setting means (for example, an operation button 9030) on the player side.

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning status to the general winning opening may be notified. Specifically, the image display device 905 has the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the winning frequency (the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls fired into the game area, or the general winning per hour. The number of winnings to the mouth) may be displayed, or the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed according to the number of winnings to the general winning mouth and the frequency of winning. Further, when a prize is given to the general winning opening, the winning to the general winning opening may be notified by voice from the speakers 908L and 908R. By using such voice notification, it becomes easier for the game or the like to grasp the frequency of winning a prize in the general winning opening. Further, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the hitting ball operation handle, the operation button 9030, or the like may be vibrated. By providing such a bodily sensation notification, it becomes easier for the game or the like to grasp the frequency of winning a prize in the general winning opening.

The number of winnings and the frequency of winning each general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905, and are also output to a management device such as a hall computer communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 901. It is possible to manage the number of winnings to each general winning slot for each machine. This information can be useful, for example, for the maintenance of gaming machines.

(2) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a sound effect may be output when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning slot, and a sound effect different from that when winning a prize in another winning slot such as a starting winning slot. It is good to output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be different for each of the general winning openings. Further, in such a configuration, the sound effect may not be output when a prize is won in a specific general winning opening.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the execution ratio and the production mode of the advance notice effect may be changed based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the execution rate and the effect mode of the advance notice effect change, and the advance notice effect is changed for a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable. Until the number of impressions is executed, it is preferable that the execution ratio and the effect mode after the change are continued.

(4) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first variable display of the decorative symbol executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening, and a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable display number is executed. Until then, it is better to continue the music after the change. Further, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined value, a specific music (for example, a music during a big hit) may be output. In addition, the player plays from a plurality of songs (BGM) based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening or the number of winning balls in the general winning opening has reached a predetermined number. Music (BGM) may be selectable.

Further, the music being played may be continuously output based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the music during the jackpot may be continuously output even after the jackpot gaming state ends, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. Further, a stage change may be executed in which the background image of the decorative pattern and the music (BGM) are changed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. It should be noted that the transition destination stage (background image and music) may be different depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the specific effect executed based on the winning of the general winning opening is the variation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect related to the display result of the special figure game. Not limited to such a form, the specific effect may be an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game. For example, a general winning opening in which a game ball has not won may be displayed among a plurality of general winning openings, and a character may appear when the game ball wins in the general winning opening.

(6) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game ball is not won in the general winning opening for a predetermined period even though the gaming ball is launched in the gaming area, or the winning frequency in the general winning opening is less than the threshold value. In some cases, the image display device 905 may be configured to perform a specific notification such as displaying that a prize has not been generated in the general winning opening. In addition, even though the game ball is fired in the game area, if the game ball does not win only in a specific general winning opening among a plurality of general winning openings for a predetermined period, or a winning in a specific general winning opening. When the frequency is less than the threshold value, the image display device 905 may execute a specific notification such as displaying that a prize has not been generated in the specific general winning opening.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the simultaneous production is executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening until the simultaneous production is executed, or all at once. A specific production may be executed according to the winning of the general winning opening during the production period. Further, the decorative symbol may be changed, the stop symbol may be changed, or the sliding effect may be executed according to the winning of the general winning opening during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

(8) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, each time a game ball wins in the general winning opening, the object displayed on the image display device 905 is increased by one, and the winning and winning times in the general winning opening are recognized. It may be easier. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, only the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the general winning opening is cumulatively added, and the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of the general winning opening. When the number reaches a predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying "100 shots exceeded!" On the image display device 905 may be executed. If the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number is the period during which the gaming machine error is notified based on fraud detection or failure detection. It is assumed that the notification of the gaming machine error is displayed with priority over the specific effect, and the specified effect that has been suspended after the notification of the gaming machine error is completed is executed.

(9) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a winning sound is output every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and during notification of the gaming machine error, the notification sound of the gaming machine error is output rather than the winning sound. You may give priority to output. In addition, every time a game ball wins a prize in the general prize opening, the image display device 905 is set to display the prize, and during the notification of the game machine error, the display of the game machine error is given priority over the prize display and output. You may let it.

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening when controlled to the big hit gaming state. The number of prize balls paid out based on the above may be added and displayed on the image display device 905 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state]. In such a configuration, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is added to the displayed [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state]. At times, it is advisable to add the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the general winning opening. That is, the increase in the number of prize balls per display update may be apparently increased. In addition, the [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball to the big winning opening, and the [in the big hit game state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball to the general winning opening. The display may be updated according to the individual winning timing, such as updating the number of prize balls paid out.

(11) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of prize balls may be different depending on the general winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B of the left game area 9010A, 10 prize balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening of the right game area 9010B is paid out. If a game ball wins in the 9050C and the 4th general prize opening 9050D, 5 prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, an effect of inciting a game ball to be won in the general winning opening may be executed. For example, in a form such as the sixth effect form, the seventh effect form, and the fourteenth effect form, in which a specific effect is executed by winning a game ball in each of a plurality of general winning openings, the plurality of the effect forms are used. The image display device 905 notifies the general winning opening in which the game ball has not won, and the player is suggested to aim at the general winning opening in which the game ball has not won. It is good to set it to. Further, in a form such as the 8th effect mode and the 16th effect form, in which a specific effect is executed based on a game ball winning in a specific order in a plurality of prize openings, the winning openings and the winning openings to be awarded It is preferable to notify the order in which the prizes should be won by the image display device 905 so that the player can grasp the order. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, "Aim for the first general winning opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning of the first general winning opening 9050A is confirmed, the next "Aim for the 1st start winning opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning to the 1st starting winning opening is confirmed, finally, "Aim for the 2nd general winning opening!" Is displayed and the second After the winning of the general winning opening 9050B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) Further, when the game area 9010 is provided with a guide path for the game ball toward the general winning opening, and the approach sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guide path. , Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the approach sensor, an effect of notifying in advance that the game ball will win the general winning opening may be executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In addition, a period from the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening to the execution of the payout of the winning ball is secured for a certain period, and the production based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed within that period. You may do so.

(14) When a stage on which the game ball can roll is provided below the image display device 905, a general winning opening and an entrance to a guidance path connected to the general winning opening are provided on the stage. The configuration may be set so that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general winning opening or the entrance to the guidance route.

(15) It is also possible to execute an effect in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display device 905 is updated every time a prize is won in the general winning opening. For example, the character grows for each prize in the general winning opening, and when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number (when the character grows to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege, etc.) is executed. You may do so. In addition, each time a prize is won in the general winning opening, an effect that increases the gauge is executed, and when the predetermined number of prizes is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege) is performed. Etc.) may be executed. In such a form of production, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. It may be done.

(16) In the above embodiment, the types of specific effects (variation result notice effect, look-ahead advance notice effect) to be executed differ depending on the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied, and are output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Although an example in which the sounds are different has been described, the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be different depending on the game state, not limited to such a form. In addition, in the probable change state and the time saving state, there are many cases where the effect by the game effect lamp 909 and the music to be played are more flashy than in the normal state. The mode may be easy to understand and flashy for the player.

(17) If the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the frequency of winning are less than the standard values even though a certain number of gaming balls are fired in the gaming area 9010, the player usually knows. Information on a gaming machine that is difficult to handle, for example, a latent probability change state, a limiter, or the like may be notified.

(18) In the above embodiment, an example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is satisfied has been described, but tentatively, the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the reserved storage number (first reserved storage). If the winning condition is satisfied while the number and the total number of the second reserved storages are also 0, neither the fluctuation result advance notice effect nor the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game (for example, appearance of a specific character or reproduction of a specific song) as a specific effect.

(19) Further, when the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the winning condition is satisfied when the number of reserved storage (the total number of the first reserved storage and the second reserved storage) is 0. , The execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and then the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed or at the timing when the number of reserved storages becomes 2 or more. That is, the specific effect that was suspended based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game was satisfied or the start condition of the special figure game was satisfied without immediately executing the specific effect based on the establishment of the winning condition. You may try to do it.

(20) In the above embodiment, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number in the predetermined period, the game ball does not win in the general winning opening (for example, "the number of winnings in the general winning opening is small". The message "It's too much.") May be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, it is general only during the maintenance mode in which the information for the clerk (the winning number information stored in the winning number management table) based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031 is displayed on the image display device 905. It is preferable to display on the image display device 905 that the game ball does not win in the winning opening. The clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. In addition, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the image display device 905 displays that the game ball does not win in the general winning opening. You can do it. Further, similar to the display control of the number of winnings in the general winning opening, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number based on the setting by the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030, it is general. The image display device 905 may display that the game ball does not win in the winning opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number, it means that the game ball has excessively won the general winning opening (for example, "to the general winning opening". The message "The number of winnings is too large.") May be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, it is general only during the maintenance mode in which the information for the clerk (the winning number information stored in the winning number management table) based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031 is displayed on the image display device 905. It is preferable to display on the image display device 905 that the game ball has won an excessive prize at the winning opening. The clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 901 transmits the prize number information stored in the prize number management table of the effect control board 9012 to the game information management device that manages the game information, and the game information is transmitted. The management device manages the winning number information of each game machine. Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a general winning signal when the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is detected (for example, one pulse signal is output for each winning. By doing so, the game information management device may manage the number of winnings to the general winning opening for each game machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device uses the game information as the number of winnings in the general winning slot per predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) and the number of winnings in the general winning slot per predetermined number of hit balls (for example, 6000 shots). Or, the winning rate to the general winning opening (the number of winnings to the general winning opening ÷ the number of balls to be driven) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 has described an example of increasing the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 905 for each prize in the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. The mode of the object displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed each time the winning opening is won. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

(24) In the above embodiment, when the maintenance mode is set, the information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 as information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning opening). The example of notification in the above has been described, but the notification is not limited to such a form, and the notification is made by voice notification using the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, the decorative LED, and the lighting / extinguishing control of the 7-segment display. May be. In addition, it is not limited to the form of notifying all the information of the winning number management table, and only the information of the winning openings whose payout number, winning ratio, etc. are not within the predetermined standard range (or within the standard range) is notified. You may do so.

(25) In the above embodiment, when the maintenance mode is set, the information of the winning number management table as the information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings to each winning opening, the number of payouts, etc.) is shown in the game as shown in FIG. 43. Although an example of notifying (displaying) in a mode unrelated to the effect performed in the game has been described, the notification is not limited to such a form, and the notification may be made in a mode corresponding to the mode of the effect executed in the game. good. By notifying in an manner according to the mode of the effect, it is only necessary to confirm the notification mode as to which type of model the information is, as compared with the case where the information is notified only by the table data as shown in FIG. 43. It will be easy to grasp with. The effect executed in the game may be any effect such as a demo screen effect, a notice effect, a reach effect, a big hit effect, etc., and is not limited to the effect displayed on the image display device 905, but the sound. Or a lamp may be used. In addition, notifying in a mode according to the mode of the production means, for example, displaying or outputting a voice so that the character appearing during the advance notice production or the reach production reads out the information of the winning number management table, or whether or not there is a change. Regardless of this, the resident character displayed on the image display device 905 and giving a notice or explaining the game may be displayed and output so that the information in the winning number management table is read aloud. Further, the information is not limited to the character image, and the information of the winning number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game.

(26) In the above embodiment, an operating means such as a mode changeover switch 9031 operated to display information on the winning number management table as information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning opening). Has described an example in which the player is inoperable and is provided in a position where only the clerk of the game hall can operate, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the player and the clerk of the game hall cannot operate. Therefore, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated only by a person concerned such as an inspector, an inspector, or a manufacturer of the gaming machine. Further, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated by a person other than the above-mentioned player.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes is used as a storage area for storing information related to winning a game, but a counter having a maximum of 3 bytes and a counter having a maximum of 4 bytes are used. Can also be provided. At this time, two types of the above-mentioned combination ratio (%) and combination (relationship ratio) (%) are displayed on the above-mentioned display monitor 9029 from the total number of acquired balls of the game medium (prize ball) paid out from the gaming machine. The calculation method is not limited to the above-mentioned method, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 102, when the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls for a bonus, and the number of consecutive winning balls are totaled by a counter composed of a maximum of 4 bytes, the upper 16 bits are used for calculation. You may go. By the way, assuming that the number of acquired balls is 30,000 per day by the 4-byte counter, 4294863225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (number of acquired balls per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days. = Approximately 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), an example in which the display monitor 9029 is provided in the central portion on the main board 9011 housed in the board case 90201 has been described, but the display monitor 9029 has been described. May be provided at other positions.

For example, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), a main board 9011C without a display monitor and a display board 9011D are provided separately from the main board 9011C, and the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are connected by a harness 9011E. The display monitor 9029 may be provided on the display board 9011D. In this case, the main board 9011C is used to calculate the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio to be displayed on the display monitor 9029 and to receive data for use in these calculations. The main board 9011C transmits the calculated combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, and information regarding control for displaying these to the display board 9011D via the harness 9011E. On the display board 9011D, the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 9029 based on the data transmitted from the main board 9011C.

Further, the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are housed in a board case 90201A which is a caulking board case. The caulking pin 9011B is attached to the substrate case 90201A as in the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 77 (A). By providing the caulking pin 9011B, the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are completely enclosed in the board case 90201A, and fraudulent acts against the main board 9011C are prevented. Further, also in the substrate case 90201A, as in the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 77 (A), a hole portion and a heat radiation hole are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to obstruct the display of the display monitor 9029.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the display board 9011D may be provided outside the board case 90201B which is a caulking board case, and the main board 9011C may be enclosed in the board case 90201B. In this example, the display board 9011D is connected to the main board 9011C by a harness 9011E.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the display board 9011D may be enclosed in the substrate case 90201C, and the main substrate 9011C may be enclosed in the substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display board 9011D is connected to the main board 9011C by a harness 9011E. Further, also in the substrate case 90201C, as in the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 77 (A), a hole portion and a heat radiation hole are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and seals are arranged so as not to obstruct the display of the display monitor 9029. The substrate case 90201C that encloses the display substrate 9011D does not have to be a caulking substrate case, or may be a caulking substrate case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 76 (A), and a caulking use record is described on the label 9011R. May be good. Here, the label 9011R may be arranged at a position where a part of the display monitor 9029 is hidden. By hiding a part of the display monitor 9029 by the label 9011R in this way, for example, when the glass door frame 903a is opened, the player cannot easily visually recognize the combination (combination) or combination ratio. Can be done. Further, even when the label 9011R is attached, the display monitor 9029 may be attached at a position where it is not hidden.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the movable accessory, an electric accessory such as a large winning opening (attacker) opened and closed by a solenoid and a second starting winning opening (electric chew) is used. Alternatively, a so-called mechanical accessory that opens and closes by the weight of the game ball may be used as a movable accessory. Further, although the display monitor 9029 uses a 7-segment LED, a dot display, a display screen, or the like may be used instead of the 7-segment LED. Further, instead of the LED, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, or the like may be used. Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided with a 4-digit display unit of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D, but the number of digits is not limited to four and may be another number of digits. For example, it may be 2 digits, 8 digits or 10 digits.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is opened regardless of the content to be displayed on the display monitor 9029, for example, the display of the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio. We may take measures such as canceling the error. For example, in order to pay out the game balls, a supply mechanism for supplying the game balls (replenishment balls) may be provided on the back side of the game board 902. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball jam occurs, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 may be opened to clear the ball jam and release the error. When the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is opened to clear the error regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, the combination (combination ratio) or the combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 9029 is performed. Etc. may not be displayed.

Further, at this time, in order to prevent the display of the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio from being displayed on the display monitor 9029, no error has occurred in the display of the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio. May be a condition. The error in displaying the winning combination (combination), the winning ratio, etc. here is, for example, the detection of an abnormal operation determined in step S90101 shown in FIG. 89 or the winning information during business hours determined in step S90104. Acquisition, detection of a predetermined number or more of prizes for the attacker per unit time determined in step S90106 may be detected. On condition that no error has occurred in displaying such a combination (relationship) or combination ratio, the player can see information such as a combination (relationship) or combination ratio. The situation can be suppressed.

Further, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is opened to clear the error regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, and after the error clearing is completed, the combination (combination) with respect to the display monitor 9029 is performed. It is also possible to wait for a predetermined period, for example, 1 minute until the combination or the like is displayed, and display it after the predetermined time has elapsed. After the error occurrence is cleared, the cause of the error occurrence cannot be completely eliminated, and similar errors often occur in succession. By displaying the combination (relationship), combination ratio, etc. on the display monitor 9029 after a predetermined time has elapsed, the player can receive information such as the combination (relationship), combination ratio, etc. even when such an error occurs. It is possible to suppress the situation of being seen. The predetermined period here can be arbitrarily set, and may be a time longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or a time shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Further, a predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of failure of the image display device 905, the predetermined period of the ball clogging of the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

Further, the main board 9011 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 9029, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as "error display") for displaying an error. It is preferable that the error display is arranged at a position away from the display monitor 9029. Specifically, the display monitor 9029 may be arranged at the position of the right side 1/3 of the main board 9011, and the error display may be arranged at the position of the left side 1/3 of the main board 9011. Further, in order to make the display monitor 9029 easy to understand, the location of the display monitor 9029 on the main board 9011 may be printed in characters on the board case 90201, or a sticker may be attached to the board case 90201. You may leave it. Further, the display monitor 9029 may be provided on the payout control board which is a part of the main board 9011.

(29) In the above embodiment,
It was explained that the combination ratio (%) and the combination ratio (relationship ratio) (%) are calculated and displayed on the display monitor using the pachinko gaming machine as an example. You may calculate the value corresponding to the ream (ream ratio) (%) and display these values on the display monitor provided in the slot machine. The display monitor can be provided on the main board of the slot machine, for example, like the above-mentioned gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1.

The role ratio and the combination (relationship) in the slot machine are, for example, the payout of the game value (game value, hereinafter also referred to as "medal") with the progress of the game of the slot machine. It is calculated by whether or not the slot machine is in operation, and whether or not the slot machine is equipped with an accessory other than the first-class special accessory.

For example, a type 1 special character, a type 2 special character, and a normal character are set as the character, and the slot machine is not equipped with the type 1 special character as the character, and the normal character is not installed. When only other bonuses such as objects are mounted, the winning combination ratio is calculated by the number of medals paid out during operation of the bonus with respect to the total number of medals paid out. In addition, if the slot machine is equipped with only the first-class special bonuses and no other bonuses other than the first-class special bonuses, the medals will be paid out in total. It is calculated by the number of medals paid out during the operation of the bonus for the number.

An example of a method of calculating the winning combination (relationship ratio) (%) in the slot machine will be described below. Here, an example in which the first-class special bonus is set to the special gaming state and only the first-class special bonus is mounted as the bonus will be described. The slot machine can start the fluctuation of the symbol by setting the number of bets, and a prize is generated according to the result of the fluctuation of the symbol. For the prizes in the slot machine, the prizes are given with the addition of game value, the re-game prizes that can start the fluctuation of the symbol without setting the number of bets, and the special game state where the probability of occurrence of the prizes is improved. There is a bonus prize. Here, the winning combination (ratio) (%) in the slot machine is the cumulative total of the game value obtained by the award winning as a result of the fluctuation of the symbol during the period in which the fluctuation of the symbol is performed a predetermined number of times. For the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine (corresponding to the total number of acquired balls), the cumulative total of the gaming value obtained by the award winning as a result of the fluctuation of the symbol during the period of transition to the special gaming state (the above-mentioned). It is expressed as a ratio of (corresponding to the number of consecutive winning balls) in a pachinko machine. For example, in a period in which the symbol is changed 6000 times, when the number of medals, which is an example of the gaming value obtained in the period, is 16000, a prize is awarded during the period of transition to the special gaming state. When the number of medals obtained by the above is 9000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is the winning combination (relationship ratio) (%).

Further, the main board in the slot machine is provided, for example, in the back of the outer frame. Therefore, when the door frame (front door) of the slot machine is opened, the appearance of the main board when the main board is viewed from the outside of the slot machine is different from that of the gaming machine 901. Since reels and the like are stored in the outer frame of the slot machine, the outer frame of the slot machine is often larger than that of the pachinko gaming machine. Further, due to its structure, the main board in the slot machine is often attached to the inner side of the outer frame (the inner side surface of the plate material on the back side). For this reason, when the door frame of the slot machine is opened, it is possible that the light does not reach the main board sufficiently. Therefore, when the display monitor is attached to the main board, the information displayed on the display monitor ( For numerical values, characters, etc.), it is preferable to display them brightly with a large amount of light.

Further, in the slot machine, a display monitor is arranged so that it can be easily visually recognized from an oblique direction with respect to the main board provided at the back of the outer frame. The arrangement that is easy to see from an oblique direction is, for example, an arrangement that faces the front when the door frame is opened from the outer frame and is viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By arranging the display monitor in this way, when the store clerk or the like confirms the role ratio (combination ratio), the store clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 greatly, but slightly opens it. You can check the role ratio (combination ratio) just by doing this. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

When the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the arrangement facing the front when viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame has an inclined surface like the base member 90129A shown in FIG. 94 and is inclined. The display monitor may be attached to the inclined surface of the base member whose surface faces the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. Alternatively, the inclined surface may be an embedded inclined surface formed on the main substrate. Including these, the display monitor may be provided on any of the base members 90129A to 90129I provided with the display monitors 90130A to 90130I described above. Further, when the display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor may be provided directly on the main board and the main board and the display monitor may be housed in the board case, or the display monitor may be housed on the outside of the board case containing the main board. May be provided.

Further, these display monitors may be provided in an adjusting means capable of adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By providing a display monitor as an adjustment means that makes it possible to adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame, adjustments can be made according to the wishes of the playground where the slot machine is installed. It can be carried out. Further, the adjusting means may be a manual type or an electric type.

Although the main board of the slot machine is provided at the back of the outer frame, it may be provided at another position. For example, it may be provided on the right side surface when viewed from the player side inside the outer frame, or may be provided on the left side surface. If it is provided on the right side of the outer frame, it is provided on the side corresponding to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame. Therefore, when the display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor is easy to see. be able to.

Further, in the slot machine as well, the main board may be provided on the back surface side of the door frame as in the pachinko gaming machine. However, in slot machines, there is no equivalent to the game board of pachinko gaming machines, and the door frame is provided with a viewing window for visually recognizing the reel, so the main board is placed at a position avoiding this viewing window. It may be provided. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine as well, instead of providing the main board on the back surface side of the game board, the main board may be provided on the back side of the outer frame or on the left and right sides like a slot machine.

Although an example of displaying the calculated combination ratio (%) and combination (relationship ratio) (%) on a display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided on the main board is shown, the payout control is not limited to this. A display monitor may be provided on another board such as a board, a game board surface, a game machine frame (underframe), or the like. Further, the present invention is not limited to the one provided with a dedicated display monitor for displaying the combination ratio (%) and the combination ratio (relationship ratio) (%), and is used to display an existing display device (for example, an image display device 905, an error). The 7-segment display, the credit display in the slot machine, the payout number display, etc.) may be used to display predetermined information such as the winning combination (%) and the winning combination (continuous ratio) (%).

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 901 and the slot machine, the predetermined information is the combination (continuous ratio) and the combination ratio (cumulative combination (relationship) and cumulative combination ratio), but other information may be used. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, predetermined information may be used as the number of payouts of game balls (= number of prize balls). Further, in the slot machine, the machine discount (= (number of medals to be paid out / number of medals to be inserted) x 100) or the difference between the number of medals to be inserted and the number of medals to be paid out may be set. Further, these numerical values may be used as information calculated for each predetermined number of games and for each predetermined number of medals inserted. Further, predetermined information such as a combination (combination ratio), a combination ratio, and a machine discount may be calculated for a predetermined period, for example, 400 games or 6000 games, and the predetermined information for each number of these games may be displayed. In this case, the predetermined period may be displayed together.

In addition, some slot machines are provided with so-called settings. The setting means a numerical value obtained by dividing the probability in the slot machine into stages, and for example, 6 stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided. Information such as the combination (combination) and combination ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each setting, or when displaying for each setting, the setting is also displayed. May be good.

In addition, some slot machines can execute one game with different numbers of medals inserted (number of bets). For example, one game can be executed by selecting the number of inserted medals (number of bets) for executing one game from one to three and inserting the selected number of medals. In such a slot machine, information such as a winning combination (combination ratio) and a winning combination displayed on a display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each number of inserted sheets (number of bets). There are also slot machines in which the required number of slots (number of bets) differs depending on the gaming state. For example, there is a slot machine in which the required number of inserts is two when the gaming state is in the bonus, and the required number of inserts is three when the gaming state is not in the bonus. In such a slot machine, it may be possible to display information such as a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio displayed on a display monitor as predetermined information for each relationship between the game state and the number of inserted sheets.

Further, in the slot machine, as predetermined information, in addition to the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination calculated based on the ordinary bonus, the special bonus, etc., for example, the gaming state of the slot machine is advantageous except during the bonus. When a section and a non-advantageous section are set, the ratio of the number of medals paid out in these advantageous sections to the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section is displayed. May be good. Further, on the display monitor, as predetermined information, in addition to the winning combination (combination ratio), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as "the number of advantageous section games") and the number of games in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section. The ratio (hereinafter referred to as "advantageous / non-advantageous ratio") may be displayed. The number of continuous games in the advantageous section and the advantageous / non-advantage ratio may be displayed on a dedicated display monitor different from the combination ratio, or may be displayed with a time lag using a common display monitor. good. For example, using a common display monitor, the number of advantageous section games → advantageous / non-advantageous ratio → short-term combination (relationship) → short-term combination ratio → cumulative combination (relationship) → cumulative combination ratio → number of advantageous section games → ... may be displayed in this order.

Further, the number of advantageous section games may be the number of games in the ongoing advantageous section during the continuation of the advantageous section, or may be the number of predetermined games, for example, the number of games per 3000G in the past. Alternatively, it may be the number of games in an advantageous section executed for a predetermined period, for example, on the day. The advantageous / non-advantage ratio may be the number of games between a predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000G in the past, or may be the advantageous / non-advantage ratio for a predetermined period, for example, the day.

Further, the ratio of the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in the non-advantageous section may be displayed. In short, the ratio of the medals paid out in the advantageous section to the medals paid out in the non-advantageous section may be calculated and displayed. There are various ways of thinking about the relationship between the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section. By lowering the payout ratio of medals in the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce the fluctuation of the increase / decrease of medals. Further, in order to prevent the advantageous section from being too long, a predetermined limit may be set on the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined number of games, an upper limit of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section, a machine discount in the advantageous section, and the like. ..

The advantageous section is a section in which the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out (machine discount) to the number of medals inserted is higher than that of the non-advantageous section. This is a section that is advantageous for players because the machine discount is high. As advantageous sections, in addition to bonuses in which ordinary and special characters are operating, replay time (RT), assist time (AT), assist replay time (ART), etc. can be mentioned. Can be done. The machine percentage in the advantageous section often exceeds 100%, but may be less than 100% (so-called reduced RT, etc.). If the machine percentage in the advantageous section is less than 100%, the more the game is continued, the more medals will be consumed. It will be advantageous.

The term “during replay time” means, for example, a state in which the winning probability (winning probability) of the replay is higher than that in the state other than during the replay time. During the replay time, the replay probability is higher than during the non-replay time, so that the consumption of medals can be reduced, so that the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

During the assist time, for example, when a condition device for displaying a winning combination on a valid line is established when a predetermined condition such as a predetermined operation procedure is satisfied, the operation procedure is navigated. .. The operation procedure can be navigated by, for example, navigating the stop order when stopping three reels in a predetermined stop order, or navigating the symbol when stopping and displaying a predetermined symbol. There is. During the assist time, the operation procedure is not navigated except during the assist time, so it is uncertain whether or not the operation procedure is executed, but during the assist time, the operation procedure is navigated. Therefore, as long as the player follows the navigation, the winning combination can be aligned with the valid line. Therefore, the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

The assist replay time is a state in which the replay time and the assist time are executed at the same time. The slot machine is designed so that the game progresses by increasing or decreasing medals by combining these advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections. Here, each advantageous section such as during bonus, replay time, assist time, and assist replay time is more advantageous than the non-advantageous section, but the degree of advantage may be smaller.

The advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information may be all or a part of them. For example, in a slot machine provided with a plurality of advantageous sections as advantageous sections, the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information may be only the advantageous section in which the machine percentage exceeds 100%. Further, even if it is an advantageous section of the same type, it may be changed whether or not it is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information depending on the transition condition. For example, in a slot machine that shifts to a predetermined number of games immediately after the end of the bonus and after the end of the bonus, for example, after 1000 games have elapsed, the replay shifts immediately after the end of the bonus. The ratio displayed as predetermined information is calculated as the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information during the time, and during the replay time shifted after 1000 games have elapsed since the end of the bonus. It may not be an advantageous section for the purpose.

During the replay time that shifts immediately after the end of the bonus, it is a so-called chance replay time that gives the player who has won many medals in the bonus a chance to win more medals. On the other hand, during the replay time, which is shifted after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus period, the player who has lost many medals is in a so-called relief replay time in which the lost medals are relieved. During such a chance replay time, it is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information, and during the salvage replay time, it is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information. You may not do it.

In addition, in calculating other numerical values such as the winning combination (combination ratio), the winning combination, or the machine discount in the slot machine, for the replay, a predetermined number of medals, for example, three medals are inserted and one game is executed. The calculation may be performed assuming that three medals have been paid out. Alternatively, for the re-game, it may be considered that the game has not been played, and other numerical values such as the winning combination (combination ratio), the winning ratio, or the machine discount in the slot machine may be performed.

Further, the ring buffer provided in the RAM 90102 of the pachinko gaming machine stores the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening. On the other hand, in the ring buffer in the slot machine, for example, the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section for each predetermined number of medals to be paid out may be stored, and the number of medals to be paid out may be stored for each predetermined number of games. The number of medals paid out for the section and the non-advantageous section may be stored. The predetermined number of sheets here may be, for example, 500 sheets or 1000 sheets. In addition, the number may be an appropriate number. Further, the predetermined number of games may be 100 games or 400 games. Assuming that the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game is 15, the maximum number of medals to be paid out in 400 games is 6000. Therefore, the maximum number of payouts in 400 games can be stored with a margin in the storage area of 2 bytes.

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub side) of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, one variation is made when the variation is started. An example of transmitting a pattern specification command is shown, but the variation pattern may be notified to the staging control board by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) has the presence or absence of pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of slipping effect, etc. in the first command before reaching (so-called when not reaching). A command (for example, a previous fluctuation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (for example, the previous fluctuation pattern) of the second stop is transmitted, and the second command determines the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, and the like. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (for example, the post-variation pattern) after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. ..

In this case, the effect control board may perform effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the staging control board may select the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode shown by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern specification command.

Only one type of off-design (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. .. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, etc., the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED. Various production operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout-type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but a score is scored based on the occurrence of a prize by enclosing the gaming medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that grants.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 901. , It may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of prize balls (general prize balls) and the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (electric chew prize balls) due to winning in the first starting port (heso) and the general prize opening (sode) to be totaled. Number), the number of special electric prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. However, instead of this format, in the present invention, a format having only two types of total cumulative totals as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 104 can be used. Specifically, it has an RWM9010000 for total cumulative storage and an RWM901001 for total cumulative storage, and is related to winning a game in order to display a joint ratio (synonymous with "combined ratio" in the above embodiment) and a combination ratio. Information (Number of prize balls (general prize balls), number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), special electric prize balls The number (number of attacker prize balls)) is accumulated and stored in RWM9010000 and 901001. Furthermore, by deleting the information related to the winning of the game with the RWM9010000 for total cumulative storage at a predetermined opportunity, the consecutive ratios and the combination ratios calculated based on the total from the deleted timing to the present are the short-term continuous ratio and the combination ratio. It can be displayed as a short-term combination ratio, and the connection ratio and the combination ratio calculated based on the aggregation of the total cumulative storage RWM901001 can be displayed as the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio. With such a configuration, it is sufficient to simply have a plurality of storage areas for accumulating and storing information related to winning a game, and there is no need for a process of storing and updating a certain amount of information such as a ring buffer. It is preferable because it becomes.

As a predetermined trigger, for example, the power can be turned on or off. According to this, the information regarding the winning of the game from the power ON can be aggregated, that is, the daily continuous ratio and the combination ratio can be displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio. Further, in this case, if the RWM901002 is provided to save the cumulative value of the total cumulative storage RWM9010000 when erased, and the cumulative value of the RWM901002 is displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio, the power supply can be used. It is preferable because it is possible to display the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio for one day before the input. By using a real-time clock or the like as a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to accurately total short-term continuous ratios and short-term combination ratios such as one day and one hour.

Further, as a predetermined trigger, it can be a trigger related to the game such as setting change, door opening, or touch sensor detection of the steering wheel. According to this, even if it is not a one-day period like turning on the power, it is a short-term continuous ratio and a short-term in a predetermined period (between setting change and setting change, between door opening and door opening). It is preferable because the role ratio can be displayed. Further, as a predetermined opportunity, the same effect can be obtained even if the number of times the demo screen is displayed or the number of times the big hit reaches the predetermined number of times.
In addition, instead of the configuration having two RWMs such as RWM9010000 and 901001, two areas may be formed in the RWM area of the memory space.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ring buffer format may be replaced with a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 105. Specifically, in the RWM area of the memory space, the area 9020000 that aggregates the information related to the winning of the game and the area B1 that stores the cumulative result of the information related to the winning of the game in the 6000th item are stored. Area B2, 18,000 ... An area B10 for storing the cumulative result of information regarding the winning of the 60000th game is provided. Then, information on the winning of the game is added to and updated in the area 9020000, and on the condition that the number of prize balls reaches the 6000th, the winning of the game accumulated and stored in the area 9020000 is related. Information (Number of prize balls (general prize balls), number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), special electric prize balls The value of the number (number of attacker prize balls)) is stored in the area B1. Further, on condition that the number of prize balls reaches the 12000th, the information stored in the area B1 is moved to the area B2, and the information regarding the winning of the game accumulated in the area 9020000 is transferred to the area B1. Remember. In this way, the information of the area 9020000 is put into the area B1 every 6000th item, and the information of the other areas is shifted. Further, after the number of prize balls reaches the 66000th, the information regarding the winning of the game stored in the area B10 is deleted, and the information in the area B9 is controlled to be transferred to the area B10.

With this configuration, the connection ratio and the combination ratio calculated based on the aggregation of the area 9020000 can be displayed as the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B10 from the area 9020000, the most recent 60,000 pieces (that is, for 10 approximate hours) can be displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B1 from the area 9020000, the connection ratio and the combination ratio of the latest 6000 pieces (that is, for about 1 hour) can be displayed as the short-term combination ratio and the short-term combination ratio.

Further, instead of the configuration as shown in FIG. 105, it is possible to provide only the area B10 as shown in FIG. 106. According to this, it is not possible to obtain a fine connection ratio or role ratio of about 1 hour, but since the short-term connection ratio and short-term combination ratio of the latest 60000 pieces (about 10 hours) can be displayed, the capacity is also large. Less is preferable.

Further, in the above embodiment, the ring buffer format may be replaced with a format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 107. Specifically, it has an RWM9030000 for total cumulative storage and an RWM903001 for total cumulative storage, and information on winning a game (first starting port (heso) and general winning port (sode) in order to display the continuous ratio and the combination ratio. ), The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls)) are accumulated in RWM9030000 and 903001. Try to remember.
The total cumulative storage RWM9030000 accumulates and stores from the first prize ball number, while the total cumulative storage RWM903001 waits without storing the first to 60,000 prize balls. Then, the number of prize balls is accumulated from the 60001th and memorized. According to this, the difference between the total cumulative storage RWM9030000 and the total cumulative storage RWM903001 is 60,000 pieces, and by subtracting the total cumulative storage RWM9030000 from the total cumulative storage RWM9030000, the continuous ratio and the role ratio for 60,000 pieces can be obtained. It can be displayed as a short-term continuous ratio or a short-term combination ratio. Further, the continuous ratio and the combination ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative storage RWM9030000 can be displayed as the cumulative continuous ratio and the cumulative combination ratio.

Further, in the above embodiment, the format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 108 may be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, the cumulative counters 9040000 and 904001 and the total cumulative counter 9040002 are provided, and the total cumulative counter 9040002 includes information on winning a game (first starting port (heso) and general) in order to display the connection ratio and the combination ratio. The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls)) Accumulate and memorize from the first number. The continuous ratio and the combination ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative counter 9040002 can be displayed as the cumulative continuous ratio and the cumulative combination ratio.

On the other hand, two counters, the cumulative counters 9040000 and 904001, display the continuous ratios and combination ratios for 60,000 pieces as short-term continuous ratios and short-term combination ratios. More specifically, first, the cumulative counter 9040000 starts counting from the first prize ball number, and clears when the prize ball reaches the 60,000th place. On the other hand, the cumulative counter 904001 starts counting from the 30,000th and clears when the prize ball reaches the 90,000th. Then, when trying to calculate the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio for 60,000 pieces, for example, in the 30001th to 60000th pieces, the calculation is made based on the total of the cumulative counter 9040000, and the 60001th to 90000th pieces are calculated. Is calculated based on the total of the cumulative counter 904001.
In this way, the cumulative counters 9040000 and 904001 are totaled so that the number of prize balls deviates by the 30,000th, so when trying to display the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term winning combination ratio, at least 30,000 or less. That is, it is possible to display the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio within 5 hours before. According to this, it is preferable because it is possible to suppress the increase in capacity and to display the relatively recent short-term continuous ratio and short-term combination ratio.

(Performance display)
Further, in the gaming machine 901, performance information (described later) can be displayed in place of or in addition to the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio display. Hereinafter, displaying performance information is also referred to as performance display. In the gaming machine 901, for example, a performance display is executed on a display monitor provided on the main board 9011 (display monitor 901130 or the like shown in FIG. 136, which will be described later).

109 and 110 are explanatory views regarding performance information. FIG. 109A shows an example of items of performance information displayed by the gaming machine 901. In the gaming machine 901, as the performance information, as shown in the item name column of FIG. 109 (A), the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value can be displayed. The real-time base value of the item number “bL” is a base value (real-time value during measurement) for every 60,000 outs in the normal state. More specifically, the real-time base value is the number of game balls used (launched) in the normal state, up to 60,000 (0 to 59999), and the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls being measured (0 to 59999). %) Is a value indicating. The previous cumulative base value of the item number "b6" is the base value for every 60,000 outs (cumulative value measured last time) in the normal state. More specifically, the previous cumulative base value is the number of game balls used (launched) in the normal state, and is a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the number of 60,000 game balls measured last time. ..

The normal state in the performance display is a state managed or controlled by the above-mentioned game state flag. Specifically, both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off (however, the state where the round game flag is on is excluded). That is, in the performance display, the state in which all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are off is called a normal state. The probability change flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the probability change state. The time saving flag is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving state is set. The round game flag will be described later.

It was explained that the normal state in the performance display is the state in which the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in progress flag are all off, but the number of prize balls on the other display (main board 9011 side or staging control board 9012 side). In the display related to the above, etc.), the state when all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are off may be set as the normal state. For example, the items B1 to B4 in FIG. 71 may be aggregated when all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are in the off state. Further, for example, in relation to FIG. 77 (B), it has been explained that the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state, but for example, the normal state (probability variation flag, time saving flag, It is also possible to calculate and display the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination ratio in the state where all the flags during the round game are off).

FIG. 109 (B) shows the values aggregated (updated) on the game control microcomputer 90100 side for the performance display. The base value shown in FIG. 109 (A) is calculated based on the value shown in FIG. 109 (B). Specifically, the above base value is based on the number of prize balls by all winning openings for the number of balls (60,000) (the number of winning balls by winning the first general winning opening 9050A, and the winning of the second general winning opening 9050B). Number of prize balls, number of prize balls by winning the 3rd general winning opening 9050C, number of winning balls by winning the 4th general winning opening 9050D, number of winning balls by the 1st starting winning opening, number of winning balls by the 2nd starting winning opening, It is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls by the big winning opening. That is, in the gaming machine 901, each value shown in FIG. 109 (B) is aggregated in the normal state, and the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value shown in FIG. 109 (A) are calculated using the aggregated value. Calculate and display.

FIG. 109 (C) shows a display mode of performance information. In the gaming machine 901, the performance information is displayed on the display monitor provided on the main board 9011 according to the display mode shown in FIG. 109 (C). Specifically, when displaying the real-time base value, the gaming machine 901 displays (blinks or lights up) "bL." In the upper two digits of all four digits to indicate that the real-time base value is used. , A number (%) in the range of "00" to "99" or "---" is displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of all four digits. Although the lower two digits of the four digits are the original real-time base value, the real-time base value may be displayed by displaying all four digits including the upper two digits. When displaying the previous cumulative base value, the gaming machine 901 displays (blinks or lights up) "b6." In the upper two digits of all four digits to indicate that it is the previous cumulative base value. A number (%) in the range of "00" to "99" or "---" is displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of all four digits. In addition, although the lower two digits of all four digits are the original previous cumulative base value, the display of all four digits including the upper two digits may be referred to as the previous cumulative base value.

FIG. 110 (A) shows a section (aggregation section, evaluation section) according to the total number of outs (total number of shots). The “factory shipment test section” in FIG. 110 (A) is a section in which the total number of outs is less than 300. The "first section" is the first section of each section managed for each total number of outs of 60,000 (0 to 59999). The "second section" is the second section of each of the above sections. The "third section" is the third section of each of the above sections. In FIG. 110 (A), the following sections are omitted.

FIGS. 110 (B) to 110 (F) show display modes of performance information according to each section (and the number in the section). In each of FIGS. 110 (B) to 110 (F), the left side is the display mode of the real-time base value, the right side is the display mode of the previous cumulative base value, and the arrows pointing in both directions in the center indicate the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value. Indicates that it will switch.

FIG. 110 (B) shows a display mode of performance information displayed in the factory shipment test section shown in FIG. 110 (A). In the factory shipment test section, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), the upper two digits are "bL. (Blinking)" and the lower two digits are "--- (lit)", and the upper two digits. The previous cumulative base value, in which the two digits are "b6. (Blinking)" and the lower two digits are "--- (lit)", is displayed alternately every 5 seconds. The radial highlights shown in the upper two digits "bL." On the left side of FIG. 110 (B) and the upper two digits "b6." On the right side are blinking. It shows that. The same applies to FIGS. 110 (C), 110 (D), 110 (E), 131, and 132.

FIG. 110 (C) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 0 to 5999 in the first section shown in FIG. 110 (A). When the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the first section, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the upper two digits are "bL. (Blinking)" and the lower two digits are numerical values. The real-time base value of (%) lighting (“32 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 110 (C)) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Blinking)” and the lower two digits are “－－ (. (Lighting) ”is displayed alternately every 5 seconds with the previous cumulative base value.

FIG. 110 (D) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 6000 to 59999 in the first section shown in FIG. 110 (A). When the total number of outs is from 6000 to 59999 in the first section, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), the upper two digits are "bL. (Lighting)" and the lower two digits are numerical values. The real-time base value of (%) lighting (“33 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 110 (D)) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Blinking)” and the lower two digits are “－－ (. (Lighting) ”is displayed alternately every 5 seconds with the previous cumulative base value.

FIG. 110 (E) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 0 to 5999 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 110 (A). When the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the second and subsequent sections, the upper two digits are "bL. (Blinking)" and the lower two digits are as shown in FIG. 110 (E). The real-time base value of the numerical value (%) lighting (“34 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 110 (E)) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Lighting)” and the lower two digits are numerical values (%). ) Is lit (“33 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 110 (E)), and the previous cumulative base value is alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

FIG. 110 (F) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 6000 to 59999 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 110 (A). When the total number of outs is from 6000 to 59999 in the second and subsequent sections, the upper two digits are "bL. (Lighting)" and the lower two digits are as shown in FIG. 110 (F). The real-time base value of the numerical value (%) lighting (“34 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 110 (F)) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Lighting)” and the lower two digits are numerical values (%). ) Is lit (“33 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 110 (F)), and the previous cumulative base value is alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

Hereinafter, the configuration and the like of the gaming machine 901 in the case of displaying the performance will be described. FIG. 111 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 112 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 111. The gaming machine 901 for displaying the performance described above may have, for example, the configurations shown in FIGS. 111 and 112.

In FIG. 111, reference numeral 90700 near the tip of the guide rail (near the exit of the game ball) is a launch ball detector provided with a launch detection sensor 90700A (see FIG. 112). In FIG. 111, an example in which the launch ball detector 90700 is arranged near the exit of the guide rail is shown, but at another position of the guide rail (for example, near the center of the guide rail (for example, at the same height as the normal symbol 9020). The launching ball detector 90700 may be arranged at a position (position), a position closer to the hitting ball launching device of the guide rail (near the entrance), etc.). Although some of the appearances of the game effect lamp 909, the operation button 9030, etc. are different, the same components as those in FIG. 27 are designated by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 27 in FIG. 111. ) Will be omitted.

In FIG. 112, reference numeral 901130 is a display monitor that displays performance information. Reference numeral 90700A is a launch detection sensor. In FIG. 112, the same configurations as those in FIG. 75 are designated by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 75, and the description of the configurations (the same configurations as those in FIG. 75) will be omitted.

Subsequently, the operation of the gaming machine 901 and the like in the case of displaying the performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 120.

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing an example of special figure processing (also referred to as special symbol process processing). In the special drawing process shown in FIG. 113, the CPU 90103 executes a state control process (step S901101A). The state control process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes a start winning determination process (step S901102). In the start prize determination process, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a start prize based on the detection signals from, for example, the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, and determines whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed. , Set the transmission of various commands (holding memory count notification command, start winning judgment result specification command, etc.).

Following the start winning determination process of step S901102, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes of steps S901110 to S901117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102). And execute.

The special symbol normal processing in step S901110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B based on the presence or absence of the reserved data (reserved storage). In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result is set to "big hit" by using the random number for determining the special symbol display result, and when it is decided to be "big hit", the random number for determining the big hit type is used. Which big hit type to use and the confirmed special symbol in the special diagram game are determined. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, when it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit", the big hit flag provided in RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in RAM 90102) is set to the on state and "big hit". Then, the value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control buffer setting unit in the RAM 90102). In the special symbol normal processing, for example, when a confirmed special symbol is determined, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1".

The variation pattern setting process in step S901111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In the variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types is performed using a random number for determining the variation pattern. In the variation pattern setting process, for example, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process in step S901112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In the special symbol variation process, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B perform a process of changing the special symbol, a process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the like. .. In the special symbol variation process, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing in step S901113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop and display the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol for a predetermined time (special symbol confirmed display time). And so on. When the special symbol confirmation display time has elapsed in the special symbol stop processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0" or "4" with reference to the jackpot flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is on (when the confirmed special symbol is a jackpot symbol), the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off, and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (when the confirmed special symbol is a missed symbol), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S901114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the process of waiting until the waiting time until the end of the execution time of the fanfare effect (also referred to as the big hit start effect) executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 (the big hit start effect waiting time) elapses. Or, settings are made to open the big prize opening after the waiting time for the production at the start of the big hit has elapsed. In the big hit opening pre-processing, if the setting for opening the big winning opening is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S901115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the process during the opening of the big hit, the process of determining whether or not the condition for returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state is satisfied (the elapse of the upper limit time for opening the large winning opening or the winning of the maximum number of prizes) is satisfied, and after the condition is satisfied. Settings are made to return the big prize opening to the closed state. When the setting for returning the big prize opening to the closed state is made in the process during the big hit opening process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S901116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the big hit opening post-processing, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached a predetermined number of times is performed. In the jackpot opening post-processing, if the number of round executions has not reached the specified number of times, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and if the number of times has reached the specified number of times, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "7". Update to.

The jackpot end process of step S901117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a process of waiting until the end of the execution time of the ending effect (also referred to as the effect at the end of the jackpot) executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 (waiting time for the effect at the end of the jackpot) elapses, etc. Is done. In the big hit end process, when the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing an example of the state control process executed in step S901101A of FIG. 113. In the state control process shown in FIG. 114, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S902001). When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S902001 (step S902001; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) is on. (Step S902002). As described above, the round gaming flag is one of the flags that defines the normal state. If the round gaming flag is on in step S902002 (step S902002; YES), the state control process ends.

On the other hand, if the round gaming flag is off in step S902002 (step S902002; NO), is the CPU 90103 turned on the state change switching waiting flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102)? It is determined whether or not (step S902003). The state change switching waiting flag is a flag provided to set the state change switching waiting time (described later) only once when the round game in progress flag is off.

If the state change switching waiting flag is off in step S902003 (step S902003; NO), the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting time (step S902004). Specifically, the CPU 90103 is set as a predetermined timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value, which is a storage value of the state changing switching waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the status change switching wait time. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S902004 is shorter than the big hit start effect waiting time set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 115). Although the details will be described later, the time T1 in FIG. 121 is the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit, and the time T2 in FIG. 121 is the state change switching waiting time.

Following step S902004, the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting flag to the on state (step S902005). Then, the state control process is terminated.

If the state change switching waiting flag is turned on in step S902003 (step S902003; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902006). In the process of step S902006, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set has timed out (whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0) in step S902004. Just do it. If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed in step S902006 (step S902006; NO), the state control process ends.

If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S902006 (step S902006; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the state change switching waiting flag and puts it in the off state (step S902007), and turns the round gaming flag on. Set (step S902008).

Following step S902008, the CPU 90103 makes settings for ending the time saving state and the probability change state (step S902009). In the process of step S902009, the CPU 90103 executes a process of clearing the time saving flag and the probability change flag to turn it off. Further, in the process of step S902009, when a value (a value other than 0) is set in the probability variation count value which is the stored value of the probability variation counter provided in the RAM 90102 (the game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102). May execute a process of initializing the probability variation count value to "0". Further, in the process of step S902009, when a value (value other than 0) is set in the time reduction count value, which is the storage value of the time reduction counter provided in the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102). May execute the process of initializing the time reduction count value to "0". The time reduction counter is a counter for counting the number of times (execution number or remaining number) of the special figure game in which the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed. The probability variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times (execution count or remaining number of times) of the special figure game for which probability variation control is performed.

Following the process of step S902009, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902015). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the side of the staging control board 9012. Then, the state control process is terminated.

In the state control process shown in FIG. 114, the game state specification command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state changes or does not change, but when the game state changes (for example, a time saving state or The game state specification command may be transmitted only when the probability change state is changed to the normal state). On the side of the staging control board 9012, the current game state is specified based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, but instead of this, the current game state is specified based on the hit start designation command or the like. May be specified. The same applies to the state control process shown in FIG. 127.

When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S902001 (step S902001; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S902010). If the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S902010 (step S902010; NO), the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S902010 (step S902010; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S902011). If the round gaming flag is off in step S902011 (step S902002; NO), the state control process ends.

If the round gaming flag is on in step S902011 (step S902011; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the round gaming flag to turn it off (step S902013).

Following step S902013, the CPU 90103 makes settings for starting a time saving state or a probable change state (step S902014). In the process of step S902014, the CPU 90103 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag to the ON state according to the jackpot type (value stored in the jackpot type buffer; the jackpot type buffer value), and counts the number of probability changes according to the jackpot type. Set the initial value for the value and the time reduction count value. For example, in the case of a probability variation jackpot in which the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue until the next jackpot after the end of the jackpot, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state. Also, for example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot in which the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit or the end of 100 special figure games after the end of the big hit, the probabilistic change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. Set, 100 is set as the initial value in the probability variation count value, and 100 is set as the initial value in the time reduction count value. Also, for example, after the end of the big hit, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit or the 30 times special figure game is completed, and after the 31st special figure game, until the next big hit. In the case of a probability change jackpot where the time reduction state continues until the 100 special figure games are completed, the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, the probability change count value is set to 30 as the initial value, and the time reduction number is set. Set the count value to 100 as the initial value. Also, for example, in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot where the time saving state continues until the next big hit or the end of 100 special figure games after the end of the big hit, the time saving flag is set to the on state and the time saving number of times. Set the count value to 100 as the initial value. Also, for example, in the case of a non-probability change jackpot that does not enter the probability change state or the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot, nothing is done (the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are not set to the on state, and the probability change number count value is also time reduction. Do not set a value for the count value).

Following step S902014, the CPU 90103 executes the process of step S902015 described above, and ends the state control process.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing executed in step S901113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 115, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the special figure confirmation display flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit is on (step S902291). Here, the flag for confirming the special figure is set to the ON state by the process of step S902295 corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game is derived and displayed.

When the flag for confirming the special figure is off in step S902291 (step S902291; NO), the CPU 90103 makes a setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step S902292). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902293). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 sets the special symbol confirmation display time, which is the stop display time of the confirmation special symbol (step S902294). Specifically, the CPU 90103 is predetermined as a timer initial value of the special figure confirmation display time timer value which is a stored value of the special figure confirmation display time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the special figure confirmation display time.

Following the process of step S902294, the CPU 90103 sets the special figure confirmation display flag to the ON state (step S902295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is on in step S902291 (step S902291; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S902296). In the process of step S902296, for example, if it is determined in step S902294 whether or not the special figure confirmation display time timer for which the timer initial value is set has timed out (whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer value has become 0). good. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S902296 (step S902296; NO), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S902296 (step S902296; YES), after clearing the special figure confirmation display in-display flag to the off state (step S902297), whether or not the jackpot flag is on is determined. Determination (step S902298). If the jackpot flag is on (step S902298; YES), the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step S902299). Specifically, the CPU 90103 uses the CPU 90103 as the timer initial value of the jackpot start effect wait time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start effect wait time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the production waiting time at the start of a predetermined jackpot. Following the process of step S902299, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting the hit start designation command from the main board 9011 to the staging control board 9012 (step S902300). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the jackpot flag to turn it off (step S902301), and sets the jackpot start flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) to the on state (step S902302). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S902305), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the jackpot flag is off in step S902298 (step S902298; NO), it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state or the probability change state (step S902306). In the process of step S902306, the CPU 90103 updates each count value according to whether or not a value (a value other than 0) is set in the probability variation count value or the time reduction count value, and changes the time reduction state or the probability variation state. Determine whether to terminate. For example, when the value is set in the time reduction count value (for example, the special figure game that is digested after the end of the non-probability variable jackpot that the time reduction state continues until the next big hit or the completion of 100 special figure games. (When is 100 times or less, etc.), the time reduction count value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the updated time reduction count value matches the time reduction end determination value (for example, "0"), and when the updated time reduction count value does not match the time reduction end determination value. Determines not to end the time saving state. Further, for example, when the values are set in the probability change count value and the time reduction count value (for example, the probability change state and the time reduction state continue until the next big hit or the 100 special figure games are completed. When the special figure game digested after the end of the big hit is 100 times or less), the probability variation count value is subtracted by 1 and updated, and the time reduction count value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the updated probability variation count value matches the probability variation end determination value (for example, "0"), and when the updated probability variation count value does not match the probability variation end determination value. Determines that the probabilistic state is not terminated, and if it matches, it is determined that the probabilistic state is terminated, and whether or not the updated time reduction count value matches the time reduction end determination value (for example, "0"). Judgment is made, and if the time reduction count value after the update does not match the time reduction end determination value, it is determined that the time reduction state is not terminated. When the CPU 90103 determines to end the probabilistic change state, it clears the probabilistic change flag and puts it in the off state, and when it determines to end the time saving state, it clears the time saving flag and puts it in the off state.

Following the process of step S902306, a setting for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is made (step S902307). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the side of the staging control board 9012. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (initialized) to "0" (step S902308), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 115, the game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state changes or does not change, but when the game state changes (for example, a time saving state). Or when the probabilistic state changes to the normal state, etc.), the game state specification command may be transmitted. On the side of the effect control board 9012, the current game state is specified based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, but instead of this, the effect control is performed independently of the side of the main board 9011. The current gaming state may be specified by counting the number of times the variable display is executed on the side of the board 9012.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing executed in step S901114 of FIG. 113. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 116, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is on (step S902131). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state corresponding to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop processing (step S902302 in FIG. 115).

If the big hit start flag is not turned on in step S902131 (step S902131; NO), the big winning opening determination process (see FIG. 118) is executed (step S90220), and the process proceeds to step S902138. In this way, by executing the big winning opening determination processing in the big hit opening post-processing in step S901114 in addition to the big hit opening processing in step S901115, the winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value is suitably detected. be able to. For example, over-winning can be suitably detected during the next open waiting (while step S902138 (YES)). The large winning opening determination process will be described later.

In addition, although it was explained that the addition of the number of prize balls when the game balls have won more than the predetermined number of balls in the large prize opening per unit time is excluded, the over prize is not excluded. In other words, even if there is a prize that exceeds the above-mentioned "upper limit judgment value of prize", if the number of prizes in excess is within the range generally assumed as over prize (for example, up to about +3), the prize ball (actual payout). , Reflected in performance information). Exclusion from the addition of the number of prize balls is due to fraudulent activity, and the excess number of prizes is outside the range generally assumed as over prize.

If the jackpot start flag is on in step S902131 (step S902131; YES), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start staging waiting time has elapsed (step S902132). In the process of step S902132, for example, whether or not the jackpot start effect wait time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process has timed out (the jackpot start effect wait time timer value becomes 0). Whether or not it is) may be determined.

If the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit has not elapsed (step S902132; NO), the big hit opening pre-processing is terminated.

If the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit has elapsed (step S902132; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the flag at the start of the big hit (step S902134). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the large winning opening opening number counter (step S902135). Specifically, the count value for the number of times the large winning opening is opened is initialized to "1". Subsequently, the CPU 90103 reads the jackpot type buffer value (step S902136), and sets the release control pattern corresponding to the read jackpot type buffer value (step S902137). That is, the opening control pattern of the special variable winning ball device 907 (big winning opening) is set according to the big hit type determined in the special symbol normal processing. In the opening control pattern, for example, a large winning opening opening upper limit time for each round is set.

Following the process of step S902137 or the process of step S90220, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the next release standby is in progress (step S902138). That is, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval period until the big winning opening is opened as the next round. In the process of step S902138, for example, whether or not the round start waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set has timed out in step S902366 of the big hit opening post-processing (whether or not the round start waiting time timer value has become 0). Should be determined. If the next opening standby is in progress (step S902138; YES), that is, if the interval period has not ended, the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is not in the next opening standby (step S902138; NO), that is, when the interval period ends, the CPU 90103 controls the start of opening the large winning opening (step S902139). For example, the CPU 90103 sets the opening time for opening the large winning opening based on the opening control pattern set in step S902137 and the count value in the large winning opening opening counter, and the large winning opening is opened. To set. Specifically, in the process of step S902139, for example, the CPU 90103 steps as the timer initial value of the open time timer value which is the stored value of the open time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). The upper limit time for opening the large winning opening of the corresponding round in the opening control pattern set in S902137 (the upper limit time for opening the opening state) is set. Further, in the process of step S902139, the solenoid 9028 for the big winning door may be set to be turned on by transmitting a solenoid drive signal via the solenoid circuit 90111 or the like. In the case of the first round (when the big hit pre-opening process is executed after the special symbol stop process), the round start waiting time (interval period) is not set (because it is zero), so the step. In the process of S902138, it is immediately determined that the next release waiting is not in progress.

Following the process of step S902139, the CPU 90103 sets the effect control board 9012 to send a notification command during the opening of the winning opening (step S902140). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" (step S902141), and the jackpot opening preprocessing is terminated.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process executed in step S901115 of FIG. 113. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 117, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the jackpot opening upper limit time has elapsed (step S902121). If the upper limit time for opening the large winning opening has not elapsed (step S902121; NO), the large winning opening determination process is executed (step S90220).

118 shows the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S901114) of FIG. 116, the jackpot opening processing of FIG. 117 (step S901115), the jackpot opening post-processing of FIG. 119 (step S901116), and the jackpot end processing of FIG. 120 (step S901117). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening determination process executed in.

In the large winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 118, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the detection signal transmitted from the count switch 9023 is in the ON state (step S90221). If the count switch 9023 is not on (step S90221; NO), the large winning opening determination process is terminated.

When the count switch 9023 is on (step S90221; YES), the transmission setting of the big prize opening prize notification command for notifying the effect control board 9012 of the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is made. (Step S90222). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is “5”, which is a value corresponding to the processing during the jackpot opening (step S90223). If the value of the special figure process flag is not "5", which is a value corresponding to the processing during the opening of the big hit (step S90223; NO), the large winning opening determination processing is terminated.

If the value of the special figure process flag is "5" corresponding to the processing during the jackpot opening (step S90223; YES), the winning number counter provided in the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102) is stored. The value is updated so that the winning number count value is added by 1 (step S90224). Then, the large winning opening judgment process is completed. When the process of step S90224 is performed in the large winning opening determination process, the prize ball payout process is executed in the prize ball process. Further, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), if all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are in the off state, the number of prize balls by the big winning opening is updated in relation to the performance display. .. However, as shown in FIG. 114, during the round game, at least during the period from the start of the first round (closed → open of the big winning door) to the end of the final round (opening → closing of the big winning door). Since the flag is on instead of off, the number of prize balls by the above-mentioned big winning opening is not updated during the period.

Return to FIG. 117. Following the large winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 118, it is determined whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined winning upper limit determination value (for example, “10”) (step S902126). If the winning upper limit determination value has not been reached (step S902126; NO), the process of opening the jackpot is terminated.

On the other hand, when the upper limit time for opening the large winning opening has elapsed in step S902121 (step S902121; YES), or when the upper limit determination value for winning is reached in step S902126 (step S902126; YES), the opening of the large winning opening is opened. Controls the end of (step S902127). That is, the CPU 90103 determines that the current round game is finished, and sets the large winning opening to be closed. For example, it may be set to stop the transmission of the drive signal to the solenoid 9082. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the winning number counter and initializes the winning number count value to "0" (step S902128). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" (step S902129), and the processing during the jackpot opening process is terminated.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening post-processing executed in step S901116 of FIG. 113. In the big hit opening post-processing shown in FIG. 119, the CPU 90103 first executes the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 118 (step S90220). In this way, by executing the big winning opening determination processing in the big hit opening post-processing in step S901116 in addition to the big hit opening processing in step S901115, the winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value is suitably detected. be able to.

After executing the large winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 118, the CPU 90103 updates the large winning opening opening count value by 1 (step S902364). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the updated large winning opening opening count value has reached the maximum value (step S902365).

In step S902365, the above-mentioned "maximum value" to be compared with the updated large winning opening opening count value is a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. That is, the large winning opening opening count value to be compared with the above "maximum value" is the one after the update (step S902364), and the initial value of the large winning opening opening count value is "1" (FIG. 116). S902135), the above "maximum value" needs to be a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit of the number of rounds. For example, in the case of a 6-round jackpot (when the maximum number of rounds is 6), the above "maximum value" is "7", and in the case of a 16-round jackpot (when the maximum number of rounds is 16). The above "maximum value" is "17". It should be noted that the "maximum value" may be compared with the large winning opening opening count value before the update instead of the large winning opening opening count value after the update, and compared with the large winning opening opening count value before the update. In that case, the "maximum value" may be set as the upper limit of the number of rounds.

If the count value for the number of times the large winning opening is opened is other than the maximum value (step S902365; NO), the round start waiting time (interval time) is set (step S902366). Specifically, for example, the CPU 90103 is set as a predetermined timer initial value of the round start waiting time timer value, which is a stored value of the round start waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the round start wait time.

Following step S902366, the CPU 90103 sets the effect control board 9012 to send a notification command after opening the winning opening (step S902367). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (step S902368), and the post-processing after opening the big hit is completed. In this way, until it is determined by the process of step S902365 that the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened after the update is the maximum value, the processes of steps S901114 to S901116 shown in FIG. 113 and the like are repeatedly executed. It is possible to execute multiple rounds in which the big winning opening is opened in the big hit game state. Further, by setting the round start waiting time in the process of step S902366, the process of step S901114 shown in FIG. 113 and the like waits for the next opening until the round start waiting time elapses (FIG. 116). Step S902138; YES), the next round can be started with a desired interval period.

If the count value for the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the maximum value in step S902365 (step S902365; YES), the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit is set (step S902369). Specifically, for example, the CPU 90103 is a timer initial value of the jackpot end-time effect wait time timer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot end-time effect wait time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). As a result, the effect waiting time at the end of a predetermined big hit is set.

Following step S902369, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902370). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" (step S902371), and the post-processing after opening the big hit is completed. In this way, by setting the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit in the process of step S902369, according to the end of the ending effect executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 (step S902321; YES in FIG. 120), FIG. The special symbol normal processing of step S901110 shown in 113 can be executed.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S901117 of FIG. 113. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 120, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed (step S902321). In the processing of step S902321, for example, whether or not the jackpot end-time effect waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S902369 of the jackpot opening post-processing has timed out (the jackpot end-time effect waiting time timer value becomes 0). Whether or not it is) may be determined. If the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has not elapsed in step S902321 (step S902321; NO), the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 118 is executed (step S90220), and the big hit end process ends. In this way, by executing the big prize opening determination process in the big hit end process of step S901117 in addition to the big hit opening process of step S901115, the winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value is suitably detected. Can be done.

When the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed in step S902321 (step S902321; YES), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" (step S902325), and the execution of the big hit end process is terminated.

The operation and the like of the gaming machine 901 in the case of displaying the performance have been described above with reference to FIGS. 113 to 120, but according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 113 to 120, a big hit as a definite special symbol in the special figure game. After the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, but the round gaming flag is turned on before the opening of the first round. Hereinafter, it will be described in detail.

(A) End of fanfare effect → First opening of special variable winning ball device After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (special symbol confirmation display time), the CPU 90103 performs the execution time of the fanfare effect in the special symbol stop process. The waiting time until the end of (step S902299 at the start of the big hit) is set (step S902299 in FIG. 115), and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Further, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 90103 opens the big winning opening after the lapse of the waiting time (step S902132 in FIG. 116; YES) (step S902139 in FIG. 116). That is, the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the closed state before the end of the fanfare effect, and is in the first open state after the end of the fanfare effect.

(B) Set the round gaming flag to the on state → End of fanfare effect When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting time (FIG. 114). Step S902004), after the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902006 in FIG. 114; YES), the round gaming flag is set to the on state (step S902008 in FIG. 114). Then, as described above, the state change switching waiting time is shorter than the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit (execution time of the fanfare effect). That is, the flag during the round game is turned on before the end of the fanfare effect.

From the above (A) and (B), the flag during the round game is set to the ON state → the end of the fanfare effect → the first opening of the special variable winning ball device 907. That is, the flag during the round game is turned on before the opening of the first round.

Further, as described above, the game state in which the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls is collected for performance display is referred to as a normal state, and the normal state is specifically a probability change flag, a time saving flag, and a round game. All of the middle flags are in the off state (see FIG. 109). Therefore, at least when the round game flag is on, it does not correspond to the normal state, and at least when the round game flag is on, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not collected for performance display. That is, at least when the round game flag is on, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not reflected in the performance display.

According to the above (A) and (B), since the round game flag is turned on before the opening of the first round, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are set from a certain stage before the opening of the first round at the latest. The number is not reflected in the performance display (it is not reflected more accurately). In addition, the expression "at the latest" is when the game state during execution of the special figure game before the special figure game in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is a probability change state or a time reduction state (that is, at least the probability change flag or the time reduction flag). (When one is on), a stage before the above "a certain stage before the opening of the first round" (for example, a stage during execution of the special figure game before the special figure game in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), etc. This is because the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not already reflected in the performance display.

FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state change switching waiting time and the like. In the figure, the direction from left to right shows the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom shows the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 is, in order from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the launch ball detector 90700 (launch detection sensor 90700A), and the state (open state) of the special variable winning ball device 907 (large winning door). , Closed state), the winning timing to the big winning opening (the detection timing of the game ball by the count switch 9023) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 121, the jackpot symbol (shown as the confirmed decorative symbol “777” in the image display device 905 in the same figure) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special diagram game (more details are shown in FIG. 115). When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed) and the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit (shown as a fanfare effect in the figure) is completed, the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened for the first time (the first R is opened in the figure). (Illustrated as) is performed. The jackpot effect in the image display device 905 is an effect performed during the execution of the jackpot opening process (FIG. 117). In addition to the effect performed during the execution of the jackpot opening process (FIG. 117), the effect performed during the execution of the jackpot opening post-processing (FIG. 119) may also be referred to as a jackpot effect.

The timing t1 shown at the lower part of FIG. 121 is the timing at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special diagram game. The timing t3 is the timing at which the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit ends and the first opening is performed in the special variable winning ball device 907. The time T1 between the timing t1 and the timing t3 is the jackpot start effect waiting time set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 115). The timing t2 and the like will be described later.

Further, FIG. 121 schematically shows a state in which three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) launched by the hit ball launcher are detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A. The game ball a is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t1 (for example, during reach production, etc.), and is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, the big winning door that is closed). A game ball, etc. that has flowed down the front side). The game ball b is a game ball that is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at timing t2, picked up by the big winning door at timing t3 (the moment when it is opened), and detected by the count switch 9023. The game ball c is a game ball that is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at a timing slightly later than the timing t2, picked up by the winning door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and detected by the count switch 9023.

The time T2 between the timing t1 and the timing t2 is the state change switching waiting time set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 114). The game ball b detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at the timing t2 flows down the game area 9010 at the slowest possible flow speed after being detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A, and the big winning door immediately after opening. It is assumed that the game ball is picked up by the user and detected by the count switch 9023. In other words, the game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at a timing earlier than the timing t2 is not detected by the count switch 9023. That is, the timing t2 is the earliest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening can be detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A.

That is, since there is a game ball detected by the count switch 9023 among the game balls detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A before the opening of the big winning door (for example, during the execution period of the fanfare effect) (for example, the game). (A game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at any timing of the time T3 like the ball c), even if the game ball is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A before the opening of the grand prize opening door, the count switch 9023 In order not to reflect the detectionable game ball on the performance display, the round game in-game flag is set to the ON state at the timing t2 (when the time T2 has elapsed) (step S902008 in FIG. 114).

It should be noted that, although it is tentative, when the round game in-game flag is set to the ON state at the timing t3 (when the performance display is not reflected from the opening timing of the big prize opening door), for example, at the time T3 like the game ball c. The game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at any timing is reflected in the performance display as the number of hit balls, but is not reflected in the performance display as the number of prize balls when a prize is won in the big winning opening. Inconsistencies will occur and accurate performance display will not be possible. On the other hand, if the round gaming flag is set to the ON state at the timing t2 (when the time T2 has elapsed), the above-mentioned problem is solved.

It should be noted that the timing t2 has been described as the earliest timing in which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening can be detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A, but the timing t2 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t2 may be the average timing when the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A, or the timing is later than the average timing. You may. That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T2) set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 114) takes into consideration the flow time of the game ball (launching ball detector 90700 → special variable winning ball device 907). It should be. However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned earliest timing as the timing t2. The same applies to FIG. 124.

[Modification example of launcher detector]
FIG. 122 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 123 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 122. The gaming machine 901 for displaying the performance may have the configurations shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, for example.

In FIG. 122, reference numeral 90701 above the first passage gate 9041A is a first launch ball detector comprising a first launch detection sensor 90701A (see FIG. 123). All the game balls that pass through the left game area 9010A pass through the first launch ball detector 90701. That is, the first launch ball detector 90701 (first launch detection sensor 90701A) detects all the game balls that pass through the left game area 9010A. Reference numeral 90702 above the second passage gate 9041B is a second launch ball detector comprising a second launch detection sensor 90702A (see FIG. 123). All the game balls that pass through the right game area 9010B pass through the second launch ball detector 90702. That is, the second launch ball detector 90702 (second launch detection sensor 90702A) detects all the game balls that pass through the right game area 9010B.

FIG. 122 shows an example in which the launch ball detectors 90701 and 90702 are arranged above the passage gates 9041A and 9041B, but if all the game balls can be detected, other positions (for example, the passage gates 9041A and 9041B) are shown. The launcher detectors 90701 and 90702 may be arranged below (such as below). In FIG. 122, the same configuration as that of FIG. 111 is designated by the same reference numeral as that of FIG. 111, and the description of the configuration (the same configuration as that of FIG. 111) will be omitted.

In FIG. 123, reference numeral 90701A is a first launch detection sensor. Reference numeral 90702A is a second emission detection sensor. In FIG. 123, the same configuration as that of FIG. 112 is designated by the same reference numeral as that of FIG. 112, and the description of the configuration (the same configuration as that of FIG. 112) will be omitted.

The operation shown in FIGS. 113 to 120 is also applied to the gaming machine 901 having the configurations shown in FIGS. 122 and 123. In other words, the special figure processing in the case of displaying the performance in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, and the special drawing processing in the case of displaying the performance in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 122 and 123. It is common with figure processing.

FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 901 having the configurations shown in FIGS. 122 and 123. In FIG. 124, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 is, in order from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the launch ball detector 90701, 90702 (launch detection sensors 90701A, 90702A), and the special variable winning ball device 907 (large winning door). The state (open state, closed state) and the winning timing to the large winning opening (the detection timing of the game ball by the count switch 9023) are shown.

Further, in FIG. 124, three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) launched by the hit ball launcher are detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) and the like. It is schematically shown how it is done. The game ball a is detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t1, and is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, is in a closed state). A game ball, etc. that has flowed down the front side of the big prize opening door). The game ball b is detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) at timing t2, picked up by the big prize opening door at timing t3 (the moment when it is opened), and detected by the count switch 9023. It is a game ball to be played. The game ball c is detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and is picked up by the winning door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3. It is a game ball detected by the count switch 9023.

The first launch ball detector 90701 (first launch detection sensor 90701A) and the second launch ball detector 90702 (second launch detection sensor 90702A) can detect the game ball at the same time, but detect the game ball at the same time. Even in this case, it is possible to capture (count) each of the game balls detected at the same time as the number of hit balls. For example, for one of them, the execution timing of the process (process to be counted) executed after the detection may be shifted, and the game balls detected at the same time may be captured as the number of hit balls.

Since the arrangement position of the launch ball detector 90700 shown in FIG. 111 and the arrangement position of the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 shown in FIG. 122 are different, they are shown in FIGS. 121 and 124. As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the time until the game ball launched by the hit ball launcher is detected by the first launch ball detector 90701 (or the second launch ball detector 90702) is shown in FIGS. 111 and 123. In the configuration of FIG. 112, it is longer than the time until the game ball launched by the hit ball launcher is detected by the launch ball detector 90700. Further, in the configurations of FIGS. 122 and 123, the time until the game ball detected by the first launch ball detector 90701 (or the second launch ball detector 90702) reaches the arrangement position of the special variable winning ball device 907 is determined. In the configurations of FIGS. 111 and 112, the time required for the game ball detected by the launch ball detector 90700 to reach the placement position of the special variable winning ball device 907 is shorter than that of the time required.

Therefore, the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 124) set in the case of the configurations of FIGS. 122 and 123 is the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 124) set in the case of the configurations of FIGS. 111 and 112. Time is longer than T2).

The first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 (or the parts (referred to as parts A) including the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702) are attached to the game board 902. On the other hand, it may be removable. Further, the game board 902 may be composed of a component A and one or more components other than the component A, and the component A may be detachable from one or more components other than the component A. For example, in FIG. 122, the portion including the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 (the portion above the broken line P in the figure) may be removable.

[Modification using an out-ball detector]
FIG. 125 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 126 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 125. The gaming machine 901 for displaying the performance may have the configurations shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, for example.

In FIG. 125, reference numeral 90710 in the broken line is an out-ball detector including the out-ball detection sensor 90710A. The out-ball detector 90710 is arranged at a position invisible from the front side, but for convenience of explanation, it is shown by using a broken line in FIG. 125. Further, reference numeral 9052 is an out port. Enter the winning openings (1st general winning opening 9050A, 2nd general winning opening 9050B, 3rd general winning opening 9050C, 4th general winning opening 9050D, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening) The missing game ball is taken into the out port 9052.

The out-ball detector 90710 detects all the game balls launched into the game area 9010 by the hit ball launcher. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 9010 has a winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A, 2nd general winning opening 9050B, 3rd general winning opening 9050C, 4th general winning opening 9050D, 1st starting winning opening, Either the player enters the second starting winning slot (the second starting winning slot, the large winning slot), or the player enters the out slot 9052 without entering the winning slot. Both the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball that has been taken into the out opening 9052 are finally collected in one path on the back surface (or inside) of the game board 902. Since the out-ball detector 90710 is arranged on the above path, it detects all the game balls launched into the game area 9010 by the hit ball launcher.

FIG. 125 shows an example in which the out ball detector 90710 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction (below the out opening), but if all the game balls can be detected, another position (for example, the right side in the left-right direction) is shown. The out-ball detector 90710 may be arranged closer to the left side in the left-right direction, etc.). In FIG. 125, the same configuration as that of FIG. 111 is designated by the same reference numeral as that of FIG. 111, and the description of the configuration (the same configuration as that of FIG. 111) will be omitted.

In FIG. 126, reference numeral 90710A is an out-ball detection sensor. In FIG. 126, the same configuration as that of FIG. 112 is designated by the same reference numeral as that of FIG. 112, and the description of the configuration (the same configuration as that of FIG. 112) will be omitted.

In the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the state control process (FIG. 127) of step S901101B is executed instead of the state control process (FIG. 113 and 114) of step S901101A. The other special drawing processes (each process shown in FIGS. 115 to 120) are also applied to the gaming machine 901 having the configurations shown in FIGS. 125 and 126.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the state control process executed in the gaming machine 901 having the configurations shown in FIGS. 125 and 126. In the state control process shown in FIG. 127, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S92021). When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S902021 (step S902021; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S92022). If the round gaming flag is off in step S92022 (step S92022; NO), the state control process ends.

On the other hand, if the round gaming flag is on in step S902022 (step S902022; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting flag is on (step S902023).

If the state change switching waiting flag is off in step S902023 (step S902023; NO), the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting time (step S902024). Specifically, the CPU 90103 sets a predetermined state change switching waiting time as a timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S902024 is shorter than the waiting time for producing the big hit at the end of the big hit set in step S902369 of the big hit opening post-processing (FIG. 119). Although the details will be described later, the time T4 in FIG. 128 is the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit, and the time T5 in FIG. 128 is the state change switching waiting time.

Following step S902024, the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting flag to the on state (step S902025). Then, the state control process is terminated.

If the state change switching waiting flag is turned on in step S902023 (step S902023; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902026). In the process of step S902026, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set has timed out (whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). Just do it. If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed in step S902026 (step S902026; NO), the state control process ends.

If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S902026 (step S902026; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the state change switching waiting flag to turn it off (step S902027), and clears the round gaming flag. Turn off (step S902028).

Following step S902028, the CPU 90103 makes settings for starting a time saving state or a probable change state (step S902029). The process of step S902029 is the same as the process of step S902014 of the state control process (step S901101A) shown in FIG. 114.

Following step S902029, the CPU 90103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902035). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the side of the staging control board 9012. Then, the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S902021 (step S902021; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S902030). If the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S902030 (step S902030; NO), the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S902030 (step S902030; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S902031). If the round gaming flag is on in step S92032 (step S902032; YES), the state control process ends.

If the round gaming flag is off in step S90231 (step S92031; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit has elapsed (step S902032). In the process of step S90232, as in the process of step S902132 of the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S901114) shown in FIG. 116, the jackpot start in which the timer initial value is set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 115. It suffices to determine whether or not the time effect waiting time timer has timed out. If the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit has not elapsed in step S902032 (step S902032; NO), the state control process ends.

If the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit has elapsed in step S902032 (step S902032; YES), the CPU 90103 sets the round gaming flag to the on state (step S902033).

Following step S902033, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for terminating the time saving state or the probable change state (step S902034). The process of step S902034 is the same as the process of step S902009 of the state control process (step S901101A) shown in FIG. 114.

Following the process of step S902034, the CPU 90103 executes the process of step S902035 described above, and ends the state control process.

FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 901 having the configurations shown in FIGS. 125 and 126. In FIG. 128, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 is the state (open state, closed state) of the special variable winning ball device 907 (large winning opening door) and the winning timing to the large winning opening (game by the count switch 9023) in order from the top. (Ball detection timing), the detection timing of the game ball by the out ball detector 90710 (out ball detection sensor 90710A) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 128, in the special variable winning ball device 907, the final opening (shown as the opening of the final R in the figure) is completed, and the jackpot end effect (shown as the ending effect in the figure) is performed.

The timing t4 shown at the lower part of FIG. 128 is the timing at which the final opening of the special variable winning ball device 907 ends (the timing at which the large winning opening door is closed). The timing t4 is also the start timing of the ending effect. The timing t6 is the end timing of the ending effect. The time T4 between the timing t4 and the timing t6 is the jackpot end time effect waiting time set in step S902369 of the jackpot opening post-processing (FIG. 119). The timing t5 and the like will be described later.

Further, FIG. 128 schematically shows a state in which three game balls (game ball d, game ball e, game ball f) launched by the hit ball launching device are detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A. .. The game ball d is picked up by the big winning door at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t4, detected by the count switch 9023 at a timing slightly later than the timing t4, and is detected by the count switch 9023 at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t5. It is a game ball detected by 90710A. The game ball e is picked up by the big winning door at timing t4 (the moment when it closes), is detected by the count switch 9023 at a timing later than timing t4, and is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at timing t5. It is a game ball. The game ball f is a game ball that is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, a game ball that has flowed down the front side of the closed big winning door), and is more than timing t5 (further than timing t6). It is a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at a late timing.

The time T5 between the timing t4 and the timing t5 is the state change switching waiting time set in step S902020 of the state control process (FIG. 127). The game ball e picked up by the big prize opening door at timing t4 moves to the position detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at the slowest possible speed after being picked up by the big winning door. It is assumed that the game ball is detected by the count switch 9023) and the out ball detection sensor 90710A. In other words, the game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at a timing later than the timing t5 is not detected by the count switch 9023. That is, the timing t5 is the latest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of closing can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A.

That is, since there is a game ball detected by the count switch 9023 among the game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the big winning door is closed (for example, during the execution period of the ending effect) (for example, the game ball is detected by the count switch 9023). A game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at any timing of the time T5 such as the game ball d), a count switch even if the game ball is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the big winning door is closed. In order not to reflect the game ball that can be detected by 9023 on the performance display, the round game in-game flag is cleared to the off state at the timing t5 (when the time T5 has elapsed) (step S902028 in FIG. 127). That is, until the timing t5 (time T5), the flag during the round game is kept on and is not reflected in the performance display.

It should be noted that, although it is tentative, if the round gaming flag is cleared to the off state at timing t4 (when the performance display is reflected from the closing timing of the big winning door), the big winning door is won before timing t4. Then, when the game ball (the game ball launched at a timing slightly earlier than the game ball d) detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the timing t4 wins the big prize opening, the number of prize balls is displayed as a performance. However, there is an inconsistency such as the number of shot balls being reflected in the performance display, making it impossible to accurately display the performance. On the other hand, if the flag during the round game is cleared to the off state at the timing t5 (when the time T5 has elapsed), the above-mentioned problem is solved.

It should be noted that the timing t5 has been described as the latest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of closing can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, but the timing t5 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t5 may be the average timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of closing is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, or at an earlier timing than the average timing. There may be. That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) set in step S902020 of the state control process (FIG. 127) takes into consideration the movement time of the game ball (special variable winning ball device 907 → out ball detector 90710). It should be. However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned latest timing as the timing t5.

FIG. 129 is a configuration example of the out-ball detector. The out-ball detector 90710 described above may be, for example, the one shown in FIG. 129 (A). The out-ball detector 90710 shown in FIG. 129 (A) includes a main body 90720 and a harness 90730. The main body 90720 detects an opening (passing portion) 90721 through which a game ball that has entered one of the winning openings or a game ball taken into the out opening 9052 passes, and an out ball detection that detects a game ball that passes through the opening 90721. A sensor 90710A and a connection portion 90722 are provided. The harness 90730 has a signal line 90734 to which connection portions (connection portions 90732, 90733) are connected at both ends, a connection portion (connector) 90732 for connecting to the connection portion 90722 on the main body 90720 side, and a main board 9011 side. It is provided with a connection portion (connector) 90733 for connecting to a predetermined connection portion (not shown) provided. Note that FIG. 129 (A) (also the same applies to FIG. 129 (B)) shows a state in which the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 are connected. In the connection portion (connection portion 90733, connection portion on the main board 9011 side), the out-ball detector 90710 (harness 90730) and the main board 9011 can be attached and detached. Further, the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 may be detachable at the connection portion (connection portion 90722, 90732).

The game balls that have entered any of the winning openings or the game balls that have been taken into the out opening 9052 are finally collected in one path, and all of them pass through the opening 90721. When the game ball that has passed through the opening 90721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, a detection signal indicating that the game ball has been detected is output to the main board 9011 side via the harness 90730. Since the game balls detected by the out-ball detector 90710 are totaled (counted) as the number of hit balls, the out-ball detection sensor 90710A may be referred to as a count switch.

The out-ball detector 90710 may be used when the harness 90730 is disconnected from the main body 90720 (when the connection portion 90722 on the main body 90720 side and the connection portion 90732 on the harness 90730 side are not properly connected) or when the harness 90730 is used. Whenever there is a disconnection (intermediate disconnection of the signal line 90734, disconnection between the signal line 90734 and the connection portion 90732, disconnection between the signal line 90734 and the connection portion 90734, etc.), the signal that is always on is mainly used. It is configured to output to the board 9011 side. Therefore, in the error detection process described above, the CPU 90103 can detect harness disconnection and the like by monitoring the signal input from the out-ball detector 90710. For example, the CPU 90103 may determine that the harness is pulled out or the wire is broken when the ON signal is continuously input for a predetermined time or longer.

Further, at least a part of the detection signal output by the out-ball detector 90710 when the game ball passes through the opening 90721 may be composed of a predetermined on / off pattern. When at least a part of the detection signal is composed of a predetermined on / off pattern, the CPU 90103 can detect garbled signals due to noise or the like by monitoring the signal input from the out ball detector 90710.

Further, the out-ball detector 90710 may include a clasp 90740 having a screw hole 90741 as shown in FIG. 129 (B). Alternatively, the out-ball detector 90710 (main body 90720) may be capable of attaching a clasp 90740. The clasp 90740 is an example of a fixing member for fixing the main body 90720 to the gaming machine 901 or the like, and is any kind as long as the main body 90720 can be fixed to the gaming machine 901 or the like. May be good.

Further, the harness 90730 (at least a part of the connection portion 90732, 90734, signal line 90734) may be protected by a cover or the like. Further, the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 may be separate bodies. That is, the main body 90720 of the out-ball detector 90710 may be connectable to the harness 90730 which is a separate body.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of error notification processing of an error related to performance display. FIG. 131 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to performance display. In the error notification process shown in FIG. 130, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not a reception abnormality related to the reception of the detection signal output from the out-ball detector 90710 is detected (step S901200).

If there is an abnormality in the out-ball detector 90710 (for example, harness disconnection, disconnection, signal garbled, etc.), the CPU 90103 detects the out-ball in a process different from the error notification process (error detection process described above). A reception abnormality related to the reception of the detection signal output from the device 90710 is detected. For example, the CPU 90103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when the ON signal continues for a predetermined time. Further, at least a part of the detection signal output from the out-ball detector 90710 is composed of a predetermined on / off pattern, and the CPU 90103 receives an input signal different from the predetermined on / off pattern. If there is, it may be determined that the signal is garbled.

If the reception abnormality is not detected in step S901200 (step S901200; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the reception error flag provided in the RAM 90102 (for example, the game control flag setting unit) is on (step S901200; NO). Step S901201). If the reception error flag is on in step S901201 (step S901201; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the reception error flag to turn it off (step S901202), and proceeds to step S901205. If the reception error flag is off in step S901201 (step S901201; NO), the process of step S901202 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S901205.

If the reception abnormality is detected in step S901200 (step S901200; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the reception error flag is on (step S901203). If the reception error flag is off in step S901203 (step S901203; NO), the CPU 90103 sets the reception error flag to the on state (step S901204) and proceeds to step S901205. If the reception error flag is turned on in step S901203 (YES in step S901203; YES), the process of step S901204 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S901205.

Following any of the processes of step S901201 (NO), step S901202, step S901203 (YES), and step S901204, it is determined whether or not the reception error flag is on (step S901205).

If the reception error flag is off in step S901205 (step S901205; NO), the CPU 90103 controls so that the performance display is performed according to the normal mode (normal mode) (step S901206). In the process of step S901206, the CPU 90103 controls so that the performance display is performed according to the display modes shown in FIGS. 110 (B) to 110 (F). Then, the error notification process is terminated.

If the reception error flag is turned on in step S901205 (step S901205; YES), the CPU 90103 controls so that the error notification mode is displayed (step S901207). In the process of step S901207, for example, the CPU 90103 controls so that the display according to the display mode of FIG. 131 (A) is performed. In the display mode of FIG. 131 (A), the upper two digits are “−− (blinking)” and the lower two digits are “−− (lighting)”. Then, the error notification process is terminated.

If a reception abnormality occurs related to the reception of the detection signal by the out-ball detector 90710, the number of hit balls (FIG. 109 (B)) is not updated as a matter of course, but the number of prize balls in each winning opening ( FIG. 109 (B)) is not updated either. That is, the CPU 90103 has the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first one, as in the case of the combination (combination) / combination-related processing (FIG. 87, etc.). Each winning information is acquired (received) by detecting a game ball by any of the general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, but in a situation where the number of hit balls is not updated, the winning is won. The prize ball number addition process based on the information is not performed.

According to the error notification process shown in FIG. 130, the upper two digits are normally displayed as "bL. (Blinking, lighting)" or "b6. (Blinking, lighting)" (FIG. 110 (B)). -FIG. 110 (F)), "--- (lit)" is displayed when reception is abnormal (FIG. 131 (A)). That is, when the reception is abnormal, the display of the upper two digits is displayed in a display mode that is not normally displayed. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal by looking at the display of the upper two digits.

The display mode shown in FIG. 131 (A) is an example. For example, in the process of step S901207, it may be controlled so that the display is performed according to the display mode of FIG. 131 (B) instead of the display mode of FIG. 131 (A). Similar to FIG. 131 (A), the upper two digits of FIG. 131 (B) are also displayed in a display mode that is not normally displayed. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal by looking at the display of the upper two digits.

Further, for example, in the process of step S901207, it may be controlled so that the display according to the display mode of FIGS. 131 (C) and 131 (D) is performed. The upper two digits "E. (blinking)" in FIG. 131 (C) and the upper two digits "Er. (blinking)" in FIG. 131 (D) are reminiscent of "Err". Therefore, the abnormality can be easily recognized by looking at the display of the upper two digits (or the upper second digit).

Further, in FIGS. 131 (A) to 131 (D), the lower two digits are "-(lighting)", but the lower two digits may be "--- (blinking)", or other displays. It may be an embodiment.

When it is normal, that is, in the display by the process of step S901206, the display contents are as shown in FIGS. 110 (B) to 110 (F) according to the section shown in FIG. 110 (A) and every 5 seconds. However, when it is abnormal, that is, in the display by the process of step S901207, even if a reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. Even after that), the displayed contents do not change. That is, the display when it is abnormal is simpler than the display when it is normal. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is not normal (or abnormal) without giving confusion or extra burden.

FIG. 132 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to performance display. The display of FIGS. 131 (A) to 131 (D) described above is displayed even if a reception abnormality occurs in any of the sections shown in FIG. 110 (A) and 5 seconds have passed from the start of the display. The content does not change, but even when it is abnormal, according to the section shown in FIG. 110 (A) and every 5 seconds, for example, as shown in FIGS. 132 (A) to 132 (E). The displayed contents may be changed. The display mode of FIGS. 132 (A) to 132 (E) is different from the display mode of FIGS. 110 (B) to 110 (F) in that the lower two digits are blinking. According to the error notification mode of FIG. 132, since the display content changes according to the section, in addition to being abnormal, the section at the time of occurrence of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) (section shown in FIG. 110A) and It is also possible to recognize the real-time base value when an error occurs (immediately before the occurrence) and the previous cumulative base value.

In addition, the lower two digits showing the real-time base values in FIGS. 132 (B) to 132 (E) and the lower two digits so as not to show the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value to the player when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened. , The lower two digits indicating the previous cumulative base value in FIGS. 132 (D) and 132 (E) may be, for example, "Er. (blinking)". That is, in FIGS. 132 (A) to 132 (E), the lower two digits may be “−− (blinking)” or “Er. (blinking)”. According to the display mode, it is possible to recognize the section (section shown in FIG. 110 (A)) at the time of occurrence of abnormality (immediately before occurrence) in addition to the fact that it is not normal.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 130, when the error (abnormality) is resolved, the display returns to the normal mode (step S901206), but when the error is resolved, the error notification is performed without returning to the normal mode display. The display of the aspect (step S901207) may be continued. Further, when the error is resolved, the display may be restored to the normal mode, but the notification that the error has occurred may be continued.

As a first example, after the error is resolved, the lowest (fourth digit) dot is blinked (or lit) in the display of the normal mode (FIGS. 110 (A) to 110 (F)). May be good. As a second example, a display monitor different from the display monitor 901130 (for example, one with a single digit) is arranged on the main board 9011, and after the error is resolved, the display monitor 901130 returns to the normal mode display. At the same time, a display monitor different from the display monitor 901130 may continue to notify that an error has occurred (for example, "E. (blinking)").

To be precise, the first example described above is the same as the display of the normal mode when the error is resolved (except for the blinking (lighting) of the lowest dot notifying that the error has occurred). (Same) is displayed, but in the display mode of the first example, in order to provide information provided (displayed) in the display of the normal mode (except for the lowest dot, the display of the normal mode is used). (Because they are the same), it was expressed as returning to the display of the normal mode. In addition, the display monitor (display monitor different from the display monitor 901130) that notifies that there is an error in the second example above is such that the display is not cleared when the power is turned off such as a power failure, like the display monitor 901130. do. That is, the information that there was an error is prevented from being cleared due to a power failure such as a power failure.

In addition, in the mode of displaying the performance information as well as the mode of displaying the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio described above, the clear switch is connected to the main board 9011 and stored in the RAM 90102 by the operation of the clear switch. You may clear the data used for the performance display. The clear switch in the mode of displaying the performance information is operated when the calculation of the performance display has to be redone, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the performance information. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing the data, as in the mode of displaying the connection ratio) and the combination ratio.

When the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying the performance information, an error is displayed as in the case of the combination (combination) and the clear switch in the mode of displaying the combination ratio (FIGS. 87 and 88). The warning table may be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode (display mode shown in FIGS. 131 and 132). Further, when the clear switch is operated when the reception is abnormal, both the error display and the warning display may be performed. For example, the error display and the warning display may be displayed in order. When performing the performance display according to the display mode shown in FIG. 132, for example, the error display (real-time base value), the error display (previous cumulative base value), and the warning display may be displayed in order.

Further, in the mode of displaying the performance information as well as the mode of displaying the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio described above, the main board 9011 may be provided with an error display separately from the display monitor 90130. good. When the error display is provided on the main board 9011 separately from the display monitor 90130, it is preferable that the error display is arranged at a position away from the display monitor 9029. In a configuration in which a display monitor 90130 and an error display are provided on the main board 9011, when a reception abnormality occurs, information indicating the reception abnormality is displayed on the error display, and FIG. 131 and FIG. 131 are displayed on the display monitor 90130. It may be displayed according to the display mode shown in FIG. 132.

Further, when a reception abnormality occurs, for example, the first special symbol display device 904A is displayed with a predetermined error on the second special symbol display device 904B or the like so that the reception abnormality can be recognized. You may do it. Further, a predetermined error display may be performed on the image display device 905 by transmitting an abnormality detection designation command for designating that a reception abnormality has occurred, or the game effect lamp 909 is lit and blinked in a predetermined pattern. A predetermined sound (including a voice) may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R.
Further, by transmitting information indicating that a reception abnormality has occurred, an information display device (for example, a display device of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a call lamp provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901). The device, etc.) or the information management device (hall computer, etc.) may be able to recognize that the reception is abnormal.

Other devices (error display, first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905, game effect lamp 909, speaker 908L, 908R, information display device, information management device). Etc.), the display may be erased on the display monitor 90130 regardless of whether or not the reception abnormality can be recognized. That is, in the case of a reception abnormality, for example, all four digits of the display monitor 90130 are all turned off (the "off" does not mean that the display is hidden in "blinking", but is always hidden). Alternatively, one digit (or two or three digits) of all four digits of the display monitor 90130 may be turned off. That is, the display when the reception is abnormal (display by the process of step S901207) limits the display when it is normal (display by the process of step S901206) (display to recognize that the reception is abnormal). Anything that limits the performance display by doing so, something that limits by erasing a part or all of the performance display, etc.) may be used.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing (game control timer interrupt processing) performed by CPU 90103. In the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 133, the CPU 90103 first executes an error detection process (step S9010), and if an error (abnormality) is detected, an error is notified (step S9011). In the processing of steps S9010 and S9011, the CPU 90103 monitors, for example, the signal output from the out-ball detector 90710, detects a reception abnormality of the signal output from the out-ball detector 90710 (step S9010), and receives the reception abnormality. Is detected on the display monitor 901130 or the like (step S9011).

Following step S9011, the CPU 90103 executes a random number update process (step S9012). In the random number update process of step S9012, the CPU 90103 updates, for example, a game random number (for example, a big hit determination random number, a big hit type determination random number, a variation pattern determination random number, etc.) used on the main board 9011 side. Following step S9012, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol processing (special symbol process processing) (step S9013). In the special drawing process of step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes, for example, various processes shown in FIGS. 113 to 120, 127, and the like.

Following step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (steps S9014A, S9014B). Details of the performance information update process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes the performance information display process (step S9015). In the performance information display process of step S9015, the CPU 90103 displays, for example, the performance information updated in the performance information update process (steps S9014A, S9014B) on the display monitor 901130 as shown in FIG. 110.

Following step S9015, the CPU 90103 executes the prize ball processing (step S9016). In the prize ball processing in step S9016, the CPU 90103 calculates the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of various switches, and controls the payout mechanism so that the calculated number of game balls are paid out. Following step S9016, the CPU 90103 executes a normal symbol process (ordinary symbol process process) (step S9017). In the normal symbol processing in step S9017, the CPU 90103 controls, for example, the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9020 and the operation of the movable wing piece on the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Following step S9017, the CPU 90103 executes information output processing (step S9018). In the information output process of step S9018, the CPU 90103 may be, for example, an information display device (for example, a display device of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901, or the like). Various information such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, and abnormality information is output to an information management device (hall computer, etc.). Then, the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

The processing of steps S9010 to S9018 shown in FIG. 133 describes a part of the processing executed in the game control timer interrupt processing, and the CPU 90103 describes the game control timer interrupt processing in steps S9010 to S9018. Processing other than (for example, switch processing for inputting (determining) the state of detection signals input from various switches, processing for transmitting an effect control command from the main board 9011 side to the effect control board 9012 side, etc.) can be executed. be.

In the case of the configuration of FIG. 112, in the above switch processing, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D, and the firing detection. The detection signal of the sensor 90700A or the like is output to the CPU 90103. In the case of the configuration of FIG. 123, the detection signals of the first launch detection sensor 90701A and the second launch detection sensor 90702A are output to the CPU 90103 instead of the launch detection sensor 90700A. In the case of the configuration of FIG. 126, the detection signal of the out-ball detection sensor 90710A is output to the CPU 90103 instead of the firing detection sensor 90700A.

Further, the execution order of each process of steps S9010 to S9018 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 133 is an example. Therefore, for example, the CPU 90103 may execute the information output process before the random number update process, or may execute the normal map process immediately after the special figure process.

Further, the grouping (unit of each process) of each process such as the error detection process (step S9010) and the error notification process (step S9011) is an example. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 130, the CPU 90103 may execute the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) as one process. In the error notification process of FIG. 130, the process of step S901206 (process of controlling so that the performance display is performed according to the normal mode) becomes the performance information display process (step S9015) of the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. Equivalent to.

The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 133 and the error notification process of FIG. 130 will be supplemented. As described above, the error notification process of FIG. 130 may be regarded as a combination of the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) of FIG. 133, but it may be simply regarded as one. For convenience of explanation (for the purpose of explaining that the display mode (normal mode, error notification mode) of the display monitor 901130 differs depending on the presence or absence of an abnormality), it may be regarded as one. ..

Further, FIG. 133 shows the game control timer interrupt process when displaying the performance information, but the same applies to the game control timer interrupt process when displaying the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio. That is, the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. 133 is the process of updating the combination (combination) and the combination ratio, and the performance information display process (step S9015) is the combination (relation) and the combination ratio. It may be a process. The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011), the performance information display process (step S9015), and the like in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 133 and each process shown in FIGS. 87 to 90 is the game of FIG. 133. The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in the control timer interrupt process and the error notification process in FIG. 130 is the same.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S9014A) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 133. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S9014B) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 133.

The CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (S9014A) of FIG. 134 in the embodiment of the state control process (step S901101A) of FIG. 114. That is, the performance information update process (S9014A) of FIG. 134 is the launch ball detector 90700 (launch detection sensor 90700A), or the first launch ball detector 90701 (first launch detection sensor 90701A) and the second launch ball detector. It is performed in a configuration comprising 90702 (second firing detection sensor 90702A). On the other hand, the CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (S9014B) of FIG. 135 in the embodiment of the state control process (step S901101B) of FIG. 127. That is, the performance information update process (S9014B) of FIG. 135 is executed in a configuration including an out-ball detector 90710 (out-ball detection sensor 90710A).

In the performance information update process (S9014A) of FIG. 134, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is on (step S9020). If the probability variation flag is not on in step S9020 (step S9020; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (step S9021).

If the time saving flag is not on in step S9021 (step S9021; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S9022). At the start of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIGS. 121 and 124, the round gaming flag is set in the state change switching waiting time (FIGS. 121 and 124) set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 114). Since the off state is changed to the on state in step S902008 after the lapse of time T2), whether or not the process of step S9022 is after the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has elapsed at the start of the jackpot gaming state. It can be said that it is judging.

If the round gaming flag is not turned on in step S9022 (step S9022; NO), that is, before the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has elapsed, the CPU 90103 determines the number of prize balls and the number of balls to be driven. Add and calculate the base value which is the performance information (step S9023). In the process of step S9023, the CPU 90103 adds, for example, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of the various winning openings (FIG. 109 (B)), and the firing detection sensor. The number of shot balls is added based on the detection result (detection signal) of 90700A or the like (FIG. 109 (B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 109 (A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S9014A) is terminated.

On the other hand, if the probability change flag is on (step S9020; YES) in step S9020, the time saving flag is on (step S9021; YES) in step S9021, or the round gaming flag is on in step S9022 (step S9021; YES). Step S9022; YES), the performance information update process (step S9014A) is terminated without performing the process of step S9023.

In the performance information update process (S9014B) of FIG. 135, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is on (step S9030). If the probability variation flag is not on in step S9030 (step S9030; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (step S9031).

If the time saving flag is not on in step S9031 (step S9031; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S9032). At the end of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 128, the round gaming flag is set after the state change switching waiting time (time T5 in FIG. 128) set in step S902024 of the state control process (FIG. 127) has elapsed. Since the on state is changed to the off state in step S902028, the process of step S9032 also determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed at the end of the jackpot gaming state. I can say.

If the round gaming flag is not turned on in step S9032 (step S9032; NO), that is, after the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed, the CPU 90103 determines the number of prize balls and the number of balls to be driven. Add and calculate the base value which is the performance information (step S9033). In the process of step S9033, the CPU 90103 adds, for example, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of the various winning openings (FIG. 109 (B)), and detects the out balls. The number of shot balls is added based on the detection result (detection signal) of the sensor 90710A (FIG. 109 (B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 109 (A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S9014B) is terminated.

On the other hand, if the probability change flag is on (step S9030; YES) in step S9030, the time saving flag is on (step S9031; YES) in step S9031, or the round gaming flag is on in step S9032 (step S9032). Step S9032; YES), the performance information update process (step S9014B) is terminated without performing the process of step S9033.

According to the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. 134 and the performance information update process (step S9014B) of FIG. The number of prize balls and the number of hit balls, which are the basis of the display, are added. As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. 134 and the performance information update process (step S9014B) of FIG. 135 are both a probability change flag, a time saving flag, and a round game. It is the same in that it refers to the state of the flag, adds the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls, and calculates the base value which is the performance information, but both are the state of the flag during the round game and waiting for the state change switching. Since the relationship with time is different (specifically, in the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. 134, the round gaming flag is off before the lapse of time T2, and the performance information update process of FIG. 135 (step S9014B). Then, after the lapse of time T5, the flag during the round game is off), which was explained by separate drawings.

The processing shown in FIGS. 133 to 135 is a detection result by the switch processing when the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are all off (output results of various switches of various winning openings, firing detection sensor). The output result of 90700A etc.) is reflected (added) as performance information, and the detection result by switch processing is not reflected as performance information when at least one of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag is in the ON state. It is a process. That is, the game ball is detected in the switch process regardless of the state of the flag, but it is a process of determining whether or not the detection result is reflected as the performance information according to the state of the flag. However, when the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game in-game flag are all off, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are reflected as performance information, and the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round in-game flag are reflected. If at least one is in the ON state and the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not reflected as performance information, other processes may be used. For example, when the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are all off, the switch processing regarding the number of shot balls (launch detection sensor 90700A, first launch detection sensor 90701A, second launch detection sensor 90702A, out ball detection). (Detection by the sensor 90710A) may be executed, and if at least one of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag is in the ON state, the switch process relating to the number of balls to be driven may not be executed. That is, it may be a process of determining whether or not the switch process regarding the number of balls to be driven is executed according to the state of the flag. Regarding the switch processing related to the number of prize balls (detection by the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D, etc.), it is actually Since it is necessary to pay out the prize balls, the switch process related to the number of prize balls is executed regardless of the state of the flag, and whether or not the detection result is reflected in the performance information is set as in the process shown in FIGS. 133 to 135. It may be determined according to the state.

FIG. 136 is an example of the arrangement position of the out ball detector. FIG. 136 (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902 is opened from the outer frame 903A. A main board 9011 or the like is mounted on the back surface side of the game board 902. The main board 9011 is provided with a base member 901129, and the base member 901129 is provided with a display monitor 901130. The display monitor 901130 is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 901129 and the main substrate 9011.

In addition, as shown in FIG. Although it is arranged, the display monitor 901130 may be arranged at another position on the back surface. For example, the back surface of the main board 9011 may be arranged at the center in the left-right direction and on the lower side in the up-down direction. When it is arranged on the upper side of the back surface of the main board 9011, it is convenient that the displayed contents are easy to see when the store clerk or the like confirms the displayed contents while standing. Further, when it is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main board 9011, it is convenient for the displayed contents to be easily seen when a clerk or the like sits down or bends down to check the displayed contents. Further, various wirings (signal lines) may exist above the main board 9011 of the game board 902. Then, it is assumed that such wiring may bend or the bundled wiring may come off and cover the main board 9011. When the display monitor 901130 is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main board 9011, it is less likely that the flexible wiring will cover the display monitor 901130 as compared with the case where the display monitor 901130 is arranged on the upper side, which is convenient. Further, although related to the above, the display monitor 901130 shown in FIG. 136 (A) (the same applies to the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 136 (B)) has the same appearance as the display monitor 90130A shown in FIG. The arrangement is the same. However, the appearance of the display monitor 901130 and the mode of arrangement on the main board 9011 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 136. For example, the display monitor 901130 may have an appearance such as the display monitors 90130B, 90130C, 90130D, 90130E, 90130F, 90130G, 90130H, 90130I shown in FIGS. 96 to 99.

In FIG. 136 (A), the game board 902 (for example, the bottom, the bottom, etc. of the game board) has a winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A, second general winning opening 9050B, third general winning opening 9050C, fourth). An opening (hole at the exit of the game ball) for discharging the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening) or the game ball taken into the out opening 9052 to the outside. ) 902A is provided. The passages a, b, and c shown by the broken lines are passages (ball collection passages) through which the game balls that have entered the winning opening and the game balls that have been taken into the out opening 9052 pass. Whether the game ball has entered the winning opening or has been taken into the out opening 9052, it passes through any of the passages a, b, and c, and is finally discharged to the outside through the opening 902A. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 136 (A), the out-ball detector 90710 is provided on the game board 902 side. Specifically, the out-ball detector 90710 is provided at a position where the game ball discharged from the opening 902A can be detected. That is, like the opening 902A, the out ball detector 90710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball that has been taken into the out opening 9052.

The game ball detected by the out-ball detector 90710 is collected by the ball receiving member 901700 provided on the outer frame 903A side (game island side). Further, the signal line 90734 of the out-ball detector 90710 is connected to the main board 9011. That is, the game ball discharged from the opening 902A of the game board 902 passes through the opening 90721 of the out ball detector 90710 and is collected on the game island by the ball receiving member 901700. Further, the game ball passing through the opening 90721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, and the detection signal is output to the main board 9011.

An opening (a hole at the exit of the game ball) 901701 is provided at the bottom of the ball receiving member 901700 (a portion on which the game ball rides), and although not shown, the bottom portion is inclined toward the opening 901701. is doing. That is, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving member 901700 from the gaming machine 901 (opening 90721) passes through the opening 901701 and is discharged to the outside (lower side) of the ball receiving member 901700.

As shown in FIG. 136 (B), the out-ball detector 90710 may be provided on the outer frame 903A side (game island side). In the example of FIG. 136 (B), the out-ball detector 90710 is provided at a position where the game ball discharged from the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 can be detected. That is, like the opening 901701, the out ball detector 90710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball that has been taken into the out opening 9052, and is provided in the opening of the ball receiving member 901700. The game ball discharged from 901701 is detected. In FIG. 136 (B), the clasp 90740 is not shown.

Further, FIG. 136 (A) shows an example in which the out-ball detector 90710 is installed by using the clasp 90740, but the out-ball detector 90710 may be installed by using a fixing member other than the clasp 90740. The same applies to the example of FIG. 136 (B).

Further, in FIGS. 136A and 136B, the out-ball detector 90710 is an external component, but the game board 902 or the like may be provided with the out-ball detector 90710 from the beginning. For example, in FIG. 136 (A), the out-ball detector 90710 may be provided below the opening 902A of the game board 902 (the same position as in FIG. 136 (A)). Further, the out-ball detection sensor 90710A may be provided in the opening 902A of the game board 902 (the opening 902A of the game board 902 corresponds to the opening 90721 of the main body 90720). The same applies to the example of FIG. 136 (B).

Although three passages (passages a, b, and c) are shown in FIG. 136 (A), the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball that has been taken into the out opening 9052 finally reach the opening 902A. If it is, the number and shape of the passages are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 136 (A). The same applies to the example of FIG. 136 (B).

The state change switching waiting time (time T5 in FIG. 128) set in the process of step S902024 in FIG. 127 includes the time required until the game ball picked up by the big winning door is detected by the count switch 9023. It is affected by the time required for the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 to be detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A. Specifically, the shorter the required time, the shorter the state change switching waiting time (time T5) can be (not necessarily shortened).

Therefore, for example, in order to shorten the state change switching waiting time (time T5), in the configuration of FIG. 136 (A), the time until the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 is discharged from the opening 902A is shortened. You may do so. Specifically, the length of the passage (for example, passage a) through which the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 passes is shortened, or the game ball that has passed through the passage is tilted to immediately enter the opening 902A. And guidance may be provided. In addition, in the configuration of FIG. 136 (B), in place of or in addition to the above, the time required for the gaming ball discharged from the gaming machine 901 (opening 90721) to reach the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 is short. It should be. As an example, the inclination of the bottom of the ball receiving member 901700 may be increased.

The opening 902A of the game board 902 and the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 may be widened so that the game ball is not clogged and the game ball flows quickly, or the game board 902 may be widened. A plurality of openings may be provided, or a plurality of openings may be provided in the ball receiving member 901700.

When the opening 902A of the game board 902 is widened, a plurality of out ball detectors 90710 (out ball detection sensor 90710A) are provided so that the game balls discharged from the widened opening 902A can be detected without omission. You may do it. The same applies to the case where the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 is widened. Further, when a plurality of openings are provided in the game board 902, a plurality of out-ball detectors 90710 corresponding to the respective openings are provided so that the game balls discharged from the respective openings can be detected without omission. An out-ball detection sensor 90710A) may be provided. The same applies to the case where the ball receiving member 901700 is provided with a plurality of openings.

When a plurality of out-ball detectors 90710 (out-ball detection sensor 90710A) are provided, the game balls can be detected at the same time. , Each of the game balls detected at the same time may be captured as the number of hit balls.

As described above, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 136 is
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device) for launching a game medium (for example, a gaming ball, etc.) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 9010, etc.) is provided, and advantageous conditions are satisfied (for example, first and second). Derived display of definite special symbols that are big hit symbols and small hit symbols in special symbol display devices 904A and 904B, derivation display of definite decorative symbols that are big hit combinations in image display device 905, passage of game balls in a specific area, etc.) It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player based on the above.
A detection means capable of detecting a game medium launched into the game area (for example, a launch ball detector provided on a guide rail (FIG. 111), a launch ball detector 90701, 90702 (FIG. 122) provided in the game area). Etc.) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 907) capable of changing the game medium launched into the gaming area into an open state in which a winning can be made, and
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning opening, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, and the large winning opening. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.).
A determination means capable of determining whether or not it is in an advantageous state (for example, a CPU 90103 or the like that determines whether or not it is in a gaming state based on a probability change flag, a time saving flag, or the like).
The number of gaming media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like; specifically, a state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening) calculated based on the number of balls to be driven and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls to each winning opening). For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 136) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible) of the performance information of FIG. 109.
The variable winning means is
The change to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 124, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing t1, and the big winning door is displayed at the timing t3. The door changes from a closed state to an open state, etc.),
The determination means is
A predetermined period before the variable winning means changes to the open state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 124, time T3 before the timing t3 when the large winning opening door changes from the closed state to the open state). From the timing t2, etc.), it is determined that the advantageous state is obtained (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 114, the round gaming flag is turned on at the timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses. Set to state, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A or the first launch ball detector 90701 (second launch ball detector 90702) at any timing of the time T3 (for example, the game ball in FIG. 121). By not including c) etc. in the calculation of the performance display, an accurate base value can be calculated.

In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machine 901 is
It is provided with variable display means (for example, first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905, etc.) for performing variable display and deriving and displaying display results.
A state (for example, a state at timing t2) before a predetermined period of change to the open state is
A special state after the display result of the variable display executed by the variable display means is derived and displayed (for example, a state in which the fanfare effect is executed in the image display device 905 as shown in FIGS. 121 and 124). Is.

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. That is, predetermined information is not included, including the game balls (game balls c shown in FIGS. 121 and 124) that are fired after the fluctuation is stopped (after the stop is displayed) and may win the special variable winning ball device 907. (Performance information) can be calculated.

In the above embodiment (FIGS. 114, 121, 121, etc.), the fanfare effect is turned on from the off state during the round game during the execution of the fanfare effect after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The flag during the round game may be changed from the off state to the on state before the execution of (during the execution of the reach effect, etc.). For example, if the execution time of the fanfare effect is short (for example, a few seconds, etc.), the game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 is a launch detection sensor before the start of the fanfare effect. Since it may be detected by 90700A or the first launch ball detector 90701 (second launch ball detector 90702), the game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 should not be included in the performance display. In addition, the flag during the round game may be changed from the off state to the on state before the fanfare effect is executed. Specifically, for example, the round gaming flag may be set to the ON state at a timing prior to the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed with reference to the special symbol fluctuation time. It should be noted that the flag during the round game may be changed from the off state to the on state at the start of the execution of the fanfare effect.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means is removable (for example, as shown in FIG. 122, the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 include the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702. The portion above the broken line P including the broken line P is removable, etc.).

As a result, even if the detection means is not provided, it can be dealt with. It also facilitates maintenance.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means
It is configured as a unit that can be arranged on a game board (for example, a game board 902 or the like) forming a game area (for example, the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 are shown in FIG. 122. The part above the broken line P of is configured as a unit).

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
In the game area,
Areas through which the game medium launched by the launcher can pass include a left game area (for example, left game area 9010A and the like) and a right game area (for example, right game area 9010A and the like).
The unit (for example, a portion above the broken line P in FIG. 122) is
A left side detecting means (for example, a first launch ball detector 90701) for detecting a game medium passing through the left gaming area and a right side detecting means (for example, a second firing) for detecting a game medium passing through the right gaming area. Sphere detector 90702 etc.) and included.

As a result, it can be detected regardless of where it is fired in the game area.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means
The launch ball detector 90700 is provided on the upstream side in the flow path of the game medium with respect to any of the winning areas provided in the game area (for example, as shown in FIG. 111, the launching ball detector 90700 is a normal winning ball device 906A, It is provided above the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, and the special variable winning ball device 907. Also, as shown in FIG. 122, the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball. The detector 90702 is provided above the normal winning ball device 906A, the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, and the special variable winning ball device 907).

As a result, it can be reliably detected.

Further, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 136 is
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device) for launching a game medium (for example, a gaming ball, etc.) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 9010, etc.) is provided, and advantageous conditions are satisfied (for example, first and second). Derived display of definite special symbols that are big hit symbols and small hit symbols in special symbol display devices 904A and 904B, derivation display of definite decorative symbols that are big hit combinations in image display device 905, passage of game balls in a specific area, etc.) It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player based on the above.
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 907) capable of changing the game medium launched into the gaming area into an open state in which a winning can be made, and
A variable winning control means (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the special drawing process shown in FIG. 113) capable of performing a round game for changing the variable winning means to the open state a predetermined number of times, and
A game medium that has passed through any of the winning areas provided in the game area (first general winning opening 9050A, second general winning opening 9050B, third general winning opening 9050C, fourth general winning opening 9050D, first starting winning). To eject the mouth, the game ball that won any of the second start winning mouth, the big winning mouth, etc.) and the game medium that did not pass through any of the winning areas (the game ball, etc. taken into the out mouth 9052). (For example, a position where a game ball discharged from the opening 902A of the game board 902A can be detected as shown in FIG. 136 (A) and a ball receiving member 901700 as shown in FIG. 136 (B). A detection means (for example, an out-ball detector 90710 or the like) provided at a position where the game ball discharged from the opening 901701 can be detected and capable of detecting the game medium passing through the flow path, and the like.
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning opening, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, and the large winning opening. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.).
A determination means capable of determining whether or not it is in an advantageous state (for example, a CPU 90103 or the like that determines whether or not it is in a gaming state based on a probability change flag, a time saving flag, or the like).
The number of gaming media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like; specifically, a state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening) calculated based on the number of balls to be driven and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls to each winning opening). For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 136) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible) of the performance information of FIG. 109.
The variable winning control means
The round game is started based on the establishment of the advantageous conditions (for example, the big winning door is controlled from the closed state to the open state based on the stop display of the big hit symbol).
The determination means is
From the end of the predetermined number of round games and the change of the variable winning means to the closed state until a predetermined period elapses (for example, as shown in FIG. 128, the large winning opening door changes from the open state to the closed state. From the timing t4 to the timing t5 when the time T5 has elapsed, etc.), the advantageous state is determined (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 127, the timing at which the state change switching waiting time (time T5) elapses. Clear the round game flag to the off state at t5, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball detected by the out ball detector 90710 at any timing of the time T5 (for example, the game ball d in FIG. 128) is not included in the calculation of the performance display, so that it is accurate. Base value can be calculated.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The state when the predetermined period elapses (for example, the state at timing t5, etc.) is
This is a special state after the predetermined number of round games is completed (for example, a state in which the ending effect is executed in the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 128).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. That is, even if the game ball is detected by the out ball detector 90710 during the ending effect, the game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 (game ball d or the like shown in FIG. 128) , Accurate predetermined information can be calculated because it is not included in the calculation of predetermined information (performance information).

In the above embodiment (FIG. 127, 128, etc.), the round gaming flag is changed from the on state to the off state during the execution of the ending effect after the final round, but after the ending effect is executed (no time reduction). The flag during the round game may be changed from the on state to the off state during the first variable display in the normal jackpot. For example, when the execution time of the ending effect is short (for example, a few seconds, etc.), the game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 is the out ball detector 90710 after the ending effect is completed. Since it may be detected by, the round game in-game flag is changed from the on state to the off state after the ending effect is executed so that the game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 is not included in the performance display. You may. Specifically, for example, the state change switching waiting time set in step S902024 of FIG. 127 may be made longer than the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit. It should be noted that the flag during the round game may be changed from the on state to the off state at the end of the execution of the ending effect.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means is removable (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 is removable by a clasp 90740 as shown in FIG. 129 (B)).

As a result, even if the detection means is not provided, it can be dealt with. It also facilitates maintenance.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, a game board 902 or the like) that forms a game area (for example, for the out-ball detector 90710, the game board 902 is shown in FIG. 136 (B). It is configured as a unit that can be placed in).

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Further, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 136 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a game and being able to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
A detection means capable of detecting a game medium (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) used for a game (for example, an out-ball detector 90710, etc. shown in FIGS. 129, 136, etc.) and
A signal line to which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 129) and the like.
A receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, etc.) and
An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 130) and
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning opening, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, and the large winning opening. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.).
The number of gaming media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like; specifically, a state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening) calculated based on the number of balls to be driven and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls to each winning opening). For example, it is provided with information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 136) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible) of the performance information of FIG. 109.
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified and the performance display is restricted as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132).

This makes it possible to prevent the information display means from performing an inaccurate display. For example, if a fraudulent act such as pulling out the harness 90730 (connection portion 90732, 90733) in order to show the value of the performance display well is performed, at least the performance display by the display monitor 901130 is restricted. It is possible to prevent the numbers due to fraudulent activity from being displayed as if they were valid.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
When the abnormality of the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the display mode of the information display means is changed to indicate that the abnormality of the reception state is detected (for example, the display mode as shown in FIGS. 131 and 132). Is notified by changing etc.).

This makes it possible to confirm without providing a new display means.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The abnormality detecting means can detect the disconnection of the signal line (for example, it can be detected by monitoring the signal input from the out-ball detector 90710).
It is possible to notify the outside (for example, the game effect lamp 909, the speaker 908L, 908R, the display device of the card unit, the call lamp device, the hall computer, etc.) that the disconnection of the signal line is detected.

This makes it possible to recognize the door without opening the door.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 is configured as a unit that can be arranged on the game board 902 as shown in FIG. 136 (B)).

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Further, in FIGS. 109 to 136, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as a gaming machine for displaying performance, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. A game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player by rotating (rotating the reel). It is also applicable to slot machines capable of executing (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)).

For example, a slot machine that displays performance is a slot machine that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a bonus) that is advantageous to the player, and is a game medium used for the game (for example, a medal). A detection means capable of detecting (for example, an inserted medal sensor or the like) and a signal line to which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, a detection signal by an inserted medal sensor or the like) are slotted. A signal line output to the main board side of the machine, etc.), a receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board of the slot machine, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board side, etc.), and the detection signal. An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception status of the slot machine (for example, the CPU of the main board of the slot machine) and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, a combination (combination) of a specific symbol is stopped on each reel). Is detected by the payout means for paying out the game medium based on (for example, a hopper motor for paying out the medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout outlet) and the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state. Information that can display predetermined information (for example, information indicating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of inserts) calculated based on the number of game media and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state. It is provided with a display means (for example, a display unit provided on the main board of the slot machine), and when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error). , And restricts the display of information indicating the above ratio, etc.) It may be a slot machine.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 5 ... Image display device 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 8L, 8R ... Speaker 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control CPU
123 ... Display control unit VL ... Volume status display image NG ... Remaining winning number display image TG ... Ball removal error display image RG1, RG2 ... History image 901 ... Pachinko game machine 902 ... Game board 903 ... Game machine frame 903a ... Glass door Frame 903A ... Outer frame 904A, 904B ... Special symbol display device 905 ... Image display device 906A ... Ordinary winning ball device 906B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 907 ... Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R ... Speaker 909 ... Game effect lamp 9011 ... Main board 9012 ... Production control board 9013 ... Voice control board 9014 ... Lamp control board 9015 ... Relay board 9020 ... Ordinary symbol display 9021 ... Gate switch 9022A, 9022B ... Start port switch 9023 ... Count switch 9029 ... Display monitor 9030 ... Operation button 90100 ... Game control microcomputer 90101, 90121 ... ROM
90102, 90122 ... RAM
90103 ... CPU
90104, 90124 ... Random number circuit 90105, 90125 ... I / O
90120 ... CPU for staging control
90123 ... Display control unit 901000 ... Movable accessory

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A specific effect executing means capable of executing the selected specific effect in the advantageous state, and
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect while a specific effect is being executed, and a predetermined effect execution means.
A changing means that can change whether or not a predetermined effect is executed,
Equipped with an abnormality notification means capable of executing abnormality notification,
The abnormality notification means can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the presence or absence of execution of the predetermined effect is changed by the change means during the abnormality notification.
When the presence or absence of execution of the predetermined effect is changed by the changing means during the abnormality notification, the recognizability of the abnormality notification changes .
It is possible to change whether or not to execute a plurality of predetermined effects based on the detection of the specific action of the player during the advantageous state.
A gaming machine characterized by that. A gaming machine that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A specific effect executing means capable of executing the selected specific effect in the advantageous state, and
A predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect while a specific effect is being executed, and a predetermined effect execution means.
A changing means that can change the execution mode of a predetermined effect,
Equipped with an abnormality notification means capable of executing abnormality notification,
The abnormality notification means can continuously execute the abnormality notification when the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by the change means during the abnormality notification.
When the execution mode of the predetermined effect is changed by the changing means during the abnormality notification, the recognizability of the abnormality notification changes .
Based on the fact that the specific action of the player is detected during the advantageous state, it is possible to change the execution mode of a plurality of predetermined effects.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images